Tumor necrosis factor delta polypeptides

ABSTRACT

The invention relates to human TNF delta and TNF epsilon polypeptides, polynucleotides encoding the polypeptides, methods for producing the polypeptides, in particular by expressing the polynucleotides, and agonists and antagonists of the polypeptides. The invention further relates to methods for utilizing such polynucleotides, polypeptides, agonists and antagonists for applications, which relate, in part, to research, diagnostic and clinical arts.

RELATED APPLICATIONS

This application claims benefit of priority under 35 U.S.C. § 119(e)based on the following U.S. Provisional Patent Application Ser. Nos.:60/293,499, filed May 25, 2001; 60/277,978 filed Mar. 23, 2001;60/276,248, filed Mar. 16, 2001; 60/254,875 filed Dec. 13, 2000;60/241,952 filed Oct. 23, 2000; and 60/211,537 filed Jun. 15, 2000. Thisapplication is also a continuation-in-part of copending application Ser.No. 08/815,783, filed Mar. 12, 1997, which claims the benefit ofpriority under 35 U.S.C. § 119(e) based on the U.S. Provisional PatentApplication Ser. No. 60/016,812 filed Mar. 14, 1996. Each of theforegoing provisional and non-provisional applications is herebyincorporated by refrence in its entirety.

FIELD OF THE INVENTION

This invention relates, in part, to newly identified polynucleotides andpolypeptides; variants and derivatives of the polynucleotides andpolypeptides; processes for making the polynucleotides and thepolypeptides, and their variants and derivatives; agonists andantagonists of the polypeptides; and uses of the polynucleotides,polypeptides, variants, derivatives, agonists and antagonists. Inparticular, in these and in other regards, the invention relates topolynucleotides and polypeptides of human tumor necrosis factor deltaand epsilon, sometimes hereinafter referred to as “TNF delta” and “TNFepsilon”.

BACKGROUND OF THE INVENTION

Human tumor necrosis factors alpha (TNF-alpha) and beta (TNF-beta orlymphotoxin) are related members of a broad class of polypeptidemediators, which includes the interferons, interleukins and growthfactors, collectively called cytokines (Beutler, B. and Cerami, A.,Annu. Rev. Immunol., 7:625-655, 1989).

Tumor necrosis factor (TNF-alpha and TNF-beta) was originally discoveredas a result of its anti-tumor activity, however, now it is recognized asa pleiotropic cytokine capable of numerous biological activitiesincluding apoptosis of some transformed cell lines, mediation of cellactivation and proliferation and also as playing important roles inimmune regulation and inflammation.

To date, there are nine known members of the TNF-ligand superfamily,TNF-alpha, TNF-beta (lymphatoxin-alpha), LT-beta, OX40L, FASL, CD30L,CD27L, CD40L and 4-1BBL. The ligands of the TNF ligand superfamily areacidic, TNF-like molecules with approximately 20% sequence homology inthe extracellular domains (range, 12%-36%) and exist mainly asmembrane-bound forms with the biologically active form being atrimeric/multimeric complex. Soluble forms of the TNF ligand superfamilyhave only been identified so far for TNF, LT-alpha, and FasL (for ageneral review, see Gruss, H. and Dower, S. K., Blood, 85 (12):3378-3404(1995)), which is hereby incorporated by reference in its entirety.

These proteins are involved in regulation of cell proliferation,activation, and differentiation, including control of cell survival ordeath by apoptosis or cytotoxicity (Armitage, R. J., Curr. Opin.Immunol., 6:407 (1994) and Smith, C. A., Cell, 75:959 1994).

TNF is produced by a number of cell types, including monocytes,fibroblasts, T cells, natural killer (NK) cells and predominately byactivated machrophages. TNF-alpha has been reported to have a role inthe rapid necrosis of tumors, immunostimulation, autoimmune disease,graft rejection, resistance to parasites, producing an anti-viralresponse, septic shock, growth regulation, vascular endothelium effectsand metabolic effects. TNF-alpha also triggers endothelial cells tosecrete various factors, including PAF-1, IL-1, GM-CSF and IL-6 topromote cell proliferation. In addition, TNF-alpha up-regulates variouscell adhesion molecules such as E-Selectin, ICAM-1 and VCAM-1.

The first step in the induction of the various cellular responsesmediated by the members of the TNF ligand superfamily is their bindingto specific cell surface receptors. The TNF receptor superfamilycontains at present ten known membrane proteins and several viral openreading frames encoding TNFR-related molecules. The p75 low-affinityNerve Growth Factor (NGF) receptor was the first cloned receptor of thisfamily (Johnson, D. et al. Cell, 47:545 (1986). Subsequently, cloning oftwo specific receptors for TNF show that they were related to the NGFreceptor (Loetscher, H. et al., Cell, 61:351 (1990)). In recent years, anew type I-transmembrane TNF receptor superfamily has been established.This family includes the p75 nerve growth factor receptor, p60 TNFR-I,p80 TNFR-II, TNFR-RP/TNFR-II, CD27, CD30, CD40, 4-IBB, OX40 andFAS/APO-1. In addition, several viral open reading frames encodingsoluble TNF receptors have been identified, such as SFV-T2 in Shopefibroma virus (Smith, C. A. et al., Biochem. Biophys. Res. Commun.,176:335, 1991) and Va53 or SaIF19R in vaccinia virus (Howard, S. T.,Virology, 180:633, 1991). These receptors are characterized by multiplecysteine-rich domains in the extracellular (amino-terminal) domain,which have been shown to be involved in ligand binding. The averagehomology in the cysteine-rich extracellular region between the humanfamily members are in the range of 25 to 30%.

Inflammation, which is characterized by redness, swelling, heat, andpain, is an essential immune response which occurs following tissueinjury or infection. The initial event triggers an elaborate signalingcascade which results in increased local blood flow, blood clotting, andvascular permeability. These acute changes facilitate the recruitment ofphagocytic leukocytes to the site of injury or infection. Once at theaffected site, the immune cells can begin to neutralize pathogens andcontribute to tissue repair.

Among the many protein classes involved in the inflammatory response areblood clotting factors, vasodilating substances (such as histamine andbradykinin), cell adhesion molecules, cytokines (such as interleukinsand chemokines), and immune system effector cells (such as neutrophils,macrophages, and lymphocytes).

Although the inflammatory response is an important defense mechanismagainst infection by foreign substances, inappropriate or excessiveactivation of inflammation can lead to tissue damage and even death.Medical conditions resulting from inflammation include, but are notlimited to, inflammatory bowel disease, multiple sclerosis, arthritis,asthma, allergies, sarcoidosis, septic shock, gastrointestinal cancers,pancreatitis, dermatitis, gout, systemic lupus erythematosis, andGrave's disease. Inflammation is also a potentially life-threateningcomplication of cardiopulmonary bypass surgery, renalischemia-reperfusion, and traumatic injury.

Several steroidal and nonsteroidal drugs have been used to controlinflammation or to provide symptomatic relief. However, these therapiescan be accompanied by numerous side effects which limit theirusefulness. Therefore, there is a continuing need for more effective andless toxic alternatives for modulating the inflammatory response.

Clearly, there is also a need for factors that regulate activation, anddifferentiation of normal and abnormal cells. There is a need,therefore, for identification and characterization of such factors thatmodulate activation and differentiation of cells, both normally and indisease states. In particular, there is a need to isolate andcharacterize additional TNF ligands akin to members of the TNF ligandsuper-family that control apoptosis of transformed cell lines, mediatecell activation and proliferation and are functionally linked as primarymediators of immune regulation and inflammatory response, and, amongother things, can play a role in preventing, ameliorating or correctingdysfunctions or diseases.

SUMMARY OF THE INVENTION

Toward these ends, and others, it is an object of the present inventionto provide novel polypeptides, referred to as novel TNF delta and TNFepsilon which have been putatively identified as being tumor necrosisfactor ligands by homology between the amino acid sequence set out inFIGS. 1A and 1B and 2A and 2B and known amino acid sequences of otherproteins in the tumor necrosis factor family such as human TNF-alpha andTNF-beta.

The polypeptides of the present invention have been identified as anovel members of the TNF ligand super-family based on structural andbiological similarities.

It is a further object of the invention, moreover, to providepolynucleotides that encode TNF delta and TNF epsilon, particularlypolynucleotides that encode the polypeptide herein designated TNF deltaand TNF epsilon.

In a particularly preferred embodiment of this aspect of the inventionthe polynucleotides comprise the region encoding human TNF delta and TNFepsilon in the sequences set out in FIGS. 1A and 1B, 2A and 2B, 6A and6B and 7A and 7B.

In accordance with this aspect of the invention there are providedisolated nucleic acid molecules encoding human TNF delta, includingmRNAs, cDNAs, genomic DNAs and, in further embodiments of this aspect ofthe invention, biologically, diagnostically, clinically ortherapeutically useful variants, analogs or derivatives thereof, orfragments thereof, including fragments of the variants, analogs andderivatives.

Among the particularly preferred embodiments of this aspect of theinvention are naturally occurring allelic variants of human TNF deltaand TNF epsilon.

In accordance with this aspect of the present invention there areprovided isolated nucleic acid molecules encoding a mature human TNFdelta polypeptide expressed by the human cDNA contained in ATCC DepositNo. 97377 deposited on Dec. 8, 1995 and a mature human TNF epsilonpolypeptide expressed by the human cDNA contained in ATCC Deposit No.97457 deposited on on Mar. 1, 1996, or a human TNF epsilon polypeptideexpressed by the human cDNA corresponding to clone HADCA12 (SEQ IDNO:13) contained in the ATCC Deposit No. PTA-1543 of pooled plasmidsdeposited on Mar. 21, 2000. It is possible to retrieve a given cDNAclone from a pooled plasmid deposit by techniques known in the art anddescribed elsewhere herein. The ATCC is located at 10801 UniversityBoulevard, Manassas, Va. 20110-2209, USA. The ATCC deposits were madepursuant to the terms of the Budapest Treaty on the internationalrecognition of the deposit of microorganisms for the purposes of patentprocedure.

It also is an object of the invention to provide TNF delta polypeptides,particularly human TNF delta and TNF epsilon polypeptides, that destroysome transformed cell lines, mediate cell activation and proliferationand are functionally linked as primary mediators of immune regulationand inflammatory response.

In accordance with this aspect of the invention there are provided novelpolypeptides of human origin referred to herein as TNF delta and TNFepsilon as well as biologically, diagnostically or therapeuticallyuseful fragments, variants and derivatives thereof, variants andderivatives of the fragments, and analogs of the foregoing.

Among the particularly preferred embodiments of this aspect of theinvention are variants of human TNF delta and TNF epsilon encoded bynaturally occurring alleles of the human TNF delta and TNF epsilon gene.

It is another object of the invention to provide a process for producingthe aforementioned polypeptides, polypeptide fragments, variants andderivatives, fragments of the variants and derivatives, and analogs ofthe foregoing.

In a preferred embodiment of this aspect of the invention there areprovided methods for producing the aforementioned TNF delta and TNFepsilon polypeptides comprising culturing host cells having expressiblyincorporated therein an exogenously-derived human TNF delta-encodingpolynucleotide and TNF epsilon-encoding polynucleotide under conditionsfor expression of human TNF delta and TNF epsilon in the host and thenrecovering the expressed polypeptide.

In accordance with another object the invention there are providedproducts, compositions, processes and methods that utilize theaforementioned polypeptides and polynucleotides for research,biological, clinical and therapeutic purposes, inter alia.

In accordance with certain preferred embodiments of this aspect of theinvention, there are provided products, compositions and methods, interalia, for, among other things: assessing TNF delta and TNF epsilonexpression in cells by determining TNF delta and TNF epsilonpolypeptides or TNF delta-encoding mRNA or TNF epsilon-encoding mRNApolypeptides; assaying genetic variation and aberrations, such asdefects, in TNF delta and TNF epsilon genes; and administering a TNFdelta or TNF epsilon polypeptide or polynucleotide to an organism toaugment TNF delta or TNF epsilon function or remediate TNF delta or TNFepsilon dysfunction.

In accordance with certain preferred embodiments of this and otheraspects of the invention there are provided polynucleotides and inparticular probes that hybridize to human TNF delta or TNF epsilonsequences.

In certain additional preferred embodiments of this aspect of theinvention there are provided antibodies against TNF delta or TNF epsilonpolypeptides. In certain particularly preferred embodiments in thisregard, the antibodies are highly selective for human TNF delta or TNFepsilon.

In accordance with another aspect of the present invention, there areprovided TNF delta or TNF epsilon agonists. Among preferred agonists aremolecules that mimic TNF delta or TNF epsilon, that bind to TNFdelta-binding molecules or receptor molecules or to TNF epsilon-bindingmolecules or receptor molecules , and that elicit or augment TNFdelta-induced or TNF epsilon-induced responses. Also among preferredagonists are molecules that interact with TNF delta and TNF epsilon orTNF delta and TNF epsilon polypeptides, or with other modulators of TNFdelta activities, and thereby potentiate or augment an effect of TNFdelta and TNF epsilon or more than one effect of TNF delta and TNFepsilon.

In accordance with yet another aspect of the present invention, thereare provided TNF delta and TNF epsilon antagonists. Among preferredantagonists are those which mimic TNF delta and TNF epsilon so as tobind to TNF delta and TNF epsilon receptors or binding molecules but notelicit a TNF delta- and TNF epsilon-induced response or more than oneTNF delta- and TNF epsilon-induced response. Also among preferredantagonists are molecules that bind to or interact with TNF delta andTNF epsilon so as to inhibit an effect of TNF delta and TNF epsilon ormore than one effect of TNF delta and TNF epsilon or which preventexpression of TNF delta and TNF epsilon.

The agonists and antagonists may be used to mimic, augment or inhibitthe action of TNF delta and TNF epsilon polypeptides. They may be used,for instance, to prevent septic shock, inflammation, cerebral malaria,activation of the HIV virus, graft-host rejection, bone resorption,rheumatoid arthritis and cachexia.

In a further aspect of the invention there are provided compositionscomprising a TNF delta and TNF epsilon polynucleotide or a TNF delta andTNF epsilon polypeptide for administration to cells in vitro, to cellsex vivo and to cells in vivo, or to a multicellular organism. In certainparticularly preferred embodiments of this aspect of the invention, thecompositions comprise a TNF delta and TNF epsilon polynucleotide forexpression of a TNF delta and TNF epsilon polypeptide in a host organismfor treatment of disease. Particularly preferred in this regard isexpression in a human patient for treatment of a dysfunction associatedwith aberrant endogenous activity of TNF delta and TNF epsilon.

Polynucleotides and/or polypeptides of the invention and/or agonistsand/or antagonists thereof are useful in the diagnosis and treatment orprevention of a wide range of diseases and/or conditions. Such diseasesand conditions include, but are not limited to, cancer (e.g., immunecell related cancers, breast cancer, prostate cancer, ovarian cancer,follicular lymphoma, cancer associated with mutation or alteration ofp53, brain tumor, bladder cancer, uterocervical cancer, colon cancer,colorectal cancer, non-small cell carcinoma of the lung, small cellcarcinoma of the lung, stomach cancer, etc.), lymphoproliferativedisorders (e.g., lymphadenopathy), microbial (e.g., viral, bacterial,etc.) infection (e.g., HIV-1 infection, HIV-2 infection, herpesvirusinfection (including, but not limited to, HSV-1, HSV-2, CMV, VZV, HHV-6,HHV-7, EBV), adenovirus infection, poxvirus infection, human papillomavirus infection, hepatitis infection (e.g., HAV, HBV, HCV, etc.),Helicobacter pylori infection, invasive Staphylococcia, etc.), parasiticinfection, nephritis, bone disease (e.g., osteoporosis),atherosclerosis, pain, cardiovascular disorders (e.g.,neovascularization, hypovascularization or reduced circulation (e.g.,ischemic disease (e.g., myocardial infarction, stroke, etc.))), AIDS,allergy, inflammation, neurodegenerative disease (e.g., Alzheimer'sdisease, Parkinson's disease, amyotrophic lateral sclerosis, pigmentaryretinitis, cerebellar degeneration, etc.), graft rejection (acute andchronic), graft vs. host disease, diseases due to osteomyelodysplasia(e.g., aplastic anemia, etc.), joint tissue destruction in rheumatism,liver disease (e.g., acute and chronic hepatitis, liver injury, andcirrhosis), autoimmune disease (e.g., multiple sclerosis, rheumatoidarthritis, systemic lupus erythematosus, immune complexglomerulonephritis, autoimmune diabetes, autoimmune thrombocytopenicpurpura, Grave's disease, Hashimoto's thyroiditis, etc.), cardiomyopathy(e.g., dilated cardiomyopathy), diabetes, diabetic complications (e.g.,diabetic nephropathy, diabetic neuropathy, diabetic retinopathy),influenza, asthma, psoriasis, glomerulonephritis, septic shock, andulcerative colitis.

Polynucleotides and/or polypeptides of the invention and/or agonistsand/or antagonists thereof are useful in promoting angiogenesis, woundhealing (e.g., wounds, bums, and bone fractures).

Polynucleotides and/or polypeptides of the invention and/or agonistsand/or antagonists thereof are also useful as an adjuvant to enhanceimmune responsiveness to specific antigen, anti-viral immune responses.

More generally, polynucleotides and/or polypeptides of the inventionand/or agonists and/or antagonists thereof are useful in regulating(i.e., elevating or reducing) immune response. For example,polynucleotides and/or polypeptides of the invention may be useful inpreparation or recovery from surgery, trauma, radiation therapy,chemotherapy, and transplantation, or may be used to boost immuneresponse and/or recovery in the elderly and immunocompromisedindividuals. Alternatively, polynucleotides and/or polypeptides of theinvention and/or agonists and/or antagonists thereof are useful asimmunosuppressive agents, for example in the treatment or prevention ofautoimmune disorders. In specific embodiments, polynucleotides and/orpolypeptides of the invention are used to treat or prevent chronicinflammatory, allergic or autoimmune conditions, such as those describedherein or are otherwise known in the art.

Other objects, features, advantages and aspects of the present inventionwill become apparent to those of skill from the following description.It should be understood, however, that the following description and thespecific examples, while indicating preferred embodiments of theinvention, are given by way of illustration only. Various changes andmodifications within the spirit and scope of the disclosed inventionwill become readily apparent to those skilled in the art from readingthe following description and from reading the other parts of thepresent disclosure.

BRIEF DESCRIPTION OF THE DRAWINGS

The following drawings depict certain embodiments of the invention. Theyare illustrative only and do not limit the invention otherwise disclosedherein.

FIGS. 1A and 1B show the nucleotide (SEQ ID NO:1) and deduced amino acid(SEQ ID NO:2) sequence of human TNF delta. A TNF family signaturesequence is found at positions Val-138 through Phe-154 in the TNF-deltaamino acid sequence shown in FIGS. 1A and 1B. See, Peitsch M. C., etal., Int. Immunol. 5:233-38 (1993); Farrah T., et al, Nature 358:26(1992); Bazan J. F., Curr. Biol. 3:603-606(1993). The sequence is markedin the Figures with a double underline under the corresponding aminoacids.

A potential asparagine-linked glycosylation site is marked in FIGS. 1Aand 1B with a bolded asparagine symbol (N) in the TNF-delta amino acidsequence and a bolded pound sign (#) above the first nucleotide encodingthat asparagine residue in the TNF-delta nucleotide sequence. Apotential N-linked glycosylation sequence is found at the followinglocation in the TNF-delta amino acid sequence: N-220 through P-223(N-220, L-221, S-222, and P-223).

Regions of high identity between TNF-delta, TNF-epsilon, TNF-alpha, andTNF-beta (an alignment of these sequences is presented in FIG. 3) areunderlined in FIGS. 1A and 1B. These regions are not limiting and arelabeled as Conserved Domain (CD)-I, CD-II, CD-III, CD-IV, CD-V, CD-VI,CD-VII, CD-VIII, CD-IX, CD-X, and CD-XI in FIGS. 1A and 1B.

FIGS. 2A and 2B show the nucleotide (SEQ ID NO:3) and deduced amino acid(SEQ ID NO:4) sequence of human TNF epsilon. A TNF family signaturesequence is found at positions Val-73 through Phe-89 in the TNF-epsilonamino acid sequence shown in FIGS. 2A and 2B. See, Peitsch M. C., etal., Int. Immunol. 5:233-38 (1993); Farrah T., et al., Nature 358:26(1992); Bazan J. F., Curr. Biol. 3:603-606(1993). The sequence is markedin the Figures with a double underline under the corresponding aminoacids.

Two potential asparagine-linked glycosylation sites are marked in FIGS.2A and 2B with a bolded asparagine symbol (N) in the TNF-epsilon aminoacid sequence and a bolded pound sign (#) above the first nucleotideencoding that asparagine residue in the TNF-epsilon nucleotide sequence.The potential N-linked glycosylation sequences are found at thefollowing locations in the TNF-epsilon amino acid sequence: N-47 throughD-50 (N-47, D-48, S-49, and D-50) and N-155 through P-158 (N-155, L-156,S-1 57, and P-158).

Regions of high identity between TNF-delta, TNF-epsilon, TNF-alpha, andTNF-beta (an alignment of these sequences is presented in FIG. 3) areunderlined in FIGS. 2A and 2B. These regions are not limiting and arelabeled as Conserved Domain (CD)-I, CD-III, CD-IV, CD-V, CD-VI, CD-VII,CD-VIII, CD-IX, CD-X, and CD-XI in FIGS. 2A and 2B.

FIG. 3 shows the regions of similarity (alignment report) between aminoacid sequences of TNF alpha (SEQ ID NO:5; GenBank Accession No. Z15026),TNF beta (SEQ ID NO:6; GenBank Accession No. Z15026), TNF delta (SEQ IDNO:1), and TNF epsilon (SEQ ID NO:2), polypeptides.

FIG. 4 shows structural and functional features of TNF delta deduced bythe indicated techniques, as a function of amino acid sequence. Alpha,beta, turn and coil regions; hydrophilicity and hydrophobicity;amphipathic regions; flexible regions; antigenic index and surfaceprobability are shown, as predicted for the amino acid sequence of SEQID NO:2 using the default parameters of the recited computer programs.In the “Antigenic Index—Jameson-Wolf” graph, the indicated location ofthe highly antigenic regions of the TNF-delta protein, i.e., regionsfrom which epitope-bearing peptides of the invention may be obtained.The data shown in FIG. 4 can be easily represented in tabular formatsimilar to the data shown in Table II. Such a tabular representation ofthe exact data disclosed in FIG. 4 can be generated using the MegAligncomponent of the DNA*STAR computer sequence analysis package set ondefault parameters.

FIG. 5 shows structural and functional features of TNF epsilon deducedby the indicated techniques, as a function of amino acid sequence.Alpha, beta, turn and coil regions; hydrophilicity and hydrophobicity;amphipathic regions; flexible regions; antigenic index and surfaceprobability are shown, as predicted for the amino acid sequence of SEQID NO:4 using the default parameters of the recited computer programs.In the “Antigenic Index—Jameson-Wolf” graph, the indicated location ofthe highly antigenic regions of the TNF-epsilon protein, i.e., regionsfrom which epitope-bearing peptides of the invention may be obtained.The data shown in FIG. 5 can be easily represented in tabular formatsimilar to the data shown in Table III. Such a tabular representation ofthe exact data disclosed in FIG. 5 can be generated using the MegAligncomponent of the DNA*STAR computer sequence analysis package set ondefault parameters.

FIGS. 6A and 6B show the nucleotide and deduced amino acid sequence of alonger open reading frame of human TNF delta obtained from the identicalnucleotide sequence shown in FIGS. 1A and 1B (SEQ ID NOs: 1 and 2). Theamino acid sequence shown in FIGS. 6A and 6B is also shown as SEQ ID NO:11. A TNF family signature sequence is found at positions Val-155through Phe-171 in the TNF-delta amino acid sequence shown in FIGS. 6Aand 6B. See, Peitsch M. C., et al., Int. Immunol. 5:233-38 (1993);Farrah T., et al., Nature 358:26 (1992); Bazan J. F., Curr. Biol.3:603-606(1993). The sequence is marked in the Figures with a doubleunderline under the corresponding amino acids.

A potential asparagine-linked glycosylation site is marked in FIGS. 6Aand 6B with a bolded asparagine symbol (N) in the TNF-delta amino acidsequence and a bolded pound sign (#) above the first nucleotide encodingthat asparagine residue in the TNF-delta nucleotide sequence. Apotential N-linked glycosylation sequence is found at the followinglocation in the TNF-delta amino acid sequence: N-237 through P-240(N-237, L-238, S-239, and P-240).

Regions of high identity between TNF-delta, TNF-epsilon, TNF-alpha, andTNF-beta are underlined in FIGS. 6A and 6B. These regions are notlimiting and are labeled as Conserved Domain (CD)-I, CD-II, CD-III,CD-IV, CD-V, CD-VI, CD-VII, CD-VIII, CD-IX, CD-X, and CD-XI in FIGS. 6Aand 6B.

FIGS. 7A and 7B show the nucleotide and deduced amino acid sequence of alonger human TNF epsilon than that shown in FIGS. 2A and 2B (SEQ IDNOs:3 and 4). The nucleotide and amino acid sequences shown in FIGS. 7Aand 7B are also shown as SEQ ID NO:12 and SEQ ID NO:13, respectively. ATNF family signature sequence is found at positions Val-139 throughPhe-155 in the TNF-epsilon amino acid sequence shown in FIGS. 7A and 7B.See, Peitsch M. C., et al., Int. Immunol. 5:233-38 (1993); Farrah T., etal., Nature 358:26 (1992); Bazan J. F., Curr. Biol. 3:603-606(1993). Thesequence is marked in the Figures with a double underline under thecorresponding amino acids.

Two potential asparagine-linked glycosylation sites are marked in FIGS.7A and 7B with a bolded asparagine symbol (N) in the TNF-epsilon aminoacid sequence and a bolded pound sign (#) above the first nucleotideencoding that asparagine residue in the TNF-epsilon nucleotide sequence.The potential N-linked glycosylation sequences are found at thefollowing locations in the TNF-epsilon amino acid sequence: N-1 13through D-116 (N-113, D-114, S-115, and D-116) and N-221 through P-224(N-221, L-222, S-223, and P-224).

Regions of high identity between TNF-delta, TNF-epsilon, TNF-alpha, andTNF-beta (an alignment of these sequences is presented in FIG. 3) areunderlined in FIGS. 2A and 2B. These regions are not limiting and arelabeled as Conserved Domain (CD)-I, CD-III, CD-IV, CD-V, CD-VI, CD-VII,CD-VIII, CD-IX, CD-X, and CD-XI in FIGS. 2A and 2B.

DETAILED DESCRIPTION OF THE INVENTION

The following illustrative explanations are provided to facilitateunderstanding of certain terms used frequently herein, particularly inthe examples. The explanations are provided as a convenience and are notlimitative of the invention.

The term “digestion” of DNA refers to catalytic cleavage of the DNA witha restriction enzyme that acts only at certain sequences in the DNA. Thevarious restriction enzymes referred to herein are commerciallyavailable and their reaction conditions, cofactors and otherrequirements for use are known and routine to the skilled artisan.

For analytical purposes, typically, 1 microgram of plasmid or DNAfragment is digested with about 2 units of enzyme in about 20microliters of reaction buffer. For the purpose of isolating DNAfragments for plasmid construction, typically 5 to 50 micrograms of DNAare digested with 20 to 250 units of enzyme in proportionately largervolumes.

Appropriate buffers and substrate amounts for particular restrictionenzymes are described in standard laboratory manuals, such as thosereferenced below, and they are specified by commercial suppliers.

Incubation times of about 1 hour at 37° C. are ordinarily used, butconditions may vary in accordance with standard procedures, thesupplier's instructions and the particulars of the reaction. Afterdigestion, reactions may be analyzed, and fragments may be purified byelectrophoresis through an agarose or polyacrylamide gel, using wellknown methods that are routine for those skilled in the art.

The term “genetic element” generally means a polynucleotide comprising aregion that encodes a polypeptide or a region that regulatestranscription or translation or other processes important to expressionof the polypeptide in a host cell, or a polynucleotide comprising both aregion that encodes a polypeptide and a region operably linked theretothat regulates expression.

Genetic elements may be comprised within a vector that replicates as anepisomal element; that is, as a molecule physically independent of thehost cell genome. They may be comprised within mini-chromosomes, such asthose that arise during amplification of transfected DNA by methotrexateselection in eukaryotic cells. Genetic elements also may be comprisedwithin a host cell genome; not in their natural state but, rather,following manipulation such as isolation, cloning and introduction intoa host cell in the form of purified DNA or in a vector, among others.

The term “isolated” means altered “by the hand of man” from its naturalstate; i.e., if it occurs in nature, it has been changed or removed fromits original environment, or both. For example, a naturally occurringpolynucleotide or a polypeptide naturally present in a living animal inits natural state is not “isolated,” but the same polynucleotide orpolypeptide separated from the coexisting materials of its natural stateis “isolated”, as the term is employed herein. For example, with respectto polynucleotides, the term isolated means that it is separated fromthe chromosome and cell in which it naturally occurs. However, a nucleicacid molecule contained in a clone that is a member of a mixed clonelibrary (e.g., a genomic or cDNA library) and that has not been isolatedfrom other clones of the library (e.g., in the form of a homogeneoussolution containing the clone without other members of the library) or achromosome isolated or removed from a cell or a cell lysate (e.g., a“chromosome spread”, as in a karyotype), is not “isolated” for thepurposes of this invention. Moreover, a nucleic acid molecule containedin a preparation of mechanically or enzymatically cleaved genomic DNA isalso not “isolated” for the purposes of this invention.

As part of or following isolation, such polynucleotides can be joined toother polynucleotides, for mutagenesis, to form fusion proteins, and forpropagation or expression in a host, for instance. The isolatedpolynucleotides, alone or joined to other polynucleotides such asvectors, can be introduced into host cells, in culture or in wholeorganisms, after which such DNAs still would be isolated, as the term isused herein, because they would not be in their naturally occurring formor environment.

Similarly, the polynucleotides and polypeptides may occur in acomposition, such as a media formulations, solutions for introduction ofpolynucleotides or polypeptides, for example, into cells, compositionsor solutions for chemical or enzymatic reactions, for instance, whichare not naturally occurring compositions, and, therein remain isolatedpolynucleotides or polypeptides within the meaning of that term as it isemployed herein.

The term “ligation” refers to the process of forming phosphodiesterbonds between two or more polynucleotides, which most often are doublestranded DNAs. Techniques for ligation are well known to the art andprotocols for ligation are described in standard laboratory manuals andreferences, such as, for instance, Sambrook et al., Molecular Cloning, aLaboratory Manual, 2nd Ed.; Cold Spring Harbor Laboratory Press, ColdSpring Harbor, New York (1989) and Maniatis et al., pg. 146, as citedbelow.

The term “oligonucleotide(s)” refers to relatively shortpolynucleotides. Often the term refers to single-strandeddeoxyribonucleotides, but it can refer as well to single-ordouble-stranded ribonucleotides, RNA:DNA hybrids and double-strandedDNAs, among others.

Oligonucleotides, such as single-stranded DNA probe oligonucleotides,often are synthesized by chemical methods, such as those implemented onautomated oligonucleotide synthesizers. However, oligonucleotides can bemade by a variety of other methods, including in vitro recombinantDNA-mediated techniques and by expression of DNAs in cells andorganisms.

Initially, chemically synthesized DNAs typically are obtained without a5′ phosphate. The 5′ ends of such oligonucleotides are not substratesfor phosphodiester bond formation by ligation reactions that employ DNAligases typically used to form recombinant DNA molecules. Where ligationof such oligonucleotides is desired, a phosphate can be added bystandard techniques, such as those that employ a kinase and ATP.

The 3′ end of a chemically synthesized oligonucleotide generally has afree hydroxyl group and, in the presence of a ligase, such as T4 DNAligase, readily will form a phosphodiester bond with a 5′ phosphate ofanother polynucleotide, such as another oligonucleotide. As is wellknown, this reaction can be prevented selectively, where desired, byremoving the 5′ phosphates of the other polynucleotide(s) prior toligation.

Plasmids generally are designated herein by a lower case p precededand/or followed by capital letters and/or numbers, in accordance withstandard naming conventions that are familiar to those of skill in theart. Starting plasmids disclosed herein are either commerciallyavailable, publicly available on an unrestricted basis, or can beconstructed from available plasmids by routine application of wellknown, published procedures. Many plasmids and other cloning andexpression vectors that can be used in accordance with the presentinvention are well known and readily available to those of skill in theart. Moreover, those of skill readily may construct any number of otherplasmids suitable for use in the invention. The properties, constructionand use of such plasmids, as well as other vectors, in the presentinvention will be readily apparent to those of skill from the presentdisclosure.

The term “polynucleotide(s)” generally refers to any polyribonucleotideor polydeoxribonucleotide, which may be unmodified RNA or DNA ormodified RNA or DNA. Thus, for instance, polynucleotides as used hereinrefers to, among others, single- and double-stranded DNA, DNA that is amixture of single-and double-stranded regions, single- anddouble-stranded RNA, and RNA that is mixture of single- anddouble-stranded regions, hybrid molecules comprising DNA and RNA thatmay be single-stranded or, more typically, double-stranded or a mixtureof single- and double-stranded regions. In addition, polynucleotide asused herein refers to triple-stranded regions comprising RNA or DNA orboth RNA and DNA. The strands in such regions may be from the samemolecule or from different molecules. The regions may include all of oneor more of the molecules, but more typically involve only a region ofsome of the molecules. One of the molecules of a triple-helical regionoften is an oligonucleotide.

As used herein, the term polynucleotide includes DNAs or RNAs asdescribed above that contain one or more modified bases. Thus, DNAs orRNAs with backbones modified for stability or for other reasons are“polynucleotides” as that term is intended herein. Moreover, DNAs orRNAs comprising unusual bases, such as inosine, or modified bases, suchas tritylated bases, to name just two examples, are polynucleotides asthe term is used herein.

It will be appreciated that a great variety of modifications have beenmade to DNA and RNA that serve many useful purposes known to those ofskill in the art. The term polynucleotide as it is employed hereinembraces such chemically, enzymatically or metabolically modified formsof polynucleotides, as well as the chemical forms of DNA and RNAcharacteristic of viruses and cells, including simple and complex cells,inter alia.

By a polynucleotide having a nucleotide sequence at least, for example,95% “identical” to a reference nucleotide sequence encoding a TNF deltaor TNF epsilon polypeptide is intended that the nucleotide sequence ofthe polynucleotide is identical to the reference sequence except thatthe polynucleotide sequence may include up to five mismatches per each100 nucleotides of the reference nucleotide sequence encoding TNF deltaor TNF epsilon. In other words, to obtain a polynucleotide having anucleotide sequence at least 95% identical to a reference nucleotidesequence, up to 5% of the nucleotides in the reference sequence may bedeleted or substituted with another nucleotide, or a number ofnucleotides up to 5% of the total nucleotides in the reference sequencemay be inserted into the reference sequence. These mismatches of thereference sequence may occur at the 5′ or 3′ terminal positions of thereference nucleotide sequence or anywhere between those terminalpositions, interspersed either individually among nucleotides in thereference sequence or in one or more contiguous groups within thereference sequence. The reference (query) sequence may be the entire TNFdelta-encoding nucleotide sequence shown in FIGS. 1A and 1B or FIGS. 6Aand 6B or the entire TNF epsilon-encoding nucleotide sequence shown inFIGS. 2A and 2B or FIGS. 7A and 7B or any TNF delta or TNF epsilonpolynucleotide fragment (e.g., a polynucleotide encoding the amino acidsequence of any of the TNF delta and TNF epsilon N- and/or C- terminaldeletions described herein), variant, derivative or analog, as describedherein.

As a practical matter, whether any particular nucleic acid molecule isat least 90%, 95%, 96%, 97%, 98% or 99% identical to, for instance, theencoding nucleotide sequence shown in FIGS. 1A and 1B, FIGS. 2A and 2B,FIGS. 6A and 6B or FIGS. 7A and 7B, or to the nucleotide sequence of thedeposited cDNA clones, can be determined conventionally using knowncomputer programs such as the Bestfit program (Wisconsin SequenceAnalysis Package, Version 8 for Unix, Genetics Computer Group,University Research Park, 575 Science Drive, Madison, Wis. 53711).Bestfit uses the local homology algorithm of Smith and Waterman,Advances in Applied Mathematics 2:482-489 (1981), to find the bestsegment of homology between two sequences. When using Bestfit or anyother sequence alignment program to determine whether a particularsequence is, for instance, 95% identical to a reference sequenceaccording to the present invention, the parameters are set, of course,such that the percentage of identity is calculated over the full lengthof the reference nucleotide sequence and that gaps in homology of up to5% of the total number of nucleotides in the reference sequence areallowed.

In a specific embodiment, the identity between a reference (query)sequence (a sequence of the present invention) and a subject sequence,also referred to as a global sequence alignment, is determined using theFASTDB computer program based on the algorithm of Brutlag et al. (Comp.App. Biosci. 6:237-245 (1990)). Preferred parameters used in a FASTDBalignment of DNA sequences to calculate percent identity are:Matrix=Unitary, k-tuple=4, Mismatch Penalty=1, Joining Penalty=30,Randomization Group Length=0, Cutoff Score=l, Gap Penalty=5, Gap SizePenalty 0.05, Window Size=500 or the length of the subject nucleotidesequence, whichever is shorter. According to this embodiment, if thesubject sequence is shorter than the query sequence because of 5′ or 3′deletions, not because of internal deletions, a manual correction ismade to the results to take into consideration the fact that the FASTDBprogram does not account for 5′ and 3′ truncations of the subjectsequence when calculating percent identity. For subject sequencestruncated at the 5′ or 3′ ends, relative to the query sequence, thepercent identity is corrected by calculating the number of bases of thequery sequence that are 5′ and 3′ of the subject sequence, which are notmatched/aligned, as a percent of the total bases of the query sequence.A determination of whether a nucleotide is matched/aligned is determinedby results of the FASTDB sequence alignment. This percentage is thensubtracted from the percent identity, calculated by the above FASTDBprogram using the specified parameters, to arrive at a final percentidentity score. This corrected score is what is used for the purposes ofthis embodiment. Only bases outside the 5′ and 3′ bases of the subjectsequence, as displayed by the FASTDB alignment, which are notmatched/aligned with the query sequence, are calculated for the purposesof manually adjusting the percent identity score. For example, a 90 basesubject sequence is aligned to a 100 base query sequence to determinepercent identity. The deletions occur at the 5′ end of the subjectsequence and therefore, the FASTDB alignment does not show amatched/alignment of the first 10 bases at 5′ end. The 10 unpaired basesrepresent 10% of the sequence (number of bases at the 5′ and 3′ ends notmatched/total number of bases in the query sequence) so 10% issubtracted from the percent identity score calculated by the FASTDBprogram. If the remaining 90 bases were perfectly matched the finalpercent identity would be 90%. In another example, a 90 base subjectsequence is compared with a 100 base query sequence. This time thedeletions are internal deletions so that there are no bases on the 5′ or3′ of the subject sequence which are not matched/aligned with the query.In this case the percent identity calculated by FASTDB is not manuallycorrected. Once again, only bases 5′ and 3′ of the subject sequencewhich are not matched/aligned with the query sequence are manuallycorrected for. No other manual corrections are made for the purposes ofthis embodiment.

The present application is directed to nucleic acid molecules at least90%, 95%, 96%, 97%, 98% or 99% identical to the nucleic acid sequencesdisclosed herein irrespective of whether they encode a polypeptidehaving TNF delta and/or TNF epsilon functional activity. This is becauseeven where a particular nucleic acid molecule does not encode apolypeptide having TNF delta and/or TNF epsilon functional activity, oneof skill in the art would still know how to use the nucleic acidmolecule, for instance, as a hybridization probe or a polymerase chainreaction (PCR) primer. Uses of the nucleic acid molecules of the presentinvention that do not encode a polypeptide having TNF delta and/or TNFepsilon functional activity include, inter alia, (1) isolating a TNFdelta and/or TNF epsilon gene or allelic or splice variants thereof in acDNA library; (2) in situ hybridization (e.g., “FISH”) to metaphasechromosomal spreads to provide precise chromosomal location of the TNFdelta and TNF epsilon genes, as described in Verma et al., HumanChromosomes: A Manual of Basic Techniques, Pergamon Press, New York(1988); and (3) Northern Blot analysis for detecting TNF delta and TNFepsilon mRNA expression in specific tissues.

Preferred, however, are nucleic acid molecules having sequences at least90%, 95%, 96%, 97%, 98% or 99% identical to the nucleic acid sequencesdisclosed herein, which do, in fact, encode a polypeptide having TNFdelta and/or TNF epsilon functional activity. By “a polypeptide havingTNF delta and/or TNF epsilon functional activity” is intendedpolypeptides exhibiting activity similar, but not necessarily identical,to a functional activity of the TNF delta and/or TNF epsilonpolypeptides of the present invention as measured, for example, in aparticular immunoassay or biological assay. For example, TNF deltaand/or TNF-epsilon polypeptide functional activity can be measured bythe ability of a polypeptide sequence described herein to form multimers(e.g., homodimers and homotrimers) with the complete TNF delta and/orTNF-epsilon or extracellular domain of TNF delta and/or TNF-epsilon, andto bind a TNF delta and/or TNF-epsilon receptor. Additionally, TNF deltaand/or TNF-epsilon polypeptide functional activity can be measured bythe ability of a polypeptide sequence described herein to formheteromultimers with Neutrokine-alpha and/or Neutrokine-alphaSVfragments or variants (e.g., International Publication No. WO 98/18921;Science. 285:260 (1999); SEQ ID NOS: 23 and 24 respectively), especiallythe extracellular soluble domain of Neutrokine-alpha and/orNeutrokine-alphaSV (e.g., amino acids 134-285 of SEQ ID NO: 23). TNFdelta and/or TNF-epsilon polypeptide functional activity can be also bemeasured by determining the ability of a polypeptide of the invention toinduce lymphocyte (e.g., B cell) proliferation, differentiation oractivation and/or to extend B cell survival. These functional assays canbe routinely performed using techniques described herein (e.g., seeExample 6) and otherwise known in the art. Additionally, TNF deltaand/or TNF-epsilon polypeptides of the present invention modulate cellproliferation, cytotoxicity, cell survival and cell death. An in vitrocell proliferation, cytotoxicity, cell survival, and cell death assayfor measuring the effect of a protein on certain cells can be performedby using reagents well known and commonly available in the art fordetecting cell replication and/or death. For instance, numerous suchassays for TNF-related protein activities are described in the variousreferences in this disclosure. Briefly, an example of such an assayinvolves collecting human or animal (e.g., mouse) cells and mixing with(1) transfected host cell-supernatant containing TNF delta and/or TNFepsilon protein (or a candidate polypeptide) or (2) nontransfected hostcell-supernatant control, and measuring the effect on cell numbers orviability after incubation of certain period of time. Such cellproliferation and/or survival modulation activities as can be measuredin this type of assay are useful for treating tumor, tumor metastasis,infections, autoimmune diseases, inflammation and other immune-relateddiseases.

Of course, due to the degeneracy of the genetic code, one of ordinaryskill in the art will immediately recognize that a large number of thenucleic acid molecules having a sequence at least 90%, 95%, 96%, 97%,98%, or 99% identical to the nucleic acid sequence of the depositedcDNA, the nucleic acid sequences shown in FIGS. 1A and 1B and 6A and 6B(SEQ ID NO: 1), or fragments thereof, will encode polypeptides “havingTNF-delta functional activity.” One of ordinary skill in the art willalso immediately recognize that a large number of the nucleic acidmolecules having a sequence at least 90%, 95%, 96%, 97%, 98%, or 99%identical to the nucleic acid sequence of the deposited cDNA, thenucleic acid sequence shown in FIGS. 2A and 2B and 7A and 7B (SEQ IDNOs:3 and 12, respectively), or fragments thereof, will encodepolypeptides “having TNF-epsilon functional activity.” In fact, sincedegenerate variants of any of these nucleotide sequences all encode thesame polypeptide, in many instances, this will be clear to the skilledartisan even without performing the above described comparison assay. Itwill be further recognized in the art that, for such nucleic acidmolecules that are not degenerate variants, a reasonable number willalso encode a polypeptide having TNF-delta and/or TNF-epsilon functionalactivity or activities. This is because the skilled artisan is fullyaware of amino acid substitutions that are either less likely or notlikely to significantly effect protein function (e.g., replacing onealiphatic amino acid with a second aliphatic amino acid), as furtherdescribed below.

For example, guidance concerning how to make phenotypically silent aminoacid substitutions is provided in Bowie, et al., “Deciphering theMessage in Protein Sequences: Tolerance to Amino Acid Substitutions,”Science 247:1306-10 (1990), wherein the authors indicate that proteinsare surprisingly tolerant of amino acid substitutions.

The term “polypeptides,” as used herein, includes all polypeptides asdescribed below. The basic structure of polypeptides is well known andhas been described in innumerable textbooks and other publications inthe art. In this context, the term is used herein to refer to anypeptide or protein comprising two or more amino acids joined to eachother in a linear chain by peptide bonds. As used herein, the termrefers to both short chains, which also commonly are referred to in theart as peptides, oligopeptides and oligomers, for example, and to longerchains, which generally are referred to in the art as proteins, of whichthere are many types.

It will be appreciated that polypeptides often contain amino acids otherthan the 20 amino acids commonly referred to as the 20 naturallyoccurring amino acids, and that many amino acids, including the terminalamino acids, may be modified in a given polypeptide, either by naturalprocesses, such as processing and other post-translationalmodifications, but also by chemical modification techniques which arewell known to the art. Even the common modifications that occurnaturally in polypeptides are too numerous to list exhaustively here,but they are well described in basic texts and in more detailedmonographs, as well as in a voluminous research literature, and they arewell known to those of skill in the art.

Among the known modifications which may be present in polypeptides ofthe present invention are, to name an illustrative few, acetylation,acylation, ADP-ribosylation, amidation, covalent attachment of flavin,covalent attachment of a heme moiety, covalent attachment of anucleotide or nucleotide derivative, covalent attachment of a lipid orlipid derivative, covalent attachment of phosphotidylinositol,cross-linking, cyclization, disulfide bond formation, formation ofcovalent cross-links, formation of cystine, formation of pyroglutamate,formylation, gamma-carboxylation, glycosylation, GPI anchor formation,hydroxylation, iodination, methylation, myristoylation, oxidation,proteolytic processing, phosphorylation, prenylation, racemization,selenoylation, sulfation, transfer-RNA mediated addition of amino acidsto proteins such as arginylation, and ubiquitination.

Such modifications are well known to those of skill and have beendescribed in great detail in the scientific literature. Severalparticularly common modifications, glycosylation, lipid attachment,sulfation, gamma-carboxylation of glutamic acid residues, hydroxylationand ADP-ribosylation, for instance, are described in most basic texts,such as, for instance Proteins—Structure and Molecular Properties, 2ndEd., T. E. Creighton, W. H. Freeman and Company, New York (1993). Manydetailed reviews are available on this subject, such as, for example,those provided by Wold, F., Posttranslational Protein Modifications:Perspectives and Prospects, pgs. 1-12 in Posttranslational CovalentModification of Proteins, B. C. Johnson, Ed., Academic Press, New York(1983); Seifter et al., Analysis for protein modifications andnonprotein cofactors, Meth. Enzymol., 182: 626-646 (1990) and Rattan etal., Protein Synthesis: Posttranslational Modifications and Aging, Ann.N.Y. Acad. Sci., 663: 48-62 (1992).

It will be appreciated, as is well known and as noted above, thatpolypeptides are not always entirely linear. For instance, polypeptidesmay be branched as a result of ubiquitination, and they may be circular,with or without branching, generally as a result of posttranslationevents, including natural processing event, and events brought about byhuman manipulation which do not occur naturally. Circular, branched andbranched circular polypeptides may be synthesized by non-translationalnatural process and by entirely synthetic methods, as well.

Modifications can occur anywhere in a polypeptide, including the peptidebackbone, the amino acid side-chains and the amino or carboxyl termini.In fact, blockage of the amino or carboxyl group in a polypeptide, orboth, by a covalent modification, is common in naturally occurring andsynthetic polypeptides and such modifications may be present inpolypeptides of the present invention, as well. For instance, the aminoterminal residue of polypeptides made in E. coli, prior to proteolyticprocessing, almost invariably will be N-formylmethionine.

The modifications that occur in a polypeptide often will be a functionof how it is made. For polypeptides made by expressing a cloned gene ina host, for instance, the nature and extent of the modifications inlarge part will be determined by the host cell posttranslationalmodification capacity and the modification signals present in thepolypeptide amino acid sequence. For instance, as is well known,glycosylation often does not occur in bacterial hosts such as E. coli.Accordingly, when glycosylation is desired, a polypeptide should beexpressed in a glycosylating host, generally a eukaryotic cell. Insectcells often carry out the same posttranslational glycosylations asmammalian cells and, for this reason, insect cell expression systemshave been developed to express efficiently mammalian proteins havingnative patterns of glycosylation, inter alia. Similar considerationsapply to other modifications. It will be appreciated that the same typeof modification may be present in the same or varying degree at severalsites in a given polypeptide. Also, a given polypeptide may contain manytypes of modifications. In general, as used herein, the term polypeptideencompasses all such modifications, particularly those that are presentin polypeptides synthesized by expressing a polynucleotide in a hostcell.

The term “variant(s)” of polynucleotides or polypeptides, as the term isused herein, are polynucleotides or polypeptides that differ from areference polynucleotide or polypeptide, respectively. Variants in thissense are described below and elsewhere in the present disclosure ingreater detail.

A polynucleotide variant is a polynucleotide that differs in nucleotidesequence from another, reference polynucleotide. Generally, differencesare limited so that the nucleotide sequences of the reference and thevariant are closely similar overall and, in many regions, identical. Asnoted below, changes in the nucleotide sequence of the variant may besilent. That is, they may not alter the amino acids encoded by thepolynucleotide. Where alterations are limited to silent changes of thistype a variant will encode a polypeptide with the same amino acidsequence as the reference. Also as noted below, changes in thenucleotide sequence of the variant may alter the amino acid sequence ofa polypeptide encoded by the reference polynucleotide. Such nucleotidechanges may result in amino acid substitutions, additions, deletions,fusions and truncations in the polypeptide encoded by the referencesequence, as discussed below.

A polypeptide variant is a polypeptide that differs in amino acidsequence from another, reference polypeptide. Generally, differences arelimited so that the sequences of the reference and the variant areclosely similar overall and, in many region, identical. A variant andreference polypeptide may differ in amino acid sequence by one or moresubstitutions, additions, deletions, fusions and truncations, which maybe present in any combination.

By a polypeptide having an amino acid sequence at least, for example,95% “identical” to a reference amino acid sequence of a TNF delta or aTNF epsilon polypeptide is intended that the amino acid sequence of thepolypeptide is identical to the reference sequence except that thepolypeptide sequence may include up to five amino acid alterations pereach 100 amino acids of the reference amino acid of a respective TNFdelta or TNF epsilon sequence. In other words, to obtain a polypeptidehaving an amino acid sequence at least 95% identical to a referenceamino acid sequence, up to 5% of the amino acid residues in thereference sequence may be deleted or substituted with another aminoacid, or a number of amino acids up to 5% of the total amino acidresidues in the reference sequence may be inserted into the referencesequence. These alterations of the reference sequence may occur at theamino or carboxy terminal positions of the reference amino acid sequenceor anywhere between those terminal positions, interspersed eitherindividually among residues in the reference sequence or in one or morecontiguous groups within the reference sequence.

As a practical matter, whether any particular polypeptide is at least90%, 95%, 96%, 97%, 98% or 99% identical to, for instance, the aminoacid sequence shown in FIGS. 1A and 1B (SEQ ID NO:2), FIGS. 6A and 6B(SEQ ID NO: 11), FIGS. 2A and 2B (SEQ ID NO:4), and FIGS. 7A and 7B (SEQID NO: 13), the amino acid sequence encoded by the deposited cDNAclones, or fragments thereof, can be determined conventionally usingknown computer programs such the Bestfit program (Wisconsin SequenceAnalysis Package, Version 8 for Unix, Genetics Computer Group,University Research Park, 575 Science Drive, Madison, Wis. 53711). Whenusing Bestfit or any other sequence alignment program to determinewhether a particular sequence is, for instance, 95% identical to areference sequence according to the present invention, the parametersare set, of course, such that the percentage of identity is calculatedover the full length of the reference amino acid sequence and that gapsin homology of up to 5% of the total number of amino acid residues inthe reference sequence are allowed.

In a specific embodiment, the identity between a reference (query)sequence (a sequence of the present invention) and a subject sequence,also referred to as a global sequence alignment, is determined using theFASTDB computer program based on the algorithm of Brutlag et al. (Comp.App. Biosci. 6:237-245 (1990)). Preferred parameters used in a FASTDBamino acid alignment are: Matrix=PAM 0, k-tuple=2, Mismatch Penalty=1,Joining Penalty=20, Randomization Group Length=0, Cutoff Score=1, WindowSize=sequence length, Gap Penalty=5, Gap Size Penalty=0.05, WindowSize=500 or the length of the subject amino acid sequence, whichever isshorter. According to this embodiment, if the subject sequence isshorter than the query sequence due to N- or C-terminal deletions, notbecause of internal deletions, a manual correction is made to theresults to take into consideration the fact that the FASTDB program doesnot account for N- and C-terminal truncations of the subject sequencewhen calculating global percent identity. For subject sequencestruncated at the N- and C-termini, relative to the query sequence, thepercent identity is corrected by calculating the number of residues ofthe query sequence that are N- and C-terminal of the subject sequence,which are not matched/aligned with a corresponding subject residue, as apercent of the total bases of the query sequence. A determination ofwhether a residue is matched/aligned is determined by results of theFASTDB sequence alignment. This percentage is then subtracted from thepercent identity, calculated by the above FASTDB program using thespecified parameters, to arrive at a final percent identity score. Thisfinal percent identity score is what is used for the purposes of thisembodiment. Only residues to the N- and C-termini of the subjectsequence, which are not matched/aligned with the query sequence, areconsidered for the purposes of manually adjusting the percent identityscore. That is, only query residue positions outside the farthest N- andC-terminal residues of the subject sequence. For example, a 90 aminoacid residue subject sequence is aligned with a 100 residue querysequence to determine percent identity. The deletion occurs at theN-terminus of the subject sequence and therefore, the FASTDB alignmentdoes not show a matching/alignment of the first 10 residues at theN-terminus. The 10 unpaired residues represent 10% of the sequence(number of residues at the N- and C-termini not matched/total number ofresidues in the query sequence) so 10% is subtracted from the percentidentity score calculated by the FASTDB program. If the remaining 90residues were perfectly matched the final percent identity would be 90%.In another example, a 90 residue subject sequence is compared with a 100residue query sequence. This time the deletions are internal deletionsso there are no residues at the N- or C-termini of the subject sequencewhich are not matched/aligned with the query. In this case the percentidentity calculated by FASTDB is not manually corrected. Once again,only residue positions outside the N- and C-terminal ends of the subjectsequence, as displayed in the FASTDB alignment, which are notmatched/aligned with the query sequence are manually corrected for. Noother manual corrections are made for the purposes of this embodiment.

The term “receptor molecule,” as used herein, refers to molecules whichbind or interact specifically with TNF delta or TNF epsilon polypeptidesof the present invention, including not only classic receptors, whichare preferred, but also other molecules that specifically bind to orinteract with polypeptides of the invention (which also may be referredto as “binding molecules” and “interaction molecules,” respectively andas “TNF delta binding molecules” and “TNF delta interaction molecules”or “TNF epsilon binding molecules” and “TNF epsilon interactionmolecules.” Binding between polypeptides of the invention and suchmolecules, including receptor or binding or interaction molecules may beexclusive to polypeptides of the invention, which is very highlypreferred, or it may be highly specific for polypeptides of theinvention, which is highly preferred, or it may be highly specific to agroup of proteins that includes polypeptides of the invention, which ispreferred, or it may be specific to several groups of proteins at leastone of which includes polypeptides of the invention.

The present invention relates to novel TNF delta and TNF epsilonpolypeptides and polynucleotides, among other things, as described ingreater detail below. In particular, the invention relates topolypeptides and polynucleotides which are related by amino acidsequence homology to the TNF ligand superfamily. The invention relatesespecially to TNF delta having the nucleotide and amino acid sequencesset out in FIGS. 1A and 1B, FIGS. 6A and 6B, and to the TNF nucleotideand amino acid sequences of the human cDNA in ATCC Deposit No. 97377.The invention also relates especially to TNF epsilon having thenucleotide and amino acid sequences set out in FIGS. 2A and 2B, FIGS. 7Aand 7B, and to the TNF epsilon nucleotide and amino acid sequences ofthe human cDNA in ATCC Deposit No. 97457 or ATCC Deposit No. PTA-1543.The deposits are hereinafter referred to as the deposited clones or as“the cDNA of the deposited clones.” It will be appreciated that thenucleotide and amino acid sequences set out in FIGS. 1A and 1B, FIGS. 2Aand 2B, FIGS. 6A and 6B and FIG. 7A and 7B were obtained by sequencingthe human cDNA of the deposited clones. Hence, the sequence of thedeposited clone is controlling as to any discrepancies between the twoand any reference to the sequences of FIGS. 1A and 1B, FIGS. 2A and 2B,FIGS. 6A and 6B and/or FIGS. 7A and 7B include reference to thesequences of the human cDNA's of the deposited clones.

In accordance with one aspect of the present invention, there areprovided isolated polynucleotides which encode the TNF deltapolynucleotides having the deduced amino acid sequences of FIGS. 1A, 1B,6A, and 6B and TNF epsilon polypeptides having the deduced amino acidsequences of FIGS. 2A, 2B, 7A and 7B.

Using the information provided herein, such as the polynucleotidesequence set out in FIGS. 1A and 1B, a polynucleotide of the presentinvention encoding human TNF delta polypeptide may be obtained usingstandard cloning and screening procedures, such as those for cloningcDNAs using mRNA from cells of human tissue as starting material.Illustrative of the invention, the polynucleotide set out in FIGS. 1A,1B, 6A, and 6B was discovered in a cDNA library derived from cells ofhuman heart tissue.

Human TNF delta of the invention is structurally related to otherproteins of the TNF ligand superfamily, as shown by the results ofsequencing the cDNA encoding human TNF delta in the deposited clone. ThecDNA sequence thus obtained is set out in FIGS. 1A and 1B and 6A and 6B.In one embodiment, it contains an open reading frame encoding a proteinof about 233 amino acid residues with a deduced molecular weight ofabout 25.871 kDa (FIGS. 1A and 1B, SEQ ID NO:2). In another embodiment,it contains an open reading frame encoding a protein of about 250 aminoacid residues with a deduced molecular weight of about 27.531 kDa (FIGS.6A and 6B, SEQ ID NO: 11). The protein exhibits greatest homology toTNF-alpha, among known proteins. The entire amino acid sequence of TNFdelta of FIGS. 1A and 1B has about 38% identity to the amino acidsequence of TNF-alpha.

A polynucleotide of the present invention encoding human TNF epsilonpolypeptide may be obtained using standard cloning and screeningprocedures, such as those for cloning cDNAs using mRNA from cells ofhuman tissue as starting material. Illustrative of the invention, thepolynucleotide set out in FIGS. 2A and 2B was discovered in a cDNAlibrary derived from cells of human heart tissue.

Human TNF epsilon of the invention is structurally related to otherproteins of the TNF ligand superfamily, as shown by the results ofsequencing the cDNA encoding human TNF epsilon in the deposited clone.The cDNA sequence thus obtained is set out in FIGS. 2A and 2B. The TNFepsilon sequence is nearly identical to the sequence of TNF delta as setout in FIGS. 1A and 1B minus the initial 50 amino acids of SEQ ID NO:2,or initial 67 amino acids of SEQ ID NO: 11 and a region of TNF deltacomprising amino acid 96-112 of SEQ ID NO:2 (or amino acids 113-129 ofSEQ ID NO:11). Accordingly, TNF epsilon is a splicing variant of TNFdelta. In one embodiment, TNF epsilon comprises 168 amino acid residuesand the sequence of FIGS. 2A and 2B show a protein of TNF epsilonwithout any N-terminal hydrophobic region. In another embodiment, TNFepsilon comprises 234 amino acid residues and the sequence of FIGS. 7Aand 7B show the full-length protein of TNF epsilon. The protein exhibitsgreatest homology to TNF-alpha. TNF epsilon of FIGS. 2A and 2B has about20% identity to the amino acid sequence of TNF-alpha

Another clone (HADCA12) containing cDNA sequence overlapping the codingregion of SEQ ID NO:3 and which contains the complete amino terminus ofTNF-epsilon has been identified. The polynucleotide sequence containedin HADCA12 is shown in FIGS. 7A and 7B and in SEQ ID NO:12 along withthe deduced amino acid sequences of the TNF epsilon protein encoded bythis polynucleotide (SEQ ID NO: 13).

Polynucleotides of the present invention may be in the form of RNA, suchas mRNA, or in the form of DNA, including, for instance, cDNA andgenomic DNA obtained by cloning or produced by chemical synthetictechniques or by a combination thereof. The DNA may be double-strandedor single-stranded. Single-stranded DNA may be the coding strand, alsoknown as the sense strand, or it may be the non-coding strand, alsoreferred to as the anti-sense strand.

The coding sequence which encodes the polypeptide may be identical tothe coding sequence of the polynucleotide shown in FIGS. 1A and 1B, 2Aand 2B, 6A and 6B, and 7A and 7B. It also may be a polynucleotide with adifferent sequence, which, as a result of the redundancy (degeneracy) ofthe genetic code, encodes the polypeptide of the DNA of FIGS. FIGS. 1Aand 1B, 2A and 2B, 6A and 6B, and 7A and 7B.

Polynucleotides of the present invention which encode the polypeptide ofFigures FIGS. 1A and 1B, 2A and 2B, 6A and 6B, and/or 7A and 7B mayinclude, but are not limited to the coding sequence for the maturepolypeptide, by itself; the coding sequence for the mature polypeptideand additional coding sequences, such as those encoding a leader orsecretory sequence, such as a pre-, or pro- or prepro- protein sequence;the coding sequence of the mature polypeptide, with or without theaforementioned additional coding sequences, together with additional,non-coding sequences, including for example, but not limited to intronsand non-coding 5′ and 3′ sequences, such as the transcribed,non-translated sequences that play a role in transcription, mRNAprocessing—including splicing and polyadenylation signals, forexample—ribosome binding and stability of mRNA; additional codingsequence which codes for additional amino acids, such as those whichprovide additional functionalities.

Thus, for instance, the polypeptide may be fused to a marker sequence,such as a peptide, which facilitates purification of the fusedpolypeptide. In certain preferred embodiments of this aspect of theinvention, the marker sequence is a hexa-histidine peptide, such as thetag provided in the pQE vector (Qiagen, Inc.), among others, many ofwhich are commercially available. As described in Gentz et al., Proc.Natl. Acad. Sci., USA, 86:821-824 (1989), for instance, hexa-histidineprovides for convenient purification of the fusion protein. The HA tagcorresponds to an epitope derived of influenza hemagglutinin protein,which has been described by Wilson et al., Cell, 37:767 (1984), forinstance.

In further preferred embodiments, TNF-delta and/or TNF-epsilonpolynucleotides of the invention are fused to a polynucleotide encodinga “FLAG” polypeptide. Thus, a TNF-delta-FLAG or a TNF-epsilon-FLAGfusion protein is encompassed by the present invention. The FLAGantigenic polypeptide may be fused to a TNF-delta or TNF-epsilonpolypeptide of the invention at either or both the amino or the carboxyterminus. In preferred embodiments, a TNF-delta-FLAG or aTNF-epsilon-FLAG fusion protein is expressed from a pFLAG-CMV-5a or apFLAG-CMV-1 expression vector (available from Sigma, St. Louis, Mo.,USA). See, Andersson, S., et al., J. Biol. Chem. 264:8222-29 (1989);Thomsen, D. R., et al., Proc. Natl. Acad. Sci. USA, 81:659-63 (1984);and Kozak, M., Nature 308:241 (1984) (each of which is herebyincorporated by reference). In further preferred embodiments, aTNF-delta-FLAG or a TNF-epsilon-FLAG fusion protein is detectable byanti-FLAG monoclonal antibodies (also available from Sigma). See, e.g.,Example 29.

The TNF delta and/or TNF epsilon polypeptides of the invention may be inmonomers or multimers (i.e., dimers, trimers, tetramers, and highermultimers). In preferrred embodiments, the TNF delta and TNF epsilonpolypeptides of the invention are trimers. Accordingly, the presentinvention relates to monomers and multimers of the TNF delta and/or TNFepsilon proteins of the invention, their preparation, and compositions(preferably, pharmaceutical compositions) containing them. In specificembodiments, the polypeptides of the invention are monomers, dimers,trimers or tetramers. In additional embodiments, the multimers of theinvention are at least dimers, at least trimers, or at least tetramers.

Multimers encompassed by the invention may be homomers or heteromers. Asused herein, the term homomer, refers to a multimer containing only TNFdelta proteins of the invention (including TNF delta fragments,variants, and fusion proteins, as described herein). These homomers maycontain TNF delta proteins having identical or different polypeptidesequences. As used herein, the term homomer, may alternatively refer toa multimer containing only TNF epsilon proteins of the invention(including TNF epsilon fragments, variants, and fusion proteins, asdescribed herein). These homomers may contain TNF epsilon proteinshaving identical or different polypeptide sequences.

In a specific embodiment, a homomer of the invention is a multimercontaining only TNF delta proteins having an identical polypeptidesequence. In another specific embodiment, a homomer of the invention isa multimer containing TNF delta proteins having different polypeptidesequences. Also in a specific embodiment, a homomer of the invention isa multimer containing only TNF epsilon proteins having an identicalpolypeptide sequence. In another specific embodiment, a homomer of theinvention is a multimer containing TNF epsilon proteins having differentpolypeptide sequences.

In specific embodiments, the multimer of the invention is a homodimer(e.g., containing TNF delta proteins having identical or differentpolypeptide sequences or also e.g., containing TNF epsilon proteinshaving identical or different polypeptide sequences) or a homotrimer(e.g., containing TNF delta proteins having identical or also e.g.,different polypeptide sequences or a homotrimer containing TNF epsilonproteins having identical or different polypeptide sequences). Inadditional embodiments, the homomeric multimer of the invention is atleast a homodimer, at least a homotrimer, or at least a homotetramer.

As used herein, the term heteromer refers to a multimer containing TNFdelta proteins of the invention and heterologous proteins (i.e.,proteins containing only polypeptide sequences that do not correspond toa polypeptide sequence encoded by the TNF delta gene or TNF-epsilongene). Alternatively, the term heteromer, as used herein, refers to amultimer containing TNF epsilon proteins of the invention andheterologous proteins (i.e., proteins containing only polypeptidesequences that do not correspond to a polypeptide sequence encoded bythe TNF delta gene or TNF-epsilon gene). In a specific embodiment, themultimer of the invention is a heterodimer, a heterotrimer, or aheterotetramer. In additional embodiments, the heteromeric multimer ofthe invention is at least a heterodimer, at least a heterotrimer, or atleast a heterotetramer. In highly preferred embodiments, the heteromericmultimer of the invention is a heterotrimer comprising both TNF-deltapolypeptides and Neutrokine-alpha and/or Neutokine-alphaSV polypeptides(e.g., International Publication No. WO 98/18921; Science. 285:260(1999); SEQ ID NOS:23 and 24 respectively). In other highly preferredembodiments, the heteromeric multimer of the invention is a heterotrimerconsisting of one TNF-delta polypeptide and two Neutrokine-alpha and/orNeutokine-alphaSV polypeptides. In other highly preferred embodiments,the heteromeric multimer of the invention is a heterotrimer consistingof two TNF-delta polypeptides and one Neutrokine-alpha and/orNeutokine-alphaSV polypeptide. In other highly preferred embodiments,the heteromeric multimer of the invention is a heterotrimer comprisingTNF-delta and/or TNF-epsilon polypeptides and Neutrokine-alpha and/orNeutokine-alphaSV polypeptides (e.g., International Publication No. WO98/18921; Science. 285:260 (1999); SEQ ID NOS:23 and 24 respectively).

In other highly preferred embodiments, the heteromeric multimer of theinvention is a heterotrimer consisting of one TNF-epsilon polypeptideand two Neutrokine-alpha and/or Neutokine-alphaSV polypeptides. In otherhighly preferred embodiments, the heteromeric multimer of the inventionis a heterotrimer consisting of two TNF-epsilon polypeptides and oneNeutrokine-alpha and/or Neutokine-alphaSV polypeptide. In still otherhighly preferred embodiments, the heteromeric multimer of the inventionis a heterotrimer comprising TNF-delta and/or TNF epsilon polypeptidesand Neutrokine-alpha and/or Neutokine-alphaSV polypeptides (e.g.,International Publication No. WO 98/18921; Science. 285:260 (1999); SEQID NOS:23 and 24, respectively).

Multimers of the invention may be the result of hydrophobic,hydrophilic, ionic and/or covalent associations and/or may be indirectlylinked, by for example, liposome formation. Thus, in one embodiment,multimers of the invention, such as, for example, homodimers orhomotrimers, are formed when proteins of the invention contact oneanother in solution. In another embodiment, heteromultimers of theinvention, such as, for example, heterotrimers or heterotetramers, areformed when proteins of the invention contact antibodies to thepolypeptides of the invention (including antibodies to the heterologouspolypeptide sequence in a fusion protein of the invention) in solution.In other embodiments, multimers of the invention are formed by covalentassociations with and/or between the TNF delta and/or TNF epsilonproteins of the invention. Such covalent associations may involve one ormore amino acid residues contained in the polypeptide sequence of theprotein (e.g., the polypeptide sequence recited in SEQ ID NO:2, SEQ IDNO:4, SEQ ID NO:11, and/or SEQ ID NO: 13 or the polypeptides encoded bythe deposited cDNA clones). In one instance, the covalent associationsare cross-linking between cysteine residues located within thepolypeptide sequences of the proteins which interact in the native(i.e., naturally occurring) polypeptide. In another instance, thecovalent associations are the consequence of chemical or recombinantmanipulation. Alternatively, such covalent associations may involve oneor more amino acid residues contained in the heterologous polypeptidesequence in a TNF delta and/or TNF epsilon fusion protein. In oneexample, covalent associations are between the heterologous sequencecontained in a fusion protein of the invention (see, e.g., U.S. Pat. No.5,478,925). In specific examples, the covalent associations are betweenthe heterologous sequences contained in a TNF delta-Fc fusion protein ofthe invention (as described herein) or between the heterologoussequences contained in a TNF epsilon-Fc fusion protein of the invention(as described herein). In a specific example, covalent associations offusion proteins of the invention are between the heterologous sequencescontained in a TNF delta-Fc fusion protein of the invention and theheterologous sequences contained in a TNF epsilon-Fc fusion protein ofthe invention. In another specific example, covalent associations offusion proteins of the invention are between heterologous polypeptidesequences from another TNF family ligand/receptor member that is capableof forming covalently associated multimers, such as for example,oseteoprotegerin (see, e.g., International Publication No. WO 98/49305,the contents of which are herein incorporated by reference in itsentirety).

The multimers of the invention may be generated using chemicaltechniques known in the art. For example, proteins desired to becontained in the multimers of the invention may be chemicallycross-linked using linker molecules and linker molecule lengthoptimization techniques known in the art (see, e.g., U.S. Pat. No.5,478,925, which is herein incorporated by reference in its entirety).Additionally, multimers of the invention may be generated usingtechniques known in the art to form one or more inter-moleculecross-links between the cysteine residues located within the polypeptidesequence of the proteins desired to be contained in the multimer (see,e.g., U.S. Pat. No. 5,478,925, which is herein incorporated by referencein its entirety). Further, proteins of the invention may be routinelymodified by the addition of cysteine or biotin to the C- or N-termini ofthe polypeptide sequence of the protein and techniques known in the artmay be applied to generate multimers containing one or more of thesemodified proteins (see, e.g., U.S. Pat. No. 5,478,925, which is hereinincorporated by reference in its entirety). Additionally, techniquesknown in the art may be applied to generate liposomes containing theprotein components desired to be contained in the multimer of theinvention (see, e.g., U.S. Pat. No. 5,478,925, which is hereinincorporated by reference in its entirety).

Alternatively, multimers of the invention may be generated using geneticengineering techniques known in the art. In one embodiment, proteinscontained in multimers of the invention are produced recombinantly usingfusion protein technology described herein or otherwise known in the art(see, e.g., U.S. Pat. No. 5,478,925, which is herein incorporated byreference in its entirety). In a specific embodiment, polynucleotidescoding for a homodimer of the invention are generated by ligating apolynucleotide sequence encoding a polypeptide of the invention to asequence encoding a linker polypeptide and then further to a syntheticpolynucleotide encoding the translated product of the polypeptide in thereverse orientation from the original C-terminus to the N-terminus(lacking the leader sequence) (see, e.g., U.S. Pat. No. 5,478,925, whichis herein incorporated by reference in its entirety). In anotherembodiment, recombinant techniques described herein or otherwise knownin the art are applied to generate recombinant polypeptides of theinvention which contain a transmembrane domain and which can beincorporated by membrane reconstitution techniques into liposomes (see,e.g., U.S. Pat. No. 5,478,925, which is herein incorporated by referencein its entirety).

In accordance with the foregoing, the term “polynucleotide encoding apolypeptide” as used herein encompasses polynucleotides which include asequence encoding a polypeptide of the present invention, particularlythe human TNF delta having the amino acid sequence set out in FIGS. 1Aand 1B and/or FIGS. 6A and 6B and TNF epsilon having the amino acidsequences set out in FIGS. 2A and 2B, and/or FIGS. 7A and 7B. The termencompasses polynucleotides that include a single continuous region ordiscontinuous regions encoding the polypeptide (for example, interruptedby introns) together with additional regions, that also may containcoding and/or non-coding sequences.

The present invention further relates to variants of the herein abovedescribed polynucleotides which encode for fragments, analogs andderivatives of the polypeptide having the deduced amino acid sequence ofFIGS. 1A and 1B, 2A and 2B, 6A and 6B, and/or 7A and 7B. In preferredembodiments, the present invention encompasses polynucleotides encodingthe extracellular soluble form of the TNF delta and TNF epsilonproteins, (e.g., a polynucleotide encoding amino acid residues 88-233 ofSEQ ID NO:2, a polynucleotide encoding amino acid residues 105-250 ofSEQ ID NO:11, a polynucleotide encoding amino acid residues 39-168 ofSEQ ID NO:4, and or a polynucleotide encoding amino acid residues105-234 of SEQ ID NO: 13. A variant of the polynucleotide may be anaturally occurring variant such as a naturally occurring allelicvariant, or it may be a variant that is not known to occur naturally.Such non-naturally occurring variants of the polynucleotide may be madeby mutagenesis techniques, including those applied to polynucleotides,cells or organisms.

Among variants in this regard are variants that differ from theaforementioned polynucleotides by nucleotide substitutions, deletions oradditions. The substitutions, deletions or additions may involve one ormore nucleotides. The variants may be altered in coding or non-codingregions or both. Alterations in the coding regions may produceconservative or non-conservative amino acid substitutions, deletions oradditions.

Among the particularly preferred embodiments of the invention in thisregard are polynucleotides encoding polypeptides having the amino acidsequence TNF delta having the amino acid sequence set out in FIGS. 1Aand 1B and/or FIGS. 6A and 6B and TNF epsilon having the amino acidsequences set out in FIGS. 2A and 2B, and/or FIGS. 7A and 7B; variants,analogs, derivatives and fragments thereof, and fragments of thevariants, analogs and derivatives.

Further particularly preferred in this regard are polynucleotidesencoding TNF delta and TNF epsilon which have the amino acid sequence ofthe TNF delta having the amino acid sequence set out in FIGS. 1A and 1Band/or FIGS. 6A and 6B and TNF epsilon having the amino acid sequencesset out in FIGS. 2A and 2B, and/or FIGS. 7A and 7B in which several, afew, 5 to 10, 1 to 5, 1 to 3, 2, 1 or no amino acid residues aresubstituted, deleted or added, in any combination. Especially preferredamong these are silent substitutions, additions and deletions, which donot alter the properties and activities of the TNF delta and TNFepsilon. Also especially preferred in this regard are conservativesubstitutions. Most highly preferred are polynucleotides encodingpolypeptides having the amino acid sequence of FIGS. 1A and 1B, 2A and2B, 6A and 6B, and/or 7A and 7B without substitutions. Further preferredembodiments of the invention are polynucleotides that are at least 70%identical to a polynucleotide encoding the TNF delta polypeptide havingthe amino acid sequence set out in FIGS. 1A and 1B and/or FIGS. 6A and6B and the TNF epsilon polypeptide having the amino acid sequences setout in FIGS. 2A and 2B, and/or FIGS. 7A and 7B, and polynucleotideswhich are complementary to such polynucleotides. Alternatively, mosthighly preferred are polynucleotides that comprise a region that is atleast 80% identical to a polynucleotide encoding the TNF delta and TNFepsilon polypeptide and polynucleotides complementary thereto. In thisregard, polynucleotides at least 90% identical to the same areparticularly preferred, and among these particularly preferredpolynucleotides, those with at least 95% are especially preferred.Furthermore, those with at least 97% are highly preferred among thosewith at least 95%, and among these those with at least 98% and at least99% are particularly highly preferred, with at least 99% being the morepreferred.

Particularly preferred embodiments in this respect, moreover, arepolynucleotides which encode polypeptides which retain substantially thesame biological function or activity as the mature polypeptide encodedby the cDNA of FIGS. 1A and 1B, 2A and 2B, and/or 7A and 7B.

The present invention further relates to polynucleotides that hybridizeto the herein above-described sequences. In this regard, the presentinvention especially relates to polynucleotides that hybridize understringent conditions to the herein above-described polynucleotides. Asherein used, the term “stringent conditions” means hybridization willoccur when at least 95% and preferably at least 97% of the bases betweensequences are complementary (e.g., G:C; A:T). Also as used herein, theterm “stringent conditions” means hybridization according to anystringent conditions recited herein. For example, 7% SDS, 0.5 M NaPO₄,pH 7.4 at 65° C., overnight, followed by two washes at room temperatureand two additional washes at 60° C. with 0.5×SSC, 0.1% SDS.

As discussed additionally herein regarding polynucleotide assays of theinvention, for instance, polynucleotides of the invention as discussedabove, may be used as a hybridization probe for cDNA and genomic DNA toisolate full-length cDNAs and genomic clones encoding TNF delta and TNFepsilon and to isolate cDNA and genomic clones of other genes that havea high sequence similarity to the human TNF delta and TNF epsilon gene.Such probes generally will comprise at least 15 bases. Preferably, suchprobes will have at least 30 bases and may have at least 50 bases.

For example, the coding region of the TNF delta and TNF epsilon gene maybe isolated by screening using the known DNA sequence to synthesize anoligonucleotide probe. A labeled oligonucleotide having a sequencecomplementary to that of a gene of the present invention is then used toscreen a library of human cDNA, genomic DNA or mRNA to determine whichmembers of the library the probe hybridizes to.

The polynucleotides and polypeptides of the present invention may beemployed as research reagents and materials for discovery of treatmentsand diagnostics to human disease, as further discussed herein relatingto polynucleotide assays, inter alia.

The polynucleotides may encode a polypeptide which is the mature proteinplus additional amino or carboxyl-terminal amino acids, or amino acidsinterior to the mature polypeptide (when the mature form has more thanone polypeptide chain, for instance). Such sequences may play a role inprocessing of a protein from precursor to a mature form, may facilitateprotein trafficking, may prolong or shorten protein half-life or mayfacilitate manipulation of a protein for assay or production, amongother things. As generally is the case in situ, the additional aminoacids may be processed away from the mature protein by cellular enzymes.

A precursor protein, having the mature form of the polypeptide fused toone or more prosequences may be an inactive form of the polypeptide.When prosequences are removed such inactive precursors generally areactivated. Some or all of the prosequences may be removed beforeactivation. Generally, such precursors are called proproteins.

In sum, a polynucleotide of the present invention may encode a matureprotein, a mature protein plus a leader sequence (which may be referredto as a preprotein), a precursor of a mature protein having one or moreprosequences which are not the leader sequences of a preprotein, or apreproprotein, which is a precursor to a proprotein, having a leadersequence and one or more prosequences, which generally are removedduring processing steps that produce active and mature forms of thepolypeptide.

Deposits containing human TNF delta and human TNF epsilon cDNA have beendeposited with the American Type Culture Collection, as noted above.Also as noted above, the cDNA deposit is referred to herein as “thedeposited clone” or as “the cDNA of the deposited clone.” The cloneswere deposited with the American Type Culture Collection, 10801University Boulevard, Manassas, Va., USA, on Dec. 8, 1995, Mar. 1, 1996,and March 21, 2000 and assigned ATCC Deposit No. 97377 97457, andPTA-1543, respectively. The deposited materials in Deposit Nos. 97377ans 97457 are pBluescript SK (−) plasmids (Stratagene, La Jolla, Calif.)that contain TNF epsilon human cDNA and the full length TNF delta cDNA,as described above.

The deposits have been made under the terms of the Budapest Treaty onthe international recognition of the deposit of micro-organisms forpurposes of patent procedure. The strains will be irrevocably andwithout restriction or condition released to the public upon theissuance of a patent. The deposits are provided merely as convenience tothose of skill in the art and are not an admission that a deposit isrequired for enablement, such as that required under 35 U.S.C. § 112.The sequence of the polynucleotides contained in the deposited material,as well as the amino acid sequence of the polypeptide encoded thereby,are controlling in the event of any conflict with any description ofsequences herein. A license may be required to make, use or sell thedeposited materials, and no such license is hereby granted.

The present invention further relates to human TNF delta and TNF epsilonpolypeptides having the deduced amino acid sequences of FIGS. 1A and 1B,2A and 2B, 6A and 6B, and/or 7A and 7B. The polypeptide of the presentinvention may be a recombinant polypeptide, a natural polypeptide or asynthetic polypeptide. In certain preferred embodiments, it is arecombinant polypeptide.

The invention also relates to fragments, analogs and derivatives ofthese polypeptides. The terms “fragment,” “derivative” and “analog” whenreferring to the polypeptide of FIGS. 1A and 1B, 2A and 2B, 6A and 6B,and/or 7A and 7B means a polypeptide which retains essentially the samebiological function or activity as such polypeptide. Thus, an analogincludes a proprotein that can be activated by cleavage of theproprotein portion to produce an active mature polypeptide.

It will be recognized by one of ordinary skill in the art that someamino acid sequences of the TNF-delta and TNF-epsilon polypeptides canbe varied without significant effect of the structure or function of thepolypeptide. If such differences in sequence are contemplated, it shouldbe remembered that there will be critical areas on the polypeptide whichdetermine activity.

Thus, the invention further includes variations of the TNF-deltapolypeptide which show substantial TNF-delta polypeptide functionalactivity (e.g., biological activity) or which include regions ofTNF-delta polypeptide such as the protein portions discussed below. Theinvention also includes variations of the TNF-epsilon polypeptide whichshow substantial TNF-epsilon polypeptide functional activity (e.g.,biological activity) or which include regions of TNF-epsilon polypeptidesuch as the polypeptide portions discussed below. Such mutants includedeletions, insertions, inversions, repeats, and type substitutionsselected according to general rules known in the art so as have littleeffect on activity. For example, guidance concerning how to makephenotypically silent amino acid substitutions is provided in Bowie, J.U. et al., “Deciphering the Message in Protein Sequences: Tolerance toAmino Acid Substitutions,” Science 247:1306-1310 (1990), wherein theauthors indicate that there are two main approaches for studying thetolerance of an amino acid sequence to change. The first method relieson the process of evolution, in which mutations are either accepted orrejected by natural selection. The second approach uses geneticengineering to introduce amino acid changes at specific positions of acloned gene and selections or screens to identify sequences thatmaintain functionality.

As the authors state, these studies have revealed that proteins aresurprisingly tolerant of amino acid substitutions. The authors furtherindicate which amino acid changes are likely to be permissive at acertain position of the protein. For example, most buried amino acidresidues require nonpolar side chains, whereas few features of surfaceside chains are generally conserved. Other such phenotypically silentsubstitutions are described in Bowie, J. U. et al., supra, and thereferences cited therein. Typically seen as conservative substitutionsare the replacements, one for another, among the aliphatic amino acidsAla, Val, Leu and Ile; interchange of the hydroxyl residues Ser and Thr,exchange of the acidic residues Asp and Glu, substitution between theamide residues Asn and Gln, exchange of the basic residues Lys and Argand replacements among the aromatic residues Phe, Tyr.

The fragment, derivative or analog of the polypeptide FIGS. 1A and 1B,2A and 2B, 6A and 6B, and/or 7A and 7B may be (i) one in which one ormore of the amino acid residues are substituted with a conserved ornon-conserved amino acid residue (preferably a conserved amino acidresidue) and such substituted amino acid residue may or may not be oneencoded by the genetic code, or (ii) one in which one or more of theamino acid residues includes a substituent group, or (iii) one in whichthe mature polypeptide is fused with another compound, such as acompound to increase the half-life of the polypeptide (for example,polyethylene glycol), or (iv) one in which the additional amino acidsare fused to the mature polypeptide, such as an IgG Fc fusion regionpeptide or a leader, human serum albumin (including but not limited torecombinant human albumin or fragments or variants thereof (see, e.g.,U.S. Pat. No. 5,876,969, issued Mar. 2, 1999, EP Patent 0 413 622, andU.S. Pat. No. 5,766,883, issued Jun. 16, 1998, herein incorporated byreference in their entirety)), a secretory sequence, or a sequence whichis employed for purification of the mature polypeptide or a proproteinsequence. Such fragments, derivatives and analogs are deemed to bewithin the scope of those skilled in the art from the teachings herein.

Thus, the TNF-delta and/or TNF-epsilon polypeptides of the presentinvention may include one or more amino acid substitutions, deletions oradditions, either from natural mutations or human manipulation. Asindicated, changes are preferably of a minor nature, such asconservative amino acid substitutions that do not significantly affectthe folding or activity of the protein (see Table I).

TABLE I Conservative Amino Acid Substitutions. Aromatic PhenylalanineTryptophan Tyrosine Hydrophobic Leucine Isoleucine Valine PolarGlutamine Asparagine Basic Arginine Lysine Histidine Acidic AsparticAcid Glutamic Acid Small Alanine Serine Threonine Methionine Glycine

Among the particularly preferred embodiments of the invention in thisregard are polypeptides having the amino acid sequence of TNF delta andTNF epsilon set out in FIGS. FIGS. 1A and 1B, 2A and 2B, 6A and 6B,and/or 7A and 7B, variants, analogs, derivatives and fragments thereof,and variants, analogs and derivatives of the fragments. Alternatively,particularly preferred embodiments of the invention in this regard arepolypeptides having the amino acid sequence of the TNF delta and TNFepsilon of the human cDNA in the deposited clone, variants, analogs,derivatives and fragments thereof, and variants, analogs and derivativesof the fragments.

Among preferred variants are those that vary from a reference byconservative amino acid substitutions. Such substitutions are those thatsubstitute a given amino acid in a polypeptide by another amino acid oflike characteristics. Typically seen as conservative substitutions arethe replacements, one for another, among the aliphatic amino acids Ala,Val, Leu and Ile; interchange of the hydroxyl residues Ser and Thr,exchange of the acidic residues Asp and Glu, substitution between theamide residues Asn and Gln, exchange of the basic residues Lys and Argand replacements among the aromatic residues Phe, Tyr.

Further particularly preferred in this regard are variants, analogs,derivatives and fragments, and variants, analogs and derivatives of thefragments, having the amino acid sequence of the TNF delta as set out inFIGS. 1A and 1B and/or FIGS. 6A and 6B, and/or TNF epsilon as set out inFIGS. 2A and 2B, and/or FIGS. 7A and 7B, or of the cDNA in the depositedclones, in which several, a few, 5 to 10, 1 to 5, 1 to 3, 2, 1 or noamino acid residues are substituted, deleted or added, in anycombination. Especially preferred among these are silent substitutions,additions and deletions, which do not alter the properties andactivities of the TNF delta and TNF epsilon. Also especially preferredin this regard are conservative substitutions. Most highly preferred arepolypeptides having the amino acid sequence of FIGS. 1A and 1B, 2A and2B, 6A and 6B, and/or 7A and 7B without substitutions.

The polypeptides and polynucleotides of the present invention arepreferably provided in an isolated form, and preferably are purified tohomogeneity.

The TNF delta polypeptides of the present invention include thepolypeptide of SEQ ID NO:2 (in particular the mature polypeptide, e.g.,amino acid residues 88-233 of SEQ ID NO:2) as well as polypeptides whichhave at least 70% similarity (preferably at least 70% identity) to thepolypeptide of SEQ ID NO:2 and more preferably at least 90% similarity(more preferably at least 90% identity) to the polypeptide of SEQ IDNO:2 and still more preferably at least 95% similarity (still morepreferably at least 95% identity) to the polypeptide of SEQ ID NO:2 andalso include portions of such polypeptides with such portion of thepolypeptide generally containing at least 30 amino acids and morepreferably at least 50 amino acids.

The TNF delta polypeptides of the present invention include thepolypeptide of SEQ ID NO:11 (in particular the mature polypeptide, e.g.,amino acid residues 105-250 of SEQ ID NO:11) as well as polypeptideswhich have at least 70% similarity (preferably at least 70% identity) tothe polypeptide of SEQ ID NO: 11 and more preferably at least 90%similarity (more preferably at least 90% identity) to the polypeptide ofSEQ ID NO: 11 and still more preferably at least 95% similarity (stillmore preferably at least 95% identity) to the polypeptide of SEQ ID NO:11 and also include portions of such polypeptides with such portion ofthe polypeptide generally containing at least 30 amino acids and morepreferably at least 50 amino acids.

The TNF epsilon polypeptides of the present invention include thepolypeptide of SEQ ID NO:4 (in particular the mature polypeptide, e.g.,amino acid residues 39-168 of SEQ ID NO:4) as well as polypeptides whichhave at least 70% similarity (preferably at least 70% identity) to thepolypeptide of SEQ ID NO:4 and more preferably at least 90% similarity(more preferably at least 90% identity) to the polypeptide of SEQ IDNO:4 and still more preferably at least 95% similarity (still morepreferably at least 95% identity) to the polypeptide of SEQ ID NO:4 andalso include portions of such polypeptides with such portion of thepolypeptide generally containing at least 30 amino acids and morepreferably at least 50 amino acids.

The TNF epsilon polypeptides of the present invention include thepolypeptide of SEQ ID NO: 13 (in particular the mature polypeptide,e.g., amino acid residues 105-234 of SEQ ID NO:13) as well aspolypeptides which have at least 70% similarity (preferably at least 70%identity) to the polypeptide of SEQ ID NO: 13 and more preferably atleast 90% similarity (more preferably at least 90% identity) to thepolypeptide of SEQ ID NO: 13 and still more preferably at least 95%similarity (still more preferably at least 95% identity) to thepolypeptide of SEQ ID NO: 13 and also include portions of suchpolypeptides with such portion of the polypeptide generally containingat least 30 amino acids and more preferably at least 50 amino acids.

As known in the art “similarity” between two polypeptides is determinedby comparing the amino acid sequence and its conserved amino acidsubstitutes of one polypeptide to the sequence of a second polypeptide.

Fragments or portions of the polypeptides of the present invention maybe employed for producing the corresponding full-length polypeptide bypeptide synthesis; therefore, the fragments may be employed asintermediates for producing the full-length polypeptides. Fragments orportions of the polynucleotides of the present invention may be used tosynthesize full-length polynucleotides of the present invention.

A fragment is a polypeptide having an amino acid sequence that entirelyis the same as part but not all of the amino acid sequence of theaforementioned TNF delta and TNF epsilon polypeptides and variants orderivatives thereof. Such fragments may be “free-standing,” i.e., notpart of or fused to other amino acids or polypeptides, or they may becomprised within a larger polypeptide of which they form a part orregion. When comprised within a larger polypeptide, the presentlydiscussed fragments most preferably form a single continuous region.However, several fragments may be comprised within a single largerpolypeptide. For instance, certain preferred embodiments relate to afragment of a TNF delta and TNF epsilon polypeptide of the presentcomprised within a precursor polypeptide designed for expression in ahost and having heterologous pre and pro-polypeptide regions fused tothe amino terminus of the TNF delta and TNF epsilon fragment and anadditional region fused to the carboxyl terminus of the fragment.Therefore, fragments in one aspect of the meaning intended herein,refers to the portion or portions of a fusion polypeptide or fusionprotein derived from TNF delta and TNF epsilon.

As representative examples of polypeptide fragments of the invention,there may be mentioned those which have from about 30 to about 233 aminoacids. In this context, “about” includes the particularly recited rangeand ranges larger or smaller by several, a few, 5, 4, 3, 2 or 1 aminoacid at either extreme or at both extremes. For instance, about 100 to233 amino acids in this context means a polypeptide fragment of 100 plusor minus several, a few, 5, 4, 3, 2 or 1 amino acids to 233 plus orminus several a few, 5, 4, 3, 2 or 1 amino acid residues, i.e., rangesas broad as 100 minus several amino acids to 233 plus several aminoacids to as narrow as 100 plus several amino acids to 233 minus severalamino acids.

Highly preferred in this regard are the recited ranges plus or minus asmany as 5 amino acids at either or at both extremes. Particularly highlypreferred are the recited ranges plus or minus as many as 3 amino acidsat either or at both the recited extremes. Especially particularlyhighly preferred are ranges plus or minus 1 amino acid at either or atboth extremes or the recited ranges with no additions or deletions. Mosthighly preferred of all in this regard are fragments from about 15 toabout 233 amino acids.

The present invention is further directed to fragments of the isolatednucleic acid molecules described herein. By a fragment of an isolatednucleic acid molecule having, for example, the nucleotide sequence ofthe deposited cDNA (clone HLTBT71), a nucleotide sequence encoding thepolypeptide sequence encoded by the deposited cDNA, a nucleotidesequence encoding the polypeptide sequence depicted in FIGS. 1A and 1B(SEQ ID NO:2) and/or FIGS. 6A and 6B (SEQ ID NO: 11), the nucleotidesequence shown in FIGS. 1A and 1B (SEQ ID NO: 1), or the complementarystrand thereto, is intended fragments at least 15 nt, and morepreferably at least about 20 nt, still more preferably at least 30 nt,and even more preferably, at least about 40, 50, 100, 150, 200, 250,300, 325, 350, 375, 400, 450, 500, 550, or 600 nt in length.

By a fragment of an isolated nucleic acid molecule having, for example,the nucleotide sequence of the deposited cDNA (clone HPDDO12 or cloneHADCA12), a nucleotide sequence encoding the polypeptide sequenceencoded by the either or both deposited cDNAs, a nucleotide sequenceencoding the polypeptide sequence depicted in FIGS. 2A and 2B (SEQ IDNO:4), a nucleotide sequence encoding the polypeptide sequence depictedin FIGS. 7A and 7B (SEQ ID NO:13), the nucleotide sequence shown inFIGS. 2A and 2B (SEQ ID NO:3), or the complementary strand thereto, thenucleotide sequence shown in FIGS. 7A and 7B (SEQ ID NO:12), or thecomplementary strand thereto, is intended fragments at least 15 nt, andmore preferably at least about 20 nt, still more preferably at least 30nt, and even more preferably, at least about 40, 50, 100, 150, 200, 250,300, 325, 350, 375, 400, 450, 500, 550, or 600 nt in length.

These fragments have numerous uses that include, but are not limited to,diagnostic probes and primers as discussed herein. Of course, largerfragments, such as those of 501-1500 nt in length are also usefulaccording to the present invention as are fragments corresponding tomost, if not all, of the nucleotide sequences of the deposited cDNAs(clones HLTBT71, HPDDO12, and/or HADCA12) or as shown in FIGS. 1A and 1B(SEQ ID NO:1), 2A and 2B (SEQ ID NO:3) 7A and 7B (SEQ ID NO:12),respectively. By a fragment at least 20 nt in length, for example, isintended fragments which include 20 or more contiguous bases from, forexample, the nucleotide sequence of the deposited cDNAs, or thenucleotide sequences as shown in FIGS. 1A and 1B (SEQ ID NO:1), 2A and2B (SEQ ID NO:3), or 7A and 7B (SEQ ID NO:12), respectively.

By a fragment at least about 20 nt in length, for example, is intendedfragments which include 20 or more contiguous bases from the nucleotidesequence. In this context “about” includes the particularly recitedsize, larger or smaller by several (5, 4, 3, 2, or 1) nucleotides, ateither terminus or at both termini.

Representative examples of TNF-delta polynucleotide fragments of theinvention include, for example, fragments that comprise, oralternatively, consist of, a sequence from about nucleotide 282 to 315,316 to 348, 349 to 380, 381 to 410, 411 to 440, 441 to 470, 471 to 500,501 to 530, 531 to 560, 561 to 590, 591 to 620, 621 to 650, 651 to 680,681 to 710, 711 to 740, 741 to 770, 771 to 800, 801 to 830, 831 to 860,861 to 890, 891 to 920, 921 to 950, 951 to 980, 981 to 1010, 1011 to1040 of SEQ ID NO:1, or the complementary strand thereto, or the cDNAcontained in the deposited clone. In this context “about” includes theparticularly recited ranges, larger or smaller by several (5, 4, 3, 2,or 1) nucleotides, at either terminus or at both termini.

Representative examples of TNF-epsilon polynucleotide fragments of theinvention include, for example, fragments that comprise, oralternatively, consist of, a sequence from about nucleotide 2 to 31, 32to 61, 62 to 91, 92 to 121, 122 to 151, 152 to 181, 182 to 211, 212 to241, 242 to 271, 272 to 301, 302 to 331, 332 to 361, 362 to 391, 392 to421, 422 to 451, 452 to 481, 482 to 511, 512 to 541, 542 to 571 of SEQID NO:3, or the complementary strand thereto, or the cDNA contained inthe deposited clone. In this context “about” includes the particularlyrecited ranges, larger or smaller by several (5, 4, 3, 2, or 1)nucleotides, at either terminus or at both termini.

Additional examples of TNF-epsilon polynucleotide fragments of theinvention include, for example, fragments that comprise, oralternatively, consist of, a sequence from about nucleotide 108 to 139,140 to 170, 171 to 201, 202 to 232, 233 to 263, 264 to 294, 295 to 325,326 to 356, 357 to 381, 382 to 419, 420 to 452, 453 to 485, 486 to 517,518 to 550, 551 to 582, 583 to 615, 616 to 648, 649 to 680, 681 to 713,714 to 746, 747 to 778, 779 to 809 of SEQ ID NO: 12, or thecomplementary strand thereto, or the cDNA contained in the depositedclone. In this context “about” includes the particularly recited ranges,larger or smaller by several (5, 4, 3, 2, or 1) nucleotides, at eitherterminus or at both termini.

Preferably, the polynucleotide fragments of the invention encode apolypeptide which demonstrates a TNF-delta and/or TNF-epsilon functionalactivity. By a polypeptide demonstrating a TNF-delta and/or TNF-epsilon“functional activity” is meant, a polypeptide capable of displaying oneor more known functional activities associated with a full-length(complete) TNF-delta and/or TNF-epsilon protein. Such functionalactivities include, but are not limited to, biological activity (e.g.,cell proliferation, differentiation, and/or growth), antigenicity,ability to bind (or compete with a TNF-delta and/or TNF-epsilonpolypeptide for binding) to an anti-TNF-delta and/or TNF-epsilonantibody, immunogenicity (ability to generate/induce antibody whichbinds to a TNF-delta and/or TNF-epsilon polypeptide), ability to formmultimers with TNF-delta and/or TNF-epsilon polypeptides of theinvention, ability to form heteromultimers with Neutrokine alpha-and/orNeutrokine-alphaSV polypeptides (e.g., International Publication No. WO98/18921; Science. 285:260 (1999); SEQ ID NOS 23 and 24, respectively);and ability to bind to a receptor or ligand for a TNF-delta and/orTNF-epsilon polypeptide (e.g., TACI (See, von Bulow, G. U. and Bram, R.J., Science 278:138-41 (1997) and GenBank accesion number AAC51790,and/or BCMA (GenBank accession number NP_(—)001183)), and/or TR11,and/or TR11SV1, and/or TR11SV2 (See, International Publication No.WO99/22085).

The functional activity of TNF-delta and/or TNF-epsilon polypeptides,and fragments, variants derivatives, and analogs thereof, can be assayedby various methods.

For example, in one embodiment where one is assaying for the ability tobind or compete with full-length TNF-delta and/or TNF-epsilonpolypeptide for binding to anti-TNF-delta and/or anti-TNF-epsilonantibody, various immunoassays known in the art can be used, includingbut not limited to, competitive and non-competitive assay systems usingtechniques such as radioimmunoassays, ELISA (enzyme linked immunosorbentassay), “sandwich” immunoassays, immunoradiometric assays, gel diffusionprecipitation reactions, immunodiffusion assays, in situ immunoassays(using colloidal gold, enzyme or radioisotope labels, for example),western blots, precipitation reactions, agglutination assays (e.g., gelagglutination assays, hemagglutination assays), complement fixationassays, immunofluorescence assays, protein A assays, andimmunoelectrophoresis assays, etc. In one embodiment, antibody bindingis detected by detecting a label on the primary antibody. In anotherembodiment, the primary antibody is detected by detecting binding of asecondary antibody or reagent to the primary antibody. In a furtherembodiment, the secondary antibody is labeled. Many means are known inthe art for detecting binding in an immunoassay and are within the scopeof the present invention.

Among especially preferred fragments of the invention are truncationmutants of TNF delta and TNF epsilon. Truncation mutants include TNFdelta and TNF epsilon polypeptides having the amino acid sequence ofFIGS. 1A and 1B and 2A and 2B, or of variants or derivatives thereof,except for deletion of a continuous series of residues (that is, acontinuous region, part or portion) that includes the amino terminus, ora continuous series of residues that includes the carboxyl terminus or,as in double truncation mutants, deletion of two continuous series ofresidues, one including the amino terminus and one including thecarboxyl terminus. Fragments having the size ranges set out about alsoare preferred embodiments of truncation fragments, which are especiallypreferred among fragments generally.

Also preferred in this aspect of the invention are fragmentscharacterized by structural or functional attributes of TNF delta andTNF epsilon. Preferred embodiments of the invention in this regardinclude fragments that comprise alpha-helix and alpha-helix formingregions (“alpha-regions”), beta-sheet and beta-sheet-forming regions(“beta-regions”), turn and turn-forming regions (“turn-regions”), coiland coil-forming regions (“coil-regions”), hydrophilic regions,hydrophobic regions, alpha amphipathic regions, beta amphipathicregions, flexible regions, surface-forming regions and high antigenicindex regions of TNF delta and TNF epsilon.

Certain preferred regions in these regards are set out in FIG. 4 for TNFdelta and FIG. 5 for TNF epsilon, and include, but are not limited to,regions of the aforementioned types identified by analysis of the aminoacid sequence set out in FIGS. 1A and 1B and 2A and 2B. As set out inFIGS. 4 and 5, such preferred regions include Garnier-Robsonalpha-regions, beta-regions, turn-regions and coil-regions, Chou-Fasmanalpha-regions, beta-regions and turn-regions, Kyte-Doolittle hydrophilicregions and hydrophilic regions, Eisenberg alpha and beta amphipathicregions, Karplus-Schulz flexible regions, Emini surface-forming regionsand Jameson-Wolf high antigenic index regions.

Among highly preferred fragments in this regard are those that compriseregions of TNF delta and TNF epsilon that combine several structuralfeatures, such as several of the features set out above. In this regard,the regions defined by the residues following the signal peptide regionof FIGS. 1A, 1B, 2A, 2B, 4 and 5, which all are characterized by aminoacid compositions highly characteristic of turn-regions, hydrophilicregions, flexible-regions, surface-forming regions, and high antigenicindex-regions, are especially highly preferred regions. Such regions maybe comprised within a larger polypeptide or may be by themselves apreferred fragment of the present invention, as discussed above. It willbe appreciated that the term “about” as used in this paragraph has themeaning set out above regarding fragments in general.

In additional embodiments, the polynucleotides of the invention encodefunctional attributes of TNF delta and/or TNF epsilon. Preferredembodiments of the invention in this regard include fragments thatcomprise alpha-helix and alpha-helix forming regions (“alpha-regions”),beta-sheet and beta-sheet forming regions (“beta-regions”), turn andturn-forming regions (“turn-regions”), coil and coil-forming regions(“coil-regions”), hydrophilic regions, hydrophobic regions, alphaamphipathic regions, beta amphipathic regions, flexible regions,surface-forming regions and high antigenic index regions of TNF deltaand/or TNF epsilon.

The data representing the structural or functional attributes of TNFdelta and/or TNF epsilon set forth in FIGS. 1A and 1B, 4 and/or TableII, and/or as set forth in FIGS. 2A and 2B, 5 and/or Table III, asdescribed above, was generated using the various modules and algorithmsof the DNA*STAR set on default parameters. In a preferred embodiment,the data presented in columns VIII, IX, XIII, and XIV of Tables II andIII can be used to determine regions of TNF delta and TNF epsilon,respectively, which exhibit a high degree of potential for antigenicity.Regions of high antigenicity are determined from the data presented incolumns VIII, IX, XIII, and/or XIV by choosing values which representregions of the polypeptide which are likely to be exposed on the surfaceof the polypeptide in an environment in which antigen recognition mayoccur in the process of initiation of an immune response.

Certain preferred regions in these regards are set out in FIGS. 4 and 5,but may, as shown in Tables II and III, respectively, be represented oridentified by using tabular representations of the data presented inFIGS. 4 and 5. The DNA*STAR computer algorithm used to generate FIGS. 4and 5 (set on the original default parameters) was used to present thedata in FIGS. 4 and 5 in a tabular format (See Tables II and III,respectively). The tabular format of the data in FIGS. 4 and 5 may beused to easily determine specific boundaries of a preferred region.

The above-mentioned preferred regions set out in FIGS. 4 and 5 and inTables II and III, respectively, include, but are not limited to,regions of the aforementioned types identified by analysis of the aminoacid sequence set out in FIGS. 4 and 5. As set out in FIGS. 4 and 5, andin Tables II and III, respectively, such preferred regions includeGarnier-Robson alpha-regions, beta-regions, turn-regions, andcoil-regions, Chou-Fasman alpha-regions, beta-regions, and coil-regions,Kyte-Doolittle hydrophilic regions and hydrophobic regions, Eisenbergalpha- and beta-amphipathic regions, Karplus-Schulz flexible regions,Emini surface-forming regions and Jameson-Wolf regions of high antigenicindex.

TABLE II Res Position I II III IV V VI VII VIII IX X XI XII XIII XIV Met1 . . . . T . . −0.41  0.19 . * . 0.30 0.56 Gly 2 . . . . . . C 0.090.40 * * . 0.32 0.33 Gly 3 . . . . . . C 0.48 −0.03  * * . 1.14 0.50 Pro4 . . . . . . C 0.66 −0.46  * * . 1.36 0.87 Val 5 . . B . . . . 0.46−0.64  . * F 1.98 1.37 Arg 6 . . B . . . . 0.24 −0.57  . * F 2.20 1.39Glu 7 . . B . . . . 0.29 −0.31  . . F 1.53 0.74 Pro 8 A . . . . . .−0.22  −0.36  . * F 1.46 1.34 Ala 9 A A . . . . . −0.60  −0.36  . * .0.74 0.51 Leu 10 A A . . . . . −0.56  0.14 . . . −0.08  0.30 Ser 11 A A. . . . . −0.96  0.83 . * . −0.60  0.16 Val 12 A A . . . . . −1.77  1.31. * . −0.60  0.16 Ala 13 A A . . . . . −1.86  1.50 . * . −0.60  0.16 Leu14 A A . . . . . −1.56  1.20 . * . −0.60  0.16 Trp 15 A A . . . . .−1.09  1.73 . * . −0.60  0.23 Leu 16 A . . . . T . −1.38  1.51 . * .−0.20  0.23 Ser 17 A . . . . T . −1.11  1.51 . * . −0.20  0.28 Trp 18 A. . . . T . −1.33  1.33 . . . −0.20  0.27 Gly 19 A . . . . T . −0.87 1.10 . * . −0.20  0.27 Ala 20 A A . . . . . −1.17  0.84 . . . −0.60 0.20 Ala 21 A A . . . . . −1.21  0.96 . . . −0.60  0.19 Leu 22 A A . . .. . −1.50  0.69 . . . −0.60  0.14 Gly 23 A A . . . . . −1.88  0.76 . . .−0.60  0.14 Ala 24 A A . . . . . −2.12  0.83 . . . −0.60  0.08 Val 25 AA . . . . . −2.13  0.83 . . . −0.60  0.09 Ala 26 A A . . . . . −2.13 0.76 . . . −0.60  0.09 Cys 27 A A . . . . . −2.13  0.83 . . . −0.60 0.09 Ala 28 A A . . . . . −2.60  1.01 . . . −0.60  0.10 Met 29 A A . . .. . −2.32  1.06 . . . −0.60  0.08 Ala 30 A A . . . . . −1.47  1.04 . . .−0.60  0.23 Leu 31 A A . . . . . −0.88  0.87 . . . −0.60  0.39 Leu 32 AA . . . . . −0.52  0.77 . . . −0.60  0.68 Thr 33 A A . . . . . 0.07 0.64. . F −0.45  0.97 Gln 34 A A . . . . . −0.14  0.14 . * F 0.00 2.05 Gln35 A A . . . . . 0.44 0.14 . * F 0.00 2.05 Thr 36 A A . . . . . 0.96−0.14  . . F 0.60 2.45 Glu 37 A A . . . . . 0.96 −0.24  . * F 0.60 1.90Leu 38 A A . . . . . 1.38 0.04 * . F −0.15  0.90 Gln 39 . A B . . . .1.49 −0.36  * . F 0.60 1.23 Ser 40 . A . . . . C 1.49 −0.84  * * F 1.101.39 Leu 41 A A . . . . . 0.94 −0.84  * . F 0.90 2.91 Arg 42 A A . . . .. 0.64 −0.89  * . F 0.90 1.25 Arg 43 A A . . . . . 1.57 −0.90  * . F0.90 1.25 Glu 44 A A . . . . . 0.76 −1.29  * * F 0.90 2.97 Val 45 . A B. . . . 1.06 −1.29  * . F 0.90 1.25 Ser 46 . A B . . . . 1.98 −0.89  * .F 1.21 1.10 Arg 47 . A B . . . . 1.56 −0.89  * . F 1.52 1.25 Leu 48 . AB . . . . 1.10 −0.40  * * F 1.53 2.43 Gln 49 . . B . . T . 0.76 −0.61  *. F 2.54 1.79 Arg 50 . . . . T T . 1.40 −0.57  * . F 3.10 0.91 Thr 51 .. . . T T . 1.40 −0.14  * * F 2.64 1.70 Gly 52 . . . . . T C 1.29−0.44  * . F 2.43 1.32 Gly 53 . . . . . T C 2.10 −0.44  * . F 2.42 1.16Pro 54 . . . . . T C 1.76 −0.04  . . F 2.41 1.30 Ser 55 . . . . . T C1.64 −0.10  . * F 2.40 1.30 Gln 56 . . . . . T C 1.61 −0.53  . . F 3.002.27 Asn 57 . . . . . T C 1.71 −0.53  . . F 2.70 1.45 Gly 58 . . . . T T. 1.84 −0.20  . . F 2.30 1.70 Glu 59 . . . . T T . 1.77 −0.16  . . F2.00 1.51 Gly 60 . . . . . T C 2.07 0.36 . . F 0.75 0.99 Tyr 61 . . . .. T C 1.77 0.36 . . . 0.45 1.73 Pro 62 . . . . T T . 0.96 0.31 . . .0.65 1.34 Trp 63 . . . . T T . 1.09 1.00 . . . 0.35 1.12 Gln 64 . . B .. T . 1.09 1.00 . . . −0.05  1.10 Ser 65 . . B . . . . 1.43 0.24 . . F0.20 1.24 Leu 66 . . . . . . C 1.38 0.21 . . F 0.70 2.03 Pro 67 . . . .. . C 1.29 −0.31  * . F 1.60 1.57 Glu 68 . . . . T . . 1.58 −0.33  * . F2.10 1.57 Gln 69 . . . . . . C 0.99 −0.71  * . F 2.50 3.19 Ser 70 . . .. . T C 0.48 −0.90  * . F 3.00 2.08 Ser 71 . . . . . T C 1.29 −0.64  * .F 2.55 0.99 Asp 72 A . . . . T . 0.91 −0.64  * . F 2.05 0.99 Ala 73 A .. . . T . 0.62 −0.54  * . F 1.75 0.75 Leu 74 A . . . . . . 0.62 −0.01  *. . 0.80 0.59 Glu 75 A . . . . . . 0.92 −0.40  * . . 0.50 0.61 Ala 76 A. . . . . . 0.88 0.00 * . . −0.10  0.97 Trp 77 A . . . . T . 0.88−0.07  * . . 0.85 1.16 Glu 78 A . . . . T . 1.58 −0.76  * . F 1.30 1.16Asn 79 A . . . . T . 2.09 −0.76  . * F 1.30 2.25 Gly 80 A . . . . T .2.20 −0.87  * . F 1.30 2.87 Glu 81 A . . . . . . 2.83 −1.79  * * F 1.103.25 Arg 82 A . . . . T . 3.23 −1.79  . * F 1.30 4.04 Ser 83 A . . . . T. 3.34 −2.19  . . F 1.30 7.99 Arg 84 A . . . . T . 2.76 −2.61  . . F1.30 9.04 Lys 85 A . . . . T . 2.24 −2.11  . . F 1.30 4.66 Arg 86 A A .. . . . 1.43 −1.47  . * F 0.90 2.58 Arg 87 A A . . . . . 1.01 −1.17  . *F 0.90 1.09 Ala 88 A A . . . . . 1.31 −0.69  . . . 0.60 0.78 Val 89 A A. . . . . 1.24 −0.29  . . . 0.30 0.69 Leu 90 A A . . . . . 1.20 −0.29 . * F 0.45 0.71 Thr 91 A A . . . . . 1.13 0.11 . . F 0.00 1.21 Gln 92 AA . . . . . 1.07 −0.39  . * F 0.60 3.27 Lys 93 A A . . . . . 1.66 −1.03 . . F 0.90 7.94 Gln 94 A A . . . . . 2.48 −1.31  . . F 0.90 9.52 Lys 95A A . . . . . 2.99 −1.30  . . F 0.90 7.48 Lys 96 A A . . . . . 2.44−1.31  . . F 0.90 5.01 Gln 97 . A B . . . . 1.63 −0.67  . . F 0.90 2.15His 98 . A B . . . . 1.56 −0.39  . . . 0.30 0.89 Ser 99 . A B . . . .0.74 0.11 * . . −0.30  0.60 Val 100 . A B . . . . −0.16  0.80 * . .−0.60  0.29 Leu 101 . A B . . . . −0.41  1.04 . . . −0.60  0.16 His 102. A B . . . . −1.30  0.97 . . . −0.60  0.18 Leu 103 . A B . . . . −1.27 1.27 . . . −0.60  0.17 Val 104 . A B . . . . −1.56  1.03 . . . −0.60 0.33 Pro 105 . A B . . . . −1.01  0.84 . . . −0.60  0.25 Ile 106 . . B B. . . −0.50  0.83 . * . −0.60  0.43 Asn 107 . . B B . . . −0.42  0.53. * . −0.26  0.78 Ala 108 . . B B . . . 0.39 −0.11  . * F 1.28 1.01 Thr109 . . B B . . . 1.24 −0.54  . * F 1.92 2.41 Ser 110 . . . . . T C 1.16−1.23  . * F 2.86 2.50 Lys 111 . . . . T T . 2.04 −1.24  * * F 3.40 3.31Asp 112 . . . . T T . 1.19 −1.74  . * F 3.06 3.83 Asp 113 . . . . T T .1.47 −1.59  . * F 2.72 2.12 Ser 114 . . . B . . C 1.78 −1.49  . . F 1.781.53 Asp 115 A A . B . . . 1.22 −1.49  * . F 1.24 1.59 Val 116 . A B B .. . 0.58 −0.84  * . F 0.75 0.71 Thr 117 . A B B . . . 0.29 −0.23  . . F0.45 0.52 Glu 118 A A . B . . . 0.29 0.30 . . . −0.30  0.33 Val 119 A A. B . . . 0.38 0.70 * . . −0.60  0.77 Met 120 A A . B . . . −0.21 0.49 * * . −0.60  0.82 Trp 121 A A . B . . . −0.17  0.50 * * . −0.60 0.48 Gln 122 A A . B . . . 0.26 1.19 * * . −0.60  0.53 Pro 123 A A . B .. . 0.37 0.54 * * . −0.45  1.05 Ala 124 A A . . . . . 0.88 −0.07  * * .0.79 1.96 Leu 125 . A B . . . . 1.59 −0.56  * * F 1.58 1.12 Arg 126 . A. . T . . 1.53 −0.96  * * F 2.32 1.42 Arg 127 . . . . T . . 0.72−0.96  * . F 2.86 1.39 Gly 128 . . . . T T . 0.93 −0.77  * . F 3.40 1.39Arg 129 . . . . T T . 0.93 −1.06  * . F 3.06 1.23 Gly 130 . . B . . T .1.74 −0.56  * . F 2.17 0.63 Leu 131 . . B . . T . 1.29 −0.16  * . . 1.531.11 Gln 132 . . B . . . . 0.93 −0.16  . * . 0.84 0.56 Ala 133 . . B . .T . 0.93 0.60 * . . −0.20  0.89 Gln 134 . . B . . T . −0.03  0.60 * . .−0.05  1.07 Gly 135 . . B . . T . 0.42 0.56 * * . −0.20  0.46 Tyr 136 .. B . . T . 0.34 0.16 . * . 0.10 0.89 Gly 137 . . B B . . . 0.340.34 * * . −0.30  0.36 Val 138 . . B B . . . 0.93 0.34 * * . −0.30  0.63Arg 139 . . B B . . . 0.34 −0.09  * * . 0.30 0.67 Ile 140 . . B B . . .0.34 −0.34  * * . 0.30 0.68 Gln 141 . . B B . . . −0.27  −0.34  * * F0.45 0.91 Asp 142 . . B . . T . −0.17  −0.34  * * F 0.85 0.34 Ala 143 .. B . . T . −0.12  0.41 * * . −0.20  0.77 Gly 144 . . B . . T . −1.04 0.41 * * . −0.20  0.37 Val 145 . . B . . T . −0.40  0.70 * . . −0.20 0.18 Tyr 146 . . B B . . . −0.70  1.46 . . . −0.60  0.28 Leu 147 . . B B. . . −0.70  1.34 . * . −0.60  0.38 Leu 148 . . B B . . . −0.97  1.31 .. . −0.60  0.89 Tyr 149 . . B B . . . −1.43  1.31 . . . −0.60  0.42 Ser150 . . B B . . . −1.28  1.24 . * . −0.60  0.42 Gln 151 . . B B . . .−1.03  1.34 . . . −0.60  0.44 Val 152 . . B B . . . −0.22  1.06 . . .−0.60  0.49 Leu 153 . . B B . . . −0.27  0.30 . . . −0.30  0.61 Phe 154. . B B . . . −0.33  0.56 . . . −0.60  0.26 Gln 155 . . B B . . . −0.73 0.64 . . . −0.60  0.51 Asp 156 . . B B . . . −1.04  0.79 . * . −0.60 0.53 Val 157 . . B B . . . −0.79  0.59 . . . −0.60  0.89 Thr 158 . . B B. . . −0.32  0.41 * . . −0.60  0.51 Phe 159 . . B B . . . 0.38 0.44 * .. −0.60  0.30 Thr 160 . . B B . . . −0.48  0.84 * . . −0.60  0.70 Met161 . . B B . . . −1.33  0.84 * * . −0.60  0.36 Gly 162 . . B B . . .−0.78  1.00 * * . −0.60  0.31 Gln 163 . . B B . . . −0.36  0.60 * . .−0.60  0.29 Val 164 . . B B . . . 0.34 0.11 * . . −0.30  0.57 Val 165 .. B B . . . 0.31 −0.50  * . . 0.64 0.99 Ser 166 . . B . . . . 0.91−0.50  * . F 1.33 0.57 Arg 167 . . B . . . . 0.91 −0.50  . * F 1.82 1.33Glu 168 . . . . T . . 1.02 −0.71  . * F 2.86 1.77 Gly 169 . . . . T T .1.88 −1.36  . * F 3.40 2.58 Gln 170 . . . . . T C 2.73 −1.34  . * F 2.862.28 Gly 171 . . . . . T C 2.72 −1.34  . . F 2.52 2.28 Arg 172 . . . . TT . 1.80 −0.86  . * F 2.38 3.33 Gln 173 . . B B . . . 1.10 −0.60  * * F1.24 1.59 Glu 174 . . B B . . . 1.56 −0.21  . * F 0.60 1.39 Thr 175 . .B B . . . 0.89 −0.64  * * F 0.90 1.39 Leu 176 . . B B . . . 0.34−0.07  * * . 0.30 0.43 Phe 177 . . B B . . . 0.34 0.21 * * . −0.30  0.17Arg 178 . . B B . . . 0.04 0.21 * . . −0.30  0.24 Cys 179 . . B B . . .−0.56  0.11 * . . −0.30  0.38 Ile 180 . . . B T . . −0.46  0.04 * . .0.10 0.44 Arg 181 . . . B T . . 0.06 −0.31  * . . 0.70 0.35 Ser 182 . .. B T . . 0.72 0.07 * . . 0.10 0.86 Met 183 . . . . . . C 0.40 0.00 * .F 0.74 1.68 Pro 184 . . . . T . . 1.07 −0.26  * * F 1.88 1.33 Ser 185 .. . . . . C 2.07 −0.26  * * F 2.02 1.65 His 186 . . . . . T C 1.37−0.64  * . F 2.86 3.27 Pro 187 . . . . T T . 1.42 −0.76  * . F 3.40 2.14Asp 188 . . . . T T . 2.02 −0.43  * . F 2.76 2.50 Arg 189 . . . . T T .1.93 −0.41  * . F 2.42 2.95 Ala 190 . . . . T . . 1.57 −0.53  * . . 2.032.56 Tyr 191 . . B . . . . 1.36 −0.39  * . . 0.84 0.82 Asn 192 . . B . .T . 1.27 0.37 * . . 0.10 0.66 Ser 193 . . B . . T . 0.68 0.76 * . .−0.20  0.87 Cys 194 . . B . . T . 0.22 0.76 * * . −0.20  0.56 Tyr 195 .. . . T T . −0.04  0.43 . . . 0.20 0.35 Ser 196 . . . . T . . −0.50 0.67 . . . 0.00 0.19 Ala 197 . . B . . . . −0.53  1.07 . . . −0.40  0.31Gly 198 . . B . . . . −1.04  1.00 . . . −0.40  0.27 Val 199 . A B . . .. −0.41  0.93 . . . −0.60  0.17 Phe 200 . A B . . . . −0.17  1.04 . . .−0.60  0.22 His 201 . A B . . . . −0.21  0.94 . . . −0.60  0.39 Leu 202. A B . . . . 0.38 0.94 . . . −0.60  0.52 His 203 . . B . . T . −0.17 0.30 . . . 0.25 1.00 Gln 204 A . . . . T . −0.12  0.20 . . F 0.25 0.52Gly 205 . . . . T T . 0.28 0.39 . . F 0.65 0.52 Asp 206 . . . . T T .−0.54  0.09 . . F 0.65 0.51 Ile 207 . . B B . . . −0.62  0.23 . . .−0.30  0.22 Leu 208 . . B B . . . −1.48  0.51 . . . −0.60  0.15 Ser 209. . B B . . . −1.69  0.77 * . . −0.60  0.06 Val 210 . . B B . . . −1.23 1.20 * . . −0.60  0.14 Ile 211 . . B B . . . −1.82  0.51 * * . −0.60 0.34 Ile 212 . . B B . . . −0.82  0.33 * * . −0.30  0.26 Pro 213 . . B B. . . −0.60  −0.06  . * . 0.30 0.68 Arg 214 A A . . . . . −0.26  −0.20 . * . 0.30 0.97 Ala 215 A A . . . . . −0.21  −0.89  . * F 0.90 2.78 Arg216 A A . . . . . 0.68 −0.89  . * F 0.90 1.48 Ala 217 A A . . . . . 0.76−0.91  . * F 0.90 1.22 Lys 218 A A . . . . . 0.67 −0.23  . * . 0.30 0.99Leu 219 . A B . . . . 0.34 −0.34  . * . 0.30 0.68 Asn 220 . A B . . . .0.90 0.09 . * . −0.15  1.04 Leu 221 . A B . . . . 0.44 0.09 . * . −0.30 0.71 Ser 222 . . . . . T C 0.72 0.51 . * F 0.15 0.85 Pro 223 . . . . . TC −0.02  0.31 . * F 0.45 0.76 His 224 . . . . T T . −0.02  0.70 . * F0.35 0.80 Gly 225 . . B . . T . −0.37  0.70 . * F −0.05  0.49 Thr 226 .. B B . . . −0.26  0.74 . . . −0.60  0.31 Phe 227 . . B B . . . −0.81 1.10 . * . −0.60  0.20 Leu 228 . . B B . . . −0.56  1.24 . * . −0.60 0.15 Gly 229 . . B B . . . −1.33  0.81 . * . −0.60  0.21 Phe 230 . . B B. . . −1.38  1.01 . * . −0.60  0.20 Val 231 . . B B . . . −1.46  0.66. * . −0.60  0.31 Lys 232 A . . B . . . −1.14  0.40 . * . −0.60  0.40Leu 233 A . . B . . . −0.72  0.40 . . . −0.60  0.59 Ter 234 A . . B . .. −0.77  0.04 . * . −0.15  1.01

TABLE III Res Position I II III IV V VI VII VIII IX X XI XII XIII XIVGly 1 . . . . T . . 0.39 0.06 . . . 0.30 0.52 Thr 2 . . . . T . . 0.480.06 . . . 0.30 0.63 Gly 3 . . . . . . C 0.87 0.01 . . . 0.40 0.66 Gly 4. . . . . T C 1.26 −0.01  . . . 1.65 1.16 Pro 5 . . . . . T C 1.30−0.04  . . F 2.10 1.30 Ser 6 . . . . . T C 1.64 −0.10  . . F 2.40 1.30Gln 7 . . . . . T C 1.61 −0.53  . . F 3.00 2.27 Asn 8 . . . . . T C 1.71−0.53  . . F 2.70 1.45 Gly 9 . . . . T T . 1.84 −0.20  . . F 2.30 1.70Glu 10 . . . . T T . 1.77 −0.16  . . F 2.00 1.51 Gly 11 . . . . . T C2.07 0.36 . . F 0.75 0.99 Tyr 12 . . . . . T C 1.77 0.36 . . . 0.45 1.73Pro 13 . . . . T T . 0.96 0.31 . . . 0.65 1.34 Trp 14 . . . . T T . 1.091.00 . . . 0.35 1.12 Gln 15 . . B . . T . 1.09 1.00 . . . −0.05  1.10Ser 16 . . B . . . . 1.43 0.24 . . F 0.20 1.24 Leu 17 . . . . . . C 1.380.21 . . F 0.70 2.03 Pro 18 . . . . . . C 1.29 −0.31  * . F 1.60 1.57Glu 19 . . . . T . . 1.58 −0.33  * . F 2.10 1.57 Gln 20 . . . . . . C0.99 −0.71  * . F 2.50 3.19 Ser 21 . . . . . T C 0.48 −0.90  * . F 3.002.08 Ser 22 . . . . . T C 1.29 −0.64  * . F 2.55 0.99 Asp 23 . . . . . TC 0.91 −0.64  * . F 2.25 0.99 Ala 24 . . . . . T C 0.62 −0.54  * . F1.95 0.75 Leu 25 . A . . . . C 0.62 −0.01  * . . 0.80 0.59 Glu 26 A A .. . . . 0.62 −0.40  * . . 0.30 0.61 Ala 27 A A . . . . . 0.58 −0.01  * .. 0.30 0.81 Trp 28 A A . . . . . 0.58 −0.09  * . . 0.64 0.97 Glu 29 A .. . . T . 1.28 −0.77  * . F 1.83 0.97 Ser 30 A . . . . T . 1.79 −0.77 . * F 2.32 1.88 Gly 31 . . . . . T C 1.90 −0.89  * * F 2.86 2.39 Glu 32. . . . T T . 2.53 −1.80  * * F 3.40 2.71 Arg 33 . . . . T T . 2.93−1.80  . * F 3.06 4.04 Ser 34 . . . . T T . 3.04 −2.19  . * F 2.72 7.99Arg 35 . . . . T T . 2.76 −2.61  . . F 2.38 9.04 Lys 36 . . . . T T .2.24 −2.11  . . F 2.04 4.66 Arg 37 . A . . T . . 1.43 −1.47  . * F 1.302.58 Arg 38 . A B . . . . 1.01 −1.17  . * F 0.90 1.09 Ala 39 . A B . . .. 1.31 −0.69  . . . 0.60 0.78 Val 40 . A B . . . . 1.24 −0.29  . . .0.30 0.69 Leu 41 . A B . . . . 1.20 −0.29  . * F 0.45 0.71 Thr 42 . A B. . . . 1.13 0.11 . . F 0.00 1.21 Gln 43 . A B . . . . 1.02 −0.39  . * F0.60 3.27 Lys 44 . A B . . . . 1.61 −0.63  . . F 0.90 6.38 Gln 45 . A .. T . . 2.17 −1.31  . . F 1.30 7.38 Lys 46 . A . . T . . 2.98 −1.41  . *F 1.30 5.71 Asn 47 . A . . . . C 2.43 −1.81  . * F 1.33 4.77 Asp 48 . .. . . T C 2.12 −1.17  . . F 1.96 2.05 Ser 49 . . . . . T C 2.08 −1.09 . * F 2.19 1.48 Asp 50 . . . . . T C 1.22 −1.09  * . F 2.42 1.59 Val 51. . B . . T . 0.58 −0.84  * . F 2.30 0.71 Thr 52 . A B . . . . 0.29−0.23  . . F 1.37 0.52 Glu 53 . A B . . . . 0.29 0.30 . . . 0.39 0.33Val 54 . A B . . . . 0.38 0.70 * . . −0.14  0.77 Met 55 . A B . . . .−0.21  0.49 * . . −0.37  0.82 Trp 56 . A B . . . . −0.17  0.50 * * .−0.60  0.48 Gln 57 . A B . . . . 0.26 1.19 * * . −0.60  0.53 Pro 58 . AB . . . . 0.37 0.54 * * . −0.45  1.05 Ala 59 . A . . . . C 0.88−0.07  * * . 0.99 1.96 Leu 60 . A B . . . . 1.59 −0.56  * * F 1.58 1.12Arg 61 . A . . T . . 1.53 −0.96  * . F 2.32 1.42 Arg 62 . . . . T . .0.72 −0.96  * . F 2.86 1.39 Gly 63 . . . . T T . 0.93 −0.77  * . F 3.401.39 Arg 64 . . . . T T . 0.93 −1.06  * . F 3.06 1.23 Gly 65 . . B . . T. 1.74 −0.56  * . F 2.17 0.63 Leu 66 . . B . . T . 1.29 −0.16  * . .1.53 1.11 Gln 67 . . B . . . . 0.93 −0.16  . * . 0.84 0.56 Ala 68 . . B. . T . 0.93 0.60 * . . −0.20  0.89 Gln 69 . . B . . T . −0.03  0.60 * .. −0.05  1.07 Gly 70 . . B . . T . 0.42 0.56 * * . −0.20  0.46 Tyr 71 .. B . . T . 0.34 0.16 . * . 0.10 0.89 Gly 72 . . B B . . . 0.34 0.34 * *. −0.30  0.36 Val 73 . . B B . . . 0.93 0.34 * * . −0.30  0.63 Arg 74 .. B B . . . 0.34 −0.09  * * . 0.30 0.67 Ile 75 . . B B . . . 0.34−0.34  * * . 0.30 0.68 Gln 76 . . B B . . . −0.27  −0.34  * * F 0.450.91 Asp 77 . . B . . T . −0.17  −0.34  * * F 0.85 0.34 Ala 78 . . B . .T . −0.12  0.41 * * . −0.20  0.77 Gly 79 . . B . . T . −1.04  0.41 * * .−0.20  0.37 Val 80 . . B . . T . −0.40  0.70 * . . −0.20  0.18 Tyr 81 .. B B . . . −0.70  1.46 . . . −0.60  0.28 Leu 82 . . B B . . . −0.70 1.34 . * . −0.60  0.38 Leu 83 . . B B . . . −0.97  1.31 . . . −0.60 0.89 Tyr 84 . . B B . . . −1.43  1.31 . . . −0.60  0.42 Ser 85 . . B B .. . −1.28  1.24 . * . −0.60  0.42 Gln 86 . . B B . . . −1.03  1.34 . . .−0.60  0.44 Val 87 . . B B . . . −0.22  1.06 . . . −0.60  0.49 Leu 88 .. B B . . . −0.27  0.30 . . . −0.30  0.61 Phe 89 . . B B . . . −0.33 0.56 . . . −0.60  0.26 Gln 90 . . B B . . . −0.73  0.64 . . . −0.60 0.51 Asp 91 . . B B . . . −1.04  0.79 . * . −0.60  0.53 Val 92 . . B B .. . −0.79  0.59 . . . −0.60  0.89 Thr 93 . . B B . . . −0.32  0.41 * . .−0.60  0.51 Phe 94 . . B B . . . 0.38 0.44 * . . −0.60  0.30 Thr 95 . .B B . . . −0.48  0.84 * . . −0.60  0.70 Met 96 . . B B . . . −1.33 0.84 * * . −0.60  0.36 Gly 97 . . B B . . . −0.78  1.00 * * . −0.60 0.31 Gln 98 . . B B . . . −0.36  0.60 * . . −0.60  0.29 Val 99 . . B B .. . 0.34 0.11 * . . −0.30  0.57 Val 100 . . B B . . . 0.31 −0.50  * . .0.64 0.99 Ser 101 . . B . . . . 0.91 −0.50  * . F 1.33 0.57 Arg 102 . .B . . . . 0.91 −0.50  . * F 1.82 1.33 Glu 103 . . . . T . . 1.02 −0.71 . * F 2.86 1.77 Gly 104 . . . . T T . 1.88 −1.36  . * F 3.40 2.58 Gln105 . . . . . T C 2.73 −1.34  . * F 2.86 2.28 Gly 106 . . . . . T C 2.72−1.34  . . F 2.52 2.28 Arg 107 . . . . T T . 1.80 −0.86  . * F 2.38 3.33Gln 108 . . B B . . . 1.10 −0.60  * * F 1.24 1.59 Glu 109 . . B B . . .1.56 −0.21  . * F 0.60 1.39 Thr 110 . . B B . . . 0.89 −0.64  * * F 0.901.39 Leu 111 . . B B . . . 0.34 −0.07  * * . 0.30 0.43 Phe 112 . . B B .. . 0.34 0.21 * * . −0.30  0.17 Arg 113 . . B B . . . 0.04 0.21 * . .−0.30  0.24 Cys 114 . . B B . . . −0.56  0.11 * . . −0.30  0.38 Ile 115. . . B T . . −0.46  0.04 * . . 0.10 0.44 Arg 116 . . . B T . . 0.06−0.31  * . . 0.70 0.35 Ser 117 . . . B T . . 0.72 0.07 * . . 0.10 0.86Met 118 . . . . . . C 0.40 −0.00  * . F 1.34 1.68 Pro 119 . . . . T . .1.07 −0.26  * * F 1.88 1.33 Ser 120 . . . . . . C 2.07 −0.26  * * F 2.021.65 His 121 . . . . . T C 1.37 −0.64  * . F 2.86 3.27 Pro 122 . . . . TT . 1.42 −0.76  * . F 3.40 2.14 Asp 123 . . . . T T . 2.02 −0.43  * . F2.76 2.50 Arg 124 . . . . T T . 1.93 −0.41  * . F 2.42 2.95 Ala 125 . .. . T . . 1.57 −0.53  * . . 2.03 2.56 Tyr 126 . . B . . . . 1.36−0.39  * . . 0.84 0.82 Asn 127 . . B . . T . 1.27 0.37 * . . 0.10 0.66Ser 128 . . B . . T . 0.68 0.76 * . . −0.20  0.87 Cys 129 . . B . . T .0.22 0.76 * * . −0.20  0.56 Tyr 130 . . . . T T . −0.04  0.43 . . . 0.200.35 Ser 131 . . . . T . . −0.50  0.67 . . . 0.00 0.19 Ala 132 . . B . .. . −0.53  1.07 . . . −0.40  0.31 Gly 133 . . B . . . . −1.04  1.00 . .. −0.40  0.27 Val 134 . A B . . . . −0.41  0.93 . . . −0.60  0.17 Phe135 . A B . . . . −0.17  1.04 . . . −0.60  0.22 His 136 . A B . . . .−0.21  0.94 . . . −0.60  0.39 Leu 137 . A B . . . . 0.38 0.94 . . .−0.60  0.52 His 138 . . B . . T . −0.17  0.30 . . . 0.25 1.00 Gln 139 .. . . T T . −0.12  0.20 . . F 0.65 0.52 Gly 140 . . . . T T . 0.28 0.39. . F 0.65 0.52 Asp 141 . . . . T T . −0.54  0.09 . . F 0.65 0.51 Ile142 . . B B . . . −0.62  0.23 . . . −0.30  0.22 Leu 143 . . B B . . .−1.48  0.51 . . . −0.60  0.15 Ser 144 . . B B . . . −1.69  0.77 * . .−0.60  0.06 Val 145 . . B B . . . −1.23  1.20 * . . −0.60  0.14 Ile 146. . B B . . . −1.82  0.51 * * . −0.60  0.34 Ile 147 . . B B . . . −0.82 0.33 * * . −0.30  0.26 Pro 148 . . B B . . . −0.60  −0.06  . * . 0.300.68 Arg 149 . A B . . . . −0.26  −0.20  . * . 0.30 0.97 Ala 150 . A B .. . . −0.21  −0.89  . * F 0.90 2.78 Arg 151 . A B . . . . 0.68 −0.89 . * F 0.90 1.48 Ala 152 . A B . . . . 0.76 −0.91  . * F 0.90 1.22 Lys153 . A . . T . . 0.67 −0.23  . * . 0.70 0.99 Leu 154 . A B . . . . 0.34−0.34  . * . 0.30 0.68 Asn 155 . A B . . . . 0.90 0.09 . * . −0.15 1.04Leu 156 . A B . . . . 0.44 0.09 . * . −0.30 0.71 Ser 157 . . . . . T C0.72 0.51 . * F 0.15 0.85 Pro 158 . . . . . T C −0.02  0.31 . * F 0.450.76 His 159 . . . . T T . −0.02  0.70 . * F 0.35 0.80 Gly 160 . . B . .T . −0.37  0.70 . * F −0.05  0.49 Thr 161 . . B B . . . −0.26  0.74 . .. −0.60  0.31 Phe 162 . . B B . . . −0.81  1.10 . . . −0.60  0.20 Leu163 . . B B . . . −0.56  1.24 . * . −0.60  0.15 Gly 164 . . B B . . .−1.33  0.81 . * . −0.60  0.21 Phe 165 . . B B . . . −1.38  1.01 . * .−0.60  0.20 Val 166 . . B B . . . −1.46  0.66 . * . −0.60  0.31 Lys 167. . B B . . . −1.14  0.40 . * . −0.30  0.40 Leu 168 . . B B . . . −0.72 0.40 . . . −0.30  0.59 Ter 169 . . B B . . . −0.77  0.04 . * . −0.15 1.01

Among the especially preferred fragments of the invention are fragmentscharacterized by structural or functional attributes of TNF delta and/orTNF epsilon. Such fragments include amino acid residues that comprisealpha-helix and alpha-helix forming regions (“alpha-regions”),beta-sheet and beta-sheet-forming regions (“beta-regions”), turn andturn-forming regions (“turn-regions”), coil and coil-forming regions(“coil-regions”), hydrophilic regions, hydrophobic regions, alphaamphipathic regions, beta amphipathic regions, surface forming regions,and high antigenic index regions (i.e., containing four or morecontiguous amino acids having an antigenic index of greater than orequal to 1.5, as identified using the default parameters of theJameson-Wolf program) of complete (i.e., full-length) TNF delta (SEQ IDNO:2) and/or TNF epsilon (SEQ ID NO:4). Certain preferred regions arethose set out in FIGS. 4 and 5 and include, but are not limited to,regions of the aforementioned types identified by analysis of the aminoacid sequence depicted in FIGS. 1A and 1B (SEQ ID NO:2), 2A and 2B (SEQID NO:4), 6A and 6B (SEQ ID NO: 11) and 7A and 7B (SEQ ID NO: 13), suchpreferred regions include; Garnier-Robson predicted alpha-regions,beta-regions, turn-regions, and coil-regions; Chou-Fasman predictedalpha-regions, beta-regions, turn-regions, and coil-regions;Kyte-Doolittle predicted hydrophilic and hydrophobic regions; Eisenbergalpha and beta amphipathic regions; Emini surface-forming regions; andJameson-Wolf high antigenic index regions, as predicted using thedefault parameters of these computer programs. Polynucleotides encodingthese polypeptides are also encompassed by the invention.

Among highly preferred fragments in this regard are those that compriseregions of TNF delta and/or TNF epsilon that combine several structuralfeatures, such as several of the features set out above.

In specific embodiments, the polynucleotides of the invention are lessthan 100000 kb, 50000 kb, 10000 kb, 1000 kb, 500 kb, 400 kb, 350 kb, 300kb, 250 kb, 200 kb, 175 kb, 150 kb, 125 kb, 100 kb, 75 kb, 50 kb, 40 kb,30 kb, 25 kb, 20 kb, 15 kb, 10 kb, 7.5 kb, or 5 kb in length.

In further embodiments, polynucleotides of the invention comprise atleast 15, at least 30, at least 50, at least 100, or at least 250, atleast 500, or at least 1000 contiguous nucleotides of TNF delta or TNFepsilon coding sequence, but consist of less than or equal to 1000 kb,500 kb, 250 kb, 200 kb, 150 kb, 100 kb, 75 kb, 50 kb, 30 kb, 25 kb, 20kb, 15 kb, 10 kb, or 5 kb of genomic DNA that flanks the 5′ or 3′ codingnucleotide set forth in FIGS. 1A and 1B (SEQ ID NO:1), FIGS. 2A and 2B(SEQ ID NO:4), 6A and 6B (SEQ ID NO:11), and/or 7A and 7B (SEQ ID NO:13), respectively. In further embodiments, polynucleotides of theinvention comprise at least 15, at least 30, at least 50, at least 100,or at least 250, at least 500, or at least 1000 contiguous nucleotidesof TNF delta or TNF epsilon coding sequence, but do not comprise all ora portion of any TNF delta or TNF epsilon intron. In another embodiment,the nucleic acid comprising TNF delta or TNF epsilon coding sequencedoes not contain coding sequences of a genomic flanking gene (i.e., 5′or 3′ to the TNF delta or TNF epsilon gene in the genome). In otherembodiments, the polynucleotides of the invention do not contain thecoding sequence of more than 1000, 500, 250, 100, 50, 25, 20, 15, 10, 5,4, 3, 2, or 1 genomic flanking gene(s).

Further preferred regions are those that mediate activities of TNF deltaand TNF epsilon. Most highly preferred in this regard are fragments thathave a chemical, biological or other activity of TNF delta and TNFepsilon, including those with a similar activity or an improvedactivity, or with a decreased undesirable activity. Highly preferred inthis regard are fragments that contain regions that are homologs insequence, or in position, or in both sequence and to active regions ofrelated polypeptides, such as the related polypeptides set out in FIG.3, including human TNF-alpha and beta. Among particularly preferredfragments in these regards are truncation mutants, as discussed above.

It will be appreciated that the invention also relates to, among others,polynucleotides encoding the aforementioned fragments, polynucleotidesthat hybridize to polynucleotides encoding the fragments, particularlythose that hybridize under stringent conditions, and polynucleotides,such as PCR primers, for amplifying polynucleotides that encode thefragments. In these regards, preferred polynucleotides are those thatcorrespond to the preferred fragments, as discussed above.

The present invention also relates to vectors which includepolynucleotides of the present invention, host cells which aregenetically engineered with vectors of the invention and the productionof polypeptides of the invention by recombinant techniques.

Host cells can be genetically engineered to incorporate polynucleotidesand express polypeptides of the present invention. For instance,polynucleotides may be introduced into host cells using well knowntechniques of infection, transduction, transfection, transvection andtransformation. The polynucleotides may be introduced alone or withother polynucleotides. Such other polynucleotides may be introducedindependently, co-introduced or introduced joined to the polynucleotidesof the invention. Thus, for instance, polynucleotides of the inventionmay be transfected into host cells with another, separate,polynucleotide encoding a selectable marker, using standard techniquesfor co-transfection and selection in, for instance, mammalian cells. Inthis case the polynucleotides generally will be stably incorporated intothe host cell genome.

Alternatively, the polynucleotides may be joined to a vector containinga selectable marker for propagation in a host. The vector construct maybe introduced into host cells by the aforementioned techniques.Generally, a plasmid vector is introduced as DNA in a precipitate, suchas a calcium phosphate precipitate, or in a complex with a chargedlipid. Electroporation also may be used to introduce polynucleotidesinto a host. If the vector is a virus, it may be packaged in vitro orintroduced into a packaging cell and the packaged virus may betransduced into cells. A wide variety of techniques suitable for makingpolynucleotides and for introducing polynucleotides into cells inaccordance with this aspect of the invention are well known and routineto those of skill in the art. Such techniques are reviewed at length inSambrook et al. cited above, which is illustrative of the manylaboratory manuals that detail these techniques. In accordance with thisaspect of the invention the vector may be, for example, a plasmidvector, a single or double-stranded phage vector, a single ordouble-stranded RNA or DNA viral vector. Such vectors may be introducedinto cells as polynucleotides, preferably DNA, by well known techniquesfor introducing DNA and RNA into cells. The vectors, in the case ofphage and viral vectors also may be and preferably are introduced intocells as packaged or encapsidated virus by well known techniques forinfection and transduction. Viral vectors may be replication competentor replication defective. In the latter case viral propagation generallywill occur only in complementing host cells.

Preferred among vectors, in certain respects, are those for expressionof polynucleotides and polypeptides of the present invention. Generally,such vectors comprise cis-acting control regions effective forexpression in a host operatively linked to the polynucleotide to beexpressed. Appropriate trans-acting factors either are supplied by thehost, supplied by a complementing vector or supplied by the vectoritself upon introduction into the host.

In certain preferred embodiments in this regard, the vectors provide forspecific expression. Such specific expression may be inducibleexpression or expression only in certain types of cells or bothinducible and cell-specific. Particularly preferred among induciblevectors are vectors that can be induced for expression by environmentalfactors that are easy to manipulate, such as temperature and nutrientadditives. A variety of vectors suitable to this aspect of theinvention, including constitutive and inducible expression vectors foruse in prokaryotic and eukaryotic hosts, are well known and employedroutinely by those of skill in the art.

The engineered host cells can be cultured in conventional nutrientmedia, which may be modified as appropriate for, inter alia, activatingpromoters, selecting transformants or amplifying genes. Cultureconditions, such as temperature, pH and the like, previously used withthe host cell selected for expression generally will be suitable forexpression of polypeptides of the present invention as will be apparentto those of skill in the art.

A great variety of expression vectors can be used to express apolypeptide of the invention. Such vectors include chromosomal, episomaland virus-derived vectors e.g., vectors derived from bacterial plasmids,from bacteriophage, from yeast episomes, from yeast chromosomalelements, from viruses such as baculoviruses, papova viruses, such asSV40, vaccinia viruses, adenoviruses, fowl pox viruses, pseudorabiesviruses and retroviruses, and vectors derived from combinations thereof,such as those derived from plasmid and bacteriophage genetic elements,such as cosmids and phagemids, all may be used for expression inaccordance with this aspect of the present invention. Generally, anyvector suitable to maintain, propagate or express polynucleotides toexpress a polypeptide in a host may be used for expression in thisregard.

The appropriate DNA sequence may be inserted into the vector by any of avariety of well-known and routine techniques. In general, a DNA sequencefor expression is joined to an expression vector by cleaving the DNAsequence and the expression vector with one or more restrictionendonucleases and then joining the restriction fragments together usingT4 DNA ligase. Procedures for restriction and ligation that can be usedto this end are well known and routine to those of skill. Suitableprocedures in this regard, and for constructing expression vectors usingalternative techniques, which also are well known and routine to thoseskill, are set forth in great detail in Sambrook et al. cited elsewhereherein.

The DNA sequence in the expression vector is operatively linked toappropriate expression control sequence(s), including, for instance, apromoter to direct mRNA transcription. Representatives of such promotersinclude the phage lambda PL promoter, the E. coli lac, trp and tacpromoters, the SV40 early and late promoters and promoters of retroviralLTRs, to name just a few of the well-known promoters. It will beunderstood that numerous promoters not mentioned are suitable for use inthis aspect of the invention are well known and readily may be employedby those of skill in the manner illustrated by the discussion and theexamples herein.

In general, expression constructs will contain sites for transcriptioninitiation and termination, and, in the transcribed region, a ribosomebinding site for translation. The coding portion of the maturetranscripts expressed by the constructs will include a translationinitiating AUG at the beginning and a termination codon appropriatelypositioned at the end of the polypeptide to be translated.

In addition, the constructs may contain control regions that regulate aswell as engender expression. Generally, in accordance with many commonlypracticed procedures, such regions will operate by controllingtranscription, such as repressor binding sites and enhancers, amongothers.

Vectors for propagation and expression generally will include selectablemarkers. Such markers also may be suitable for amplification or thevectors may contain additional markers for this purpose. In this regard,the expression vectors preferably contain one or more selectable markergenes to provide a phenotypic trait for selection of transformed hostcells. Preferred markers include dihydrofolate reductase or neomycinresistance for eukaryotic cell culture, and tetracycline or ampicillinresistance genes for culturing E. coli and other bacteria.

The vector containing the appropriate DNA sequence as describedelsewhere herein, as well as an appropriate promoter, and otherappropriate control sequences, may be introduced into an appropriatehost using a variety of well known techniques suitable to expressiontherein of a desired polypeptide. Representative examples of appropriatehosts include bacterial cells, such as E. coli, Streptomyces andSalmonella typhimurium cells; fungal cells, such as yeast cells; insectcells such as Drosophila S2 and Spodoptera Sf9 cells; animal cells suchas CHO, COS and Bowes melanoma cells; and plant cells. Hosts for of agreat variety of expression constructs are well known, and those ofskill will be enabled by the present disclosure readily to select a hostfor expressing a polypeptides in accordance with this aspect of thepresent invention.

More particularly, the present invention also includes recombinantconstructs, such as expression constructs, comprising one or more of thesequences described above. The constructs comprise a vector, such as aplasmid or viral vector, into which such a sequence of the invention hasbeen inserted. The sequence may be inserted in a forward or reverseorientation. In certain preferred embodiments in this regard, theconstruct further comprises regulatory sequences, including, forexample, a promoter, operably linked to the sequence. Large numbers ofsuitable vectors and promoters are known to those of skill in the art,and there are many commercially available vectors suitable for use inthe present invention.

The following vectors, which are commercially available, are provided byway of example. Among vectors preferred for use in bacteria are pQE70,pQE60 and pQE-9, available from Qiagen; pBS vectors, Phagescriptvectors, Bluescript vectors, pNH8A, pNH16a, pNH18A, pNH46A, availablefrom Stratagene; and ptrc99a, pKK223-3, pKK233-3, pDR540, pRIT5available from Pharmacia. Among preferred eukaryotic vectors are pWLNEO,pSV2CAT, pOG44, pXT1 and pSG available from Stratagene; and pSVK3, pBPV,pMSG and pSVL available from Pharmacia. These vectors are listed solelyby way of illustration of the many commercially available and well knownvectors that are available to those of skill in the art for use inaccordance with this aspect of the present invention. It will beappreciated that any other plasmid or vector suitable for, for example,introduction, maintenance, propagation or expression of a polynucleotideor polypeptide of the invention in a host may be used in this aspect ofthe invention.

In addition to encompassing host cells containing the vector constructsdiscussed herein, the invention also encompasses primary, secondary, andimmortalized host cells of vertebrate origin, particularly mammalianorigin, that have been engineered to delete or replace endogenousgenetic material (e.g., TNF-delta and/or TNF-epsilon coding sequence),and/or to include genetic material (e.g., heterologous polynucleotidesequences) that is operably associated with TNF-delta and/or TNF-epsilonpolynucleotides of the invention, and which activates, alters, and/oramplifies endogenous TNF-delta and/or TNF-epsilon polynucleotides. Forexample, techniques known in the art may be used to operably associateheterologous control regions (e.g., promoter and/or enhancer) andendogenous TNF-delta and/or TNF-epsilon polynucleotide sequences viahomologous recombination (see, e.g., U.S. Pat. No. 5,641,670, issuedJun. 24, 1997; International Publication Number WO 96/29411, publishedSep. 26, 1996; International Publication Number WO 94/12650, publishedAug. 4, 1994; Koller, et al., Proc. Natl. Acad. Sci. USA 86:8932-35(1989); and Zijlstra, et al., Nature 342:435-38 (1989), the disclosuresof each of which are incorporated by reference in their entireties).

Promoter regions can be selected from any desired gene using vectorsthat contain a reporter transcription unit lacking a promoter region,such as a chloramphenicol acetyl transferase (“cat”) transcription unit,downstream of restriction site or sites for introducing a candidatepromoter fragment; i.e., a fragment that may contain a promoter. As iswell known, introduction into the vector of a promoter-containingfragment at the restriction site upstream of the cat gene engendersproduction of CAT activity, which can be detected by standard CATassays. Vectors suitable to this end are well known and readilyavailable. Two such vectors are pKK232-8 and pCM7. Thus, promoters forexpression of polynucleotides of the present invention include not onlywell known and readily available promoters, but also promoters thatreadily may be obtained by the foregoing technique, using a reportergene.

Among known bacterial promoters suitable for expression ofpolynucleotides and polypeptides in accordance with the presentinvention are the E. coli lacI and lacZ and promoters, the T3 and T7promoters, the gpt promoter, the lambda PR, PL promoters and the trppromoter. Among known eukaryotic promoters suitable in this regard arethe CMV immediate early promoter, the HSV thymidine kinase promoter, theearly and late SV40 promoters, the promoters of retroviral LTRs, such asthose of the Rous sarcoma virus (“RSV”), and metallothionein promoters,such as the mouse metallothionein-I promoter. Selection of appropriatevectors and promoters for expression in a host cell is a well knownprocedure and the requisite techniques for expression vectorconstruction, introduction of the vector into the host and expression inthe host are routine skills in the art.

In one embodiment, polynucleotides encoding TNF-delta and/or TNF-epsilonpolypeptides of the invention may be fused to signal sequences whichwill direct the localization of a protein of the invention to particularcompartments of a prokaryotic or eukaryotic cell and/or direct thesecretion of a protein of the invention from a prokaryotic or eukaryoticcell. For example, in E. coli, one may wish to direct the expression ofthe protein to the periplasmic space. Examples of signal sequences orproteins (or fragments thereof) to which the polypeptides of theinvention may be fused in order to direct the expression of thepolypeptide to the periplasmic space of bacteria include, but are notlimited to, the pelB signal sequence, the maltose binding protein (MBP)signal sequence, MBP, the ompA signal sequence, the signal sequence ofthe periplasmic E. coli heat-labile enterotoxin B-subunit, and thesignal sequence of alkaline phosphatase. Several vectors arecommercially available for the construction of fusion proteins whichwill direct the localization of a protein, such as the pMAL series ofvectors (particularly the pMAL-p series) available from New EnglandBiolabs. In a specific embodiment,, polynucleotides encoding TNF deltaor TNF epsilon polypeptides of the invention may be fused to the pelBpectate lyase signal sequence to increase the efficiency of expressionand purification of such polypeptides in Gram-negative bacteria. See,U.S. Pat. Nos. 5,576,195 and 5,846,818, the contents of which are hereinincorporated by reference in their entireties.

Examples of signal peptides that may be fused to a polypeptide of theinvention in order to direct its secretion in mammalian cells include,but are not limited to, the MPIF-1 signal sequence (amino acids 1-21 ofGenBank Accession number AAB51134), the stanniocalcin signal sequence(MLQNSAVLLLLVISASA, SEQ ID NO:23), and a consensus signal sequence(MPTWAWWLFLVLLLALWAPARG, SEQ ID NO:24). A suitable signal sequence thatmay be used in conjunction with baculoviral expression systems is thegp67 signal sequence, (amino acids 1-19 of GenBank Accession NumberAAA72759).

The present invention also relates to host cells containing theabove-described constructs discussed above. The host cell can be ahigher eukaryotic cell, such as a mammalian cell, or a lower eukaryoticcell, such as a yeast cell, or the host cell can be a prokaryotic cell,such as a bacterial cell.

Introduction of the construct into the host cell can be effected bycalcium phosphate transfection, DEAE-dextran mediated transfection,cationic lipid-mediated transfection, electroporation, transduction,infection or other methods. Such methods are described in many standardlaboratory manuals, such as Davis et al. Basic Methods in MolecularBiology, (1986). Constructs in host cells can be used in a conventionalmanner to produce the gene product encoded by the recombinant sequence.Alternatively, the polypeptides of the invention can be syntheticallyproduced by conventional peptide synthesizers.

Mature proteins can be expressed in mammalian cells, yeast, bacteria, orother cells under the control of appropriate promoters. Cell-freetranslation systems can also be employed to produce such proteins usingRNAs derived from the DNA constructs of the present invention.Appropriate cloning and expression vectors for use with prokaryotic andeukaryotic hosts are described by Sambrook et al., Molecular Cloning: ALaboratory Manual, 2nd Ed., Cold Spring Harbor Laboratory Press, ColdSpring Harbor, N.Y. (1989).

Generally, recombinant expression vectors will include origins ofreplication, a promoter derived from a highly-expressed gene to directtranscription of a downstream structural sequence, and a selectablemarker to permit isolation of vector containing cells after exposure tothe vector. Among suitable promoters are those derived from the genesthat encode glycolytic enzymes such as 3-phosphoglycerate kinase(“PGK”), a-factor, acid phosphatase, and heat shock proteins, amongothers. Selectable markers include the ampicillin resistance gene of E.coli and the trp1 gene of S. cerevisiae.

Transcription of the DNA encoding the polypeptides of the presentinvention by higher eukaryotes may be increased by inserting an enhancersequence into the vector. Enhancers are cis-acting elements of DNA,usually about from 10 to 300 bp that act to increase transcriptionalactivity of a promoter in a given host cell-type. Examples of enhancersinclude the SV40 enhancer, which is located on the late side of thereplication origin at bp 100 to 270, the cytomegalovirus early promoterenhancer, the polyoma enhancer on the late side of the replicationorigin, and adenovirus enhancers.

Polynucleotides of the invention, encoding the heterologous structuralsequence of a polypeptide of the invention generally will be insertedinto the vector using standard techniques so that it is operably linkedto the promoter for expression. The polynucleotide will be positioned sothat the transcription start site is located appropriately 5′ to aribosome binding site. The ribosome binding site will be 5′ to the AUGthat initiates translation of the polypeptide to be expressed.Generally, there will be no other open reading frames that begin with aninitiation codon, usually AUG, and lie between the ribosome binding siteand the initiating AUG. Also, generally, there will be a translationstop codon at the end of the polypeptide and there will be apolyadenylation signal and a transcription termination signalappropriately disposed at the 3′ end of the transcribed region.

For secretion of the translated protein into the lumen of theendoplasmic reticulum, into the periplasmic space or into theextracellular environment, appropriate secretion signals may beincorporated into the expressed polypeptide. The signals may beendogenous to the polypeptide or they may be heterologous signals.

The polypeptide may be expressed in a modified form, such as a fusionprotein, and may include not only secretion signals but also additionalheterologous functional regions. Thus, for instance, a region ofadditional amino acids, particularly charged amino acids, may be addedto the N-terminus of the polypeptide to improve stability andpersistence in the host cell, during purification or during subsequenthandling and storage. Also, region also may be added to the polypeptideto facilitate purification. Such regions may be removed prior to finalpreparation of the polypeptide. The addition of peptide moieties topolypeptides to engender secretion or excretion, to improve stabilityand to facilitate purification, among others, are familiar and routinetechniques in the art.

Suitable prokaryotic hosts for propagation, maintenance or expression ofpolynucleotides and polypeptides in accordance with the inventioninclude Escherichia coli, Bacillus subtilis and Salmonella typhimurium.Various species of Pseudomonas, Streptomyces, and Staphylococcus aresuitable hosts in this regard. Moreover, many other hosts also known tothose of skill may be employed in this regard.

As a representative but non-limiting example, useful expression vectorsfor bacterial use can comprise a selectable marker and bacterial originof replication derived from commercially available plasmids comprisinggenetic elements of the well known cloning vector pBR322 (ATCC 37017).Such commercial vectors include, for example, pKK223-3 (Pharmacia FineChemicals, Uppsala, Sweden) and GEM1 (Promega Biotec, Madison, Wis.,USA). These pBR322 “backbone” sections are combined with an appropriatepromoter and the structural sequence to be expressed.

Following transformation of a suitable host strain and growth of thehost strain to an appropriate cell density, where the selected promoteris inducible it is induced by appropriate means (e.g., temperature shiftor exposure to chemical inducer) and cells are cultured for anadditional period. Cells typically then are harvested by centrifugation,disrupted by physical or chemical means, and the resulting crude extractretained for further purification. Microbial cells employed inexpression of proteins can be disrupted by any convenient method,including freeze-thaw cycling, sonication, mechanical disruption, or useof cell lysing agents, such methods are well know to those skilled inthe art.

Various mammalian cell culture systems can be employed for expression,as well. Examples of mammalian expression systems include the COS-7lines of monkey kidney fibroblast, described in Gluzman et al., Cell,23:175 (1981). Other cell lines capable of expressing a compatiblevector include for example, the C127, 3T3, CHO, HeLa, human kidney 293and BHK cell lines.

Mammalian expression vectors will comprise an origin of replication, asuitable promoter and enhancer, and also any necessary ribosome bindingsites, polyadenylation sites, splice donor and acceptor sites,transcriptional termination sequences, and 5′ flanking non-transcribedsequences that are necessary for expression. In certain preferredembodiments in this regard DNA sequences derived from the SV40 splicesites, and the SV40 polyadenylation sites are used for requirednon-transcribed genetic elements of these types.

The polypeptides of the present invention can be recovered and purifiedfrom recombinant cell cultures by well-known methods including ammoniumsulfate or ethanol precipitation, acid extraction, anion or cationexchange chromatography, phosphocellulose chromatography, hydrophobicinteraction chromatography, affinity chromatography, hydroxylapatitechromatography and lectin chromatography. Most preferably, highperformance liquid chromatography (“HPLC”) is employed for purification.Well known techniques for refolding protein may be employed toregenerate active conformation when the polypeptide is denatured duringisolation and or purification.

Polypeptides of the present invention include naturally purifiedproducts, products of chemical synthetic procedures, and productsproduced by recombinant techniques from a prokaryotic or eukaryotichost, including, for example, bacterial, yeast, higher plant, insect andmammalian cells. Depending upon the host employed in a recombinantproduction procedure, the polypeptides of the present invention may beglycosylated or may be non-glycosylated. In addition, polypeptides ofthe invention may also include an initial modified methionine residue,in some cases as a result of host-mediated processes.

As mentioned above, even if deletion of one or more amino acids from theN-terminus of a protein results in modification of loss of one or morebiological functions of the protein, other functional activities (e.g.,biological activities, ability to multimerize, ability to bind TNF deltaligand (e.g., TACI and/or BCMA and/or TR11, and/or TR11SV1, and/or TR11SV2)) may still be retained. For example, the ability of shortened TNFdelta muteins to induce and/or bind to antibodies which recognize thecomplete or mature forms of the polypeptides generally will be retainedwhen less than the majority of the residues of the complete or maturepolypeptide are removed from the N-terminus. Whether a particularpolypeptide lacking N-terminal residues of a complete polypeptideretains such immunologic activities can readily be determined by routinemethods described herein and otherwise known in the art. It is notunlikely that a TNF delta mutein with a large number of deletedN-terminal amino acid residues may retain some biological or immunogenicactivities. In fact, peptides composed of as few as six TNF delta aminoacid residues may often evoke an immune response.

Accordingly, the present invention further provides polypeptides havingone or more residues deleted from the amino terminus of the TNF deltaamino acid sequence shown in FIGS. 1A and 1B (i.e., SEQ ID NO:2), up tothe Leucine residue at position number 228 and polynucleotides encodingsuch polypeptides. In particular, the present invention providespolypeptides comprising the amino acid sequence of residues n¹-233 ofFIGS. 1A and 1B (SEQ ID NO:2), where n¹ is an integer from 2 to 228corresponding to the position of the amino acid residue in FIGS. 1A and1B (SEQ ID NO:2).

More in particular, the invention provides polynucleotides encodingpolypeptides comprising, or alternatively consisting of, an amino acidsequence selected from the following amino acid sequences: G-2 to L-233;G-3 to L-233; P-4 to L-233; V-5 to L-233; R-6 to L-233; E-7 to L-233;P-8 to L-233; A-9 to L-233; L-10 to L-233; S-11 to L-233; V-12 to L-233;A-13 to L-233; L-14 to L-233; W-15 to L-233; L-16 to L-233; S-17 toL-233; W-18 to L-233; G-19 to L-233; A-20 to L-233; A-21 to L-233; L-22to L-233; G-23 to L-233; A-24 to L-233; V-25 to L-233; A-26 to L-233;C-27 to L-233; A-28 to L-233; M-29 to L-233; A-30 to L-233; L-31 toL-233; L-32 to L-233; T-33 to L-233; Q-34 to L-233; Q-35 to L-233; T-36to L-233; E-37 to L-233; L-38 to L-233; Q-39 to L-233; S-40 to L-233;L-41 to L-233; R-42 to L-233; R-43 to L-233; E-44 to L-233; V-45 toL-233; S-46 to L-233; R-47 to L-233; L-48 to L-233; Q-49 to L-233; R-50to L-233; T-51 to L-233; G-52 to L-233; G-53 to L-233; P-54 to L-233;S-55 to L-233; Q-56 to L-233; N-57 to L-233; G-58 to L-233; E-59 toL-233; G-60 to L-233; Y-61 to L-233; P-62 to L-233; W-63 to L-233; Q-64to L-233; S-65 to L-233; L-66 to L-233; P-67 to L-233; E-68 to L-233;Q-69 to L-233; S-70 to L-233; S-71 to L-233; D-72 to L-233; A-73 toL-233; L-74 to L-233; E-75 to L-233; A-76 to L-233; W-77 to L-233; E-78to L-233; N-79 to L-233; G-80 to L-233; E-81 to L-233; R-82 to L-233;S-83 to L-233; R-84 to L-233; K-85 to L-233; R-86 to L-233; R-87 toL-233; A-88 to L-233; V-89 to L-233; L-90 to L-233; T-91 to L-233; Q-92to L-233; K-93 to L-233; Q-94 to L-233; K-95 to L-233; K-96 to L-233;Q-97 to L-233; H-98 to L-233; S-99 to L-233; V-100 to L-233; L-101 toL-233; H-102 to L-233; L-103 to L-233; V-104 to L-233; P-105 to L-233;I-106 to L-233; N-107 to L-233; A-108 to L-233; T-109 to L-233; S-110 toL-233; K-111 to L-233; D-112 to L-233; D-113 to L-233; S-114 to L-233;D-115 to L-233; V-116 to L-233; T-117 to L-233; E-118 to L-233; V-119 toL-233; M-120 to L-233; W-121 to L-233; Q-122 to L-233; P-123 to L-233;A-124 to L-233; L-125 to L-233; R-126 to L-233; R-127 to L-233; G-128 toL-233; R-129 to L-233; G-130 to L-233; L-131 to L-233; Q-132 to L-233;A-133 to L-233; Q-134 to L-233; G-135 to L-233; Y-136 to L-233; G-137 toL-233; V-138 to L-233; R-139 to L-233; I-140 to L-233; Q-141 to L-233;D-142 to L-233; A-143 to L-233; G-144 to L-233; V-145 to L-233; Y-146 toL-233; L-147 to L-233; L-148 to L-233; Y-149 to L-233; S-150 to L-233;Q-151 to L-233; V-152 to L-233; L-153 to L-233; F-154 to L-233; Q-155 toL-233; D-156 to L-233; V-157 to L-233; T-158 to L-233; F-159 to L-233;T-160 to L-233; M-161 to L-233; G-162 to L-233; Q-163 to L-233; V-164 toL-233; V-165 to L-233; S-166 to L-233; R-167 to L-233; E-168 to L-233;G-169 to L-233; Q-170 to L-233; G-171 to L-233; R-172 to L-233; Q-173 toL-233; E-174 to L-233; T-175 to L-233; L-176 to L-233; F-177 to L-233;R-178 to L-233; C-179 to L-233; I-180 to L-233; R-181 to L-233; S-182 toL-233; M-183 to L-233; P-184 to L-233; S-185 to L-233; H-186 to L-233;P-187 to L-233; D-188 to L-233; R-189 to L-233; A-190 to L-233; Y-191 toL-233; N-192 to L-233; S-193 to L-233; C-194 to L-233; Y-195 to L-233;S-196 to L-233; A-197 to L-233; G-198 to L-233; V-199 to L-233; F-200 toL-233; H-201 to L-233; L-202 to L-233; H-203 to L-233; Q-204 to L-233;G-205 to L-233; D-206 to L-233; I-207 to L-233; L-208 to L-233; S-209 toL-233; V-210 to L-233; I-211 to L-233; I-212 to L-233; P-213 to L-233;R-214 to L-233; A-215 to L-233; R-216 to L-233; A-217 to L-233; K-218 toL-233; L-219 to L-233; N-220 to L-233; L-221 to L-233; S-222 to L-233;P-223 to L-233; H-224 to L-233; G-225 to L-233; T-226 to L-233; F-227 toL-233; and L-228 to L-233 of the TNF delta sequence shown in FIGS. 1Aand 1B (SEQ ID NO:2). Polypeptides encoded by these polynucleotides arealso encompassed by the invention. The present application is alsodirected to nucleic acid molecules comprising, or alternatively,consisting of, a polynucleotide sequence at least 90%, 92%, 95%, 96%,97%, 98% or 99% identical to the polynucleotide sequence encoding theTNF-delta polypeptides described above. The present invention alsoencompasses the above polynucleotide sequences fused to a heterologouspolynucleotide sequence. Polypeptides encoded by these nucleic acidsand/or polynucleotide sequences are also encompassed by the invention,as are polypeptides comprising an amino acid sequence at least 90%, 92%,95%, 96%, 97%, 98% or 99% identical to the amino acid sequence describedabove, and polynucleotides that encode such polypeptides.

In another embodiment, the mature form of TNF delta comprises, oralternatively consists of Ala-88 to Leu-233 of the TNF delta sequenceshown in FIGS. 1A and 1B (SEQ ID NO:2). Polynucleotides encoding thesepolypeptides are also encompassed by the invention. The presentapplication is also directed to nucleic acid molecules comprising, oralternatively, consisting of, a polynucleotide sequence at least 90%,92%, 95%, 96%, 97%, 98% or 99% identical to the polynucleotide sequenceencoding the mature TNF-delta polypeptides described above. The presentinvention also encompasses polynucleotides encoding the abovepolypeptide sequences fused to a heterologous polynucleotide sequence.Polypeptides encoded by these nucleic acids and/or polynucleotidesequences are also encompassed by the invention, as are polypeptidescomprising an amino acid sequence at least 90%, 92%, 95%, 96%, 97%, 98%or 99% identical to the amino acid sequence described above, andpolynucleotides that encode such polypeptides.

In another embodiment, the mature form of TNF delta comprises, oralternatively consists of Ala-105 to Leu-250 of the TNF delta sequenceshown in FIGS. 6A and 6B (SEQ ID NO:11). Polynucleotides encoding thesepolypeptides are also encompassed by the invention. The presentapplication is also directed to nucleic acid molecules comprising, oralternatively, consisting of, a polynucleotide sequence at least 90%,92%, 95%, 96%, 97%, 98% or 99% identical to the polynucleotide sequenceencoding the mature TNF-delta polypeptides described above. The presentinvention also encompasses polynucleotides encoding the abovepolypeptide sequences fused to a heterologous polynucleotide sequence.Polypeptides encoded by these nucleic acids and/or polynucleotidesequences are also encompassed by the invention, as are polypeptidescomprising an amino acid sequence at least 90%, 92%, 95%, 96%, 97%, 98%or 99% identical to the amino acid sequence described above, andpolynucleotides that encode such polypeptides.

Also as mentioned above, even if deletion of one or more amino acidsfrom the C-terminus of a protein results in modification of loss of oneor more biological functions of the protein, other functional activities(e.g., biological activities, ability to multimerize, ability to bindTNF delta ligand (e.g., TACI and/or BCMA and/or TR11, and/or TR11SV1,and/or TR11SV2)) may still be retained. For example the ability of theshortened TNF delta mutein to induce and/or bind to antibodies whichrecognize the complete or mature forms of the polypeptide generally willbe retained when less than the majority of the residues of the completeor mature polypeptide are removed from the C-terminus. Whether aparticular polypeptide lacking C-terminal residues of a completepolypeptide retains such immunologic activities can readily bedetermined by routine methods described herein and otherwise known inthe art. It is not unlikely that a TNF delta mutein with a large numberof deleted C-terminal amino acid residues may retain some biological orimmunogenic activities. In fact, peptides composed of as few as six TNFdelta amino acid residues may often evoke an immune response.

Accordingly, the present invention further provides polypeptides havingone or more residues deleted from the carboxy terminus of the amino acidsequence of the TNF delta polypeptide shown in FIGS. 1A and 1B (SEQ IDNO:2), up to the arginine residue at position number 6, andpolynucleotides encoding such polypeptides. In particular, the presentinvention provides polypeptides comprising the amino acid sequence ofresidues 1-m¹ of FIGS. 1A and 1B (i.e., SEQ ID NO:2), where m¹ is aninteger from 6 to 232 corresponding to the position of the amino acidresidue in FIGS. 1A and 1B (SEQ ID NO:2).

More in particular, the invention provides polynucleotides encodingpolypeptides comprising, or alternatively consisting of, an amino acidsequence selected from the following amino acid sequences: M-1 to K-232;M-1 to V-231; M-1 to F-230; M-1 to G-229; M-1 to L-228; M-1 to F-227;M-1 to T-226; M-1 to G-225; M-1 to H-224; M-1 to P-223; M-1 to S-222;M-1 to L-221; M-1 to N-220; M-1 to L-219; M-1 to K-218; M-1 to A-2 17;M-1 to R-216; M-1 to A-215; M-1 to R-214; M-1 to P-213; M-1 to I-212;M-1 to I-211; M-1 to V-210; M-1 to S-209; M-1 to L-208; M-1 to I-207;M-1 to D-206; M-1 to G-205; M-1 to Q-204; M-1 to H-203; M-1 to L-202;M-1 to H-201; M-1 to F-200; M-1 to V-199; M-1 to G-198; M-1 to A-197;M-1 to S-196; M-1 to Y-195; M-1 to C-194; M-1 to S-193; M-1 to N-192;M-1 to Y-191; M-1 to A-190; M-1 to R-189; M-1 to D-188; M-1 to P-187;M-1 to H-186; M-1 to S-185; M-1 to P-184; M-1 to M-183; M-1 to S-182;M-1 to R-181; M-1 to I-180; M-1 to C-179; M-1 to R-178; M-1 to F-177;M-1 to L-176; M-1 to T-175; M-1 to E-174; M-1 to Q-173; M-1 to R-172;M-1 to G-171; M-1 to Q-170; M-1 to G-169; M-1 to E-168; M-1 to R-167;M-1 to S-166; M-1 to V-165; M-1 to V-164; M-1 to Q-163; M-1 to G-162;M-1 to M-161; M-1 to T-160; M-1 to F-159; M-1 to T-158; M-1 to V-157;M-1 to D-156; M-1 to Q-155; M-1 to F-154; M-1 to L-153; M-1 to V-152;M-1 to Q-151; M-1 to S-150; M-1 to Y-149; M-1 to L-148; M-1 to L-147;M-1 to Y-146; M-1 to V-145; M-1 to G-144; M-1 to A-143; M-1 to D-142;M-1 to Q-141; M-1 to I-140; M-1 to R-139; M-1 to V-138; M-1 to G-137;M-1 to Y-136; M-1 to G-135; M-1 to Q-134; M-1 to A-133; M-1 to Q-132;M-1 to L-131; M-1 to G-130; M-1 to R-129; M-1 to G-128; M-1 to R-127;M-1 to R-126; M-1 to L-125; M-1 to A-124; M-1 to P-123; M-1 to Q-122;M-1 to W-121; M-1 to M-120; M-1 to V-119; M-1 to E-118; M-1 to T-117;M-1 to V-116; M-1 to D-115; M-1 to S-114; M-1 to D-113; M-1 to D-112;M-1 to K-111; M-1 to S-110; M-1 to T-109; M-1 to A-108; M-1 to N-107;M-1 to I-106; M-1 to P-105; M-1 to V-104; M-1 to L-103; M-1 to H-102;M-1 to L-101; M-1 to V-100; M-1 to S-99; M-1 to H-98; M-1 to Q-97; M-1to K-96; M-1 to K-95; M-1 to Q-94; M-1 to K-93; M-1 to Q-92; M-1 toT-91; M-1 to L-90; M-1 to V-89; M-1 to A-88; M-1 to R-87; M-1 to R-86;M-1 to K-85; M-1 to R-84; M-1 to S-83; M-1 to R-82; M -1 to E-81; M -1to G-80; M-1 to N-79; M-1 to E-78; M-1 to W-77; M-1 to A-76; M-1 toE-75; M-1 to L-74; M-1 to A-73; M-1 to D-72; M-1 to S-71; M-1 to S-70;M-1 to Q-69; M-1 to E-68; M-1 to P-67; M-1 to L-66; M-1 to S-65; M-1 toQ-64; M-1 to W-63; M-1 to P-62; M-1 to Y-61; M-1 to G-60; M-1 to E-59;M-1 to G-58; M-1 to N-57; M-1 to Q-56; M-1 to S-55; M-1 to P-54; M-1 toG-53; M-1 to G-52; M-1 to T-51; M-1 to R-50; M-1 to Q-49; M-1 to L-48;M-1 to R-47; M-1 to S-46; M-1 to V-45; M-1 to E-44; M-1 to R-43; M-1 toR-42; M-1 to L-41; M-1 to S-40; M-1 to Q-39; M-1 to L-38; M-1 to E-37;M-1 to T-36; M-1 to Q-35; M-1 to Q-34; M-1 to T-33; M-1 to L-32; M-1 toL-31; M-1 to A-30; M-1 to M-29; M-1 to A-28; M-1 to C-27; M-1 to A-26;M-1 to V-25; M-1 to A-24; M-1 to G-23; M-1 to L-22; M-1 to A-21; M-1 toA-20; M-1 to G-19; M-1 to W-18; M-1 to S-17; M-1 to L-16; M-1 to W-15;M-1 to L-14; M-1 to A-13; M-1 to V-12; M-1 to S-11; M-1 to L-10; M-1 toA-9; M -1 to P-8; M-1 to E-7; M-I to R-6 of the sequence of the TNFdelta sequence shown in FIGS. 1A and 1B (SEQ ID NO:2). Polypeptidesencoded by these polynucleotides are also encompassed by the invention.The present application is also directed to nucleic acid moleculescomprising, or alternatively, consisting of, a polynucleotide sequenceat least 90%, 92%, 95%, 96%, 97%, 98% or 99% identical to thepolynucleotide sequence encoding the TNF-delta polypeptides describedabove. The present invention also encompasses the above polynucleotidesequences fused to a heterologous polynucleotide sequence. Polypeptidesencoded by these nucleic acids and/or polynucleotide sequences are alsoencompassed by the invention, as are polypeptides comprising an aminoacid sequence at least 90%, 92%, 95%, 96%, 97%, 98% or 99% identical tothe amino acid sequence described above, and polynucleotides that encodesuch polypeptides.

The invention also provides polypeptides having one or more amino acidsdeleted from both the amino and the carboxyl termini of a TNF deltapolypeptide, which may be described generally as having residues n-m¹ ofFIGS. 1A and 1B (i.e., SEQ ID NO:2), where n¹ and m¹ are integers asdescribed above.

Also as mentioned above, even if deletion of one or more amino acidsfrom the N-terminus of a protein results in modification of loss of oneor more biological functions of the protein, other functional activities(e.g., biological activities, ability to multimerize, ability to bindTNF epsilon ligand) may still be retained. For example, the ability ofshortened TNF epsilon muteins to induce and/or bind to antibodies whichrecognize the complete or mature forms of the polypeptides generallywill be retained when less than the majority of the residues of thecomplete or mature polypeptide are removed from the N-terminus. Whethera particular polypeptide lacking N-terminal residues of a completepolypeptide retains such immunologic activities can readily bedetermined by routine methods described herein and otherwise known inthe art. It is not unlikely that a TNF epsilon mutein with a largenumber of deleted N-terminal amino acid residues may retain somebiological or immunogenic activities. In fact, peptides composed of asfew as six TNF epsilon amino acid residues may often evoke an immuneresponse.

Accordingly, the present invention further provides polypeptides havingone or more residues deleted from the amino terminus of the TNF epsilonamino acid sequence shown in FIGS. 2A and 2B (i.e., SEQ ID NO:4), up tothe leucine residue at position number 163 and polynucleotides encodingsuch polypeptides. In particular, the present invention providespolypeptides comprising the amino acid sequence of residues n²- 168 ofFIGS. 2A and 2B (SEQ ID NO:4), where n² is an integer from 2 to 163corresponding to the position of the amino acid residue in FIGS. 2A and2B (SEQ ID NO:4).

More in particular, the invention provides polynucleotides encodingpolypeptides comprising, or alternatively consisting of, an amino acidsequence selected from the following amino acid sequences: T-2 to L-168;G-3 to L-168; G-4 to L-168; P-5 to L-168; S-6 to L-168; Q-7 to L-168;N-8 to L-168; G-9 to L-168; E-10 to L-168; G-11 to L-168; Y-12 to L-168;P-13 to L-168; W-14 to L-168; Q-15 to L-168; S-16 to L-168; L-17 toL-168; P-18 to L-168; E-19 to L-168; Q-20 to L-168; S-21 to L-168; S-22to L-168; D-23 to L-168; A-24 to L-168; L-25 to L-168; E-26 to L-168;A-27 to L-168; W-28 to L-168; E-29 to L-168; S-30 to L-168; G-31 toL-168; E-32 to L-168; R-33 to L-168; S-34 to L-168; R-35 to L-168; K-36to L-168; R-37 to L-168; R-38 to L-168; A-39 to L-168; V-40 to L-168;L-41 to L-168; T-42 to L-168; Q-43 to L-168; K-44 to L-168; Q-45 toL-168; K-46 to L-168; N-47 to L-168; D-48 to L-168; S-49 to L-168; D-50to L-168; V-51 to L-168; T-52 to L-168; E-53 to L-168; V-54 to L-168;M-55 to L-168; W-56 to L-168; Q-57 to L-168; P-58 to L-168; A-59 toL-168; L-60 to L-168; R-61 to L-168; R-62 to L-168; G-63 to L-168; R-64to L-168; G-65 to L-168; L-66 to L-168; Q-67 to L-168; A-68 to L-168;Q-69 to L-168; G-70 to L-168; Y-71 to L-168; G-72 to L-168; V-73 toL-168; R-74 to L-168; I-75 to L-168; Q- 76 to L-168; D-77 to L-168; A-78to L-168; G-79 to L-168; V-80 to L-168; Y-81 to L-168; L-82 to L-168;L-83 to L-168; Y-84 to L-168; S-85 to L-168; Q-86 to L-168; V-87 toL-168; L-88 to L-168; F-89 to L-168; Q-90 to L-168; D-91 to L-168; V-92to L-168; T-93 to L-168; F-94 to L-168; T-95 to L-168; M-96 to L-168;G-97 to L-168; Q-98 to L-168; V-99 to L-168; V-100 to L-168; S-101 toL-168; R-102 to L-168; E-103 to L-168; G-104 to L-168; Q-105 to L-168;G-106 to L-168; R-107 to L-168; Q-108 to L-168; E-109 to L-168; T-110 toL-168; L-111 to L-168; F-112 to L-168; R-113 to L-168; C-114 to L-168;I-115 to L-168; R-116 to L-168; S-117 to L-168; M-118 to L-168; P-119 toL-168; S-120 to L-168; H-121 to L-168; P-122 to L-168; D-123 to L-168;R-124 to L-168; A-125 to L-168; Y-126 to L-168; N-127 to L-168; S-128 toL-168; C-129 to L-168; Y-130 to L-168; S-131 to L-168; A-132 to L-168;G-133 to L-168; V-134 to L-168; F-135 to L-168; H-136 to L-168; L-137 toL-168; H-138 to L-168; Q-139 to L-168; G-140 to L-168; D-141 to L-168;I-142 to L-168; L-143 to L-168; S-144 to L-168; V-145 to L-168; I-146 toL-168; I-147 to L-168; P-148 to L-168; R-149 to L-168; A-150 to L-168;R-151 to L-168; A-152 to L-168; K-153 to L-168; L-154 to L-168; N-155 toL-168; L-156 to L-168; S-157 to L-168; P-158 to L-168; H-159 to L-168;G-160 to L-168; T-161 to L-168; F-162 to L-168; and L-163 to L-168 ofthe TNF epsilon sequence shown in FIGS. 2A and 2B (SEQ ID NO:4).Polypeptides encoded by these polynucleotides are also encompassed bythe invention. The present application is also directed to nucleic acidmolecules comprising, or alternatively, consisting of, a polynucleotidesequence at least 90%, 92%, 95%, 96%, 97%, 98% or 99% identical to thepolynucleotide sequence encoding the TNF-epsilon polypeptides describedabove. The present invention also encompasses the above polynucleotidesequences fused to a heterologous polynucleotide sequence. Polypeptidesencoded by these nucleic acids and/or polynucleotide sequences are alsoencompassed by the invention, as are polypeptides comprising an aminoacid sequence at least 90%, 92%, 95%, 96%, 97%, 98% or 99% identical tothe amino acid sequence described above, and polynucleotides that encodesuch polypeptides.

In one embodiment, the mature form of TNF epsilon comprises, oralternatively consists of, amino acid residues Ala-39 to Leu- 168 of theTNF epsilon sequence shown in FIGS. 2A and 2B (SEQ ID NO:4).Polynucleotides encoding these polypeptides are also encompassed by theinvention. The present application is also directed to nucleic acidmolecules comprising, or alternatively, consisting of, a polynucleotidesequence at least 90%, 92%, 95%, 96%, 97%, 98% or 99% identical to thepolynucleotide sequence encoding the mature TNF-epsilon polypeptidesdescribed above. The present invention also encompasses polynucleotidesencoding the above polypeptide sequences fused to a heterologouspolynucleotide sequence. Polypeptides encoded by these nucleic acidsand/or polynucleotide sequences are also encompassed by the invention,as are polypeptides comprising an amino acid sequence at least 90%, 92%,95%, 96%, 97%, 98% or 99% identical to the amino acid sequence describedabove, and polynucleotides that encode such polypeptides.

In another embodiment, the mature form of TNF epsilon comprises, oralternatively consists of Ala-105 to Leu-234 of the TNF epsilon sequenceshown in FIGS. 7A and 7B (SEQ ID NO:13). Polynucleotides encoding thesepolypeptides are also encompassed by the invention. The presentapplication is also directed to nucleic acid molecules comprising, oralternatively, consisting of, a polynucleotide sequence at least 90%,92%, 95%, 96%, 97%, 98% or 99% identical to the polynucleotide sequenceencoding the mature TNF-epsilon polypeptides described above. Thepresent invention also encompasses polynucleotides encoding the abovepolypeptide sequences fused to a heterologous polynucleotide sequence.Polypeptides encoded by these nucleic acids and/or polynucleotidesequences are also encompassed by the invention, as are polypeptidescomprising an amino acid sequence at least 90%, 92%, 95%, 96%, 97%, 98%or 99% identical to the amino acid sequence described above, andpolynucleotides that encode such polypeptides.

Also as mentioned above, even if deletion of one or more amino acidsfrom the C-terminus of a protein results in modification of loss of oneor more biological functions of the protein, other functional activities(e.g., biological activities, ability to multimerize, ability to bindTNF epsilon ligand) may still be retained. For example the ability ofthe shortened TNF epsilon mutein to induce and/or bind to antibodieswhich recognize the complete or mature forms of the polypeptidegenerally will be retained when less than the majority of the residuesof the complete or mature polypeptide are removed from the C-terminus.Whether a particular polypeptide lacking C-terminal residues of acomplete polypeptide retains such immunologic activities can readily bedetermined by routine methods described herein and otherwise known inthe art. It is not unlikely that a TNF epsilon mutein with a largenumber of deleted C-terminal amino acid residues may retain somebiological or immunogenic activities. In fact, peptides composed of asfew as six TNF epsilon amino acid residues may often evoke an immuneresponse.

Accordingly, the present invention further provides polypeptides havingone or more residues deleted from the carboxy terminus of the amino acidsequence of the TNF epsilon polypeptide shown in FIGS. 2A and 2B (SEQ IDNO:4), up to the serine residue at position number 6, andpolynucleotides encoding such polypeptides. In particular, the presentinvention provides polypeptides comprising the amino acid sequence ofresidues 1-m² of FIGS. 2A and 2B (i.e., SEQ ID NO:4), where m² is aninteger from 6 to 167 corresponding to the position of the amino acidresidue in FIGS. 2A and 2B (SEQ ID NO:4).

More in particular, the invention provides polynucleotides encodingpolypeptides comprising, or alternatively consisting of, an amino acidsequence selected from the following amino acid sequences: G-1 to K-167;G-1 to V-166; G-1 to F-165; G-1 to G-164; G-1 to L-163; G-1 to F-162;G-1 to T-161; G-1 to G-160; G-1 to H-159; G-1 to P-158; G-1 to S-157;G-1 to L-156; G-1 to N-155; G-1 to L-154; G-1 to K-153; G-1 to A-152;G-1 to R-151; G-1 to A-150; G-1 to R-149; G-1 to P-148; G-1 to I-147;G-1 to I-146; G-1 to V-145; G-1 to S-144; G-1 to L-143; G-1 to I-142;G-1 to D-141; G-1 to G-140; G-1 to Q-139; G-1 to H-138; G-1 to L-137;G-1 to H-136; G-1 to F-135; G-1 to V-134; G-1 to G-133; G-1 to A-132;G-1 to S-131; G-1 to Y-130; G-1 to C-129; G-1 to S-128; G-1 to N-127;G-1 to Y-126; G-1 to A-125; G-1 to R-124; G-1 to D-123; G-1 to P-122;G-1 to H-121; G-1 to S-120; G-1 to P-119; G-1 to M-118; G-1 to S-1 17;G-1 to R-116; G-1 to I-115; G-1 to C-114; G-1 to R-113; G-1 to F-112;G-1 to L-111; G-1 to T-110; G-1 to E-109; G-1 to Q-108; G-1 to R-107;G-1 to G-106; G-1 to Q-105; G-1 to G-104; G-1 to E-103; G-1 to R-102;G-1 to S-101; G-1 to V-100; G-1 to V-99; G-1 to Q-98; G-1 to G-97; G-1to M-96; G-1 to T-95; G-1 to F-94; G-1 to T-93; G-1 to V-92; G-1 toD-91; G-1 to Q-90; G-1 to F-89; G-1 to L-88; G-1 to V-87; G-1 to Q-86;G-1 to S-85; G-1 to Y-84; G-1 to L-83; G-1 to L-82; G-1 to Y-81; G-1 toV-80; G-1 to G-79; G-1 to A-78; G-1 to D-77; G-1 to Q-76; G-1 to I-75;G-1 to R-74; G-1 to V-73; G-1 to G-72; G-1 to Y-71; G-1 to G-70; G-1 toQ-69; G-1 to A-68; G-1 to Q-67; G-1 to L-66; G-1 to G-65; G-1 to R-64;G-1 to G-63; G-1 to R-62; G-1 to R-61; G-1 to L-60; G-1 to A-59; G-1 toP-58; G-1 to Q-57; G-1 to W-56; G-1 to M-55; G-1 to V-54; G-1 to E-53;G-1 to T-52; G-1 to V-51; G-1 to D-50; G-1 to S-49; G-1 to D-48; G-1 toN-47; G-1 to K-46; G-1 to Q-45; G-1 to K-44; G-1 to Q-43; G-1 to T-42;G-1 to L-41; G-1 to V-40; G-1 to A-39; G-1 to R-38; G-1 to R-37; G-1 toK-36; G-1 to R-35; G-1 to S-34; G-1 to R-33; G-1 to E-32; G-1 to G-31;G-1 to S-30; G-1 to E-29; G-1 to W-28; G-1 to A-27; G-1 to E-26; G-1 toL-25; G-1 to A-24; G-1 to D-23; G-1 to S-22; G-1 to S-21; G-1 to Q-20;G-1 to E-19; G-1 to P-18; G-1 to L-17; G-1 to S-16; G-1 to Q-15; G-1 toW-14; G-1 to P-13; G-1 to Y-12; G-1 to G-11; G-1 to E-10; G-1 to G-9;G-1 to N-8; G-1 to Q-7; and G-1 to S-6 of the sequence of the TNFepsilon sequence shown in FIGS. 2A and 2B (SEQ ID NO:4). Polypeptidesencoded by these polynucleotides are also encompassed by the invention.The present application is also directed to nucleic acid moleculescomprising, or alternatively, consisting of, a polynucleotide sequenceat least 90%, 92%, 95%, 96%, 97%, 98% or 99% identical to thepolynucleotide sequence encoding the TNF-delta polypeptides describedabove. The present invention also encompasses the above polynucleotidesequences fused to a heterologous polynucleotide sequence. Polypeptidesencoded by these nucleic acids and/or polynucleotide sequences are alsoencompassed by the invention, as are polypeptides comprising an aminoacid sequence at least 90%, 92%, 95%, 96%, 97%, 98% or 99% identical tothe amino acid sequence described above, and polynucleotides that encodesuch polypeptides.

The invention also provides polypeptides having one or more amino acidsdeleted from both the amino and the carboxyl termini of a TNF epsilonpolypeptide, which may be described generally as having residues n²-m²of FIGS. 2A and 2B (i.e., SEQ ID NO:2), where n² and m² are integers asdescribed above.

The present application is also directed to proteins cotainingpolypeptides at least 90%, 95%, 96%, 97%, 98% or 99% identical to theTNF-delta and/or TNF-epsilon polypeptide sequence set forth herein asn¹-m¹ and/or n²-m^(2.) In preferred embodiments, the application isdirected to proteins containing polypeptides at least 90%, 95%, 96%,97%, 98% or 99% identical to polypeptides having the amino acid sequenceof the specific TNF-delta and/or TNF-epsilon N- and C-terminal deletionsrecited herein. Polynucleotides encoding these polypeptides are alsoencompassed by the invention.

In certain preferred embodiments, TNF-delta and/or TNF-epsilon proteinsof the invention comprise fusion proteins as described above wherein theTNF-delta and/or TNF-epsilon polypeptides are those described as n¹-m¹and/or n²-m², herein. In preferred embodiments, the application isdirected to nucleic acid molecules at least 90%, 95%, 96%, 97%, 98% or99% identical to the nucleic acid sequences encoding polypeptides havingthe amino acid sequence of the specific N- and C-terminal deletionsrecited herein. Polynucleotides encoding these polypeptides are alsoencompassed by the invention.

TNF-delta polypeptide fragments of the present invention includepolypeptides comprising or alternatively, consisting of, an amino acidsequence contained in SEQ ID NO:2, encoded by the cDNA contained in thedeposited clone, or encoded by nucleic acids which hybridize (e.g.,under stringent hybridization conditions) to the nucleotide sequencecontained in the deposited clone, or shown in FIGS. 1A and 1B (SEQ IDNO:1) or the complementary strand thereto. TNF-epsilon polypeptidefragments of the present invention include polypeptides comprising oralternatively, consisting of, an amino acid sequence contained in SEQ IDNO:4, encoded by the cDNA contained in the deposited clone, or encodedby nucleic acids which hybridize (e.g., under stringent hybridizationconditions) to the nucleotide sequence contained in the deposited clone,or shown in FIGS. 2A and 2B (SEQ ID NO:3) or the complementary strandthereto. Protein fragments may be “free-standing,” or comprised within alarger polypeptide of which the fragment forms a part or region, mostpreferably as a single continuous region.

The present invention also encompasses polypeptides comprising, oralternatively consisting of, an epitope of the polypeptide having anamino acid sequence of SEQ ID NO:2, or an epitope of the polypeptidesequence encoded by a polynucleotide sequence contained in depositedclone, or encoded by a polynucleotide that hybridizes to the complementof the sequence of SEQ ID NO:1 or contained in the deposited clone understringent hybridization conditions or lower stringency hybridizationconditions as defined supra. The present invention further encompassespolynucleotide sequences encoding an epitope of a polypeptide sequenceof the invention (such as, for example, the sequence disclosed in SEQ IDNO: 1), polynucleotide sequences of the complementary strand of apolynucleotide sequence encoding an epitope of the invention, andpolynucleotide sequences which hybridize to the complementary strandunder stringent hybridization conditions or lower stringencyhybridization conditions defined supra.

The present invention also encompasses polypeptides comprising, oralternatively consisting of, an epitope of the polypeptide having anamino acid sequence of SEQ ID NO:4, or an epitope of the polypeptidesequence encoded by a polynucleotide sequence contained in depositedclone, or encoded by a polynucleotide that hybridizes to the complementof the sequence of SEQ ID NO:3 or contained in the deposited clone understringent hybridization conditions or lower stringency hybridizationconditions as defined supra. The present invention further encompassespolynucleotide sequences encoding an epitope of a polypeptide sequenceof the invention (such as, for example, the sequence disclosed in SEQ IDNO:3), polynucleotide sequences of the complementary strand of apolynucleotide sequence encoding an epitope of the invention, andpolynucleotide sequences which hybridize to the complementary strandunder stringent hybridization conditions or lower stringencyhybridization conditions defined supra.

The term “epitopes,” as used herein, refers to portions of a polypeptidehaving antigenic or immunogenic activity in an animal, preferably amammal, and most preferably in a human. In a preferred embodiment, thepresent invention encompasses a polypeptide comprising an epitope, aswell as the polynucleotide encoding this polypeptide. An “immunogenicepitope,” as used herein, is defined as a portion of a protein thatelicits an antibody response in an animal, as determined by any methodknown in the art, for example, by the methods for generating antibodiesdescribed infra. (See, for example, Geysen et al., Proc. Natl. Acad.Sci. USA 81:3998-4002 (1983)). The term “antigenic epitope,” as usedherein, is defined as a portion of a protein to which an antibody canimmunospecifically bind its antigen as determined by any method wellknown in the art, for example, by the immunoassays described herein.Immunospecific binding excludes non-specific binding but does notnecessarily exclude cross-reactivity with other antigens. Antigenicepitopes need not necessarily be immunogenic.

Fragments that function as epitopes may be produced by any conventionalmeans. (See, e.g., Houghten, Proc. Natl. Acad. Sci. USA 82:5131-5135(1985), further described in U.S. Pat. No. 4,631,211).

In the present invention, antigenic epitopes preferably contain asequence of at least 4, at least 5, at least 6, at least 7, morepreferably at least 8, at least 9, at least 10, at least 15, at least20, at least 25, and, most preferably, between about 15 to about 30amino acids. Preferred polypeptides comprising immunogenic or antigenicepitopes are at least 10, 15, 20, 25, 30, 35, 40, 45, 50, 55, 60, 65,70, 75, 80, 85, 90, 95, or 100 amino acid residues in length. Antigenicepitopes are useful, for example, to raise antibodies, includingmonoclonal antibodies, that specifically bind the epitope. Antigenicepitopes can be used as the target molecules in immunoassays. (See, forinstance, Wilson et al., Cell 37:767-778 (1984); Sutcliffe et al.,Science 219:660-666 (1983)).

Similarly, immunogenic epitopes can be used, for example, to induceantibodies according to methods well known in the art. (See, forinstance, Sutcliffe et al., supra; Wilson et al., supra; Chow et al.,Proc. Natl. Acad. Sci. USA 82:910-914; and Bittle et al., J. Gen. Virol.66:2347-2354 (1985). A preferred immunogenic epitope includes thesecreted protein (e.g., amino acid residues 88-233 of SEQ ID NO:2, aminoacid residues 105-250 of SEQ ID NO:11, amino acid residues 39-168 of SEQID NO:4, and/or amino acid residues 105-234 of SEQ ID NO: 13). Thepolypeptides comprising one or more immunogenic epitopes may bepresented for eliciting an antibody response together with a carrierprotein, such as an albumin, to an animal system (such as, for example,rabbit or mouse), or, if the polypeptide is of sufficient length (atleast about 25 amino acids), the polypeptide may be presented without acarrier. However, immunogenic epitopes comprising as few as 8 to 10amino acids have been shown to be sufficient to raise antibodies capableof binding to, at the very least, linear epitopes in a denaturedpolypeptide (e.g., in Western blotting).

Epitope-bearing polypeptides of the present invention may be used toinduce antibodies according to methods well known in the art including,but not limited to, in vivo immunization, in vitro immunization, andphage display methods. See, e.g., Sutcliffe et al., supra; Wilson etal., supra, and Bittle et al., J. Gen. Virol., 66:2347-2354 (1985). Ifin vivo immunization is used, animals may be immunized with freepeptide; however, anti-peptide antibody titer may be boosted by couplingthe peptide to a macromolecular carrier, such as keyhole limpethemacyanin (KLH) or tetanus toxoid. For instance, peptides containingcysteine residues may be coupled to a carrier using a linker such asmaleimidobenzoyl-N-hydroxysuccinimide ester (MBS), while other peptidesmay be coupled to carriers using a more general linking agent such asglutaraldehyde. Animals such as, for example, rabbits, rats, and miceare immunized with either free or carrier-coupled peptides, forinstance, by intraperitoneal and/or intradermal injection of emulsionscontaining about 100 micrograms of peptide or carrier protein andFreund's adjuvant or any other adjuvant known for stimulating an immuneresponse. Several booster injections may be needed, for instance, atintervals of about two weeks, to provide a useful titer of anti-peptideantibody that can be detected, for example, by ELISA assay using freepeptide adsorbed to a solid surface. The titer of anti-peptideantibodies in serum from an immunized animal may be increased byselection of anti-peptide antibodies, for instance, by adsorption to thepeptide on a solid support and elution of the selected antibodiesaccording to methods well known in the art.

As one of skill in the art will appreciate, and as discussed above, thepolypeptides of the present invention comprising an immunogenic orantigenic epitope can be fused to other polypeptide sequences. Forexample, the polypeptides of the present invention may be fused with theconstant domain of immunoglobulins (IgA, IgE, IgG, IgM), or portionsthereof (CH1, CH2, CH3, or any combination thereof and portions thereof)or albumin (including but not limited to recombinant human albumin orfragments or variants thereof (see, e.g., U.S. Pat. No. 5,876,969,issued Mar. 2, 1999, EP Patent 0 413 622, and U.S. Pat. No. 5,766,883,issued Jun. 16, 1998, herein incorporated by reference in theirentirety)), resulting in chimeric polypeptides. Such fusion proteins mayfacilitate purification and may increase half-life in vivo. This hasbeen shown for chimeric proteins consisting of the first two domains ofthe human CD4-polypeptide and various domains of the constant regions ofthe heavy or light chains of mammalian immunoglobulins. See, e.g., EP394,827; Traunecker et al., Nature, 331:84-86 (1988). IgG Fusionproteins that have a disulfide-linked dimeric structure due to the IgGportion desulfide bonds have also been found to be more efficient inbinding and neutralizing other molecules than monomeric polypeptides orfragments thereof alone. See, e.g., Fountoulakis et al., J. Biochem.,270:3958-3964 (1995). Nucleic acids encoding the above epitopes can alsobe recombined with a gene of interest as an epitope tag (e.g., thehemagglutinin (“HA”) tag or flag tag) to aid in detection andpurification of the expressed polypeptide. For example, a systemdescribed by Janknecht et al. allows for the ready purification ofnon-denatured fusion proteins expressed in human cell lines (Janknechtet al., 1991, Proc. Natl. Acad. Sci. USA 88:8972-897). In this system,the gene of interest is subcloned into a vaccinia recombination plasmidsuch that the open reading frame of the gene is translationally fused toan amino-terminal tag consisting of six histidine residues. The tagserves as a matrix-binding domain for the fusion protein. Extracts fromcells infected with the recombinant vaccinia virus are loaded onto Ni²⁺nitriloacetic acid-agarose column and histidine-tagged proteins can beselectively eluted with imidazole-containing buffers.

Additional fusion proteins of the invention may be generated through thetechniques of gene-shuffling, motif-shuffling, exon-shuffling, and/orcodon-shuffling (collectively referred to as “DNA shuffling”). DNAshuffling may be employed to modulate the activities of polypeptides ofthe invention, such methods can be used to generate polypeptides withaltered activity, as well as agonists and antagonists of thepolypeptides. See, generally, U.S. Pat. Nos. 5,605,793; 5,811,238;5,830,721; 5,834,252; and 5,837,458, and Patten et al., Curr. OpinionBiotechnol. 8:724-33 (1997); Harayama, Trends Biotechnol. 16(2):76-82(1998); Hansson, et al., J. Mol. Biol. 287:265-76 (1999); and Lorenzoand Blasco, Biotechniques 24(2):308-13 (1998) (each of these patents andpublications are hereby incorporated by reference in its entirety). Inone embodiment, alteration of polynucleotides corresponding to SEQ IDNO:1 and the polypeptides encoded by these polynucleotides may beachieved by DNA shuffling. DNA shuffling involves the assembly of two ormore DNA segments by homologous or site-specific recombination togenerate variation in the polynucleotide sequence. In anotherembodiment, polynucleotides of the invention, or the encodedpolypeptides, may be altered by being subjected to random mutagenesis byerror-prone PCR, random nucleotide insertion or other methods prior torecombination. In another embodiment, one or more components, motifs,sections, parts, domains, fragments, etc., of a polynucleotide coding apolypeptide of the invention may be recombined with one or morecomponents, motifs, sections, parts, domains, fragments, etc. of one ormore heterologous molecules.

Proteins of the invention can be chemically synthesized using techniquesknown in the art (e.g., see Creighton, Proteins: Structures andMolecular Principles, W.H. Freeman & Co., N.Y. (1983), and Hunkapiller,et al., Nature 310:105-111 (1984)). For example, a peptide correspondingto a fragment of the TNF delta and/or TNF epsilon polypeptides of theinvention can be synthesized by use of a peptide synthesizer.Furthermore, if desired, nonclassical amino acids or chemical amino acidanalogs can be introduced as a substitution or addition into the TNFdelta and/or TNF epsilon polypeptide sequence. Non-classical amino acidsinclude, but are not limited to, to the D-isomers of the common aminoacids, 2,4-diaminobutyric acid, a-amino isobutyric acid, 4-aminobutyricacid, Abu, 2-amino butyric acid, g-Abu, e-Ahx, 6-amino hexanoic acid,Aib, 2-amino isobutyric acid, 3-amino propionic acid, ornithine,norleucine, norvaline, hydroxyproline, sarcosine, citrulline,homocitrulline, cysteic acid, t-butylglycine, t-butylalanine,phenylglycine, cyclohexylalanine, b-alanine, fluoro-amino acids,designer amino acids such as b-methyl amino acids, Ca-methyl aminoacids, Na-methyl amino acids, and amino acid analogs in general.Furthermore, the amino acid can be D (dextrorotary) or L (levorotary).

The invention additionally, encompasses TNF delta and/or TNF epsilonpolypeptides which are differentially modified during or aftertranslation, e.g., by glycosylation, acetylation, phosphorylation,amidation, derivatization by known protecting/blocking groups,proteolytic cleavage, linkage to an antibody molecule or other cellularligand, etc. Any of numerous chemical modifications may be carried outby known techniques, including but not limited to, specific chemicalcleavage by cyanogen bromide, trypsin, chymotrypsin, papain, V8protease, NaBH₄, acetylation, formylation, oxidation, reduction,metabolic synthesis in the presence of tunicamycin; etc.

Additional post-translational modifications encompassed by the inventioninclude, for example, e.g., N-linked or O-linked carbohydrate chains,processing of N-terminal or C-terminal ends), attachment of chemicalmoieties to the amino acid backbone, chemical modifications of N-linkedor O-linked carbohydrate chains, and addition or deletion of anN-terminal methionine residue as a result of procaryotic host cellexpression. The polypeptides may also be modified with a detectablelabel, such as an enzymatic, fluorescent, isotopic or affinity label toallow for detection and isolation of the protein.

Examples of suitable enzymes include horseradish peroxidase, alkalinephosphatase, beta-galactosidase, glucose oxidase oracetylcholinesterase; examples of suitable prosthetic group complexesinclude streptavidin/biotin and avidin/biotin; examples of suitablefluorescent materials include biotin, umbelliferone, fluorescein,fluorescein isothiocyanate, rhodamine, dichlorotriazinylaminefluorescein, dansyl chloride or phycoerythrin; an example of aluminescent material includes luminol; examples of bioluminescentmaterials include luciferase, luciferin, and aequorin; and examples ofsuitable radioactive material include a radioactive metal ion, e.g.,alpha-emitters such as, for example, ²¹³Bi, or other radioisotopes suchas, for example, iodine (¹³¹I, ¹²⁵I, ¹²³I, ¹²¹I), carbon (¹⁴C), sulfur(³⁵S), tritium (³H), indium (^(115m)In, ^(113m)In, ¹¹²In, ¹¹¹In), andtechnetium (⁹⁹Tc, ^(99m)Tc), thallium (²⁰¹Ti), gallium (⁶⁸Ga, ⁶⁷Ga),palladium (¹⁰³Pd), molybdenum (⁹⁹Mo), xenon (¹³³Xe), fluorine (¹⁸F),¹⁵³Sm, ¹⁷⁷Lu, ¹⁵⁹Gd, ¹⁴⁹Pm, ¹⁴⁰La, ¹⁷⁵Yb, ¹⁶⁶Ho, ⁹⁰Y, ⁴⁷Sc, ¹⁸⁶Re,¹⁸⁸Re, ¹⁴²Pr, ¹⁰⁵Rh, ⁹⁷Ru, ⁶⁸Ge, ⁵⁷Co, ⁶⁵Zn, ⁸⁵Sr, ³²P, ¹⁵³Gd, ¹⁶⁹Yb,⁵¹Cr, ⁵⁴Mn, ⁷⁵Se, ¹¹³Sn, and ¹¹⁷Tin.

In specific embodiments, TNF delta and/or TNF epsilonmpolypetides of theinvention are attached to macrocyclic chelators useful for conjugatingradiometal ions, including but not limited to, ¹¹¹In, ¹⁷⁷Lu, ⁹⁰Y, ¹⁶⁶Ho,and ¹⁵³Sm, to polypeptides. In a preferred embodiment, the radiometalion associated with the macrocyclic chelators attached to TNF deltaand/or TNF epsilon polypeptides of the invention is ¹¹¹In. In anotherpreferred embodiment, the radiometal ion associated with the macrocyclicchelator attached to TNF delta and/or TNF epsilon polypeptides of theinvention is ⁹⁰Y. In specific embodiments, the macrocyclic chelator is1,4,7,10-tetraazacyclododecane-N,N′,N″,N′″-tetraacetic acid (DOTA). Inother specific embodiments, the DOTA is attached to the TNF delta and/orTNF epsilon polypeptide of the invention via a linker molecule. Examplesof linker molecules useful for conjugating DOTA to a polypeptide arecommonly known in the art - see, for example, DeNardo et al., ClinCancer Res. 4(10):2483-90, 1998; Peterson et al., Bioconjug. Chem.10(4):553-7,1999; and Zimmerman et al, Nucl. Med. Biol.26(8):943-50,1999 which are hereby incorporated by reference in theirentirety. In addition, U.S. Pat. Nos. 5,652,361 and 5,756,065, whichdisclose chelating agents that may be conjugated to antibodies, andmethods for making and using them, are hereby incorporated by referencein their entireties. Though U.S. Pat. Nos. 5,652,361 and 5,756,065 focuson conjugating chelating agents to antibodies, one skilled in the artcould readily adapt the method disclosed therein in order to conjugatechelating agents to other polypeptides.

In one embodiment, TNF delta and/or TNF epsilon polypeptides of theinvention may be labeled with biotin. In other related embodiments,biotinylated TNF delta and/or TNF epsilon polypeptides of the inventionmay be used, for example, as an imaging agent or as a means ofidentifying one or more TNF delta and/or TNF epsilon receptor(s) orother coreceptor or coligand molecules.

In another embodiment, the TNF delta and/or TNF epsilon polypeptides ofthe invention can be used as an agent to target and kill cellsexpressing a TNF delta and/or TNF epsilon receptor (e.g., TACI and/orBCMA). In this embodiment the polypeptides of the invention areassociated, e.g., by covalent association or through protein-proteininteractions, to a cytotoxin or cytotoxic agent. A cytotoxin orcytotoxic agent includes any agent that is detrimental to cells.Examples include paclitaxol, cytochalasin B, gramicidin D, ethidiumbromide, emetine, mitomycin, etoposide, tenoposide, vincristine,vinblastine, colchicin, doxorubicin, daunorubicin, dihydroxy anthracindione, mitoxantrone, mithramycin, actinomycin D, 1-dehydrotestosterone,glucocorticoids, procaine, tetracaine, lidocaine, propranolol, andpuromycin and analogs or homologs thereof. Therapeutic agents include,but are not limited to, antimetabolites (e.g., methotrexate,6-mercaptopurine, 6-thioguanine, cytarabine, 5-fluorouracildecarbazine), alkylating agents (e.g., mechlorethamine, thioepachlorambucil, melphalan, carmustine (BSNU) and lomustine (CCNU),cyclophosphamide, busulfan, dibromomannitol, streptozotocin, mitomycinC, and cis-dichlorodiamine platinum (II) (DDP) cisplatin),anthracyclines (e.g., daunorubicin (formerly daunomycin) anddoxorubicin), antibiotics (e.g., dactinomycin (formerly actinomycin),bleomycin, mithramycin, and anthramycin (AMC)), and anti-mitotic agents(e.g., vincristine and vinblastine), improsulfan, piposulfan, benzodopa,carboquone, meturedopa, uredopa, altretamine, triethylenemelamine,trietylenephosphoramide, triethylenethiophosphaoramidetrimethylolomelamine, chlomaphazine, cholophosphamide, estramustine,ifosfamide, novembichin, phenesterine, prednimustine, trofosfamide,uracil mustard, chlorozotocin, fotemustine, nimustine, ranimustine,aclacinomysins, azaserine, cactinomycin, calicheamicin, carabicin,carminomycin, carzinophilin, chromomycins, detorubicin,6-diazo-5-oxo-L-norleucine, epirubicin, esorubicin, idarubicin,marcellomycin, mycophenolic acid, nogalamycin, olivomycins, peplomycin,potfiromycin, quelamycin, rodorubicin, streptonigrin, tubercidin,ubenimex, zinostatin, zorubicin, denopterin, pteropterin, trimetrexate,fludarabine, thiamiprine, ancitabine, azacitidine, 6-azauridine,carmofur, dideoxyuridine, doxifluridine, enocitabine, floxuridine, 5-FU,calusterone, dromostanolone propionate, epitiostanol, mepitiostane,testolactone, aminoglutethimide, mitotane, trilostane, frolinic acid,aceglatone, aldophosphamide glycoside, aminolevulinic acid, amsacrine,bestrabucil, bisantrene, edatraxate, defofamine, demecolcine,diaziquone, elfornithine, elliptiniurn acetate, etoglucid, galliumnitrate, hydroxyurea, lentinan, lonidamine, mitoguazone, mopidamol,nitracrine, pentostatin, phenamet, pirarubicin, podophyllinic acid,2-ethylhydrazide, procarbazine, PSKO, razoxane, sizofiran,spirogermanium, tenuazonic acid, triaziquone, 2,2′,2″-trichlorotriethylamine, urethan, vindesine, dacarbazine,mannomustine, mitobronitol, mitolactol, pipobroman, gacytosine,arabinoside (“Ara-C”), taxoids, e.g. paclitaxel (TAXOL“, Bristol-MyersSquibb Oncology, Princeton, N.J.) doxetaxel (TAXOTERE”, Rh6ne-PoulencRorer, Antony, France), gemcitabine, ifosfamide, vinorelbine, navelbine,novantrone, teniposide, aminopterin, xeloda, ibandronate, CPT-I 1,topoisomerase inhibitor RFS 2000, difluoromethylornithine (DMFO),retinoic acid, esperamicins, capecitabine, and pharmaceuticallyacceptable salts, acids or derivatives of any of the above. Alsoincluded in this definition are anti-hormonal agents that act toregulate or inhibit hormone action on tumors such as anti-estrogensincluding for example tamoxifen, raloxifene, aromatase inhibiting4(5)-imidazoles, 4 hydroxytamoxifen, trioxifene, keoxifene, LY 117018,onapristone, toremifene (Fareston), and anti-androgens such asflutamide, nilutamide, bicalutamide, leuprolide, and goserelin, andpharmaceutically acceptable salts, acids or derivatives of any of theabove.

The conjugates of the invention can be used for modifying a givenbiological response, the therapeutic agent or drug moiety is not to beconstrued as limited to classical chemical therapeutic agents. Forexample, the drug moiety may be a protein or polypeptide possessing adesired biological activity. Such proteins may include, for example, atoxin such as abrin, ricin A, pseudomonas exotoxin, or diphtheria toxin;a protein such as tumor necrosis factor, alpha-interferon,beta-interferon, nerve growth factor, platelet derived growth factor,tissue plasminogen activator, an apoptotic agent, e.g., TNF-alpha,TNF-beta, AIM I (See, International Publication No. WO 97/33899), AIM II(See, International Publication No. WO 97/34911), Fas Ligand (Takahashiet al., Int. Immunol., 6:1567-1574 (1994)), VEGI (See, InternationalPublication No. WO 99/23105), CD40 Ligand, a thrombotic agent or ananti- angiogenic agent, e.g., angiostatin or endostatin; or, biologicalresponse modifiers such as, for example, lymphokines, interleukin-1(“IL- 1”), interleukin-2 (“IL-2”), interleukin-6 (“IL-6”), granulocytemacrophage colony stimulating factor (“GM-CSF”), granulocyte colonystimulating factor (“G-CSF”), or other growth factors.

Also provided by the invention are chemically modified derivatives ofTNF delta and/or TNF epsilon which may provide additional advantagessuch as increased solubility, stability and circulating time of thepolypeptide, or decreased immunogenicity (see U.S. Pat. No. 4,179,337).The chemical moieties for derivitization may be selected from watersoluble polymers such as polyethylene glycol, ethylene glycol/propyleneglycol copolymers, carboxymethylcellulose, dextran, polyvinyl alcoholand the like. The polypeptides may be modified at random positionswithin the molecule, or at predetermined positions within the moleculeand may include one, two, three or more attached chemical moieties.

The polymer may be of any molecular weight, and may be branched orunbranched. For polyethylene glycol, the preferred molecular weight isbetween about 1 kDa and about 100 kDa (the term “about” indicating thatin preparations of polyethylene glycol, some molecules will weigh more,some less, than the stated molecular weight) for ease in handling andmanufacturing. Other sizes may be used, depending on the desiredtherapeutic profile (e.g., the duration of sustained release desired,the effects, if any on biological activity, the ease in handling, thedegree or lack of antigenicity and other known effects of thepolyethylene glycol to a therapeutic protein or analog). For example,the polyethylene glycol may have an average molecular weight of about200, 500, 1000, 1500, 2000, 2500, 3000, 3500, 4000, 4500, 5000, 5500,6000, 6500, 7000, 7500, 8000, 8500, 9000, 9500, 10,000, 10,500, 11,000,11,500, 12,000, 12,500, 13,000, 13,500, 14,000, 14,500, 15,000, 15,500,16,000, 16,500, 17,000, 17,500, 18,000, 18,500, 19,000, 19,500, 20,000,25,000, 30,000, 35,000, 40,000, 50,000, 55,000, 60,000, 65,000, 70,000,75,000, 80,000, 85,000, 90,000, 95,000, or 100,000 kDa.

As noted above, the polyethylene glycol may have a branched structure.Branched polyethylene glycols are described, for example, in U.S. Pat.No. 5,643,575; Morpurgo et al., Appl. Biochem. Biotechnol. 56:59-72(1996); Vorobjev et al., Nucleosides Nucleotides 18:2745-2750 (1999);and Caliceti et al, Bioconjug. Chem. 10:638-646 (1999), the disclosuresof each of which are incorporated herein by reference.

The polyethylene glycol molecules (or other chemical moieties) should beattached to the protein with consideration of effects on functional orantigenic domains of the protein. There are a number of attachmentmethods available to those skilled in the art, e.g., EP 0 401 384,herein incorporated by reference (coupling PEG to G-CSF), see also Maliket al., Exp. Hematol. 20:1028-1035 (1992) (reporting pegylation ofGM-CSF using tresyl chloride). For example, polyethylene glycol may becovalently bound through amino acid residues via a reactive group, suchas, a free amino or carboxyl group. Reactive groups are those to whichan activated polyethylene glycol molecule may be bound. The amino acidresidues having a free amino group may include lysine residues and theN-terminal amino acid residues; those having a free carboxyl group mayinclude aspartic acid residues glutamic acid residues and the C-terminalamino acid residue. Sulfhydryl groups may also be used as a reactivegroup for attaching the polyethylene glycol molecules. Preferred fortherapeutic purposes is attachment at an amino group, such as attachmentat the N-terminus or lysine group.

As suggested above, polyethylene glycol may be attached to proteins vialinkage to any of a number of amino acid residues. For example,polyethylene glycol can be linked to a proteins via covalent bonds tolysine, histidine, aspartic acid, glutamic acid, or cysteine residues.One or more reaction chemistries may be employed to attach polyethyleneglycol to specific amino acid residues (e.g., lysine, histidine,aspartic acid, glutamic acid, or cysteine) of the protein or to morethan one type of amino acid residue (e.g., lysine, histidine, asparticacid, glutamic acid, cysteine and combinations thereof) of the protein.

One may specifically desire proteins chemically modified at theN-terminus. Using polyethylene glycol as an illustration of the presentcomposition, one may select from a variety of polyethylene glycolmolecules (by molecular weight, branching, etc.), the proportion ofpolyethylene glycol molecules to protein (or peptide) molecules in thereaction mix, the type of pegylation reaction to be performed, and themethod of obtaining the selected N-terminally pegylated protein. Themethod of obtaining the N-terminally pegylated preparation (i.e.,separating this moiety from other monopegylated moieties if necessary)may be by purification of the N-terminally pegylated material from apopulation of pegylated protein molecules. Selective proteins chemicallymodified at the N-terminus modification may be accomplished by reductivealkylation which exploits differential reactivity of different types ofprimary amino groups (lysine versus the N-terminal) available forderivatization in a particular protein. Under the appropriate reactionconditions, substantially selective derivatization of the protein at theN-terminus with a carbonyl group containing polymer is achieved.

As indicated above, pegylation of the proteins of the invention may beaccomplished by any number of means. For example, polyethylene glycolmay be attached to the protein either directly or by an interveninglinker. Linkerless systems for attaching polyethylene glycol to proteinsare described in Delgado et al., Crit. Rev. Thera. Drug Carrier Sys.9:249-304 (1992); Francis et al., Intern. J of Hematol. 68:1-18 (1998);U.S. Pat. No. 4,002,531; U.S. Pat. No. 5,349,052; WO 95/06058; and WO98/32466, the disclosures of each of which are incorporated herein byreference.

One system for attaching polyethylene glycol directly to amino acidresidues of proteins without an intervening linker employs tresylatedMPEG, which is produced by the modification of monmethoxy polyethyleneglycol (MPEG) using tresylchloride (ClSO₂CH₂CF₃). Upon reaction ofprotein with tresylated MPEG, polyethylene glycol is directly attachedto amine groups of the protein. Thus, the invention includesprotein-polyethylene glycol conjugates produced by reacting proteins ofthe invention with a polyethylene glycol molecule having a2,2,2-trifluoreothane sulphonyl group.

Polyethylene glycol can also be attached to proteins using a number ofdifferent intervening linkers. For example, U.S. Pat. No. 5,612,460, theentire disclosure of which is incorporated herein by reference,discloses urethane linkers for connecting polyethylene glycol toproteins. Protein-polyethylene glycol conjugates wherein thepolyethylene glycol is attached to the protein by a linker can also beproduced by reaction of proteins with compounds such asMPEG-succinimidylsuccinate, MPEG activated with1,1′-carbonyldiimidazole, MPEG-2,4,5-trichloropenylcarbonate,MPEG-p-nitrophenolcarbonate, and various MPEG-succinate derivatives. Anumber additional polyethylene glycol derivatives and reactionchemistries for attaching polyethylene glycol to proteins are describedin WO 98/32466, the entire disclosure of which is incorporated herein byreference. Pegylated protein products produced using the reactionchemistries set out herein are included within the scope of theinvention.

The number of polyethylene glycol moieties attached to each protein ofthe invention (i.e., the degree of substitution) may also vary. Forexample, the pegylated proteins of the invention may be linked, onaverage, to 1,2,3,4,5,6,7,8,9, 10, 12, 15, 17, 20, or more polyethyleneglycol molecules. Similarly, the average degree of substitution withinranges such as 1-3, 2-4, 3-5, 4-6, 5-7, 6-8, 7-9, 8-10, 9-11, 10-12,11-13, 12-14, 13-15, 14-16, 15-17, 16-18, 17-19, or 18-20 polyethyleneglycol moieties per protein molecule. Methods for determining the degreeof substitution are discussed, for example, in Delgado et al., Crit.Rev. Thera. Drug Carrier Sys. 9:249-304 (1992).

As mentioned, the TNF delta and/or TNF epsilon proteins of the inventionmay be modified by either natural processes, such as posttranslationalprocessing, or by chemical modification techniques which are well knownin the art. It will be appreciated that the same type of modificationmay be present in the same or varying degrees at several sites in agiven TNF delta and/or TNF epsilon polypeptide. TNF delta and/or TNFepsilon polypeptides may be branched, for example, as a result ofubiquitination, and they may be cyclic, with or without branching.Cyclic, branched, and branched cyclic TNF delta and/or TNF epsilonpolypeptides may result from posttranslation natural processes or may bemade by synthetic methods. Modifications include acetylation, acylation,ADP-ribosylation, amidation, covalent attachment of flavin, covalentattachment of a heme moiety, covalent attachment of a nucleotide ornucleotide derivative, covalent attachment of a lipid or lipidderivative, covalent attachment of phosphotidylinositol, cross-linking,cyclization, disulfide bond formation, demethylation, formation ofcovalent cross-links, formation of cysteine, formation of pyroglutamate,formylation, gamma-carboxylation, glycosylation, GPI anchor formation,hydroxylation, iodination, methylation, myristoylation, oxidation,pegylation, proteolytic processing, phosphorylation, prenylation,racemization, selenoylation, sulfation, transfer-RNA mediated additionof amino acids to proteins such as arginylation, and ubiquitination.(See, for instance, PROTEINS—STRUCTURE AND MOLECULAR PROPERTIES, 2ndEd., T. E. Creighton, W. H. Freeman and Company, New York (1993);POSTTRANSLATIONAL COVALENT MODIFICATION OF PROTEINS, B. C. Johnson, Ed.,Academic Press, New York, pgs. 1-12 (1983); Seifter et al., Meth Enzymol182:626-646 (1990); Rattan et al., Ann NY Acad Sci 663:48-62 (1992)).

The polynucleotides and polypeptides of the present invention may beused in accordance with the present invention for a variety ofapplications, particularly those that make use of the chemical andbiological properties TNF delta and TNF epsilon. Among these areapplications in apoptosis of transformed cell lines, mediation of cellactivation and proliferation and primary mediators of immune regulationantimicrobial, antiviral and inflammatory response susceptibility topathogens. Additional applications relate to diagnosis and to treatmentof disorders of cells, tissues and organisms. These aspects of theinvention are illustrated further by the following discussion.

The proteins of the invention can also be expressed in transgenicanimals. Animals of any species, including, but not limited to, mice,rats, rabbits, hamsters, guinea pigs, pigs, micro-pigs, goats, sheep,cows and non-human primates, e.g., baboons, monkeys, and chimpanzees maybe used to generate transgenic animals. In a specific embodiment,techniques described herein or otherwise known in the art, are used toexpress polypeptides of the invention in humans, as part of a genetherapy protocol.

Any technique known in the art may be used to introduce the transgene(i.e., nucleic acids of the invention) into animals to produce thefounder lines of transgenic animals. Such techniques include, but arenot limited to, pronuclear microinjection (Paterson et al., Appl.Microbiol. Biotechnol. 40:691-698 (1994); Carver et al., Biotechnology(NY) 11:1263-1270 (1993); Wright et al., Biotechnology (NY) 9:830-834(1991); and Hoppe et al., U.S. Pat. No. 4,873,191 (1989)); retrovirusmediated gene transfer into germ lines (Van der Putten et al., Proc.Natl. Acad. Sci., USA 82:6148-6152 (1985)), blastocysts or embryos; genetargeting in embryonic stem cells (Thompson et al., Cell 56:313-321(1989)); electroporation of cells or embryos (Lo, Mol Cell. Biol.3:1803-1814 (1983)); introduction of the polynucleotides of theinvention using a gene gun (see, e.g., Ulmer et al., Science 259:1745(1993); introducing nucleic acid constructs into embryonic pleuripotentstem cells and transferring the stem cells back into the blastocyst; andsperm-mediated gene transfer (Lavitrano et al., Cell 57:717-723 (1989);etc. For a review of such techniques, see Gordon, “Transgenic Animals,”Intl. Rev. Cytol. 115:171-229 (1989), which is incorporated by referenceherein in its entirety. Further, the contents of each of the documentsrecited in this paragraph is herein incorporated by reference in itsentirety.

Any technique known in the art may be used to produce transgenic clonescontaining polynucleotides of the invention, for example, nucleartransfer into enucleated oocytes of nuclei from cultured embryonic,fetal, or adult cells induced to quiescence (Campell et al., Nature380:64-66 (1996); Wilmut et al., Nature 385:810-813 (1997)), each ofwhich is herein incorporated by reference in its entirety).

The present invention provides for transgenic animals that carry thetransgene in all their cells, as well as animals which carry thetransgene in some, but not all their cells, i.e., mosaic animals orchimeric animals. The transgene may be integrated as a single transgeneor as multiple copies such as in concatamers, e.g., head-to-head tandemsor head-to-tail tandems. The transgene may also be selectivelyintroduced into and activated in a particular cell type by following,for example, the teaching of Lasko et al. (Proc. Natl. Acad. Sci. USA89:6232-6236 (1992)). The regulatory sequences required for such acell-type specific activation will depend upon the particular cell typeof interest, and will be apparent to those of skill in the art. When itis desired that the polynucleotide transgene be integrated into thechromosomal site of the endogenous gene, gene targeting is preferred.Briefly, when such a technique is to be utilized, vectors containingsome nucleotide sequences homologous to the endogenous gene are designedfor the purpose of integrating, via homologous recombination withchromosomal sequences, into and disrupting the function of thenucleotide sequence of the endogenous gene. The transgene may also beselectively introduced into a particular cell type, thus inactivatingthe endogenous gene in only that cell type, by following, for example,the teaching of Gu et al. (Science 265:103-106 (1994)). The regulatorysequences required for such a cell-type specific inactivation willdepend upon the particular cell type of interest, and will be apparentto those of skill in the art. The contents of each of the documentsrecited in this paragraph is herein incorporated by reference in itsentirety.

Once transgenic animals have been generated, the expression of therecombinant gene may be assayed utilizing standard techniques. Initialscreening may be accomplished by Southern blot analysis or PCRtechniques to analyze animal tissues to verify that integration of thetransgene has taken place. The level of mRNA expression of the transgenein the tissues of the transgenic animals may also be assessed usingtechniques which include, but are not limited to, Northern blot analysisof tissue samples obtained from the animal, in situ hybridizationanalysis, and reverse transcriptase-PCR (rt-PCR). Samples of transgenicgene-expressing tissue may also be evaluated immunocytochemically orimmunohistochemically using antibodies specific for the transgeneproduct.

Once the founder animals are produced, they may be bred, inbred,outbred, or crossbred to produce colonies of the particular animal.Examples of such breeding strategies include, but are not limited to:outbreeding of founder animals with more than one integration site inorder to establish separate lines; inbreeding of separate lines in orderto produce compound transgenics that express the transgene at higherlevels because of the effects of additive expression of each transgene;crossing of heterozygous transgenic animals to produce animalshomozygous for a given integration site in order to both augmentexpression and eliminate the need for screening of animals by DNAanalysis; crossing of separate homozygous lines to produce compoundheterozygous or homozygous lines; and breeding to place the transgene ona distinct background that is appropriate for an experimental model ofinterest.

Transgenic and “knock-out” animals of the invention have uses whichinclude, but are not limited to, animal model systems useful inelaborating the biological function of TNF delta and/or TNF epsilonpolypeptides, studying conditions and/or disorders associated withaberrant TNF delta and/or TNF epsilon expression, and in screening forcompounds effective in ameliorating such conditions and/or disorders.

In further embodiments of the invention, cells that are geneticallyengineered to express the proteins of the invention, or alternatively,that are genetically engineered not to express the proteins of theinvention (e.g., knockouts) are administered to a patient in vivo. Suchcells may be obtained from the patient (i.e., animal, including human)or an MHC compatible donor and can include, but are not limited tofibroblasts, bone marrow cells, blood cells (e.g., lymphocytes),adipocytes, muscle cells, endothelial cells, etc. The cells aregenetically engineered in vitro using recombinant DNA techniques tointroduce the coding sequence of polypeptides of the invention into thecells, or alternatively, to disrupt the coding sequence and/orendogenous regulatory sequence associated with the polypeptides of theinvention, e.g., by transduction (using viral vectors, and preferablyvectors that integrate the transgene into the cell genome) ortransfection procedures, including, but not limited to, the use ofplasmids, cosmids, YACs, naked DNA, electroporation, liposomes, etc. Thecoding sequence of the polypeptides of the invention can be placed underthe control of a strong constitutive or inducible promoter orpromoter/enhancer to achieve expression, and preferably secretion, ofthe polypeptides of the invention. The engineered cells which expressand preferably secrete the polypeptides of the invention can beintroduced into the patient systemically, e.g., in the circulation, orintraperitoneally. Alternatively, the cells can be incorporated into amatrix and implanted in the body, e.g., genetically engineeredfibroblasts can be implanted as part of a skin graft; geneticallyengineered endothelial cells can be implanted as part of a lymphatic orvascular graft. (See, for example, Anderson et al. U.S. Pat. No.5,399,349; and Mulligan & Wilson, U.S. Pat. No. 5,460,959, each of whichis incorporated by reference herein in its entirety).

When the cells to be administered are non-autologous or non-MHCcompatible cells, they can be administered using well known techniqueswhich prevent the development of a host immune response against theintroduced cells. For example, the cells may be introduced in anencapsulated form which, while allowing for an exchange of componentswith the immediate extracellular environment, does not allow theintroduced cells to be recognized by the host immune system.

This invention is also related to the use of the polynucleotides of thepresent invention to detect complementary polynucleotides such as, forexample, as a diagnostic reagent. Detection of a mutated form of apolypeptide of the present invention associated with a dysfunction willprovide a diagnostic tool that can add or define a diagnosis of adisease or susceptibility to a disease which results fromunder-expression over-expression or altered expression of polypeptide ofthe present invention, such as, for example, neoplasia such as tumors.

Individuals carrying mutations in a gene of the present invention may bedetected at the DNA level by a variety of techniques. Nucleic acids fordiagnosis may be obtained from a patient's cells, such as from blood,urine, saliva, tissue biopsy and autopsy material. The genomic DNA maybe used directly for detection or may be amplified enzymatically byusing PCR prior to analysis. PCR (Saiki et al., Nature, 324: 163-1661986). RNA or cDNA may also be used in the same ways. As an example, PCRprimers complementary to the nucleic acid encoding TNF delta or TNFepsilon can be used to identify and analyze TNF delta or TNF epsilonexpression and mutations. For example, deletions and insertions can bedetected by a change in size of the amplified product in comparison tothe normal genotype. Point mutations can be identified by hybridizingamplified DNA to radiolabeled TNF delta or TNF epsilon RNA oralternatively, radiolabeled TNF delta or TNF epsilon antisense DNAsequences. Perfectly matched sequences can be distinguished frommismatched duplexes by RNase A digestion or by differences in meltingtemperatures.

Sequence differences between a reference gene and genes having mutationsalso may be revealed by direct DNA sequencing. In addition, cloned DNAsegments may be employed as probes to detect specific DNA segments. Thesensitivity of such methods can be greatly enhanced by appropriate useof PCR or another amplification method. For example, a sequencing primeris used with double-stranded PCR product or a single-stranded templatemolecule generated by a modified PCR. The sequence determination isperformed by conventional procedures with radiolabeled nucleotide or byautomatic sequencing procedures with fluorescent-tags.

Genetic testing based on DNA sequence differences may be achieved bydetection of alteration in electrophoretic mobility of DNA fragments ingels, with or without denaturing agents. Small sequence deletions andinsertions can be visualized by high resolution gel electrophoresis. DNAfragments of different sequences may be distinguished on denaturingformamide gradient gels in which the mobilities of different DNAfragments are retarded in the gel at different positions according totheir specific melting or partial melting temperatures (see, e.g., Myerset al., Science, 230:1242 1985).

Sequence changes at specific locations also may be revealed by nucleaseprotection assays, such as RNase and S 1 protection or the chemicalcleavage method (e.g., Cotton et al., Proc. Natl. Acad. Sci., USA,85:4397-4401, 1985). Thus, the detection of a specific DNA sequence maybe achieved by methods such as hybridization, RNase protection, chemicalcleavage, direct DNA sequencing or the use of restriction enzymes,(e.g., restriction fragment length polymorphisms (“RFLP”) and Southernblotting of genomic DNA. In addition to more conventionalgel-electrophoresis and DNA sequencing, mutations also can be detectedby in situ analysis.

The sequences of the present invention are also valuable for chromosomeidentification. The sequence is specifically targeted to and canhybridize with a particular location on an individual human chromosome.Moreover, there is a current need for identifying particular sites onthe chromosome. Few chromosome marking reagents based on actual sequencedata (repeat polymorphisms) are presently available for markingchromosomal location. The mapping of DNAs to chromosomes according tothe present invention is an important first step in correlating thosesequences with genes associated with disease.

In certain preferred embodiments in this regard, the cDNA hereindisclosed is used to clone genomic DNA of a gene of the presentinvention. This can be accomplished using a variety of well knowntechniques and libraries, which generally are available commercially.The genomic DNA the is used for in situ chromosome mapping using wellknown techniques for this purpose. Typically, in accordance with routineprocedures for chromosome mapping, some trial and error may be necessaryto identify a genomic probe that gives a good in situ hybridizationsignal.

In some cases, in addition, sequences can be mapped to chromosomes bypreparing PCR primers (preferably 15-25 bp) from the cDNA. Computeranalysis of the 3′ untranslated region of the gene is used to rapidlyselect primers that do not span more than one exon in the genomic DNA,thus complicating the amplification process. These primers are then usedfor PCR screening of somatic cell hybrids containing individual humanchromosomes. Only those hybrids containing the human gene correspondingto the primer will yield an amplified fragment.

PCR mapping of somatic cell hybrids is a rapid procedure for assigning aparticular DNA to a particular chromosome. Using the present inventionwith the same oligonucleotide primers, sublocalization can be achievedwith panels of fragments from specific chromosomes or pools of largegenomic clones in an analogous manner. Other mapping strategies that cansimilarly be used to map to its chromosome include in situhybridization, prescreening with labeled flow-sorted chromosomes andpreselection by hybridization to construct chromosome specific-cDNAlibraries.

Fluorescence in situ hybridization (“FISH”) of a cDNA clone to ametaphase chromosomal spread can be used to provide a precisechromosomal location in one step. This technique can be used with cDNAas short as 50 or 60. For a review of this technique, see Verma et al.,Human Chromosomes: A Manual of Basic Techniques, Pergamon Press, NewYork (1988).

Once a sequence has been mapped to a precise chromosomal location, thephysical position of the sequence on the chromosome can be correlatedwith genetic map data. Such data are found, for example, in V. McKusick,Mendelian Inheritance in Man, available on line through Johns HopkinsUniversity, Welch Medical Library. The relationship between genes anddiseases that have been mapped to the same chromosomal region are thenidentified through linkage analysis (coinheritance of physicallyadjacent genes).

Next, it is necessary to determine the differences in the cDNA orgenomic sequence between affected and unaffected individuals. If amutation is observed in some or all of the affected individuals but notin any normal individuals, then the mutation is likely to be thecausative agent of the disease.

With current resolution of physical mapping and genetic mappingtechniques, a cDNA precisely localized to a chromosomal regionassociated with the disease could be one of between 50 and 500 potentialcausative genes. (This assumes 1 megabase mapping resolution and onegene per 20 kb).

The present invention also relates to a diagnostic assays such asquantitative and diagnostic assays for detecting levels of a protein inthe present invention in cells and tissues, including determination ofnormal and abnormal levels. Thus, for instance, a diagnostic assay inaccordance with the invention for detecting over-expression of TNFprotein of the present invention compared to normal control tissuesamples may be used to detect the presence of neoplasia, for example.Assay techniques that can be used to determine levels of a protein, suchas a protein of the present invention, in a sample derived from a hostare well-known to those of skill in the art. Such assay methods includeradioimmunoassays, competitive-binding assays, Western Blot analysis andELISA assays. Among these ELISAs frequently are preferred. An ELISAassay initially comprises preparing an antibody specific to a protein ofthe present invention, preferably a monoclonal antibody. In addition areporter antibody generally is prepared which binds to the monoclonalantibody. The reporter antibody is attached to a detectable reagent suchas radioactive, fluorescent or enzymatic, which in this example ishorseradish peroxidase enzyme.

To carry out an ELISA assay a sample is removed from a host andincubated on a solid support, e.g. a polystyrene dish, that binds theproteins in the sample. Any free protein binding sites on the dish arethen covered by incubating with a non-specific protein such as bovineserum albumin. Next, the monoclonal antibody is incubated in the dishduring which time the monoclonal antibodies attach to any protein of thepresent invention attached to the polystyrene dish. Unbound monoclonalantibody is washed out with buffer. The reporter antibody linked tohorseradish peroxidase is placed in the dish resulting in binding of thereporter antibody to any monoclonal antibody bound to a protein of thepresent invention. Unattached reporter antibody is then washed out.Reagents for peroxidase activity, including a colorimetric substrate arethen added to the dish. Immobilized peroxidase, linked to protein of thepresent invention through the primary and secondary antibodies, producesa colored reaction product. The amount of color developed in a giventime period indicates the amount of protein of the present inventionpresent in the sample. Quantitative results typically are obtained byreference to a standard curve.

A competition assay may be employed wherein antibodies specific toprotein of the present invention attached to a solid support and labeledprotein of the present invention and a sample derived from the host arepassed over the solid support and the amount of label detected attachedto the solid support can be correlated to a quantity of protein of thepresent invention in the sample.

Antibodies

Further polypeptides of the invention include antibodies and T-cellantigen receptors (TCR) which immunospecifically bind a polypeptide(e.g. TNF delta and/or TNF epsilon), preferably an epitope, of thepresent invention (as determined by immunoassays well known in the artfor assaying specific antibody-antigen binding). In specificembodiments, antibodies of the invention bind homomeric, especiallyhomotrimeric, TNF delta and/or TNF epsilon polypeptides. In otherspecific embodiments, antibodies of the invention bind heteromeric,especially heterotrimeric, TNF delta and/or TNF epsilon polypeptidessuch as a heterotrimer containing two TNF delta and/or TNF epsilonpolypeptides and one Neutrokine-alpha and/or Neutokine-alphaSVpolypeptides (e.g., International Publication No. WO 98/18921; Science.285:260 (1999); SEQ ID NOS:23 and 24 respectively) or a heterotrimercontaining one TNF delta and/or TNF epsilon polypeptide and twoNeutrokine-alpha and/or Neutokine-alphaSV polypeptides.

In particularly preferred embodiments, the antibodies of the inventionbind homomeric, especially homotrimeric, TNF delta polypeptides, whereinthe individual protein components of the multimers consist of the matureform of TNF delta (e.g., amino acids residues 88-233 of SEQ ID NO:2, oramino acids residues 105-250 of SEQ ID NO:11.) In particularly preferredembodiments, the antibodies of the invention bind homomeric, especiallyhomotrimeric, TNF epsilon polypeptides, wherein the individual proteincomponents of the multimers consist of the mature form of TNF epsilon(e.g., amino acids residues 39-168 of SEQ ID NO:4, or amino acidsresidues 105-234 of SEQ ID NO:13.)

In other specific embodiments, antibodies of the invention bindheteromeric, especially heterotrimeric, TNF delta and/or TNF epsilonpolypeptides such as a heterotrimer containing two TNF delta and/or TNFepsilon polypeptides and one Neutrokine-alpha polypeptide or aheterotrimer containing one TNF delta and/or TNF epsilon polypeptide andtwo Neutrokine-alpha polypeptides, and wherein the individulal proteincomponents of the TNF delta and/or TNF epsilon heteromer consist of themature extracellular soluble portion of either TNF delta and/or TNFepsilon or (e.g., amino acids residues 88-233 of SEQ ID NO:2, aminoacids residues 105-250 of SEQ ID NO:1 1, amino acids residues 39-168 ofSEQ ID NO:4, or amino acids residues 105-234 of SEQ ID NO: 13.) or themature extracellular soluble portion Neutrokine-alpha (e.g., amino acidresidues 134-285 of SEQ ID NO:23, or amino acid residues 134-266 of SEQID NO:24).

In specific embodiments, the antibodies of the invention bindconformational epitopes of a TNF delta and/or TNF monomeric protein. Inspecific embodiments, the antibodies of the invention bindconformational epitopes of a TNF delta and/or TNF epsilon multimeric,especially trimeric, protein. In other embodiments, antibodies of theinvention bind conformational epitopes that arise from the juxtapositionof TNF delta and/or TNF epsilon with a heterologous polypeptide, such asmight be present when TNF delta and/or TNF epsilon forms heterotrimers(e.g., with Neutrokine-alpha and/or Neutrokine-alpha SV polypetidespolypeptides (see, e.g, (International Publication No. WO 98/18921;Science. 285:260 (1999); SEQ ID NOS, 23 and 24), or in fusion proteinsbetween TNF delta and/or TNF epsilon and a heterologous polypeptide.

Antibodies of the invention include, but are not limited to, polyclonal,monoclonal, multispecific, human, humanized or chimeric antibodies,single chain antibodies, Fab fragments, F(ab′) fragments, fragmentsproduced by a Fab expression library, anti-idiotypic (anti-Id)antibodies (including, e.g., anti-Id antibodies to antibodies of theinvention), and epitope-binding fragments of any of the above. The term“antibody,” as used herein, refers to immunoglobulin molecules andimmunologically active portions of immunoglobulin molecules, i.e.,molecules that contain an antigen binding site that immunospecificallybinds an antigen. The immunoglobulin molecules of the invention can beof any type (e.g., IgG, IgE, IgM, IgD, IgA and IgY), class (e.g., IgG1,IgG2, IgG3, IgG4, IgA1 and IgA2) or subclass of immunoglobulin molecule.

In specific embodiments, immunoglobulin molecules of the invention areIgG1.

In other specific embodiments, immunoglobulin molecules of the inventionare IgG4.

Most preferably the antibodies are human antigen-binding antibodyfragments of the present invention and include, but are not limited to,Fab, Fab′ and F(ab′)2, Fd, single-chain Fvs (scFv), single-chainantibodies, disulfide-linked Fvs (sdFv) and fragments comprising eithera VL or VH domain. Antigen-binding antibody fragments, includingsingle-chain antibodies, may comprise the variable region(s) alone or incombination with the entirety or a portion of the following: hingeregion, CH1, CH2, and CH3 domains. Also included in the invention areantigen-binding fragments also comprising any combination of variableregion(s) with a hinge region, CH1, CH2, and CH3 domains. The antibodiesof the invention may be from any animal origin including birds andmammals. Preferably, the antibodies are human, murine, donkey, shiprabbit, goat, guinea pig, camel, horse, or chicken. As used herein,“human” antibodies include antibodies having the amino acid sequence ofa human immunoglobulin and include antibodies isolated from humanimmunoglobulin libraries or from animals transgenic for one or morehuman immunoglobulin and that do not express endogenous immunoglobulins,as described infra and, for example in, U.S. Pat. No. 5,939,598 byKucherlapati et al.

The antibodies of the present invention may be monospecific, bispecific,trispecific or of greater multispecificity. Multispecific antibodies maybe specific for different epitopes of a polypeptide of the presentinvention or may be specific for both a polypeptide of the presentinvention as well as for a heterologous epitope, such as a heterologouspolypeptide or solid support material. See, e.g., PCT publications WO93/17715; WO 92/08802; WO 91/00360; WO 92/05793; Tutt, et al., J.Immunol. 147:60-69 (1991); U.S. Pat. Nos. 4,474,893; 4,714,681;4,925,648; 5,573,920; 5,601,819; Kostelny et al., J. Immunol.148:1547-1553 (1992).

Antibodies of the present invention may be described or specified interms of the epitope(s) or portion(s) of a polypeptide of the presentinvention that they recognize or specifically bind. The epitope(s) orpolypeptide portion(s) may be specified as described herein, e.g., byN-terminal and C-terminal positions, by size in contiguous amino acidresidues, or listed in the Tables and Figures. Antibodies thatspecifically bind any epitope or polypeptide of the present inventionmay also be excluded. Therefore, the present invention includesantibodies that specifically bind polypeptides of the present invention,and allows for the exclusion of the same.

Antibodies of the present invention may also be described or specifiedin terms of their cross-reactivity. Antibodies that do not bind anyother analog, ortholog, or homolog of a polypeptide of the presentinvention are included. Antibodies that bind polypeptides with at least95%, at least 90%, at least 85%, at least 80%, at least 75%, at least70%, at least 65%, at least 60%, at least 55%, and at least 50% identity(as calculated using methods known in the art and described herein) to apolypeptide of the present invention are also included in the presentinvention. In a specific embodiment, antibodies of the present inventioncross react with Neutrokine-alpha (also known as B lymphocyte stimulator(BLyS)) and/or Neutrokine alpha splice variant (InternationalPublication No. WO 98/18921; Science. 285:260 (1999); SEQ ID NOS:23 and24, respectively). In specific embodiments, antibodies of the presentinvention cross-react with murine, rat and/or rabbit homologs of humanproteins and the corresponding epitopes thereof.

Antibodies that do not bind polypeptides with less than 95%, less than90%, less than 85%, less than 80%, less than 75%, less than 70%, lessthan 65%, less than 60%, less than 55%, and less than 50% identity (ascalculated using methods known in the art and described herein) to apolypeptide of the present invention are also included in the presentinvention. In a specific embodiment, antibodies of the present inventiondo not cross react with Neutrokine-alpha (also known as B lymphocytestimulator (BLyS)) and/or Neutrokine alpha splice variant (Science.285:260 (1999)). In a specific embodiment, the above-describedcross-reactivity is with respect to any single specific antigenic orimmunogenic polypeptide, or combination(s) of 2, 3, 4, 5, or more of thespecific antigenic and/or immunogenic polypeptides disclosed herein.Further included in the present invention are antibodies that bindpolypeptides encoded by polynucleotides which hybridize to apolynucleotide of the present invention under stringent hybridizationconditions (as described herein). Antibodies of the present inventionmay also be described or specified in terms of their binding affinity toa polypeptide of the invention. Preferred binding affinities includethose with a dissociation constant or Kd less than 5×10⁻²M, 10⁻²M,5×10⁻³M, 10⁻³M, 5×10⁻⁴M, 10⁻⁴M, 5×10⁻⁵M, 10⁻⁵M. Even more preferredbinding affinities include those with a dissociation constant or Kd lessthan 5×10⁻⁶M, 10⁻⁶M, 5×10⁻⁷M, 10⁻⁷M, 5×10⁻⁸M, 10⁻⁸M, 5×10⁻⁹M, 10⁻⁹M,5×10⁻¹⁰M, 10⁻¹⁰M, 5×10⁻¹¹M, 10⁻¹¹M, 5×10⁻¹²M, 10⁻¹²M, 5×10⁻¹³M, 10⁻¹³M,5×10⁻¹⁴M, 10⁻¹⁴M, 5×10⁻¹⁵M, and 10⁻¹⁵M.

The invention also provides antibodies that competitively inhibitbinding of an antibody to an epitope of the invention as determined byany method known in the art for determining competitive binding, forexample, the immunoassays described herein. In preferred embodiments,the antibody competitively inhibits binding to the epitope by at least95%, at least 90%, at least 85%, at least 80%, at least 75%, at least70%, at least 60%, or at least 50%.

Antibodies of the present invention may act as agonists or antagonistsof the polypeptides of the present invention. For example, the presentinvention includes antibodies which disrupt the receptor/ligandinteractions with the polypeptides of the invention either partially orfully. For example, the present invention includes antibodies whichdisrupt binding of polypeptides of the invention with TACI and/or BCMAand/or TR11, and/or TR11SV1, and/or TR11SV2. The invention features bothreceptor-specific antibodies and ligand-specific antibodies. Theinvention also features receptor-specific antibodies which do notprevent ligand binding but prevent receptor activation. Receptoractivation (i.e., signaling) may be determined by techniques describedherein or otherwise known in the art. For example, receptor activationcan be determined by detecting stimulation of the transcription factorNF-AT by measuring the expression of an NF-AT regulatory element linkedto a SEAP, beta-gal, CAT, or other reporter element. Alternatively,receptor activation can be determined by detecting the phosphorylation(e.g., tyrosine or serine/threonine) of the receptor or its substrate byimmunoprecipitation followed by western blot analysis (for example, asdescribed supra). In specific embodiments, antibodies are provided thatinhibit ligand or receptor activity by at least 95%, at least 90%, atleast 85%, at least 80%, at least 75% at least 70%, at least 60%, or atleast 50% of the activity in absence of the antibody.

The invention also features receptor-specific antibodies which bothprevent ligand binding and receptor activation as well as antibodiesthat recognize the receptor-ligand complex, and, preferably, do notspecifically recognize the unbound receptor or the unbound ligand.Likewise, included in the invention are neutralizing antibodies whichbind the ligand and prevent binding of the ligand to the receptor, aswell as antibodies which bind the ligand, thereby preventing receptoractivation, but do not prevent the ligand from binding the receptor.Further included in the invention are antibodies which activate thereceptor. These antibodies may act as receptor agonists, i.e.,potentiate or activate either all or a subset of the biologicalactivities of the ligand-mediated receptor activation. The antibodiesmay be specified as agonists, antagonists or inverse agonists forbiological activities comprising the specific biological activities ofthe peptides of the invention disclosed herein. The above antibodyagonists can be made using methods known in the art. See, e.g., PCTpublication WO 96/40281; U.S. Pat. No. 5,811,097; Deng et al., Blood92(6):1981-1988 (1998); Chen, et al., Cancer Res. 58(16):3668-3678(1998); Harrop et al., J. Immunol. 161(4):1786-1794 (1998); Zhu et al.,Cancer Res. 58(15):3209-3214 (1998); Yoon, et al., J. Immunol.160(7):3170-3179 (1998); Prat et al., J. Cell. Sci. 111 (Pt2):237-247(1998); Pitard et al., J. Immunol. Methods 205(2):177-190 (1997);Liautard et al., Cytokine 9(4):233-241 (1997); Carlson et al., J. Biol.Chem. 272(17):11295-11301 (1997); Taryman et al., Neuron 14(4):755-762(1995); Muller et al., Structure 6(9):1153-1167 (1998); Bartunek et al.,Cytokine 8(1):14-20 (1996) (which are all incorporated by referenceherein in their entireties).

Antibodies of the present invention may be used, for example, but notlimited to, to purify, detect, and target the polypeptides of thepresent invention, including both in vitro and in vivo diagnostic andtherapeutic methods. For example, the antibodies have use inimmunoassays for qualitatively and quantitatively measuring levels ofthe polypeptides of the present invention in biological samples. See,e.g., Harlow et al., Antibodies: A Laboratory Manual, (Cold SpringHarbor Laboratory Press, 2nd ed. 1988) (incorporated by reference hereinin its entirety).

As discussed in more detail below, the antibodies of the presentinvention may be used either alone or in combination with othercompositions. The antibodies may further be recombinantly fused to aheterologous polypeptide at the N- or C-terminus or chemicallyconjugated (including covalently and non-covalently conjugations) topolypeptides or other compositions. For example, antibodies of thepresent invention may be recombinantly fused or conjugated to moleculesuseful as labels in detection assays and effector molecules such asheterologous polypeptides, radionuclides, metal ion chelating agents,drugs, or toxins, or any combination thereof. A preferred radionuclideis ⁹⁰Y. Another preferred radionuclide is ¹¹¹In. See, e.g., PCTpublications WO 92/08495; WO 91/14438; WO 89/12624; U.S. Pat. No.5,314,995; and EP 396,387.

The antibodies of the invention include derivatives that are modified,i.e., by the covalent attachment of any type of molecule to the antibodysuch that covalent attachment does not prevent the antibody fromgenerating an anti-idiotypic response. For example, but not by way oflimitation, the antibody derivatives include antibodies that have beenmodified, e.g., by glycosylation, acetylation, pegylation,phosphylation, amidation, derivatization by known protecting/blockinggroups, proteolytic cleavage, linkage to a cellular ligand or otherprotein, etc. Any of numerous chemical modifications may be carried outby known techniques, including, but not limited to specific chemicalcleavage, acetylation, formylation, metabolic synthesis of tunicamycin,etc. Additionally, the derivative may contain one or more non-classicalamino acids.

The antibodies of the present invention may be generated by any suitablemethod known in the art. Polyclonal antibodies to an antigen-of-interest can be produced by various procedures well known in the art.For example, a polypeptide of the invention can be administered tovarious host animals including, but not limited to, rabbits, mice, rats,etc. to induce the production of sera containing polyclonal antibodiesspecific for the antigen. Various adjuvants may be used to increase theimmunological response, depending on the host species, and include butare not limited to, Freund's (complete and incomplete), mineral gelssuch as aluminum hydroxide, surface active substances such aslysolecithin, pluronic polyols, polyanions, peptides, oil emulsions,keyhole limpet hemocyanins, dinitrophenol, and potentially useful humanadjuvants such as BCG (bacille Calmette-Guerin) and corynebacteriumparvum. Such adjuvants are also well known in the art.

Monoclonal antibodies can be prepared using a wide variety of techniquesknown in the art including the use of hybridoma, recombinant, and phagedisplay technologies, or a combination thereof. For example, monoclonalantibodies can be produced using hybridoma techniques including thoseknown in the art and taught, for example, in Harlow et al., Antibodies:A Laboratory Manual, (Cold Spring Harbor Laboratory Press, 2nd ed.1988); Hammerling, et al., in: Monoclonal Antibodies and T-CellHybridomas 563-681 (Elsevier, N.Y., 1981) (said references incorporatedby reference in their entireties). The term “monoclonal antibody” asused herein is not limited to antibodies produced through hybridomatechnology. The term “monoclonal antibody” refers to an antibody that isderived from a single clone, including any eukaryotic, prokaryotic, orphage clone, and not the method by which it is produced. A “monoclonalantibody” may comprise, or alternatively consist of, two proteins, i.e.,a heavy and a light chain.

Methods for producing and screening for specific antibodies usinghybridoma technology are routine and well-known in the art and arediscussed in detail in Example 9. Briefly, mice can be immunized with apolypeptide of the invention or a cell expressing such peptide. Once animmune response is detected, e.g., antibodies specific for the antigenare detected in the mouse serum, the mouse spleen is harvested andsplenocytes isolated. The splenocytes are then fused by well-knowntechniques to any suitable myeloma cells, for example cells from cellline SP20 available from the ATCC. Hybridomas are selected and cloned bylimited dilution. The hybridoma clones are then assayed by methods knownin the art for cells that secrete antibodies capable of binding apolypeptide of the invention. Ascites fluid, which generally containshigh levels of antibodies, can be generated by immunizing mice withpositive hybridoma clones.

Accordingly, the present invention provides methods of generatingmonoclonal antibodies as well as antibodies produced by the methodcomprising culturing a hybridoma cell secreting an antibody of theinvention wherein, preferably, the hybridoma is generated by fusingsplenocytes isolated from a mouse immunized with an antigen of theinvention with myeloma cells and then screening the hybridomas resultingfrom the fusion for hybridoma clones that secrete an antibody able tobind a polypeptide of the invention.

Another well known method for producing both polyclonal and monoclonalhuman B cell lines is transformation using Epstein Barr Virus (EBV).Protocols for generating EBV-transformed B cell lines are commonly knownin the art, such as, for example, the protocol outlined in Chapter 7.22of Current Protocols in Immunology, Coligan et al., Eds., 1994, JohnWiley & Sons, NY, which is hereby incorporated in its entirety byreference herein. The source of B cells for transformation is commonlyhuman peripheral blood, but B cells for transformation may also bederived from other sources including, but not limited to, lymph nodes,tonsil, spleen, tumor tissue, and infected tissues. Tissues aregenerally made into single cell suspensions prior to EBV transformation.Additionally, steps may be taken to either physically remove orinactivate T cells (e.g., by treatment with cyclosporin A) in Bcell-containing samples, because T cells from individuals seropositivefor anti-EBV antibodies can suppress B cell immortalization by EBV.

In general, the sample containing human B cells is innoculated with EBV,and cultured for 3-4 weeks. A typical source of EBV is the culturesupernatant of the B95-8 cell line (ATCC #VR-1492). Physical signs ofEBV transformation can generally be seen towards the end of the 3-4 weekculture period. By phase-contrast microscopy, transformed cells mayappear large, clear, hairy and tend to aggregate in tight clusters ofcells. Initially, EBV lines are generally polyclonal. However, overprolonged periods of cell cultures, EBV lines may become monoclonal orpolyclonal as a result of the selective outgrowth of particular B cellclones. Alternatively, polyclonal EBV transformed lines may be subcloned(e.g., by limiting dilution culture) or fused with a suitable fusionpartner and plated at limiting dilution to obtain monoclonal B celllines. Suitable fusion partners for EBV transformed cell lines includemouse myeloma cell lines (e.g., SP2/0, X63-Ag8.653), heteromyeloma celllines (human x mouse; e.g, SPAM-8, SBC-H20, and CB-F7), and human celllines (e.g., GM 1500, SKO-007, RPMI 8226, and KR-4). Thus, the presentinvention also provides a method of generating polyclonal or monoclonalhuman antibodies against polypeptides of the invention or fragmentsthereof, comprising EBV-transformation of human B cells.

Antibody fragments that recognize specific epitopes may be generated byknown techniques. For example, Fab and F(ab′)2 fragments of theinvention may be produced by proteolytic cleavage of immunoglobulinmolecules, using enzymes such as papain (to produce Fab fragments) orpepsin (to produce F(ab′)2 fragments). F(ab′)2 fragments contain thevariable region, the light chain constant region and the CH1 domain ofthe heavy chain.

For example, the antibodies of the present invention can also begenerated using various phage display methods known in the art. In phagedisplay methods, functional antibody domains are displayed on thesurface of phage particles which carry the polynucleotide sequencesencoding them. In a particular embodiment, such phage can be utilized todisplay antigen-binding domains expressed from a repertoire orcombinatorial antibody library (e.g., human or murine). Phage expressingan antigen binding domain that binds the antigen of interest can beselected or identified with antigen, e.g., using labeled antigen orantigen bound or captured to a solid surface or bead. Phage used inthese methods are typically filamentous phage including fd and M13binding domains expressed from phage with Fab, Fv or disulfidestabilized Fv antibody domains recombinantly fused to either the phagegene II or gene VIII protein. Examples of phage display methods that canbe used to make the antibodies of the present invention include thosedisclosed in Brinkman et al., J. Immunol. Methods 182:41-50 (1995); Ameset al., J. Immunol. Methods 184:177-186 (1995); Kettleborough et al.,Eur. J. Immunol. 24:952-958 (1994); Persic et al., Gene 187 9-18 (1997);Burton et al., Advances in Immunology 57:191-280 (1994); PCT applicationNo. PCT/GB91/01134; PCT publications WO 90/02809; WO 91/10737; WO92/01047; WO 92/18619; WO 93/11236; WO 95/15982; WO 95/20401; and U.S.Pat. Nos. 5,698,426; 5,223,409; 5,403,484; 5,580,717; 5,427,908;5,750,753; 5,821,047; 5,571,698; 5,427,908; 5,516,637; 5,780,225;5,658,727; 5,733,743 and 5,969,108; each of which is incorporated hereinby reference in its entirety.

As described in the above references, after phage selection, theantibody coding regions from the phage can be isolated and used togenerate whole antibodies, including human antibodies, or any otherdesired antigen binding fragment, and expressed in any desired host,including mammalian cells, insect cells, plant cells, yeast, andbacteria, e.g., as described in detail below. For example, techniques torecombinantly produce Fab, Fab′ and F(ab′)2 fragments can also beemployed using methods known in the art such as those disclosed in PCTpublication WO 92/22324; Mullinax et al., BioTechniques 12(6):864-869(1992); and Sawai et al., AJRI 34:26-34 (1995); and Better et al.,Science 240:1041-1043 (1988) (said references incorporated by referencein their entireties).

Examples of techniques which can be used to produce single-chain Fvs andantibodies include those described in U.S. Pat. Nos. 4,946,778 and5,258,498; Huston et al., Methods in Enzymology 203:46-88 (1991); Shu etal., PNAS 90:7995-7999 (1993); and Skerra et al., Science 240:1038-1040(1988). For some uses, including in vivo use of antibodies in humans andin vitro detection assays, it may be preferable to use chimeric,humanized, or human antibodies. A chimeric antibody is a molecule inwhich different portions of the antibody are derived from differentanimal species, such as antibodies having a variable region derived froma murine monoclonal antibody and a human immunoglobulin constant region.Methods for producing chimeric antibodies are known in the art. Seee.g., Morrison, Science 229:1202 (1985); Oi et al., BioTechniques 4:214(1986); Gillies et al., (1989) J. Immunol. Methods 125:191-202; U.S.Pat. Nos. 5,807,715; 4,816,567; and 4,816397, which are incorporatedherein by reference in their entireties. Humanized antibodies areantibody molecules from non-human species antibody that binds thedesired antigen having one or more complementarity determining regions(CDRs) from the non-human species and framework regions from a humanimmunoglobulin molecule. Often, framework residues in the humanframework regions will be substituted with the corresponding residuefrom the CDR donor antibody to alter, preferably improve, antigenbinding. These framework substitutions are identified by methods wellknown in the art, e.g., by modeling of the interactions of the CDR andframework residues to identify framework residues important for antigenbinding and sequence comparison to identify unusual framework residuesat particular positions. (See, e.g., Queen et al., U.S. Pat. No.5,585,089; Riechmann et al., Nature 332:323 (1988), which areincorporated herein by reference in their entireties.) Antibodies can behumanized using a variety of techniques known in the art including, forexample, CDR-grafting (EP 239,400; PCT publication WO 91/09967; U.S.Pat. Nos. 5,225,539; 5,530,101; and 5,585,089), veneering or resurfacing(EP 592,106; EP 519,596; Padlan, Molecular Immunology 28(4/5):489-498(1991); Studnicka et al., Protein Engineering 7(6):805-814 (1994);Roguska. et al., PNAS 91:969-973 (1994)), and chain shuffling (U.S. Pat.No. 5,565,332).

Completely human antibodies are particularly desirable for therapeutictreatment of human patients. Human antibodies can be made by a varietyof methods known in the art including phage display methods describedabove using antibody libraries derived from human immunoglobulinsequences. See also, U.S. Pat. Nos. 4,444,887 and 4,716,111; and PCTpublications WO 98/46645, WO 98/50433, WO 98/24893, WO 98/16654, WO96/34096, WO 96/33735, and WO 91/10741; each of which is incorporatedherein by reference in its entirety.

Human antibodies can also be produced using transgenic mice which areincapable of expressing functional endogenous immunoglobulins, but whichcan express human immunoglobulin genes. For example, the human heavy andlight chain immunoglobulin gene complexes may be introduced randomly orby homologous recombination into mouse embryonic stem cells.Alternatively, the human variable region, constant region, and diversityregion may be introduced into mouse embryonic stem cells in addition tothe human heavy and light chain genes. The mouse heavy and light chainimmunoglobulin genes may be rendered non-functional separately orsimultaneously with the introduction of human immunoglobulin loci byhomologous recombination. In particular, homozygous deletion of the JHregion prevents endogenous antibody production. The modified embryonicstem cells are expanded and microinjected into blastocysts to producechimeric mice. The chimeric mice are then bred to produce homozygousoffspring that express human antibodies. The transgenic mice areimmunized in the normal fashion with a selected antigen, e.g., all or aportion of a polypeptide of the invention. Monoclonal antibodiesdirected against the antigen can be obtained from the immunized,transgenic mice using conventional hybridoma technology. The humanimmunoglobulin transgenes harbored by the transgenic mice rearrangeduring B cell differentiation, and subsequently undergo class switchingand somatic mutation. Thus, using such a technique, it is possible toproduce therapeutically useful IgG, IgA, IgM and IgE antibodies. For anoverview of this technology for producing human antibodies, see Lonbergand Huszar (1995, Int. Rev. Immunol. 13:65-93 (1995)). For a detaileddiscussion of this technology for producing human antibodies and humanmonoclonal antibodies and protocols for producing such antibodies, see,e.g., PCT publications WO 98/24893; WO 92/01047; WO 96/34096; WO96/33735; European Patent No. 0 598 877; U.S. Pat. Nos. 5,413,923;5,625,126; 5,633,425; 5,569,825; 5,661,016; 5,545,806; 5,814,318;5,885,793; 5,916,771; and 5,939,598, which are incorporated by referenceherein in their entirety. In addition, companies such as Abgenix, Inc.(Freemont, Calif.) and Genpharm (San Jose, Calif.) can be engaged toprovide human antibodies directed against a selected antigen usingtechnology similar to that described above.

Completely human antibodies which recognize a selected epitope can begenerated using a technique referred to as “guided selection.” In thisapproach a selected non-human monoclonal antibody, e.g., a mouseantibody, is used to guide the selection of a completely human antibodyrecognizing the same epitope. (Jespers et al., Bio/technology 12:899-903(1988)).

Further, antibodies to the polypeptides of the invention can, in turn,be utilized to generate anti-idiotype antibodies that “mimic”polypeptides of the invention using techniques well known to thoseskilled in the art. (See, e.g., Greenspan & Bona, FASEB J. 7(5):437-444;(1989) and Nissinoff, J. Immunol. 147(8):2429-2438 (1991)). For example,antibodies which bind to and competitively inhibit polypeptidemultimerization and/or binding of a polypeptide of the invention to aligand can be used to generate anti-idiotypes that “mimic” thepolypeptide multimerization and/or binding domain and, as a consequence,bind to and neutralize polypeptide and/or its ligand. Such neutralizinganti-idiotypes or Fab fragments of such anti-idiotypes can be used intherapeutic regimens to neutralize polypeptide ligand. For example, suchanti-idiotypic antibodies can be used to bind a polypeptide of theinvention and/or to bind its ligands/receptors, and thereby block itsbiological activity.

Intrabodies of the invention can be produced using methods known in theart, such as those disclosed and reviewed in Chen et al., Hum. GeneTher. 5:595-601 (1994); Marasco, W. A., Gene Ther. 4:11-15 (1997);Rondon and Marasco, Annu. Rev. Microbiol. 51:257-283 (1997); Proba etal., J. Mol. Biol. 275:245-253 (1998); Cohen et al., Oncogene17:2445-2456 (1998); Ohage and Steipe, J. Mol. Biol. 291:1119-1128(1999); Ohage et al., J. Mol. Biol. 291:1129-1134 (1999); Wirtz andSteipe, Protein Sci. 8:2245-2250 (1999); Zhu et al., J. Immunol. Methods231:207-222 (1999); and references cited therein. In particular, a CCR5intrabody has been produced by Steinberger et al., Proc. Natl. Acad.Sci. USA 97:805-810 (2000).

Polynucleotides Encoding Antibodies.

The invention further provides polynucleotides comprising a nucleotidesequence encoding an antibody of the invention and fragments thereof.The invention also encompasses polynucleotides that hybridize understringent or lower stringency hybridization conditions, e.g., as definedsupra, to polynucleotides that encode an antibody, preferably, thatspecifically binds to a polypeptide of the invention, preferably, anantibody that binds to a polypeptide having the amino acid sequence ofSEQ ID NO:2.

The polynucleotides may be obtained, and the nucleotide sequence of thepolynucleotides determined, by any method known in the art. For example,if the nucleotide sequence of the antibody is known, a polynucleotideencoding the antibody may be assembled from chemically synthesizedoligonucleotides (e.g., as described in Kutmeier et al., BioTechniques17:242 (1994)), which, briefly, involves the synthesis of overlappingoligonucleotides containing portions of the sequence encoding theantibody, annealing and ligation of those oligonucleotides, and thenamplification of the ligated oligonucleotides by PCR.

Alternatively, a polynucleotide encoding an antibody may be generatedfrom nucleic acid from a suitable source. If a clone containing anucleic acid encoding a particular antibody is not available, but thesequence of the antibody molecule is known, a nucleic acid encoding theimmunoglobulin may be chemically synthesized or obtained from a suitablesource (e.g., an antibody cDNA library, or a cDNA library generatedfrom, or nucleic acid, preferably poly A+ RNA, isolated from, any tissueor cells expressing the antibody, such as hybridoma cells selected toexpress an antibody of the invention) by PCR amplification usingsynthetic primers hybridizable to the 3′ and 5′ ends of the sequence orby cloning using an oligonucleotide probe specific for the particulargene sequence to identify, e.g., a cDNA clone from a cDNA library thatencodes the antibody. Amplified nucleic acids generated by PCR may thenbe cloned into replicable cloning vectors using any method well known inthe art.

Once the nucleotide sequence and corresponding amino acid sequence ofthe antibody is determined, the nucleotide sequence of the antibody maybe manipulated using methods well known in the art for the manipulationof nucleotide sequences, e.g., recombinant DNA techniques, site directedmutagenesis, PCR, etc. (see, for example, the techniques described inSambrook et al., 1990, Molecular Cloning, A Laboratory Manual, 2d Ed.,Cold Spring Harbor Laboratory, Cold Spring Harbor, N.Y. and Ausubel etal., eds., 1998, Current Protocols in Molecular Biology, John Wiley &Sons, NY, which are both incorporated by reference herein in theirentireties), to generate antibodies having a different amino acidsequence, for example to create amino acid substitutions, deletions,and/or insertions.

In a specific embodiment, the amino acid sequence of the heavy and/orlight chain variable domains may be inspected to identify the sequencesof the complementarity determining regions (CDRs) by methods that arewell known in the art, e.g., by comparison to known amino acid sequencesof other heavy and light chain variable regions to determine the regionsof sequence hypervariability. Using routine recombinant DNA techniques,one or more of the CDRs may be inserted within framework regions, e.g.,into human framework regions to humanize a non-human antibody, asdescribed supra. The framework regions may be naturally occurring orconsensus framework regions, and preferably human framework regions(see, e.g., Chothia et al., J. Mol. Biol. 278: 457-479 (1998) for alisting of human framework regions). Preferably, the polynucleotidegenerated by the combination of the framework regions and CDRs encodesan antibody that specifically binds a polypeptide of the invention.Preferably, as discussed supra, one or more amino acid substitutions maybe made within the framework regions, and, preferably, the amino acidsubstitutions improve binding of the antibody to its antigen.Additionally, such methods may be used to make amino acid substitutionsor deletions of one or more variable region cysteine residuesparticipating in an intrachain disulfide bond to generate antibodymolecules lacking one or more intrachain disulfide bonds. Otheralterations to the polynucleotide are encompassed by the presentinvention and within the skill of the art.

In addition, techniques developed for the production of “chimericantibodies” (Morrison et al., 1984, Proc. Natl. Acad. Sci. 81:851-855;Neuberger et al., 1984, Nature 312:604-608; Takeda et al., 1985, Nature314:452-454) by splicing genes from a mouse antibody molecule ofappropriate antigen specificity together with genes from a humanantibody molecule of appropriate biological activity can be used. Asdescribed supra, a chimeric antibody is a molecule in which differentportions are derived from different animal species, such as those havinga variable region derived from a murine mAb and a human immunoglobulinconstant region, e.g., humanized antibodies.

Alternatively, techniques described for the production of single chainantibodies (U.S. Pat. No. 4,946,778; Bird, 1988, Science 242:423-42;Huston et al., 1988, Proc. Natl. Acad. Sci. USA 85:5879-5883; and Wardet al., 1989, Nature 334:544-54) can be adapted to produce single chainantibodies. Single chain antibodies are formed by linking the heavy andlight chain fragments of the Fv region via an amino acid bridge,resulting in a single chain polypeptide. Techniques for the assembly offunctional Fv fragments in E. coli may also be used (Skerra et al.,1988, Science 242:1038-1041).

Methods of Producing Antibodies

The antibodies of the invention can be produced by any method known inthe art for the synthesis of antibodies, in particular, by chemicalsynthesis or preferably, by recombinant expression techniques.

Methods of producing antibodies include, but are not limited to,hybridoma technology, EBV transformation, and other methods discussedherein as well as through the use recombinant DNA technology, asdiscussed below.

Recombinant expression of an antibody of the invention, or fragment,derivative or analog thereof, (e.g., a heavy or light chain of anantibody or single chain antibody of the invention), requiresconstruction of an expression vector containing a polynucleotide thatencodes the antibody. Once a polynucleotide encoding an antibodymolecule or a heavy or light chain of an antibody, or portion thereof(preferably containing the heavy or light chain variable domain), of theinvention has been obtained, the vector for the production of theantibody molecule may be produced by recombinant DNA technology usingtechniques well known in the art. Thus, methods for preparing a proteinby expressing a polynucleotide containing an antibody encodingnucleotide sequence are described herein. Methods which are well knownto those skilled in the art can be used to construct expression vectorscontaining antibody coding sequences and appropriate transcriptional andtranslational control signals. These methods include, for example, invitro recombinant DNA techniques, synthetic techniques, and in vivogenetic recombination. The invention, thus, provides replicable vectorscomprising a nucleotide sequence encoding an antibody molecule of theinvention, or a heavy or light chain thereof, or a heavy or light chainvariable domain, operably linked to a promoter. Such vectors may includethe nucleotide sequence encoding the constant region of the antibodymolecule (see, e.g., PCT Publication WO 86/05807; PCT Publication WO89/01036; and U.S. Pat. No. 5,122,464) and the variable domain of theantibody may be cloned into such a vector for expression of the entireheavy or light chain.

The expression vector is transferred to a host cell by conventionaltechniques and the transfected cells are then cultured by conventionaltechniques to produce an antibody of the invention. Thus, the inventionincludes host cells containing a polynucleotide encoding an antibody ofthe invention, or a heavy or light chain thereof, operably linked to aheterologous promoter. In preferred embodiments for the expression ofdouble-chained antibodies, vectors encoding both the heavy and lightchains may be co-expressed in the host cell for expression of the entireimmunoglobulin molecule, as detailed below.

A variety of host-expression vector systems may be utilized to expressthe antibody molecules of the invention. Such host-expression systemsrepresent vehicles by which the coding sequences of interest may beproduced and subsequently purified, but also represent cells which may,when transformed or transfected with the appropriate nucleotide codingsequences, express an antibody molecule of the invention in situ. Theseinclude but are not limited to microorganisms such as bacteria (e.g., E.coli, B. subtilis) transformed with recombinant bacteriophage DNA,plasmid DNA or cosmid DNA expression vectors containing antibody codingsequences; yeast (e.g., Saccharomyces, Pichia) transformed withrecombinant yeast expression vectors containing antibody codingsequences; insect cell systems infected with recombinant virusexpression vectors (e.g., baculovirus) containing antibody codingsequences; plant cell systems infected with recombinant virus expressionvectors (e.g., cauliflower mosaic virus, CaMV; tobacco mosaic virus,TMV) or transformed with recombinant plasmid expression vectors (e.g.,Ti plasmid) containing antibody coding sequences; or mammalian cellsystems (e.g., COS, CHO, BHK, 293, 3T3, NSO cells) harboring recombinantexpression constructs containing promoters derived from the genome ofmammalian cells (e.g., metallothionein promoter) or from mammalianviruses (e.g., the adenovirus late promoter; the vaccinia virus 7.5Kpromoter). Preferably, bacterial cells such as Escherichia coli, andmore preferably, eukaryotic cells, especially for the expression ofwhole recombinant antibody molecule, are used for the expression of arecombinant antibody molecule. For example, mammalian cells such asChinese hamster ovary cells (CHO), in conjunction with a vector such asthe major intermediate early gene promoter element from humancytomegalovirus is an effective expression system for antibodies(Foecking et al., 1986, Gene 45:101; Cockett et al., 1990,Bio/Technology 8:2).

In bacterial systems, a number of expression vectors may beadvantageously selected depending upon the use intended for the antibodymolecule being expressed. For example, when a large quantity of such aprotein is to be produced, for the generation of pharmaceuticalcompositions of an antibody molecule, vectors which direct theexpression of high levels of fusion protein products that are readilypurified may be desirable. Such vectors include, but are not limited, tothe E. coli expression vector pUR278 (Ruther et al., 1983, EMBO J.2:1791), in which the antibody coding sequence may be ligatedindividually into the vector in frame with the lac Z coding region sothat a fusion protein is produced; pIN vectors (Inouye & Inouye, 1985,Nucleic Acids Res. 13:3101-3109; Van Heeke & Schuster, 1989, J. Biol.Chem. 24:5503-5509); and the like. pGEX vectors may also be used toexpress foreign polypeptides as fusion proteins with glutathioneS-transferase (GST). In general, such fusion proteins are soluble andcan easily be purified from lysed cells by adsorption and binding to amatrix glutathione-agarose beads followed by elution in the presence offree glutathione. The pGEX vectors are designed to include thrombin orfactor Xa protease cleavage sites so that the cloned target gene productcan be released from the GST moiety.

In an insect system, Autographa californica nuclear polyhedrosis virus(AcNPV) is used as a vector to express foreign genes. The virus grows inSpodoptera frugiperda cells. The antibody coding sequence may be clonedindividually into non-essential regions (for example the polyhedringene) of the virus and placed under control of an AcNPV promoter (forexample the polyhedrin promoter).

In mammalian host cells, a number of viral-based expression systems maybe utilized. In cases where an adenovirus is used as an expressionvector, the antibody coding sequence of interest may be ligated to anadenovirus transcription/translation control complex, e.g., the latepromoter and tripartite leader sequence. This chimeric gene may then beinserted in the adenovirus genome by in vitro or in vivo recombination.Insertion in a non- essential region of the viral genome (e.g., regionE1 or E3) will result in a recombinant virus that is viable and capableof expressing the antibody molecule in infected hosts. (e.g., see Logan& Shenk, 1984, Proc. Natl. Acad. Sci. USA 81:355-359). Specificinitiation signals may also be required for efficient translation ofinserted antibody coding sequences. These signals include the ATGinitiation codon and adjacent sequences. Furthermore, the initiationcodon must be in phase with the reading frame of the desired codingsequence to ensure translation of the entire insert. These exogenoustranslational control signals and initiation codons can be of a varietyof origins, both natural and synthetic. The efficiency of expression maybe enhanced by the inclusion of appropriate transcription enhancerelements, transcription terminators, etc. (see Bittner et al., 1987,Methods in Enzymol. 153:51-544).

In addition, a host cell strain may be chosen which modulates theexpression of the inserted sequences, or modifies and processes the geneproduct in the specific fashion desired. Such modifications (e.g.,glycosylation) and processing (e.g., cleavage) of protein products maybe important for the function of the protein. Different host cells havecharacteristic and specific mechanisms for the post-translationalprocessing and modification of proteins and gene products. Appropriatecell lines or host systems can be chosen to ensure the correctmodification and processing of the foreign protein expressed. To thisend, eukaryotic host cells which possess the cellular machinery forproper processing of the primary transcript, glycosylation, andphosphorylation of the gene product may be used. Such mammalian hostcells include but are not limited to CHO, VERY, BHK, Hela, NSO, COS,MDCK, 293, 3T3, WI38, and in particular, breast cancer cell lines suchas, for example, BT483, Hs578T, HTB2, BT20 and T47D, and normal mammarygland cell line such as, for example, CRL7030 and Hs578Bst.

For long-term, high-yield production of recombinant proteins, stableexpression is preferred. For example, cell lines which stably expressthe antibody molecule may be engineered. Rather than using expressionvectors which contain viral origins of replication, host cells can betransformed with DNA controlled by appropriate expression controlelements (e.g., promoter, enhancer, sequences, transcriptionterminators, polyadenylation sites, etc.), and a selectable marker.Following the introduction of the foreign DNA, engineered cells may beallowed to grow for 1-2 days in an enriched media, and then are switchedto a selective media. The selectable marker in the recombinant plasmidconfers resistance to the selection and allows cells to stably integratethe plasmid into their chromosomes and grow to form foci which in turncan be cloned and expanded into cell lines. This method mayadvantageously be used to engineer cell lines which express the antibodymolecule. Such engineered cell lines may be particularly useful inscreening and evaluation of compounds that interact directly orindirectly with the antibody molecule.

A number of selection systems may be used, including but not limited tothe herpes simplex virus thymidine kinase (Wigler et al., 1977, Cell11:223), hypoxanthine-guanine phosphoribosyltransferase (Szybalska &Szybalski, 192, Proc. Natl. Acad. Sci. USA 48:202), and adeninephosphoribosyltransferase (Lowy et al., 1980, Cell 22:817) genes can beemployed in tk-, hgprt- or aprt- cells, respectively. Also,antimetabolite resistance can be used as the basis of selection for thefollowing genes: dhfr, which confers resistance to methotrexate (Wigleret al., 1980, Natl. Acad. Sci. USA 77:357; O'Hare et al., 1981, Proc.Natl. Acad. Sci. USA 78:1527); gpt, which confers resistance tomycophenolic acid (Mulligan & Berg, 1981, Proc. Natl. Acad. Sci. USA78:2072); neo, which confers resistance to the aminoglycoside G-418Clinical Pharmacy 12:488-505; Wu and Wu, 1991, Biotherapy 3:87-95;Tolstoshev, 1993, Ann. Rev. Pharmacol. Toxicol. 32:573-596; Mulligan,1993, Science 260:926-932; and Morgan and Anderson, 1993, Ann. Rev.Biochem. 62:191-217; May, 1993, TIB TECH 11(5):155-215); and hygro,which confers resistance to hygromycin (Santerre et al., 1984, Gene30:147). Methods commonly known in the art of recombinant DNA technologywhich can be used are described in Ausubel et al. (eds.), 1993, CurrentProtocols in Molecular Biology, John Wiley & Sons, NY; Kriegler, 1990,Gene Transfer and Expression, A Laboratory Manual, Stockton Press, NY;and in Chapters 12 and 13, Dracopoli et al. (eds), 1994, CurrentProtocols in Human Genetics, John Wiley & Sons, NY.; Colberre-Garapin etal., 1981, J. Mol. Biol. 150:1, which are incorporated by referenceherein in their entireties.

The expression levels of an antibody molecule can be increased by vectoramplification (for a review, see Bebbington and Hentschel, The use ofvectors based on gene amplification for the expression of cloned genesin mammalian cells in DNA cloning, Vol.3. (Academic Press, New York,1987)). When a marker in the vector system expressing antibody isamplifiable, increase in the level of inhibitor present in culture ofhost cell will increase the number of copies of the marker gene. Sincethe amplified region is associated with the antibody gene, production ofthe antibody will also increase (Crouse et al., 1983, Mol. Cell. Biol.3:257).

Vectors which use glutamine synthase (GS) or DHFR as the selectablemarker can be amplified in the presence of the drugs methioninesulphoximine or methotrexate, respectively. An advantage of glutaminesynthase based vectors are the availabilty of cell lines (e.g., themurine myeloma cell line, NSO) which are glutamine synthase negative.Glutamine synthase expression systems can also function in glutaminesynthase expressing cells (e.g. Chinese Hamster Ovary (CHO) cells) byproviding additional inhibitor to prevent the functioning of theendogenous gene. A glutamine synthase expression system and componentsthereof are detailed in PCT publications: WO87/04462; WO86/05807;WO89/01036; WO89/10404; and WO91/06657 which are incorporated in theirentireties by reference herein. Additionally, glutamine synthaseexpression vectors that may be used according to the present inventionare commercially available from suplliers, including, for example LonzaBiologics, Inc. (Portsmouth, N.H.). Expression and production ofmonoclonal antibodies using a GS expression system in murine myelomacells is described in Bebbington et al., Bio/technology 10:169(1992) andin Biblia and Robinson Biotechnol. Prog. 11:1 (1995) which areincorporated in their entirities by reference herein.

The host cell may be co-transfected with two expression vectors of theinvention, the first vector encoding a heavy chain derived polypeptideand the second vector encoding a light chain derived polypeptide. Thetwo vectors may contain identical selectable markers which enable equalexpression of heavy and light chain polypeptides. Alternatively, asingle vector may be used which encodes both heavy and light chainpolypeptides. In such situations, the light chain should be placedbefore the heavy chain to avoid an excess of toxic free heavy chain(Proudfoot, 1986, Nature 322:52; Kohler, 1980, Proc. Natl. Acad. Sci.USA 77:2197). The coding sequences for the heavy and light chains maycomprise cDNA or genomic DNA.

Once an antibody molecule of the invention has been produced by ananimal, chemically synthesized or recombinantly expressed, it may bepurified by any method known in the art for purification of animmunoglobulin molecule, for example, by chromatography (e.g., ionexchange, affinity, particularly by affinity for the specific antigenafter Protein A, and sizing column chromatography), centrifugation,differential solubility, or by any other standard technique for thepurification of proteins. In addition, the antibodies of the presentinvention or fragments thereof can be fused to heterologous polypeptidesequences described herein or otherwise known in the art, to facilitatepurification.

Antibody conjugates

The present invention encompasses antibodies recombinantly fused orchemically conjugated (including both covalently and non-covalentlyconjugations) to a polypeptide (or portion thereof, preferably at least10, 20, 30, 40, 50, 60, 70, 80, 90 or 100 amino acids of thepolypeptide) of the present invention to generate fusion proteins. Thefusion does not necessarily need to be direct, but may occur throughlinker sequences. The antibodies may be specific for antigens other thanpolypeptides (or portion thereof, preferably at least 10, 20, 30, 40,50, 60, 70, 80, 90 or 100 amino acids of the polypeptide) of the presentinvention. For example, antibodies may be used to target thepolypeptides of the present invention to particular cell types, eitherin vitro or in vivo, by fusing or conjugating the polypeptides of thepresent invention to antibodies specific for particular cell surfacereceptors. Antibodies fused or conjugated to the polypeptides of thepresent invention may also be used in in vitro immunoassays andpurification methods using methods known in the art. See e.g., Harbor etal., supra, and PCT publication WO 93/21232; EP 439,095; Naramura etal., Immunol. Lett. 39:91-99 (1994); U.S. Pat. No. 5,474,981; Gillies etal., PNAS 89:1428-1432 (1992); Fell et al., J. Immunol.146:2446-2452(1991), which are incorporated by reference in theirentireties.

The present invention further includes compositions comprising thepolypeptides of the present invention fused or conjugated to antibodydomains other than the variable regions. For example, the polypeptidesof the present invention may be fused or conjugated to an antibody Fcregion, or portion thereof. The antibody portion fused to a polypeptideof the present invention may comprise the constant region, hinge region,CH1 domain, CH2 domain, and CH3 domain or any combination of wholedomains or portions thereof. The polypeptides may also be fused orconjugated to the above antibody portions to form multimers. Forexample, Fc portions fused to the polypeptides of the present inventioncan form dimers through disulfide bonding between the Fc portions.Higher multimeric forms can be made by fusing the polypeptides toportions of IgA and IgM. Methods for fusing or conjugating thepolypeptides of the present invention to antibody portions are known inthe art. See, e.g., U.S. Pat. Nos. 5,336,603; 5,622,929; 5,359,046;5,349,053; 5,447,851; 5,112,946; EP 307,434; EP 367,166; PCTpublications WO 96/04388; WO 91/06570; Ashkenazi et al., Proc. Natl.Acad. Sci. USA 88:10535-10539 (1991); Zheng et al., J. Immunol.154:5590-5600 (1995); and Vil et al., Proc. Natl. Acad. Sci. USA89:11337-11341(1992) (said references incorporated by reference in theirentireties).

As discussed, supra, the polypeptides of the present invention may befused or conjugated to the above antibody portions to increase the invivo half life of the polypeptides or for use in immunoassays usingmethods known in the art. Further, the polypeptides of the presentinvention may be fused or conjugated to the above antibody portions tofacilitate purification. One reported example describes chimericproteins consisting of the first two domains of the humanCD4-polypeptide and various domains of the constant regions of the heavyor light chains of mammalian immunoglobulins. (EP 394,827; Traunecker etal., Nature 331:84-86 (1988). The polypeptides of the present inventionfused or conjugated to an antibody having disulfide- linked dimericstructures (due to the IgG) may also be more efficient in binding andneutralizing other molecules, than the monomeric secreted protein orprotein fragment alone. (Fountoulakis et al., J. Biochem. 270:3958-3964(1995)). In many cases, the Fc part in a fusion protein is beneficial intherapy and diagnosis, and thus can result in, for example, improvedpharmacokinetic properties. (EP A 232,262). Alternatively, deleting theFc part after the fusion protein has been expressed, detected, andpurified, would be desired. For example, the Fc portion may hindertherapy and diagnosis if the fusion protein is used as an antigen forimmunizations. In drug discovery, for example, human proteins, such ashIL-5, have been fused with Fc portions for the purpose ofhigh-throughput screening assays to identify antagonists of hIL-5. (See,D. Bennett et al., J. Molecular Recognition 8:52-58 (1995); K. Johansonet al., J. Biol. Chem. 270:9459-9471 (1995)0.

Moreover, the antibodies or fragments thereof of the present inventioncan be fused to marker sequences, such as a peptide to facilitates theirpurification. In preferred embodiments, the marker amino acid sequenceis a hexa-histidine peptide, such as the tag provided in a pQE vector(QIAGEN, Inc., 9259 Eton Avenue, Chatsworth, Calif., 91311), amongothers, many of which are commercially available. As described in Gentzet al., Proc. Natl. Acad. Sci. USA 86:821-824 (1989), for instance,hexa-histidine provides for convenient purification of the fusionprotein. Other peptide tags useful for purification include, but are notlimited to, the “HA” tag, which corresponds to an epitope derived fromthe influenza hemagglutinin protein (Wilson et al., Cell 37:767 (1984))and the “flag” tag.

The present invention further encompasses antibodies or fragmentsthereof conjugated to a diagnostic or therapeutic agent. The antibodiescan be used diagnostically to, for example, monitor the development orprogression of a tumor as part of a clinical testing procedure to, e.g.,determine the efficacy of a given treatment regimen. Detection can befacilitated by coupling the antibody to a detectable substance. Examplesof detectable substances include various enzymes, prosthetic groups,fluorescent materials, luminescent materials, bioluminescent materials,radioactive materials, positron emitting metals using various positronemission tomographies, and nonradioactive paramagnetic metal ions. Thedetectable substance may be coupled or conjugated either directly to theantibody (or fragment thereof) or indirectly, through an intermediate(such as, for example, a linker known in the art) using techniques knownin the art. See, for example, U.S. Pat. No. 4,741,900 for metal ionswhich can be conjugated to antibodies for use as diagnostics accordingto the present invention. Examples of suitable enzymes includehorseradish peroxidase, alkaline phosphatase, beta-galactosidase, oracetylcholinesterase; examples of suitable prosthetic group complexesinclude streptavidin/biotin and avidin/biotin; examples of suitablefluorescent materials include umbelliferone, fluorescein, fluoresceinisothiocyanate, rhodamine, dichlorotriazinylamine fluorescein, dansylchloride or phycoerythrin; an example of a luminescent material includesluminol; examples of bioluminescent materials include luciferase,luciferin, and aequorin; and examples of suitable radioactive materialinclude iodine (¹³¹I, ¹²⁵I, ¹²³I, ¹²¹I), carbon (¹⁴C), sulfur (³⁵S),tritium (³H), indium (^(115m)In, ^(113m)In, 112In, ¹¹¹In), andtechnetium (⁹⁹Tc, ^(99m)Tc), thallium (²⁰¹Ti), gallium (⁶⁸Ga, ⁶⁷Ga),palladium (¹⁰³Pd), molybdenum (⁹⁹Mo), xenon (¹³³Xe), fluorine (¹⁸F),¹⁵³Sm, ¹⁷⁷Lu, ¹⁵⁹Gd, ¹⁴⁹Pm, ¹⁴⁰La, ¹⁷⁵Yb, ¹⁶⁶Ho, ⁹⁰Y, ⁴⁷Sc, ¹⁸⁶Re,¹⁸⁸Re, ¹⁴²Pr, ¹⁰⁵Rh, ⁹⁷Ru; luminescent labels, such as luminol; andfluorescent labels, such as fluorescein and rhodamine, and biotin.

In specific embodiments, antibodies of the invention are attached tomacrocyclic chelators useful for conjugating radiometal ions, includingbut not limited to, ¹⁷⁷Lu, ⁹⁰Y, ¹⁶⁶Ho, and ¹⁵³Sm, to polypeptides. In apreferred embodiment, the radiometal ion associated with the macrocyclicchelator attached to antibodies of the invention is ¹¹¹In. In anotherpreferred embodiments, the radiometal ion associated with themacrocyclic chelator attached to antibodies of the invention is ⁹⁰Y. Inspecific embodiments, the macrocyclic chelator is1,4,7,10-tetraazacyclododecane-N,N′,N″,N′″-tetraacetic acid (DOTA). Inother specific embodiments, the DOTA is attached to the TNF delta and/orTNF epsilon polypeptide of the invention via a linker molecule. Examplesof linker molecules useful for conjugating DOTA to a polypeptide arecommonly known in the art—see, for example, DeNardo et al., Clin CancerRes. 4(10):2483-90, 1998; Peterson et al., Bioconjug. Chem. 10(4):553-7,1999; and Zimmerman et al, Nucl. Med. Biol. 26(8):943-50, 1999 which arehereby incorporated by reference in their entirety. In addition, U.S.Pat. Nos. 5,652,361 and 5,756,065, which disclose chelating agents thatmay be conjugated to antibodies, and methods for making and using them,are hereby incorporated by reference in their entireties.

Techniques known in the art may be applied to label antibodies of theinvention. Such techniques include, but are not limited to, the use ofbifunctional conjugating agents (see e.g., U.S. Pat. Nos. 5,756,065;5,714,631; 5,696,239; 5,652,361; 5,505,931; 5,489,425; 5,435,990;5,428,139; 5,342,604; 5,274,119; 4,994,560; and 5,808,003; the contentsof each of which are hereby incorporated by reference in its entirety)and direct coupling reactions (e.g., Bolton-Hunter and Chloramine-Treaction).

Further, an antibody or fragment thereof may be conjugated to atherapeutic moiety such as a cytotoxin, e.g., a cytostatic or cytocidalagent, a therapeutic agent or a radioactive metal ion. A cytotoxin orcytotoxic agent includes any agent that is detrimental to cells.Examples include paclitaxol, cytochalasin B, gramicidin D, ethidiumbromide, emetine, mitomycin, etoposide, tenoposide, vincristine,vinblastine, colchicin, doxorubicin, daunorubicin, dihydroxy anthracindione, mitoxantrone, mithramycin, actinomycin D, 1-dehydrotestosterone,glucocorticoids, procaine, tetracaine, lidocaine, propranolol, andpuromycin and analogs or homologs thereof. Therapeutic agents include,but are not limited to, antimetabolites (e.g., methotrexate,6-mercaptopurine, 6-thioguanine, cytarabine, 5-fluorouracildecarbazine), alkylating agents (e.g., mechlorethamine, thioepachlorambucil, melphalan, carmustine (BSNU) and lomustine (CCNU),cyclothosphamide, busulfan, dibromomannitol, streptozotocin, mitomycinC, and cis-dichlorodiamine platinum (II) (DDP) cisplatin),anthracyclines (e.g., daunorubicin (formerly daunomycin) anddoxorubicin), antibiotics (e.g., dactinomycin (formerly actinomycin),bleomycin, mithramycin, and anthramycin (AMC)), and anti-mitotic agents(e.g., vincristine and vinblastine).

The conjugates of the invention can be used for modifying a givenbiological response, the therapeutic agent or drug moiety is not to beconstrued as limited to classical chemical therapeutic agents. Forexample, the drug moiety may be a protein or polypeptide possessing adesired biological activity. Such proteins may include, for example, atoxin such as abrin, ricin A, pseudomonas exotoxin, or diphtheria toxin;a protein such as tumor necrosis factor, a-interferon, β-interferon,nerve growth factor, platelet derived growth factor, tissue plasminogenactivator, an apoptotic agent, e.g., TNF-alpha, TNF-beta, AIM I (See,International Publication No. WO 97/33899), AIM II (See, InternationalPublication No. WO 97/34911), Fas Ligand (Takahashi et al., Int.Immunol., 6:1567-1574 (1994)), VEGI (See, International Publication No.WO 99/23105), CD40 Ligand, a thrombotic agent or an anti- angiogenicagent, e.g., angiostatin or endostatin; or, biological responsemodifiers such as, for example, lymphokines, interleukin-1 (“IL-1”),interleukin-2 (“IL-2”), interleukin-6 (“IL-6”), granulocyte macrophasecolony stimulating factor (“GM-CSF”), granulocyte colony stimulatingfactor (“G-CSF”), or other growth factors.

Antibodies may also be attached to solid supports, which areparticularly useful for immunoassays or purification of the targetantigen. Such solid supports include, but are not limited to, glass,cellulose, polyacrylamide, nylon, polystyrene, polyvinyl chloride orpolypropylene.

Techniques for conjugating such therapeutic moiety to antibodies arewell known, see, e.g., Arnon et al., “Monoclonal Antibodies ForImmunotargeting Of Drugs In Cancer Therapy”, in Monoclonal AntibodiesAnd Cancer Therapy, Reisfeld et al. (eds.), pp. 243-56 (Alan R. Liss,Inc. 1985); Hellstrom et al., “Antibodies For Drug Delivery”, inControlled Drug Delivery (2nd Ed.), Robinson et al. (eds.), pp. 623-53(Marcel Dekker, Inc. 1987); Thorpe, “Antibody Carriers Of CytotoxicAgents In Cancer Therapy: A Review”, in Monoclonal Antibodies '84:Biological And Clinical Applications, Pinchera et al. (eds.), pp.475-506 (1985); “Analysis, Results, And Future Prospective Of TheTherapeutic Use Of Radiolabeled Antibody In Cancer Therapy”, inMonoclonal Antibodies For Cancer Detection And Therapy, Baldwin et al.(eds.), pp. 303-16 (Academic Press 1985), and Thorpe et al., “ThePreparation And Cytotoxic Properties Of Antibody-Toxin Conjugates”,Immunol. Rev. 62:119-58 (1982).

Alternatively, an antibody can be conjugated to a second antibody toform an antibody heteroconjugate as described by Segal in U.S. Pat. No.4,676,980, which is incorporated herein by reference in its entirety.

An antibody, with or without a therapeutic moiety conjugated to it,administered alone or in combination with cytotoxic factor(s) and/orcytokine(s) can be used as a therapeutic.

Immunophenotyping

The antibodies of the invention may be utilized for immunophenotyping ofcell lines and biological samples. The translation product of the geneof the present invention may be useful as a cell specific marker, ormore specifically as a cellular marker that is differentially expressedat various stages of differentiation and/or maturation of particularcell types. Monoclonal antibodies directed against a specific epitope,or combination of epitopes, will allow for the screening of cellularpopulations expressing the marker. Various techniques can be utilizedusing monoclonal antibodies to screen for cellular populationsexpressing the marker(s), and include magnetic separation usingantibody-coated magnetic beads, “panning” with antibody attached to asolid matrix (i.e., plate), and flow cytometry (See, e.g., U.S. Pat. No.5,985,660; and Morrison et al., Cell, 96:737-49 (1999)).

These techniques allow for the screening of particular populations ofcells, such as might be found with hematological malignancies (i.e.minimal residual disease (MRD) in acute leukemic patients) and“non-self” cells in transplantations to prevent Graft-versus-HostDisease (GVHD). Alternatively, these techniques allow for the screeningof hematopoietic stem and progenitor cells capable of undergoingproliferation and/or differentiation, as might be found in humanumbilical cord blood.

Assays For Antibody Binding

The antibodies of the invention may be assayed for immunospecificbinding by any method known in the art. The immunoassays which can beused include but are not limited to competitive and non-competitiveassay systems using techniques such as western blots, radioimmunoassays,ELISA (enzyme linked immunosorbent assay), “sandwich” immunoassays,immunoprecipitation assays, precipitin reactions, gel diffusionprecipitin reactions, immunodiffusion assays, agglutination assays,complement-fixation assays, immunoradiometric assays, fluorescentimmunoassays, protein A immunoassays, to name but a few. Such assays areroutine and well known in the art (see, e.g., Ausubel et al, eds, 1994,Current Protocols in Molecular Biology, Vol. 1, John Wiley & Sons, Inc.,New York, which is incorporated by reference herein in its entirety).Exemplary immunoassays are described briefly below (but are not intendedby way of limitation).

Immunoprecipitation protocols generally comprise lysing a population ofcells in a lysis buffer such as RIPA buffer (1% NP-40 or Triton X-100,1% sodium deoxycholate, 0.1% SDS, 0.15 M NaCl, 0.01 M sodium phosphateat pH 7.2, 1% Trasylol) supplemented with protein phosphatase and/orprotease inhibitors (e.g., EDTA, PMSF, aprotinin, sodium vanadate),adding the antibody of interest to the cell lysate, incubating for aperiod of time (e.g., 1-4 hours) at 4° C., adding protein A and/orprotein G sepharose beads to the cell lysate, incubating for about anhour or more at 4° C, washing the beads in lysis buffer and resuspendingthe beads in SDS/sample buffer. The ability of the antibody of interestto immunoprecipitate a particular antigen can be assessed by, e.g.,western blot analysis. One of skill in the art would be knowledgeable asto the parameters that can be modified to increase the binding of theantibody to an antigen and decrease the background (e.g., pre-clearingthe cell lysate with sepharose beads). For further discussion regardingimmunoprecipitation protocols see, e.g., Ausubel et al, eds, 1994,Current Protocols in Molecular Biology, Vol. 1, John Wiley & Sons, Inc.,New York at 10.16.1.

Western blot analysis generally comprises preparing protein samples,electrophoresis of the protein samples in a polyacrylamide gel (e.g.,8%-20% SDS-PAGE depending on the molecular weight of the antigen),transferring the protein sample from the polyacrylamide gel to amembrane such as nitrocellulose, PVDF or nylon, blocking the membrane inblocking solution (e.g., PBS with 3% BSA or non-fat milk), washing themembrane in washing buffer (e.g., PBS-Tween 20), blocking the membranewith primary antibody (the antibody of interest) diluted in blockingbuffer, washing the membrane in washing buffer, blocking the membranewith a secondary antibody (which recognizes the primary antibody, e.g.,an anti-human antibody) conjugated to an enzymatic substrate (e.g.,horseradish peroxidase or alkaline phosphatase) or radioactive molecule(e.g., ³²P or ¹²⁵I) diluted in blocking buffer, washing the membrane inwash buffer, and detecting the presence of the antigen. One of skill inthe art would be knowledgeable as to the parameters that can be modifiedto increase the signal detected and to reduce the background noise. Forfurther discussion regarding western blot protocols see, e.g., Ausubelet al, eds, 1994, Current Protocols in Molecular Biology, Vol. 1, JohnWiley & Sons, Inc., New York at 10.8.1.

ELISAs comprise preparing antigen, coating the well of a 96 wellmicrotiter plate with the antigen, adding the antibody of interestconjugated to a detectable compound such as an enzymatic substrate(e.g., horseradish peroxidase or alkaline phosphatase) to the well andincubating for a period of time, and detecting the presence of theantigen. In ELISAs the antibody of interest does not have to beconjugated to a detectable compound; instead, a second antibody (whichrecognizes the antibody of interest) conjugated to a detectable compoundmay be added to the well. Further, instead of coating the well with theantigen, the antibody may be coated to the well. In this case, a secondantibody conjugated to a detectable compound may be added following theaddition of the antigen of interest to the coated well. One of skill inthe art would be knowledgeable as to the parameters that can be modifiedto increase the signal detected as well as other variations of ELISAsknown in the art. For further discussion regarding ELISAs see, e.g.,Ausubel et al, eds, 1994, Current Protocols in Molecular Biology, Vol.1, John Wiley & Sons, Inc., New York at 11.2.1.

The binding affinity of an antibody to an antigen and the off-rate of anantibody-antigen interaction can be determined by competitive bindingassays. One example of a competitive binding assay is a radioimmunoassaycomprising the incubation of labeled antigen (e.g., ³H or ¹²⁵I) with theantibody of interest in the presence of increasing amounts of unlabeledantigen, and the detection of the antibody bound to the labeled antigen.The affinity of the antibody of interest for a particular antigen andthe binding off-rates can be determined from the data by scatchard plotanalysis. Competition with a second antibody can also be determinedusing radioimmunoassays. In this case, the antigen is incubated withantibody of interest is conjugated to a labeled compound (e.g., 3H or125I) in the presence of increasing amounts of an unlabeled secondantibody.

Therapeutic Uses

The present invention is further directed to antibody-based therapieswhich involve administering antibodies of the invention to an animal,preferably a mammal, and most preferably a human, patient for treatingone or more of the described disorders. Therapeutic compounds of theinvention include, but are not limited to, antibodies of the invention(including fragments, analogs and derivatives thereof as describedherein) and nucleic acids encoding antibodies of the invention(including fragments, analogs and derivatives thereof as describedherein). The antibodies of the invention can be used to treat, inhibitor prevent diseases and disorders associated with aberrant expressionand/or activity of a polypeptide of the invention and/or a receptor forthe polypeptide of the invention (e.g., transmembrane activator and CAMLinteractor (TACI, GenBank accesion number AAC51790), and B-cellmaturation antigen (BCMA, GenBank accession number NP_(—)001183)),including, but not limited to, any one or more of the diseases,disorders, or conditions described herein (e.g., autoimmune diseases,disorders, or conditions associated with such diseases or disorders,including, but not limited to, autoimmune hemolytic anemia (includingbut not limited to cryoglobinemia or Coombs positive anemia), autoimmuneneonatal thrombocytopenia, idiopathic thrombocytopenia purpura,autoimmunocytopenia, autoimmune neutropenia, hemolytic anemia,antiphospholipid syndrome, dermatitis (e.g., atopic dermatitis),allergic encephalomyelitis, myocarditis, relapsing polychondritis,rheumatic heart disease, Multiple Sclerosis, Neuritis, UveitisOphthalmia, Polyendocrinopathies, Purpura (e.g., Henloch-Scoenleinpurpura), Reiter's Disease, Stiff-Man Syndrome, Autoimmune PulmonaryInflammation, Guillain-Barre Syndrome, diabetes mellitus (e.g., Type Idiabetes mellitus or insulin dependent diabetes mellitus, juvenile onsetdiabetes, and autoimmune inflammatory eye, autoimmune thyroiditis,hypothyroidism (i.e., Hashimoto's thyroiditis, systemic lupuserhythematosus, discoid lupus, Goodpasture's syndrome, Pemphigus,Receptor autoimmunities such as, for example, (a) Graves' Disease, (b)Myasthenia Gravis, and (c) insulin resistance, autoimmune hemolyticanemia, autoimmune thrombocytopenic purpura, rheumatoid arthritis,schleroderma with anti-collagen antibodies, mixed connective tissuedisease, polymyositis/dermatomyositis, pernicious anemia (Addison'sdisease), idiopathic Addison's disease, infertility, glomerulonephritissuch as primary glomerulonephritis, IgA glomerulonephritis, and IgAnephropathy, bullous pemphigoid, Sjögren's syndrome, diabetes millitus,and adrenergic drug resistance (including adrenergic drug resistancewith asthma or cystic fibrosis), gluten sensitive enteropathy, densedeposit disease, chronic active hepatitis, primary biliary cirrhosis,other endocrine gland failure, vitiligo, vasculitis, post-MI, cardiotomysyndrome, urticaria, atopic dermatitis, asthma, inflammatory myopathies,and other inflammatory, granulamatous, degenerative, and atrophicdisorders) and other disorders such as inflammatory skin diseasesincluding psoriasis and sclerosis, responses associated withinflammatory bowel disease (such as Crohn's disease and ulcerativecolitis), respiratory distress syndrome (including adult respiratorydistress syndrome, ARDS), meningitis, encephalitis, colitis, allergicconditions such as eczema and other conditions involving infiltration ofT cells and chronic inflammatory responses, atherosclerosis, leukocyteadhesion deficiency, Reynaud's syndrome, and immune responses associatedwith acute and delayed hypersensitivity mediated by cytokines andT-lymphocytes typically found in tuberculosis, sarcoidosis,granulomatosis and diseases involving leukocyte diapedesis, centralnervous system (CNS) inflammatory disorder, multiple organ injurysyndrome, antigen-antibody complex mediated diseases, anti-glomerularbasement membrane disease, Lambert-Eaton myasthenic syndrome, Beheetdisease, giant cell arteritis, immune complex nephritis, IgAnephropathy, IgM polyneuropathies or autoimmune thrombocytopenia etc.

In a specific embodiment, antibodies of the invention are be used totreat, inhibit, prognose, diagnose or prevent rheumatoid arthritis. In aanother embodiment, antibodies of the invention are used to treat,inhibit, prognose, diagnose or prevent advanced rheumatoid arthritis.

In another specific embodiment, antibodies of the invention are used totreat, inhibit, prognose, diagnose or prevent systemic lupuserythematosis.

For example, an antibody, or antibodies, of the present invention areused to treat patients with clinical diagnosis of rheumatoid arthritis(RA). The patient treated will not have a B cell malignancy. Moreover,the patient is optionally further treated with any one or more agentsemployed for treating RA such as salicylate; nonsteroidalanti-inflammatory drugs such as indomethacin, phenylbutazone,phenylacetic acid derivatives (e.g. ibuprofen and fenoprofen),naphthalene acetic acids (naproxen), pyrrolealkanoic acid (tometin),indoleacetic acids (sulindac), halogenated anthranilic acid(meclofenamate sodium), piroxicam, zomepirac and diflunisal;antimalarials such as chloroquine; gold salts; penicillamine; orimmunosuppressive agents such as methotrexate or corticosteroids indosages known for such drugs or reduced dosages. Preferably however, thepatient is only treated with an antibody, or antibodies, of the presentinvention. Antibodies of the present invention are administered to theRA patient according to a dosing schedule as described infra, which maybe readily determined by one of ordinary skill in the art. The primaryresponse is determined by the Paulus index (Paulus et al. AthritisRheum. 33:477-484 (1990)), i.e. improvement in morning stiffness, numberof painful and inflamed joints, erythrocyte sedimentation (ESR), and atleast a 2-point improvement on a 5-point scale of disease severityassessed by patient and by physician. Administration of an antibody, orantibodies, of the present invention will alleviate one or more of thesymptoms of RA in the patient treated as described above.

In a further specific embodiment, antibodies of the invention are usedto treat, inhibit, prognose, diagnose or prevent hemolytic anemia. Forexample, patients diagnosed with autoimmune hemolytic anemia (AIHA),e.g., cryoglobinemia or Coombs positive anemia, are treated with anantibody, or antibodies, of the present invention. AIHA is an acquiredhemolytic anemia due to auto-antibodies that react with the patient'sred blood cells. The patient treated will not have a B cell malignancy.Further adjunct therapies (such as glucocorticoids, prednisone,azathioprine, cyclophosphamide, vinca-laden platelets or Danazol) may becombined with the antibody therapy, but preferably the patient istreated with an antibody, or antibodies, of the present invention as asingle-agent throughout the course of therapy. Antibodies of the presentinvention are administered to the hemolytic anemia patient according toa dosing schedule as described infra, which may be readily determined byone of ordinary skill in the art. Overall response rate is determinedbased upon an improvement in blood counts, decreased requirement fortransfusions, improved hemoglobin levels and/or a decrease in theevidence of hemolysis as determined by standard chemical parameters.Administration of an antibody, or antibodies of the present inventionwill improve any one or more of the symptoms of hemolytic anemia in thepatient treated as described above. For example, the patient treated asdescribed above will show an increase in hemoglobin and an improvementin chemical parameters of hemolysis or return to normal as measured byserum lactic dehydrogenase and/or bilirubin.

In another specific embodiment, antibodies of the invention are used totreat, inhibit, prognose, diagnose or prevent adult immunethrombocytopenic purpura. Adult immune thrombocytopenic purpura (ITP) isa relatively rare hematologic disorder that constitutes the most commonof the immune-mediated cytopenias. The disease typically presents withsevere thrombocytopenia that may be associated with acute hemorrhage inthe presence of normal to increased megakaryocytes in the bone marrow.Most patients with ITP have an IgG antibody directed against targetantigens on the outer surface of the platelet membrane, resulting inplatelet sequestration in the spleen and accelerated reticuloendothelialdestruction of platelets (Bussell, J. B. Hematol. Oncol. Clin. North Am.(4):179 (1990)). A number of therapeutic interventions have been shownto be effective in the treatment of ITP. Steroids are generallyconsidered first-line therapy, after which most patients are candidatesfor intravenous immunoglobulin (IVIG), splenectomy, or other medicaltherapies including vincristine or immunosuppressive/cytotoxic agents.Up to 80% of patients with ITP initially respond to a course ofsteroids, but far fewer have complete and lasting remissions.Splenectomy has been recommended as standard second-line therapy forsteroid failures, and leads to prolonged remission in nearly 60% ofcases yet may result in reduced immunity to infection. Splenectomy is amajor surgical procedure that may be associated with substantialmorbidity (15%) and mortality (2%). IVIG has also been used as secondline medical therapy, although only a small proportion of adult patientswith ITP achieve remission. Therapeutic options that would interferewith the production of autoantibodies by activated B cells without theassociated morbidities that occur with corticosteroids and/orsplenectomy would provide an important treatment approach for aproportion of patients with ITP. Patients with clinical diagnosis of ITPare treated with an antibody, or antibodies of the present invention,optionally in combination with steroid therapy. The patient treated willnot have a B cell malignancy. Antibodies of the present invention areadministered to the RA patient according to a dosing schedule asdescribed infra, which may be readily determined by one of ordinaryskill in the art. Overall patient response rate is determined based upona platelet count determined on two consecutive occasions two weeks apartfollowing treatments as described above. See, George et al. “IdiopathicThrombocytopenic Purpura: A Practice Guideline Developed by ExplicitMethods for The American Society of Hematology”, Blood 88:3-40 (1996),expressly incorporated herein by reference.

In other embodiments, antibody agonists of the invention are be used totreat, inhibit or prevent immunodeficiencies, and/or disorders, orconditions associated with immunodeficiencies. Such immunodeficienciesinclude, but are not limited to, severe combined immunodeficiency(SCID)-X linked, SCID-autosomal, adenosine deaminase deficiency (ADAdeficiency), X-linked agammaglobulinemia (XLA), Bruton's disease,congenital agammaglobulinemia, X-linked infantile agammaglobulinemia,acquired agammaglobulinemia, adult onset agammaglobulinemia, late-onsetagammaglobulinemia, dysgammaglobulinemia, hypogammaglobulinemia,transient hypogammaglobulinemia of infancy, unspecifiedhypogammaglobulinemia, agammaglobulinemia, common variableimmunodeficiency (CVID) (acquired), Wiskott-Aldrich Syndrome (WAS),X-linked immunodeficiency with hyper IgM, non X-linked immunodeficiencywith hyper IgM, selective IgA deficiency, IgG subclass deficiency (withor without IgA deficiency), antibody deficiency with normal or elevatedIgs, immunodeficiency with thymoma, Ig heavy chain deletions, kappachain deficiency, B cell lymphoproliferative disorder (BLPD), selectiveIgM immunodeficiency, recessive agammaglobulinemia (Swiss type),reticular dysgenesis, neonatal neutropenia, severe congenitalleukopenia, thymic alymphoplasia-aplasia or dysplasia withimmunodeficiency, ataxia-telangiectasia, short limbed dwarfism, X-linkedlymphoproliferative syndrome (XLP), Nezelof syndrome-combinedimmunodeficiency with Igs, purine nucleoside phosphorylase deficiency(PNP), MHC Class II deficiency (Bare Lymphocyte Syndrome) and severecombined immunodeficiency.

In another specific embodiment, antibodies of the invention are used totreat, inhibit, prognose, diagnose or prevent CVID, or a subgroup ofindividuals having CVID.

In another specific embodiment, antibody agonists of the invention areused as an adjuvant to stimulate B cell proliferation, immunoglobulinproduction, and/or to enhance B cell survival.

The treatment and/or prevention of diseases, disorders, or conditionsassociated with aberrant expression and/or activity of a polypeptide ofthe invention and/or a receptor for the polypeptide of the invention(e.g., TACI, BCMA) includes, but is not limited to, alleviating symptomsassociated with those diseases, disorders or conditions. The antibodiesof the invention may also be used to target and kill cells expressingTNF delta and/or TNF epsilon on their surface and/or cells having TNFdelta and/or TNF epsilon bound to their surface. Antibodies of theinvention may be provided in pharmaceutically acceptable compositions asknown in the art or as described herein.

A summary of the ways in which the antibodies of the present inventionmay be used therapeutically includes binding polynucleotides orpolypeptides of the present invention locally or systemically in thebody or by direct cytotoxicity of the antibody, e.g. as mediated bycomplement (CDC) or by effector cells (ADCC). Some of these approachesare described in more detail below. Armed with the teachings providedherein, one of ordinary skill in the art will know how to use theantibodies of the present invention for diagnostic, monitoring ortherapeutic purposes without undue experimentation.

The antibodies of this invention may be advantageously utilized incombination with other monoclonal or chimeric antibodies, or withlymphokines or hematopoietic growth factors (such as, e.g., IL-2, IL-3and IL-7), for example, which serve to increase the number or activityof effector cells which interact with the antibodies.

The antibodies of the invention may be administered alone or incombination with other types of treatments (e.g., radiation therapy,chemotherapy, hormonal therapy, immunotherapy, anti-tumor agents,antibiotics, and immunoglobulin therapy). Generally, administration ofproducts of a species origin or species reactivity (in the case ofantibodies) that is the same species as that of the patient ispreferred. Thus, in a preferred embodiment, human antibodies, fragmentsderivatives, analogs, or nucleic acids, are administered to a humanpatient for therapy or prophylaxis.

It is preferred to use high affinity and/or potent in vivo inhibitingand/or neutralizing antibodies against polypeptides or polynucleotidesof the present invention, fragments or regions thereof, for bothimmunoassays directed to and therapy of disorders related topolynucleotides or polypeptides, including fragments thereof, of thepresent invention. Such antibodies, fragments, or regions, willpreferably have an affinity for polynucleotides or polypeptides of theinvention, including fragments thereof. Preferred binding affinitiesinclude those with a dissociation constant or Kd less than 5×10−6 M,10−6 M, 5×10−7 M, 10−7 M, 5×10−8 M, 10−8 M, 5×10−9 M, 10−9 M, 5×10−10 M,10−10 M, 5×10−11 M, 10−11 M, 5×10−12 M, 10−12 M, 5×10−13 M, 10−13 M,5×10−14 M, 10−14 M, 5×10−15 M, and 10−15 M.

In a specific embodiment, antibodies may act as antagonists to theTNF-delta and/or TNF-epsilon polypeptides of the invention. Such anantagonist is useful in reducing, preventing, and/or eliminatingspecific T cell activity mediated and/or induced by TNF-delta and/orTNF-epsilon polypeptides of the invention. Examples of such activitiesinclude autoimmune diseases, graft-versus-host disorders, allergicdiseases, T cell regulated immune responses, and diseases and/ordisorders related to T cell stimulation. Additional examples of T celland general immune diseases and/or disorders that may be reduced,prevented, and/or treated by using antagonistic antibodies directedagainst TNF-delta and/or TNF-epsilon polypeptides of the invention asrecited herein.

In another specific embodiment, anti-TNF-delta and/or anti-TNF-epsilonantibodies of the present invention may be used to treat, diagnose,prevent, and/or prognose acute myelogenous leukemia. In a preferredembodiment, anti-TNF-delta and/or anti-TNF-epsilon antibodies of thepresent invention conjugated to a toxin or a radioactive isotope, asdescribed herein, may be used to treat, diagnose, prevent, and/orprognose acute myelogeneous leukemia. In a further preferred embodiment,anti-TNF-delta and/or anti-TNF-epsilon antibodies of the presentinvention conjugated to a toxin or a radioactive isotope, as describedherein, may be used to treat, diagnose, prevent, and/or prognose chronicmyelogeneous leukemia, multiple myeloma, non-Hodgkins lymphoma, and/orHodgkins disease.

Gene Therapy

In a specific embodiment, nucleic acids comprising sequences encodingantibodies or functional derivatives thereof, are administered to treat,inhibit or prevent a disease or disorder associated with aberrantexpression and/or activity of a polypeptide of the invention, by way ofgene therapy. Gene therapy refers to therapy performed by theadministration to a subject of an expressed or expressible nucleic acid.In this embodiment of the invention, the nucleic acids produce theirencoded protein that mediates a therapeutic effect.

Any of the methods for gene therapy available in the art can be usedaccording to the present invention. Exemplary methods are describedbelow.

For general reviews of the methods of gene therapy, see Goldspiel etal., 1993, Clinical Pharmacy 12:488-505; Wu and Wu, 1991, Biotherapy3:87-95; Tolstoshev, 1993, Ann. Rev. Pharmacol. Toxicol. 32:573-596;Mulligan, 1993, Science 260:926-932; and Morgan and Anderson, 1993, Ann.Rev. Biochem. 62:191-217; May, 1993, TIBTECH 11 (5):155-215). Methodscommonly known in the art of recombinant DNA technology which can beused are described in Ausubel et al. (eds.), 1993, Current Protocols inMolecular Biology, John Wiley & Sons, NY; and Kriegler, 1990, GeneTransfer and Expression, A Laboratory Manual, Stockton Press, NY.

In a preferred embodiment, the compound comprises nucleic acid sequencesencoding an antibody, said nucleic acid sequences being part ofexpression vectors that express the antibody or fragments or chimericproteins or heavy or light chains thereof in a suitable host. Inparticular, such nucleic acid sequences have promoters operably linkedto the antibody coding region, said promoter being inducible orconstitutive, and, optionally, tissue- specific. In another particularembodiment, nucleic acid molecules are used in which the antibody codingsequences and any other desired sequences are flanked by regions thatpromote homologous recombination at a desired site in the genome, thusproviding for intrachromosomal expression of the antibody nucleic acids(Koller and Smithies, 1989, Proc. Natl. Acad. Sci. USA 86:8932-8935;Zijlstra et al., 1989, Nature 342:435-438). In specific embodiments, theexpressed antibody molecule is a single chain antibody; alternatively,the nucleic acid sequences include sequences encoding both the heavy andlight chains, or fragments thereof, of the antibody.

Delivery of the nucleic acids into a patient may be either direct, inwhich case the patient is directly exposed to the nucleic acid ornucleic acid- carrying vectors, or indirect, in which case, cells arefirst transformed with the nucleic acids in vitro, then transplantedinto the patient. These two approaches are known, respectively, as invivo or ex vivo gene therapy.

In a specific embodiment, the nucleic acid sequences are directlyadministered in vivo, where it is expressed to produce the encodedproduct. This can be accomplished by any of numerous methods known inthe art, e.g., by constructing them as part of an appropriate nucleicacid expression vector and administering it so that they becomeintracellular, e.g., by infection using defective or attenuatedretrovirals or other viral vectors (see U.S. Pat. No. 4,980,286), or bydirect injection of naked DNA, or by use of microparticle bombardment(e.g., a gene gun; Biolistic, Dupont), or coating with lipids orcell-surface receptors or transfecting agents, encapsulation inliposomes, microparticles, or microcapsules, or by administering them inlinkage to a peptide which is known to enter the nucleus, byadministering it in linkage to a ligand subject to receptor-mediatedendocytosis (see, e.g., Wu and Wu, 1987, J. Biol. Chem. 262:4429-4432)(which can be used to target cell types specifically expressing thereceptors), etc. In another embodiment, nucleic acid-ligand complexescan be formed in which the ligand comprises a fusogenic viral peptide todisrupt endosomes, allowing the nucleic acid to avoid lysosomaldegradation. In yet another embodiment, the nucleic acid can be targetedin vivo for cell specific uptake and expression, by targeting a specificreceptor (see, e.g., PCT Publications WO 92/06180 dated Apr. 16, 1992(Wu et al.); WO 92/22635 dated Dec. 23, 1992 (Wilson et al.); WO92/20316dated Nov. 26, 1992 (Findeis et al.); WO93/14188 dated Jul. 22, 1993(Clarke et al.), WO 93/20221 dated Oct. 14, 1993 (Young)).Alternatively, the nucleic acid can be introduced intracellularly andincorporated within host cell DNA for expression, by homologousrecombination (Koller and Smithies, 1989, Proc. Natl. Acad. Sci. USA86:8932-8935; Zijlstra et al., 1989, Nature 342:435-438).

In a specific embodiment, viral vectors that contains nucleic acidsequences encoding an antibody of the invention are used. For example, aretroviral vector can be used (see Miller et al., 1993, Meth. Enzymol.217:581-599). These retroviral vectors have been to delete retroviralsequences that are not necessary for packaging of the viral genome andintegration into host cell DNA. The nucleic acid sequences encoding theantibody to be used in gene therapy are cloned into one or more vectors,which facilitates delivery of the gene into a patient. More detail aboutretroviral vectors can be found in Boesen et al., 1994, Biotherapy6:291-302, which describes the use of a retroviral vector to deliver themdrl gene to hematopoietic stem cells in order to make the stem cellsmore resistant to chemotherapy. Other references illustrating the use ofretroviral vectors in gene therapy are: Clowes et al., 1994, J. Clin.Invest. 93:644-651; Kiem et al., 1994, Blood 83:1467-1473; Salmons andGunzberg, 1993, Human Gene Therapy 4:129-141; and Grossman and Wilson,1993, Curr. Opin. in Genetics and Devel. 3:110-114.

Adenoviruses are other viral vectors that can be used in gene therapy.Adenoviruses are especially attractive vehicles for delivering genes torespiratory epithelia. Adenoviruses naturally infect respiratoryepithelia where they cause a mild disease. Other targets foradenovirus-based delivery systems are liver, the central nervous system,endothelial cells, and muscle. Adenoviruses have the advantage of beingcapable of infecting non-dividing cells. Kozarsky and Wilson, 1993,Current Opinion in Genetics and Development 3:499-503 present a reviewof adenovirus-based gene therapy. Bout et al., 1994, Human Gene Therapy5:3-10 demonstrated the use of adenovirus vectors to transfer genes tothe respiratory epithelia of rhesus monkeys. Other instances of the useof adenoviruses in gene therapy can be found in Rosenfeld et al., 1991,Science 252:431-434; Rosenfeld et al., 1992, Cell 68:143-155;Mastrangeli et al., 1993, J. Clin. Invest. 91:225-234; PCT PublicationWO94/12649; and Wang, et al., 1995, Gene Therapy 2:775-783. In apreferred embodiment, adenovirus vectors are used.

Adeno-associated virus (AAV) has also been proposed for use in genetherapy (Walsh et al., 1993, Proc. Soc. Exp. Biol. Med. 204:289-300;U.S. Pat. No. 5,436,146).

Another approach to gene therapy involves transferring a gene to cellsin tissue culture by such methods as electroporation, lipofection,calcium phosphate mediated transfection, or viral infection. Usually,the method of transfer includes the transfer of a selectable marker tothe cells. The cells are then placed under selection to isolate thosecells that have taken up and are expressing the transferred gene. Thosecells are then delivered to a patient.

In this embodiment, the nucleic acid is introduced into a cell prior toadministration in vivo of the resulting recombinant cell. Suchintroduction can be carried out by any method known in the art,including but not limited to transfection, electroporation,microinjection, infection with a viral or bacteriophage vectorcontaining the nucleic acid sequences, cell fusion, chromosome-mediatedgene transfer, microcell-mediated gene transfer, spheroplast fusion,etc. Numerous techniques are known in the art for the introduction offoreign genes into cells (see, e.g., Loeffler and Behr, 1993, Meth.Enzymol. 217:599-618; Cohen et al., 1993, Meth. Enzymol. 217:618-644;Cline, 1985, Pharmac. Ther. 29:69-92) and may be used in accordance withthe present invention, provided that the necessary developmental andphysiological functions of the recipient cells are not disrupted. Thetechnique should provide for the stable transfer of the nucleic acid tothe cell, so that the nucleic acid is expressible by the cell andpreferably heritable and expressible by its cell progeny.

The resulting recombinant cells can be delivered to a patient by variousmethods known in the art. Recombinant blood cells (e.g., hematopoieticstem or progenitor cells) are preferably administered intravenously. Theamount of cells envisioned for use depends on the desired effect,patient state, etc., and can be determined by one skilled in the art.

Cells into which a nucleic acid can be introduced for purposes of genetherapy encompass any desired, available cell type, and include but arenot limited to epithelial cells, endothelial cells, keratinocytes,fibroblasts, muscle cells, hepatocytes; blood cells such as Lymphocytes,Blymphocytes, monocytes, macrophages, neutrophils, eosinophils,megakaryocytes, granulocytes; various stem or progenitor cells, inparticular hematopoietic stem or progenitor cells, e.g., as obtainedfrom bone marrow, umbilical cord blood, peripheral blood, fetal liver,etc.

In a preferred embodiment, the cell used for gene therapy is autologousto the patient.

In an embodiment in which recombinant cells are used in gene therapy,nucleic acid sequences encoding an antibody are introduced into thecells such that they are expressible by the cells or their progeny, andthe recombinant cells are then administered in vivo for therapeuticeffect. In a specific embodiment, stem or progenitor cells are used. Anystem and/or progenitor cells which can be isolated and maintained invitro can potentially be used in accordance with this embodiment of thepresent invention (see e.g. PCT Publication WO 94/08598, dated Apr. 28,1994; Stemple and Anderson, 1992, Cell 71:973-985; Rheinwald, 1980,Meth. Cell Bio. 21A:229; and Pittelkow and Scott, 1986, Mayo ClinicProc. 61:771).

In a specific embodiment, the nucleic acid to be introduced for purposesof gene therapy comprises an inducible promoter operably linked to thecoding region, such that expression of the nucleic acid is controllableby controlling the presence or absence of the appropriate inducer oftranscription.

Demonstration of Therapeutic or Prophylactic Activity

The compounds or pharmaceutical compositions of the invention arepreferably tested in vitro, and then in vivo for the desired therapeuticor prophylactic activity, prior to use in humans. For example, in vitroassays to demonstrate the therapeutic or prophylactic utility of acompound or pharmaceutical composition include, the effect of a compoundon a cell line or a patient tissue sample. The effect of the compound orcomposition on the cell line and/or tissue sample can be determinedutilizing techniques known to those of skill in the art including, butnot limited to, rosette formation assays and cell lysis assays. Inaccordance with the invention, in vitro assays which can be used todetermine whether administration of a specific compound is indicated,include in vitro cell culture assays in which a patient tissue sample isgrown in culture, and exposed to or otherwise administered a compound,and the effect of such compound upon the tissue sample is observed.

Therapeutic/Prophylactic Administration and Composition

The invention provides methods of treatment, inhibition and prophylaxisby administration to a subject of an effective amount of a compound orpharmaceutical composition of the invention, preferably an antibody ofthe invention. In a preferred aspect, the compound is substantiallypurified (e.g., substantially free from substances that limit its effector produce undesired side-effects). The subject is preferably an animal,including but not limited to animals such as cows, pigs, horses,chickens, cats, dogs, etc., and is preferably a mammal, and mostpreferably human.

Formulations and methods of administration that can be employed when thecompound comprises a nucleic acid or an immunoglobulin are describedabove; additional appropriate formulations and routes of administrationcan be selected from among those described herein below.

Various delivery systems are known and can be used to administer acompound of the invention, e.g., encapsulation in liposomes,microparticles, microcapsules, recombinant cells capable of expressingthe compound, receptor-mediated endocytosis (see, e.g., Wu and Wu, 1987,J. Biol. Chem. 262:4429-4432), construction of a nucleic acid as part ofa retroviral or other vector, etc. Methods of introduction include butare not limited to intradermal, intramuscular, intraperitoneal,intravenous, subcutaneous, intranasal, epidural, and oral routes. Thecompounds or compositions may be administered by any convenient route,for example by infusion or bolus injection, by absorption throughepithelial or mucocutaneous linings (e.g., oral mucosa, rectal andintestinal mucosa, etc.) and may be administered together with otherbiologically active agents. Administration can be systemic or local. Inaddition, it may be desirable to introduce the pharmaceutical compoundsor compositions of the invention into the central nervous system by anysuitable route, including intraventricular and intrathecal injection;intraventricular injection may be facilitated by an intraventricularcatheter, for example, attached to a reservoir, such as an Ommayareservoir. Pulmonary administration can also be employed, e.g., by useof an inhaler or nebulizer, and formulation with an aerosolizing agent.

In a specific embodiment, it may be desirable to administer thepharmaceutical compounds or compositions of the invention locally to thearea in need of treatment; this may be achieved by, for example, and notby way of limitation, local infusion during surgery, topicalapplication, e.g., in conjunction with a wound dressing after surgery,by injection, by means of a catheter, by means of a suppository, or bymeans of an implant, said implant being of a porous, non-porous, orgelatinous material, including membranes, such as sialastic membranes,or fibers. Preferably, when administering a protein, including anantibody, of the invention, care must be taken to use materials to whichthe protein does not absorb.

In another embodiment, the compound or composition can be delivered in avesicle, in particular a liposome (see Langer, 1990, Science249:1527-1533; Treat et al., in Liposomes in the Therapy of InfectiousDisease and Cancer, Lopez-Berestein and Fidler (eds.), Liss, New York,pp. 353-365 (1989); Lopez-Berestein, ibid., pp. 317-327; see generallyibid.)

In yet another embodiment, the compound or composition can be deliveredin a controlled release system. In one embodiment, a pump may be used(see Langer, supra; Sefton, 1987, CRC Crit. Ref. Biomed. Eng. 14:201;Buchwald et al., 1980, Surgery 88:507; Saudek et al., 1989, N. Engl. J.Med. 321:574). In another embodiment, polymeric materials can be used(see Medical Applications of Controlled Release, Langer and Wise (eds.),CRC Pres., Boca Raton, Florida (1974); Controlled Drug Bioavailability,Drug Product Design and Performance, Smolen and Ball (eds.), Wiley, NewYork (1984); Ranger and Peppas, J., 1983, Macromol. Sci. Rev. Macromol.Chem. 23:61; see also Levy et al., 1985, Science 228:190; During et al.,1989, Ann. Neurol. 25:351; Howard et al., 1989, J.Neurosurg. 71:105). Inyet another embodiment, a controlled release system can be placed inproximity of the therapeutic target, i.e., the brain, thus requiringonly a fraction of the systemic dose (see, e.g., Goodson, in MedicalApplications of Controlled Release, supra, vol. 2, pp. 115-138 (1984)).

Other controlled release systems are discussed in the review by Langer(1990, Science 249:1527-1533).

In a specific embodiment where the compound of the invention is anucleic acid encoding a protein, the nucleic acid can be administered invivo to promote expression of its encoded protein, by constructing it aspart of an appropriate nucleic acid expression vector and administeringit so that it becomes intracellular, e.g., by use of a retroviral vector(see U.S. Pat. No. 4,980,286), or by direct injection, or by use ofmicroparticle bombardment (e.g., a gene gun; Biolistic, Dupont), orcoating with lipids or cell-surface receptors or transfecting agents, orby administering it in linkage to a homeobox-like peptide which is knownto enter the nucleus (see e.g., Joliot et al., 1991, Proc. Natl. Acad.Sci. USA 88:1864-1868), etc. Alternatively, a nucleic acid can beintroduced intracellularly and incorporated within host cell DNA forexpression, by homologous recombination.

The present invention also provides pharmaceutical compositions. Suchcompositions comprise a therapeutically effective amount of a compound,and a pharmaceutically acceptable carrier. In a specific embodiment, theterm “pharmaceutically acceptable” means approved by a regulatory agencyof the Federal or a state government or listed in the U.S. Pharmacopeiaor other generally recognized pharmacopeia for use in animals, and moreparticularly in humans. The term “carrier” refers to a diluent,adjuvant, excipient, or vehicle with which the therapeutic isadministered. Such pharmaceutical carriers can be sterile liquids, suchas water and oils, including those of petroleum, animal, vegetable orsynthetic origin, such as peanut oil, soybean oil, mineral oil, sesameoil and the like. Water is a preferred carrier when the pharmaceuticalcomposition is administered intravenously. Saline solutions and aqueousdextrose and glycerol solutions can also be employed as liquid carriers,particularly for injectable solutions. Suitable pharmaceuticalexcipients include starch, glucose, lactose, sucrose, gelatin, malt,rice, flour, chalk, silica gel, sodium stearate, glycerol monostearate,talc, sodium chloride, dried skim milk, glycerol, propylene, glycol,water, ethanol and the like. The composition, if desired, can alsocontain minor amounts of wetting or emulsifying agents, or pH bufferingagents. These compositions can take the form of solutions, suspensions,emulsion, tablets, pills, capsules, powders, sustained-releaseformulations and the like. The composition can be formulated as asuppository, with traditional binders and carriers such astriglycerides. Oral formulation can include standard carriers such aspharmaceutical grades of mannitol, lactose, starch, magnesium stearate,sodium saccharine, cellulose, magnesium carbonate, etc. Examples ofsuitable pharmaceutical carriers are described in “Remington'sPharmaceutical Sciences” by E. W. Martin. Such compositions will containa therapeutically effective amount of the compound, preferably inpurified form, together with a suitable amount of carrier so as toprovide the form for proper administration to the patient. Theformulation should suit the mode of administration.

In a preferred embodiment, the composition is formulated in accordancewith routine procedures as a pharmaceutical composition adapted forintravenous administration to human beings. Typically, compositions forintravenous administration are solutions in sterile isotonic aqueousbuffer. Where necessary, the composition may also include a solubilizingagent and a local anesthetic such as lignocaine to ease pain at the siteof the injection. Generally, the ingredients are supplied eitherseparately or mixed together in unit dosage form, for example, as a drylyophilized powder or water free concentrate in a hermetically sealedcontainer such as an ampoule or sachette indicating the quantity ofactive agent. Where the composition is to be administered by infusion,it can be dispensed with an infusion bottle containing sterilepharmaceutical grade water or saline. Where the composition isadministered by injection, an ampoule of sterile water for injection orsaline can be provided so that the ingredients may be mixed prior toadministration.

The compounds of the invention can be formulated as neutral or saltforms. Pharmaceutically acceptable salts include those formed withanions such as those derived from hydrochloric, phosphoric, acetic,oxalic, tartaric acids, etc., and those formed with cations such asthose derived from sodium, potassium, ammonium, calcium, ferrichydroxides, isopropylamine, triethylamine, 2-ethylamino ethanol,histidine, procaine, etc.

The amount of the compound of the invention which will be effective inthe treatment, inhibition and prevention of a disease or disorderassociated with aberrant expression and/or activity of a polypeptide ofthe invention can be determined by standard clinical techniques. Inaddition, in vitro assays may optionally be employed to help identifyoptimal dosage ranges. The precise dose to be employed in theformulation will also depend on the route of administration, and theseriousness of the disease or disorder, and should be decided accordingto the judgment of the practitioner and each patient's circumstances.Effective doses may be extrapolated from dose-response curves derivedfrom in vitro or animal model test systems.

For antibodies, the dosage administered to a patient is typically 0.1mg/kg to 100 mg/kg of the patient's body weight. Preferably, the dosageadministered to a patient is between 0.1 mg/kg and 20 mg/kg of thepatient's body weight, more preferably 1 mg/kg to 10 mg/kg of thepatient's body weight. Generally, human antibodies have a longerhalf-life within the human body than antibodies from other species dueto the immune response to the foreign polypeptides. Thus, lower dosagesof human antibodies and less frequent administration is often possible.Further, the dosage and frequency of administration of antibodies of theinvention may be reduced by enhancing uptake and tissue penetration(e.g., into the brain) of the antibodies by modifications such as, forexample, lipidation.

The invention also provides a pharmaceutical pack or kit comprising oneor more containers filled with one or more of the ingredients of thepharmaceutical compositions of the invention. Optionally associated withsuch container(s) can be a notice in the form prescribed by agovernmental agency regulating the manufacture, use or sale ofpharmaceuticals or biological products, which notice reflects approvalby the agency of manufacture, use or sale for human administration.

Diagnosis and Imaging

Labeled antibodies, and derivatives and analogs thereof, whichspecifically bind to a polypeptide of interest can be used fordiagnostic purposes to detect, diagnose, or monitor diseases and/ordisorders associated with the aberrant expression and/or activity of apolypeptide of the invention. The invention provides for the detectionof aberrant expression of a polypeptide of interest, comprising (a)assaying the expression of the polypeptide of interest in cells or bodyfluid of an individual using one or more antibodies specific to thepolypeptide interest and (b) comparing the level of gene expression witha standard gene expression level, whereby an increase or decrease in theassayed polypeptide gene expression level compared to the standardexpression level is indicative of aberrant expression.

The invention provides a diagnostic assay for diagnosising a disorder,comprising (a) assaying the expression of the polypeptide of interest incells or body fluid of an individual using one or more antibodiesspecific to the polypeptide interest and (b) comparing the level of geneexpression with a standard gene expression level, whereby an increase ordecrease in the assayed polypeptide gene expression level compared tothe standard expression level is indicative of a particular disorder.With respect to cancer, the presence of a relatively high amount oftranscript in biopsied tissue from an individual may indicate apredisposition for the development of the disease, or may provide ameans for detecting the disease prior to the appearance of actualclinical symptoms. A more definitive diagnosis of this type may allowhealth professionals to employ preventative measures or aggressivetreatment earlier thereby preventing the development or furtherprogression of the cancer.

Antibodies of the invention can be used to assay protein levels in abiological sample using classical immunohistological methods known tothose of skill in the art (e.g., see Jalkanen, M., et al., J. Cell.Biol. 101:976-985 (1985); Jalkanen, M., et al., J. Cell . Biol.105:3087-3096 (1987)). Other antibody-based methods useful for detectingprotein gene expression include immunoassays, such as the enzyme linkedimmunosorbent assay (ELISA) and the radioimmunoassay (RIA). Suitableantibody assay labels are known in the art and include enzyme labels,such as, glucose oxidase; radioisotopes, such as iodine (¹²⁵I, ¹²¹I),carbon (¹⁴C), sulfur (³⁵S), tritium (³H), indium (¹¹²In), and technetium(⁹⁹Tc); luminescent labels, such as luminol; and fluorescent labels,such as fluorescein and rhodamine, and biotin.

One aspect of the invention is the detection and diagnosis of a diseaseor disorder associated with aberrant expression of a polypeptide of theinterest in an animal, preferably a mammal and most preferably a human.In one embodiment, diagnosis comprises: a) administering (for example,parenterally, subcutaneously, or intraperitoneally) to a subject aneffective amount of a labeled molecule which specifically binds to thepolypeptide of interest; b) waiting for a time interval following theadministering for permitting the labeled molecule to preferentiallyconcentrate at sites in the subject where the polypeptide is expressed(and for unbound labeled molecule to be cleared to background level); c)determining background level; and d) detecting the labeled molecule inthe subject, such that detection of labeled molecule above thebackground level indicates that the subject has a particular disease ordisorder associated with aberrant expression of the polypeptide ofinterest. Background level can be determined by various methodsincluding, comparing the amount of labeled molecule detected to astandard value previously determined for a particular system.

It will be understood in the art that the size of the subject and theimaging system used will determine the quantity of imaging moiety neededto produce diagnostic images. In the case of a radioisotope moiety, fora human subject, the quantity of radioactivity injected will normallyrange from about 5 to 20 millicuries of 99mTc. The labeled antibody orantibody fragment will then preferentially accumulate at the location ofcells which contain the specific protein. In vivo tumor imaging isdescribed in S. W. Burchiel et al., “Immunopharmacokinetics ofRadiolabeled Antibodies and Their Fragments.” (Chapter 13 in TumorImaging: The Radiochemical Detection of Cancer, S. W. Burchiel and B. A.Rhodes, eds., Masson Publishing Inc. (1982).

Depending on several variables, including the type of label used and themode of administration, the time interval following the administrationfor permitting the labeled molecule to preferentially concentrate atsites in the subject and for unbound labeled molecule to be cleared tobackground level is 6 to 48 hours or 6 to 24 hours or 6 to 12 hours. Inanother embodiment the time interval following administration is 5 to 20days or 5 to 10 days.

In an embodiment, monitoring of the disease or disorder is carried outby repeating the method for diagnosing the disease or disease, forexample, one month after initial diagnosis, six months after initialdiagnosis, one year after initial diagnosis, etc.

Presence of the labeled molecule can be detected in the patient usingmethods known in the art for in vivo scanning. These methods depend uponthe type of label used. Skilled artisans will be able to determine theappropriate method for detecting a particular label. Methods and devicesthat may be used in the diagnostic methods of the invention include, butare not limited to, computed tomography (CT), whole body scan such asposition emission tomography (PET), magnetic resonance imaging (MRI),and sonography.

In a specific embodiment, the molecule is labeled with a radioisotopeand is detected in the patient using a radiation responsive surgicalinstrument (Thurston et al., U.S. Pat. No. 5,441,050). In anotherembodiment, the molecule is labeled with a fluorescent compound and isdetected in the patient using a fluorescence responsive scanninginstrument. In another embodiment, the molecule is labeled with apositron emitting metal and is detected in the patent using positronemission-tomography. In yet another embodiment, the molecule is labeledwith a paramagnetic label and is detected in a patient using magneticresonance imaging (MRI).

Kits

The present invention provides kits that can be used in the abovemethods. In one embodiment, a kit comprises an antibody of theinvention, preferably a purified antibody, in one or more containers. Ina specific embodiment, the kits of the present invention contain asubstantially isolated polypeptide comprising an epitope which isspecifically immunoreactive with an antibody included in the kit.Preferably, the kits of the present invention further comprise a controlantibody which does not react with the polypeptide of interest. Inanother specific embodiment, the kits of the present invention comprisetwo or more antibodies (monoclonal and/or polyclonal) that recognize thesame and/or different sequences or regions of the polypeptide of theinvention. In another specific embodiment, the kits of the presentinvention contain a means for detecting the binding of an antibody to apolypeptide of interest (e.g., the antibody may be conjugated to adetectable substrate such as a fluorescent compound, an enzymaticsubstrate, a radioactive compound or a luminescent compound, or a secondantibody which recognizes the first antibody may be conjugated to adetectable substrate).

In another specific embodiment of the present invention, the kit is adiagnostic kit for use in screening serum containing antibodies specificagainst proliferative and/or cancerous polynucleotides and polypeptides.Such a kit may include a control antibody that does not react with thepolypeptide of interest. Such a kit may include a substantially isolatedpolypeptide antigen comprising an epitope which is specificallyimmunoreactive with at least one anti-polypeptide antigen antibody.Further, such a kit includes means for detecting the binding of saidantibody to the antigen (e.g., the antibody may be conjugated to afluorescent compound such as fluorescein or rhodamine which can bedetected by flow cytometry). In specific embodiments, the kit mayinclude a recombinantly produced or chemically synthesized polypeptideantigen. The polypeptide antigen of the kit may also be attached to asolid support.

In a more specific embodiment the detecting means of the above-describedkit includes a solid support to which said polypeptide antigen isattached. Such a kit may also include a non-attached reporter-labeledanti-human antibody. In this embodiment, binding of the antibody to thepolypeptide antigen can be detected by binding of the saidreporter-labeled antibody.

In an additional embodiment, the invention includes a diagnostic kit foruse in screening serum containing antigens of the polypeptide of theinvention. The diagnostic kit includes a substantially isolated antibodyspecifically immunoreactive with polypeptide or polynucleotide antigens,and means for detecting the binding of the polynucleotide or polypeptideantigen to the antibody. In one embodiment, the antibody is attached toa solid support. In a specific embodiment, the antibody may be amonoclonal antibody. The detecting means of the kit may include asecond, labeled monoclonal antibody. Alternatively, or in addition, thedetecting means may include a labeled, competing antigen.

In one diagnostic configuration, test serum is reacted with a solidphase reagent having a surface-bound antigen obtained by the methods ofthe present invention. After binding with specific antigen antibody tothe reagent and removing unbound serum components by washing, thereagent is reacted with reporter-labeled anti-human antibody to bindreporter to the reagent in proportion to the amount of boundanti-antigen antibody on the solid support. The reagent is again washedto remove unbound labeled antibody, and the amount of reporterassociated with the reagent is determined. Typically, the reporter is anenzyme which is detected by incubating the solid phase in the presenceof a suitable fluorometric, luminescent or colorimetric substrate(Sigma, St. Louis, Mo.).

The solid surface reagent in the above assay is prepared by knowntechniques for attaching protein material to solid support material,such as polymeric beads, dip sticks, 96-well plate or filter material.These attachment methods generally include non-specific adsorption ofthe protein to the support or covalent attachment of the protein,typically through a free amine group, to a chemically reactive group onthe solid support, such as an activated carboxyl, hydroxyl, or aldehydegroup. Alternatively, streptavidin coated plates can be used inconjunction with biotinylated antigen(s).

Thus, the invention provides an assay system or kit for carrying outthis diagnostic method. The kit generally includes a support withsurface- bound recombinant antigens, and a reporter-labeled anti-humanantibody for detecting surface-bound anti-antigen antibody.

The polypeptides, their fragments or other derivatives, or analogsthereof, or cells expressing them can be used as an immunogen to produceantibodies thereto. These antibodies can be, for example, polyclonal ormonoclonal antibodies. The present invention also includes chimeric,single chain, and humanized antibodies, as well as Fab fragments, or theproduct of an Fab expression library. Various procedures known in theart may be used for the production of such antibodies and fragments.

Antibodies generated against the polypeptides corresponding to asequence of the present invention can be obtained by direct injection ofthe polypeptides into an animal or by administering the polypeptides toan animal, preferably a nonhuman. The antibody so obtained will thenbind the polypeptides itself. In this manner, even a sequence encodingonly a fragment of the polypeptides can be used to generate antibodiesbinding the whole native polypeptides. Such antibodies can then be usedto isolate the polypeptide from tissue expressing that polypeptide.

For preparation of monoclonal antibodies, any technique which providesantibodies produced by continuous cell line cultures can be used.Examples include the hybridoma technique (Kohler, G. and Milstein, C.,Nature, 256:495-497 (1975), the trioma technique, the human B-cellhybridoma technique (Kozbor et al., Immunology Today, 4:72 (1983) andthe EBV-hybridoma technique to produce human monoclonal antibodies (Coleet al., pg. 77-96 in Monoclonal Antibodies and Cancer Therapy, Alan R.Liss, Inc. (1985).

Techniques described for the production of single chain antibodies (U.S.Pat. No. 4,946,778) can be adapted to produce single chain antibodies toimmunogenic polypeptide products of this invention. Also, transgenicmice, or other organisms such as other mammals, may be used to expresshumanized antibodies to immunogenic polypeptide products of thisinvention.

The above-described antibodies may be employed to isolate or to identifyclones expressing the polypeptide or purify the polypeptide of thepresent invention by attachment of the antibody to a solid support forisolation and/or purification by affinity chromatography.

Antisense and Ribozymes (Antagonists)

In specific embodiments, antagonists according to the present inventionare nucleic acids corresponding to the sequences contained in TNF-deltaand/or TNF-epsilon, or the complementary strand thereof, and/or tonucleotide sequences contained in the deposited clones. In oneembodiment, antisense sequence is generated internally by the organism,in another embodiment, the antisense sequence is separately administered(see, for example, Okano H. et al., J. Neurochem. 56:560 (1991), andOligodeoxynucleotides as Antisense Inhibitors of Gene Expression, CRCPress, Boca Raton, Fla. (1988). Antisense technology can be used tocontrol gene expression through antisense DNA or RNA, or throughtriple-helix formation. Antisense techniques are discussed for example,in Okano, J., Neurochem. 56:560 (1991); Oligodeoxynucleotides asAntisense Inhibitors of Gene Expression, CRC Press, Boca Raton, Fla.(1988). Triple helix formation is discussed in, for instance, Lee etal., Nucleic Acids Research 6:3073 (1979); Cooney et al., Science241:456 (1988); and Dervan et al., Science 251:1300 (1991). The methodsare based on binding of a polynucleotide to a complementary DNA or RNA.

For example, the 5′ coding portion of a polynucleotide that encodes themature polypeptide of the present invention may be used to design anantisense RNA oligonucleotide of from about 10 to 40 base pairs inlength. A DNA oligonucleotide is designed to be complementary to aregion of the gene involved in transcription thereby preventingtranscription and the production of the receptor. The antisense RNAoligonucleotide hybridizes to the mRNA in vivo and blocks translation ofthe mRNA molecule into receptor polypeptide.

In one embodiment, the TNF-delta and/or TNF-epsilon antisense nucleicacid of the invention is produced intracellularly by transcription froman exogenous sequence. For example, a vector or a portion thereof, istranscribed, producing an antisense nucleic acid (RNA) of the invention.Such a vector would contain a sequence encoding the TNF-delta and/orTNF-epsilon antisense nucleic acid. Such a vector can remain episomal orbecome chromosomally integrated, as long as it can be transcribed toproduce the desired antisense RNA. Such vectors can be constructed byrecombinant DNA technology methods standard in the art. Vectors can beplasmid, viral, or others know in the art, used for replication andexpression in vertebrate cells. Expression of the sequence encodingTNF-delta and/or TNF-epsilon, or fragments thereof, can be by anypromoter known in the art to act in vertebrate, preferably human cells.Such promoters can be inducible or constitutive. Such promoters include,but are not limited to, the SV40 early promoter region (Bernoist andChambon, Nature 29:304-310 (1981), the promoter contained in the 3′ longterminal repeat of Rous sarcoma virus (Yamamoto et al., Cell 22:787-797(1980), the herpes thymidine promoter (Wagner et al., Proc. Natl. Acad.Sci. U.S.A. 78:1441-1445 (1981), the regulatory sequences of themetallothionein gene (Brinster, et al., Nature 296:39-42 (1982)), etc.

The antisense nucleic acids of the invention comprise a sequencecomplementary to at least a portion of an RNA transcript of a TNF-deltaand/or TNF-epsilon gene. However, absolute complementarity, althoughpreferred, is not required. A sequence “complementary to at least aportion of an RNA,” referred to herein, means a sequence havingsufficient complementarity to be able to hybridize with the RNA, forminga stable duplex; in the case of double stranded TNF-delta and/orTNF-epsilon antisense nucleic acids, a single strand of the duplex DNAmay thus be tested, or triplex formation may be assayed. The ability tohybridize will depend on both the degree of complementarity and thelength of the antisense nucleic acid Generally, the larger thehybridizing nucleic acid, the more base mismatches with a TNF-deltaand/or TNF-epsilon RNA it may contain and still form a stable duplex (ortriplex as the case may be). One skilled in the art can ascertain atolerable degree of mismatch by use of standard procedures to determinethe melting point of the hybridized complex.

Oligonucleotides that are complementary to the 5′ end of the message,e.g., the 5′ untranslated sequence up to and including the AUGinitiation codon, should work most efficiently at inhibitingtranslation. However, sequences complementary to the 3′ untranslatedsequences of mRNAs have been shown to be effective at inhibitingtranslation of mRNAs as well. See generally, Wagner, R., Nature372:333-335 (1994). Thus, oligonucleotides complementary to either the5′- or 3′-non-translated, non-coding regions of the TNF-delta andTNF-epsilon shown in FIGS. 1A and 1B, and 2A and 2B, respectively, couldbe used in an antisense approach to inhibit translation of endogenousTNF-delta and TNF-epsilon mRNA. Oligonucleotides complementary to the 5′untranslated region of the mRNA should include the complement of the AUGstart codon. Antisense oligonucleotides complementary to mRNA codingregions are less efficient inhibitors of translation but could be usedin accordance with the invention. Whether designed to hybridize to the5′-, 3′- or coding region of TNF-delta and/or TNF-epsilon mRNA,antisense nucleic acids should be at least six nucleotides in length,and are preferably oligonucleotides ranging from 6 to about 50nucleotides in length. In specific aspects the oligonucleotide is atleast 10 nucleotides, at least 17 nucleotides, at least 25 nucleotidesor at least 50 nucleotides.

The polynucleotides of the invention can be DNA or RNA or chimericmixtures or derivatives or modified versions thereof, single-stranded ordouble-stranded. The oligonucleotide can be modified at the base moiety,sugar moiety, or phosphate backbone, for example, to improve stabilityof the molecule, hybridization, etc. The oligonucleotide may includeother appended groups such as peptides (e.g., for targeting host cellreceptors in vivo), or agents facilitating transport across the cellmembrane (see, e.g., Letsinger et al., Proc. Natl. Acad. Sci. U.S.A.86:6553-6556 (1989); Lemaitre et al., Proc. Natl. Acad. Sci. 84:648-652(1987); PCT Publication No. WO88/09810, published Dec. 15, 1988) or theblood-brain barrier (see, e.g., PCT Publication No. WO89/10134,published Apr. 25, 1988), hybridization-triggered cleavage agents. (See,e.g., Krol et al., BioTechniques 6:958-976 (1988)) or intercalatingagents. (See, e.g., Zon, Pharm. Res. 5:539-549 (1988)). To this end, theoligonucleotide may be conjugated to another molecule, e.g., a peptide,hybridization triggered cross-linking agent, transport agent,hybridization-triggered cleavage agent, etc.

The antisense oligonucleotide may comprise at least one modified basemoiety which is selected from the group including, but not limited to,5-fluorouracil, 5-bromouracil, 5-chlorouracil, 5-iodouracil,hypoxanthine, xantine, 4-acetylcytosine, 5-(carboxyhydroxylmethyl)uracil, 5-carboxymethylaminomethyl-2-thiouridine,5-carboxymethylaminomethyluracil, dihydrouracil,beta-D-galactosylqueosine, inosine, N6-isopentenyladenine,1-methylguanine, 1-methylinosine, 2,2-dimethylguanine, 2-methyladenine,2-methylguanine, 3-methylcytosine, 5-methylcytosine, N6-adenine,7-methylguanine, 5-methylaminomethyluracil,5-methoxyaminomethyl-2-thiouracil, beta-D-mannosylqueosine,5-methoxycarboxymethyluracil, 5-methoxyuracil,2-methylthio-N6-isopentenyladenine, uracil-5-oxyacetic acid (v),wybutoxosine, pseudouracil, queosine, 2-thiocytosine,5-methyl-2-thiouracil, 2-thiouracil, 4-thiouracil, 5-methyluracil,uracil-5-oxyacetic acid methylester, uracil-5-oxyacetic acid (v),5-methyl-2-thiouracil, 3-(3-amino-3-N-2-carboxypropyl) uracil, (acp3)w,and 2,6-diaminopurine.

The antisense oligonucleotide may also comprise at least one modifiedsugar moiety selected from the group including, but not limited to,arabinose, 2-fluoroarabinose, xylulose, and hexose.

In yet another embodiment, the antisense oligonucleotide comprises atleast one modified phosphate backbone selected from the group including,but not limited to, a phosphorothioate, a phosphorodithioate, aphosphoramidothioate, a phosphoramidate, a phosphordiamidate, amethylphosphonate, an alkyl phosphotriester, and a formacetal or analogthereof.

In yet another embodiment, the antisense oligonucleotide is analpha-anomeric oligonucleotide. An alpha-anomeric oligonucleotide formsspecific double-stranded hybrids with complementary RNA in which,contrary to the usual alpha-units, the strands run parallel to eachother (Gautier et al., Nucl. Acids Res. 15:6625-6641 (1987)). Theoligonucleotide is a 2 alpha-0-methylribonucleotide or a 2beta-0-methylribonucleotide (Inoue et al., Nucl. Acids Res. 15:6131-6148(1987)), or a chimeric RNA-DNA analogue (Inoue et al., FEBS Lett.215:327-330 (1987)).

Polynucleotides of the invention may be synthesized by standard methodsknown in the art, e.g. by use of an automated DNA synthesizer (such asare commercially available from Biosearch, Applied Biosystems, etc.). Asexamples, phosphorothioate oligonucleotides may be synthesized by themethod of Stein et al. (Nucl. Acids Res. 16:3209 (1988)),methylphosphonate oligonucleotides can be prepared by use of controlledpore glass polymer supports (Sarin et al., Proc. Natl. Acad. Sci. U.S.A.85:7448-7451 (1988)), etc.

While antisense nucleotides complementary to the TNF-delta and/orTNF-epsilon coding region sequence could be used, those complementary tothe transcribed untranslated region are most preferred.

Potential antagonists according to the invention also include catalyticRNA, or a ribozyme (See, e.g., PCT International Publication WO90/11364, published Oct. 4, 1990; Sarver et al, Science 247:1222-1225(1990). While ribozymes that cleave mRNA at site specific recognitionsequences can be used to destroy TNF-delta and/or TNF-epsilon mRNAs, theuse of hammerhead ribozymes is preferred. Hammerhead ribozymes cleavemRNAs at locations dictated by flanking regions that form complementarybase pairs with the target mRNA. The sole requirement is that the targetmRNA have the following sequence of two bases: 5′-UG-3′. Theconstruction and production of hammerhead ribozymes is well known in theart and is described more fully in Haseloff and Gerlach, Nature334:585-591 (1988). There are numerous potential hammerhead ribozymecleavage sites within the nucleotide sequence of TNF-delta (FIGS. 1A and1B (SEQ ID NO:1)) and TNF-epsilon (FIGS. 2A and 2B (SEQ ID NO:3) andFIGS. 7A and 7B (SEQ ID NO:12)). Preferably, the ribozyme is engineeredso that the cleavage recognition site is located near the 5′ end of theTNF-delta and TNF-epsilon mRNA; i.e., to increase efficiency andminimize the intracellular accumulation of non-functional mRNAtranscripts.

As in the antisense approach, the ribozymes of the invention can becomposed of modified oligonucleotides (e.g., for improved stability,targeting, etc.) and should be delivered to cells which expressTNF-delta and/or TNF-epsilon in vivo. DNA constructs encoding theribozyme may be introduced into the cell in the same manner as describedabove for the introduction of antisense encoding DNA. A preferred methodof delivery involves using a DNA construct “encoding” the ribozyme underthe control of a strong constitutive promoter, such as, for example, polIII or pol II promoter, so that transfected cells will producesufficient quantities of the ribozyme to destroy endogenous TNF-deltaand/or TNF-epsilon messages and inhibit translation. Since ribozymesunlike antisense molecules, are catalytic, a lower intracellularconcentration is required for efficiency.

Endogenous gene expression can also be reduced by inactivating or“knocking out” the TNF-delta and/or TNF-epsilon gene and/or its promoterusing targeted homologous recombination. (e.g., see Smithies et al.,Nature 317:230-234 (1985); Thomas & Capecchi, Cell 51:503-512 (1987);Thompson et al., Cell 5:313-321 (1989); each of which is incorporated byreference herein in its entirety). For example, a mutant, non-functionalpolynucleotide of the invention (or a completely unrelated DNA sequence)flanked by DNA homologous to the endogenous polynucleotide sequence(either the coding regions or regulatory regions of the gene) can beused, with or without a selectable marker and/or a negative selectablemarker, to transfect cells that express polypeptides of the invention invivo. In another embodiment, techniques known in the art are used togenerate knockouts in cells that contain, but do not express the gene ofinterest. Insertion of the DNA construct, via targeted homologousrecombination, results in inactivation of the targeted gene. Suchapproaches are particularly suited in research and agricultural fieldswhere modifications to embryonic stem cells can be used to generateanimal offspring with an inactive targeted gene (e.g., see Thomas &Capecchi 1987 and Thompson 1989, supra). However this approach can beroutinely adapted for use in humans provided the recombinant DNAconstructs are directly administered or targeted to the required site invivo using appropriate viral vectors that will be apparent to those ofskill in the art. The contents of each of the documents recited in thisparagraph is herein incorporated by reference in its entirety.

In other embodiments, antagonists according to the present inventioninclude soluble forms of TNF-delta (e.g., fragments of the TNF-deltashown in FIGS. 1A and 1B (SEQ ID NO:2) and FIGS. 6A and 6B and/orTNF-epsilon (e.g., fragments of the TNF-epsilon shown in FIGS. 2A and 2B(SEQ ID NO:4) and and FIGS. 7A and 7B (SEQ ID NO: 13) that include thereceptor binding domain from the extracellular region of the full lengthligand). Such soluble forms of TNF-delta and/or TNF-epsilon, which maybe naturally occurring or synthetic, antagonize TNF-delta and/orTNF-epsilon mediated signaling by competing with the ligand for bindingto TNF-family receptors. Antagonists of the present invention alsoinclude antibodies specific for TNF-family ligands and TNF-delta- and/orTNF-epsilon-Fc fusion proteins.

In certain other embodiments, anti-TNF delta antibodies, and/or anti-TNFepsilon antibodies, and/or Neutrokine-alpha, and/or Neutrokine-alphaSV,and/or TACI soluble domain fused to Fc, and/or BCMA soluble domain fusedto Fc function as TNF delta and/or TNF epsilon antagonists.

In specific embodiments, the expression of IL-2 receptor messenger RNAis highly increased when cells are cultured in the presence of a TNFdelta and/or TNF epsilon antagonist.

In specific embodiments, the expression of IL-2 receptor messenger RNAis highly decreased when cells are cultured in the presence of a TNFdelta and/or TNF epsilon agonist.

By a “TNF-family ligand” is intended naturally occurring, recombinant,and synthetic ligands that are capable of binding to a member of the TNFreceptor family and inducing and/or blocking the ligand/receptorsignaling pathway. Members of the TNF ligand family include, but are notlimited to, TNF-alpha, lymphotoxin-alpha (LT-alpha, also known asTNF-beta), LT-beta (found in complex heterotrimer LT-alpha2-beta), FasL,TNF-gamma (International Publication No. WO 96/14328), AIM-I(International Publication No. WO 97/33899), AIM-II (InternationalPublication No. WO 97/34911), Neutrokine-alpha and/or Neutrokine-alphaSV(International Publication No. WO98/18921), endokine-alpha(International Publication No. WO 98/07880), CD40L, CD27L, CD30L,4-1BBL, OX40L and nerve growth factor (NGF).

TNF-alpha has been shown to protect mice from infection with herpessimplex virus type 1 (HSV-1). Rossol-Voth et al., J .Gen. Virol.72:143-147 (1991). The mechanism of the protective effect of TNF-alphais unknown but appears to involve neither interferons nor NK cellkilling. One member of the family has been shown to mediate HSV-1 entryinto cells. Montgomery et al., Eur. Cytokine Newt. 7:159 (1996).Further, antibodies specific for the extracellular domain of this blockHSV-1 entry into cells. Thus, TNF-delta and/or TNF-epsilon antagonistsof the present invention include both TNF-delta and/or TNF-epsilon aminoacid sequences and antibodies capable of preventing mediated viral entryinto cells. Such sequences and antibodies can function by eithercompeting with cell surface localized for binding to virus or bydirectly blocking binding of virus to cell surface receptors.

Antibodies according to the present invention may be prepared by any ofa variety of standard methods using TNF-delta and/or TNF-epsilonreceptor immunogens of the present invention. Such TNF-delta and/orTNF-epsilon receptor immunogens include the TNF-delta and TNF-epsilonproteins shown in FIGS. 1A and 1B (SEQ ID NO:2) and FIGS. 2A and 2B (SEQID NO:4), respectively, (which may or may not include a leader sequence)and polypeptide fragments of the receptor comprising the ligand binding,extracellular, transmembrane, the intracellular domains of TNF-deltaand/or TNF-epsilon, or any combination thereof.

Polyclonal and monoclonal antibody agonists or antagonists according tothe present invention can be raised according to the methods disclosedherein and and/or known in the art, such as, for example, those methodsdescribed in Tartaglia and Goeddel, J. Biol. Chem.267(7):4304-4307(1992)); Tartaglia et al., Cell 73:213-216 (1993)), andPCT Application WO 94/09137 (the contents of each of these threeapplications are herein incorporated by reference in their entireties),and are preferably specific to polypeptides of the invention having theamino acid sequence of SEQ ID NO:2 and/or SEQ ID NO:4.

Exon Shuffling

The techniques of gene-shuffling, motif-shuffling, exon-shuffling,and/or codon-shuffling (collectively referred to as “DNA shuffling”) maybe employed to modulate the activities of TNF-delta and/or TNF-epsilonthereby effectively generating agonists and antagonists of TNF-deltaand/or TNF-epsilon. See generally, U.S. Pat. Nos. 5,605,793, 5,811,238,5,830,721, 5,834,252, and 5,837,458, and Patten et al., Curr. OpinionBiotechnol. 8:724-33 (1997); Harayama, Trends Biotechnol. 16(2):76-82(1998); Hansson et al., J. Mol. Biol. 287:265-76 (1999); and Lorenzo andBlasco, Biotechniques 24(2):308-13 (1998) (each of these patents andpublications are hereby incorporated by reference). In one embodiment,alteration of TNF-delta and/or TNF-epsilon polynucleotides andcorresponding polypeptides may be achieved by DNA shuffling. DNAshuffling involves the assembly of two or more DNA segments into adesired TNF-delta and/or TNF-epsilon molecule by homologous, orsite-specific, recombination. In another embodiment, TNF-delta and/orTNF-epsilon polynucleotides and corresponding polypeptides may bealterred by being subjected to random mutagenesis by error-prone PCR,random nucleotide insertion or other methods prior to recombination. Inanother embodiment, one or more components, motifs, sections, parts,domains, fragments, etc., of TNF-delta and/or TNF-epsilon may berecombined with one or more components, motifs, sections, parts,domains, fragments, etc. of one or more heterologous molecules. Inpreferred embodiments, the heterologous molecules are TNF-alpha,TNF-beta, lymphotoxin-alpha, lymphotoxin-beta, FAS ligand,Neutrokine-alpha, and/or Neutrokine-alphaSV. In further preferredembodiments, the heterologous molecules are any member of the TNFfamily.

Non-naturally occurring variants also may be produced using art-knownmutagenesis techniques, which include, but are not limited to,oligonucleotide mediated mutagenesis, alanine scanning, PCR mutagenesis,site directed mutagenesis (see e.g., Carter et al., Nucl. Acids Res.13:4331 (1986); and Zoller et al., Nucl. Acids Res. 10:6487 (1982)),cassette mutagenesis (see e.g., Wells et al., Gene 34:315 (1985)), andrestriction selection mutagenesis (see e.g., Wells et al., Philos.Trans. R. Soc. London SerA 317:415 (1986)).

In another embodiment, the present invention is directed to a method forinhibiting apoptosis induced by a TNF-family ligand, which involvesadministering to a cell which expresses the TNF-delta and/or TNF-epsilonpolypeptide an effective amount of an antagonist capable of decreasingTNF-delta and/or TNF-epsilon mediated signaling. Preferably, TNF-delta-and/or TNF-epsilon-mediated signaling is decreased to treat a diseasewherein increased apoptosis, NF-kappaB expression and/or JNK expressionis exhibited. Antagonists include, but are not limited to, soluble formsof TNF-delta and/or TNF-epsilon polypeptide and antibodies (preferablymonoclonal) directed against the TNF-delta and/or TNF-epsilonpolypeptide.

Thus, the polypeptides of the present invention (including antibodies ofthe present invention) may be employed to inhibit neoplasia, such astumor cell growth. The polypeptides of the present invention may beresponsible for tumor destruction through apoptosis and cytotoxicity tocertain cells. The polypeptides of the present invention also induceup-regulation of adhesion cells, for example, LFA-1, therefore, may beemployed for wound-healing. The polypeptides of the present inventionmay also be employed to treat diseases which require growth promotionactivity, for example, restenosis, since the polypeptides of the presentinvention have proliferation effects on cells of endothelial origin. Thepolypeptides of the present invention may, therefore, also be employedto regulate hematopoiesis in endothelial cell development.

The polypeptides of the present invention also stimulate the activationof T-cells, and may, therefore, be employed to stimulate an immuneresponse against a variety of parasitic, bacterial and viral infections.The polypeptides of the present invention may also be employed in thisrespect to eliminate autoreactive T-cells to treat and/or preventautoimmune diseases. An example of an autoimmune disease is Type Idiabetes.

This invention also provides a method for identification of molecules,such as receptor molecules, that bind the proteins of the presentinvention. Genes encoding proteins that bind the proteins of the presentinvention, such as receptor proteins, can be identified by numerousmethods known to those of skill in the art, for example, ligand panningand FACS sorting. Such methods are described in many laboratory manualssuch as, for instance, Coligan et al., Current Protocols in Immunology1(2): Chapter 5 (1991).

For instance, expression cloning may be employed for this purpose. Tothis end polyadenylated RNA is prepared from a cell responsive to theproteins of the present invention, a cDNA library is created from thisRNA, the library is divided into pools and the pools are transfectedindividually into cells that are not responsive to the proteins of thepresent invention. The transfected cells then are exposed to labeled theproteins of the present invention. The proteins of the present inventioncan be labeled by a variety of well-known techniques including standardmethods of radio-iodination or inclusion of a recognition site for asite-specific protein kinase. Following exposure, the cells are fixedand binding of cytostatin is determined. These procedures convenientlyare carried out on glass slides.

Pools are identified of cDNA that produced TNF delta or TNF epsilonbinding cells. Sub-pools are prepared from these positives, transfectedinto host cells and screened as described above. Using an iterativesub-pooling and re-screening process, one or more single clones thatencode the putative binding molecule, such as a receptor molecule, canbe isolated.

Alternatively a labeled ligand can be photoaffinity linked to a cellextract, such as a membrane or a membrane extract, prepared from cellsthat express a molecule that it binds, such as a receptor molecule.Cross-linked material is resolved by polyacrylamide gel electrophoresis(“PAGE”) and exposed to X-ray film. The labeled complex containing theligand-receptor can be excised, resolved into peptide fragments, andsubjected to protein microsequencing. The amino acid sequence obtainedfrom microsequencing can be used to design unique or degenerateoligonucleotide probes to screen cDNA libraries to identify genesencoding the putative receptor molecule.

Polypeptides of the invention also can be used to assess TNF delta orTNF epsilon binding capacity of TNF delta or TNF epsilon bindingmolecules, such as receptor molecules, in cells or in cell-freepreparations.

The polypeptides of the present invention have uses which include, butare not limited to, as sources for generating antibodies that bind thepolypeptides of the invention, and as molecular weight markers onSDS-PAGE gels or on molecular sieve gel filtration columns using methodswell known to those of skill in the art.

In one embodiment, TNF-delta and/or TNF-epsilon polynucleotides orpolypeptides or TNF-delta and/or TNF-epsilon antagonists (e.g.,anti-TNF-delta and/or TNF-epsilon antibodies) of the invention are usedto treat, diagnose, or prognose an individual having animmunodeficiency. According to this embodiment, an individual having animmunodeficiency expresses aberrantly low levels of TNF-delta and/orTNF-epsilon when compared to an individual not having animmunodeficiency. Any means described herein or otherwise known in theart may be applied to detect TNF-delta and/or TNF-epsilonpolynucleotides or polypeptides of the invention (e.g., FACS analysis orELISA detection of TNF-delta and/or TNF-epsilon polypeptides of theinvention and hybridization or PCR detection of TNF-delta and/orTNF-epsilon polynucleotides of the invention) and to determine theexpression profile of TNF-delta and/or TNF-epsilon, polynucleotidesand/or polypeptides of the invention in a biological sample.

A biological sample of a person afflicted with an immunodeficiency ischaracterized by low levels of expression of TNF-delta and/orTNF-epsilon when compared to that observed in individuals not having animmunodeficiency. Thus, TNF-delta and/or TNF-epsilon polynucleotidesand/or polypeptides of the invention, and/or agonists or antagoniststhereof, may be used according to the methods of the invention in thediagnosis and/or prognosis of an immunodeficiency. For example, abiological sample obtained from a person suspected of being afflictedwith an immunodeficiency (“the subject”) may be analyzed for therelative expression level(s) of TNF-delta and/or TNF-epsilonpolynucleotides and/or polypeptides of the invention. The expressionlevel(s) of one or more of these molecules of the invention is (are)then compared to the expression level(s) of the same molecules of theinvention as expressed in a person known not to be afflicted with animmunodeficiency. A significant difference in expression level(s) ofTNF-delta and/or TNF-epsilon polynucleotides and/or polypeptides of theinvention, and/or agonists and/or antagonists thereof, between samplesobtained from the subject and the control suggests that the subject isafflicted with an immunodeficiency.

In another embodiment, TNF-delta and/or TNF-epsilon polynucleotides orpolypeptides or TNF-delta and/or TNF-epsilon antagonists (e.g.,anti-TNF-delta and/or TNF-epsilon antibodies) of the invention are usedto treat, diagnose and/or prognose an individual having common variableimmunodeficiency disease (“CVID”; also known as “acquiredagammaglobulinemia” and “acquired hypogammaglobulinemia”) or a subset ofthis disease. According to this embodiment, an individual having CVID ora subset of individuals having CVID expresses aberrant levels ofTNF-delta and/or TNF-epsilon receptor on their T cells, when compared toindividuals not having CVID. Any means described herein or otherwiseknown in the art may be applied to detect TNF-delta and/or TNF-epsilonreceptor polynucleotides or polypeptides of the invention (e.g., FACSanalysis or ELISA detection of TNF-delta and/or TNF-epsilon polypeptidesof the invention and hybridization or PCR detection of TNF-delta and/orTNF-epsilon polynucleotides of the invention) and to determinedifferentially the expression profile of TNF-delta and/or TNF-epsilonpolynucleotides or polypeptides of the invention in a sample containingat least T cells or some component thereof (e.g., RNA) as compared to asample containing at least B cells or a component thereof (e.g., RNA).In the instance where a sample containing at least T cells or somecomponent thereof (e.g., RNA) is determined to reflect TNF-delta and/orTNF-epsilon polynucleotide or polypeptide expression and a samplecontaining at least B cells or a component thereof (e.g., RNA) isdetermined to reflect less than normal levels of TNF-delta and/orTNF-epsilon receptor polynucleotide or polypeptide expression, thesamples may be correlated with the occurrence of CVID (i.e., “acquiredagammaglobulinemia” or “acquired hypogammaglobulinemia”).

A subject of persons afflicted with CVID are characterized by highlevels of expression of both TNF-delta and/or TNF-epsilon in peripheralor circulating T cells when compared to that observed in individuals nothaving CVID. In contrast, persons who are not afflicted with CVID aretypically characterized by low levels of TNF-delta and/or TNF-epsilonexpression. Thus, TNF-delta and/or TNF-epsilon polynucleotides and/orpolypeptides of the invention, and/or agonists or antagonists thereof,may be used according to the methods of the invention in thedifferential diagnosis of this subset of CVID. For example, a sample ofperipherial T cells obtained from a person suspected of being afflictedwith CVID (“the subject”) may be analyzed for the relative expressionlevel(s) of TNF-delta and/or TNF-epsilon polynucleotides and/orpolypeptides of the invention. The expression level(s) of one or more ofthese molecules of the invention is (are) then compared to theexpression level(s) of the same molecules of the invention as expressedin a person known not to be afflicted with CVID (“the control”). Asignificant difference in expression level(s) of TNF-delta and/orTNF-epsilon polynucleotides and/or polypeptides of the invention, and/oragonists and/or antagonists thereof, between samples obtained from thesubject and the control suggests that the subject is afflicted with thissubset of CVID.

Cunningham-Rundles and Bodian followed 248 CVID patients over a periodof 1-25 years and discovered that a number of associated diseases orconditions appear with increased frequency in CVID patients(Cunningham-Rundles and Bodian, J. Clin. Immunol., 92:34-48 (1999) whichis herein incorporated by reference in its entirety.) The most importantclinical events include infections, autoimmunity, inflammatorydisorders, marked by gastrointestinal and granulomatous disease, cancerand hepatitis. Most CVID patients are at increased risk of recurrentinfections particularly of the respiratory tract. The types of acute andrecurring bacterial infections exhibited in most patients includepneumonia, bronchitis and sinusitis. Children with CVID have a markedincreased risk of otitis media. Additionally, blood borne infectionsincluding sepsis, meningitis, septic arthritis, and osteomyelitis areseen with increased frequency in these patients.

In another specific embodiment TNF-delta and/or TNF-epsilonpolynucleotides or polypeptides, or agonists or antagonists thereof(e.g., anti- TNF-delta and/or anti-TNF-epsilon antibodies) are used todiagnose, prognose, treat, or prevent conditions associated with CVID,including, but not limited to, conditions associated with acute andrecurring infections (e.g., pneumonia, bronchitis, sinusitis, otitismedia, sepsis, meningitis, septic arthritis, and osteomyelitis), chroniclung disease, autoimmunity, granulomatous disease, lymphoma, cancers(e.g., cancers of the breast, stomach, colon, mouth, prostate, lung,vagina, ovary, skin, and melanin forming cells (i.e. melanoma),inflammatory bowel disease (e.g., Crohn's disease, ulcerative colitis,and ulcerative proctitis), malabsoption, Hodgkin's disease, andWaldenstrom's macroglobulinemia.

In a specific embodiment, TNF-delta and/or TNF-epsilon polynucleotidesor polypeptides, or agonists thereof (e.g., anti-TNF-delta and/oranti-TNF-epsilon antibodies) are used to treat or prevent a disordercharacterized by deficient serum immunoglobulin production, recurrentinfections, and/or immune system dysfunction. Moreover, TNF-delta and/orTNF-epsilon polynucleotides or polypeptides, or agonists thereof (e.g.,anti-TNF-delta and/or anti-TNF-epsilon antibodies) may be used to treator prevent infections of the joints, bones, skin, and/or parotid glands,blood-borne infections (e.g., sepsis, meningitis, septic arthritis,and/or osteomyelitis), autoimmune diseases (e.g., those disclosedherein), inflammatory disorders, and malignancies, and/or any disease ordisorder or condition associated with these infections, diseases,disorders and/or malignancies) including, but not limited to, CVID,other primary immune deficiencies, HIV disease, CLL, multiple myeloma,recurrent bronchitis, sinusitis, otitis media, conjunctivitis,pneumonia, hepatitis, meningitis, herpes zoster (e.g., severe herpeszoster), and/or pneumocystis carmii.

In another embodiment, TNF-delta and/or TNF-epsilon polynucleotides orpolypeptides or TNF-delta and/or TNF-epsilon antagonists (e.g.,anti-TNF-delta and/or anti-TNF-epsilon antibodies) of the invention areused to treat, diagnose, or prognose an individual having an autoimmunedisease or disorder. According to this embodiment, an individual havingan autoimmune disease or disorder expresses aberrantly high levels ofTNF-delta and/or TNF-epsilon when compared to an individual not havingan autoimmune disease or disorder. Any means described herein orotherwise known in the art may be applied to detect TNF-delta and/orTNF-epsilon polynucleotides or polypeptides of the invention (e.g., FACSanalysis or ELISA detection of TNF-delta and/or TNF-epsilon polypeptidesof the invention and hybridization or PCR detection of TNF-delta and/orTNF-epsilon polynucleotides of the invention) and to determine theexpression profile of TNF-delta and/or TNF-epsilon polynucleotidesand/or polypeptides of the invention in a biological sample.

TNF-delta and/or TNF-epsilon polynucleotides or polypeptides, oragonists or antagonists of TNF-delta and/or TNF-epsilon, can be used inassays to test for one or more biological activities. If TNF-deltaand/or TNF-epsilon polynucleotides or polypeptides, or agonists orantagonists of TNF-delta and/or TNF-epsilon, do exhibit activity in aparticular assay, it is likely that TNF-delta and/or TNF-epsilon may beinvolved in the diseases associated with the biological activity.Therefore, TNF-delta and/or TNF-epsilon could be used to treat theassociated disease.

In a specific embodiment, TNF-delta and/or TNF-epsilon polynucleotidesor polypeptides, or agonists or antagonists of TNF-delta and/orTNF-epsilon may be used to treat, diagnose, prevent, and/or prognoseacute myelogenous leukemia. In a preferred embodiment, TNF-delta and/orTNF-epsilon polynucleotides or polypeptides, or agonists or antagonistsof TNF-delta and/or TNF-epsilon conjugated to a toxin or a radioactiveisotope, as described herein, may be used to treat, diagnose, prevent,and/or prognose acute myelogeneous leukemia. In a further preferredembodiment, TNF-delta and/or TNF-epsilon polynucleotides orpolypeptides, or agonists or antagonists of TNF-delta and/or TNF-epsilonconjugated to a toxin or a radioactive isotope, as described herein, maybe used to treat, diagnose, prevent, and/or prognose chronicmyelogeneous leukemia, multiple myeloma, non-Hodgkins lymphoma, and/orHodgkins disease.

In another specific embodiment, TNF-delta and/or TNF-epsilonpolynucleotides or polypeptides, or agonists or antagonists of TNF-deltaand/or TNF-epsilon may be used to treat, diagnose, prognose, and/orprevent T cell deficiencies. T cell deficiencies include, but are notlimited to, for example, DiGeorge anomaly, thymic hypoplasia, third andfourth pharyngeal pouch syndrome, 22q11.2 deletion, chronicmucocutaneous candidiasis, natural killer cell deficiency (NK),idiopathic CD4+ T-lymphocytopenia, immunodeficiency with predominant Tcell defect (unspecified), and unspecified immunodeficiency of cellmediated immunity.

In another specific embodiment, TNF-delta and/or TNF-epsilonpolynucleotides or polypeptides, or agonists or antagonists of TNF-deltaand/or TNF-epsilon may be used to treat, diagnose, prognose, and/orprevent selective IgA deficiency, myeloperoxidase deficiency, C2deficiency, ataxia-telangiectasia, DiGeorge anomaly, common variableimmunodeficiency (CVI), X-linked agammaglobulinemia, severe combinedimmunodeficiency (SCID), chronic granulomatous disease (CGD), andWiskott-Aldrich syndrome.

TNF-delta and/or TNF-epsilon polynucleotides or polypeptides, oragonists or antagonists of TNF-delta and/or TNF-epsilon, may be usefulin treating deficiencies or disorders of the immune system, byactivating or inhibiting the proliferation, differentiation, ormobilization (chemotaxis) of immune cells, or through involvement in theregulation of cell-mediated immune responses. Immune cells developthrough a process called hematopoiesis, producing myeloid (platelets,red blood cells, neutrophils, and macrophages) and lymphoid (B and Tlymphocytes) cells from pluripotent stem cells. The etiology of theseimmune deficiencies or disorders may be genetic, somatic, such as canceror some autoimmune disorders, acquired (e.g., by chemotherapy ortoxins), or infectious. Moreover, TNF-delta and/or TNF-epsilonpolynucleotides or polypeptides, or agonists or antagonists of TNF-deltaand/or TNF-epsilon, can be used as a marker or detector of a particularimmune system disease or disorder.

TNF-delta and/or TNF-epsilon polynucleotides or polypeptides, oragonists or antagonists of TNF-delta and/or TNF-epsilon, may be usefulin treating or detecting deficiencies or disorders of hematopoieticcells. TNF-delta and/or TNF-epsilon polynucleotides or polypeptides, oragonists or antagonists of TNF-delta and/or TNF-epsilon, could be usedto increase differentiation and proliferation of hematopoietic cells,including the pluripotent stem cells, in an effort to treat thosedisorders associated with a decrease in certain (or many) typeshematopoietic cells. Examples of immunologic deficiency syndromesinclude, but are not limited to: blood protein disorders (e.g.agammaglobulinemia, dysgammaglobulinemia), ataxia telangiectasia, commonvariable immunodeficiency, Digeorge Syndrome, HIV infection, HTLV-BLVinfection, leukocyte adhesion deficiency syndrome, lymphopenia,phagocyte bactericidal dysfunction, severe combined immunodeficiency(SCIDs), Wiskott-Aldrich Disorder, anemia, thrombocytopenia, orhemoglobinuria.

Moreover, TNF-delta and/or TNF-epsilon polynucleotides or polypeptides,or agonists or antagonists of TNF-delta and/or TNF-epsilon, can also beused to modulate hemostatic (the stopping of bleeding) or thrombolyticactivity (clot formation). For example, by increasing hemostatic orthrombolytic activity, TNF-delta and/or TNF-epsilon polynucleotides orpolypeptides, or agonists or antagonists of TNF-delta and/orTNF-epsilon, could be used to treat blood coagulation disorders (e.g.,afibrinogenemia, factor deficiencies), blood platelet disorders (e.g.thrombocytopenia), or wounds resulting from trauma, surgery, or othercauses. Alternatively, TNF-delta and/or TNF-epsilon polynucleotides orpolypeptides, or agonists or antagonists of TNF-delta and/orTNF-epsilon, that can decrease hemostatic or thrombolytic activity couldbe used to inhibit or dissolve clotting, important in the treatment ofheart attacks (infarction), strokes, or scanning.

TNF-delta and/or TNF-epsilon polynucleotides or polypeptides, oragonists or antagonists of TNF-delta and/or TNF-epsilon, may also beuseful in treating or detecting autoimmune disorders. Many autoimmunedisorders result from inappropriate recognition of self as foreignmaterial by immune cells. This inappropriate recognition results in animmune response leading to the destruction of the host tissue.Therefore, the administration of TNF-delta and/or TNF-epsilonpolynucleotides or polypeptides, or agonists or antagonists of TNF-deltaand/or TNF-epsilon, that can inhibit an immune response, particularlythe proliferation, differentiation, or chemotaxis of T-cells, may be aneffective therapy in preventing autoimmune disorders.

Examples of autoimmune disorders that can be treated or detectedinclude, but are not limited to: Addison's Disease, hemolytic anemia,antiphospholipid syndrome, rheumatoid arthritis, dermatitis, allergicencephalomyelitis, glomerulonephritis, Goodpasture's Syndrome, Graves'Disease, Multiple Sclerosis, Myasthenia Gravis, Neuritis, Ophthalmia,Bullous Pemphigoid, Pemphigus, Polyendocrinopathies, Purpura, Reiter'sDisease, Stiff-Man Syndrome, Autoimmune Thyroiditis, Systemic LupusErythematosus, Autoimmune Pulmonary Inflammation, Guillain-BarreSyndrome, insulin dependent diabetes mellitis, and autoimmuneinflammatory eye disease.

Additional autoimmune disorders (that are highly probable) that may betreated, prevented, and/or diagnosed with the compositions of theinvention include, but are not limited to, autoimmune thyroiditis (i.e.,Hashimoto's thyroiditis) (often characterized, e.g., by cell-mediatedand humoral thyroid cytotoxicity), systemic lupus erhthematosus (oftencharacterized, e.g., by circulating and locally generated immunecomplexes), Goodpasture's syndrome (often characterized, e.g., byanti-basement membrane antibodies), Pemphigus (often characterized,e.g., by epidermal acantholytic antibodies), Receptor autoimmunitiessuch as, for example, (a) Graves' Disease (often characterized, e.g., byTSH receptor antibodies), (b) Myasthenia Gravis (often characterized,e.g., by acetylcholine receptor antibodies), and (c) insulin resistance(often characterized, e.g., by insulin receptor antibodies), autoimmunehemolytic anemia (often characterized, e.g., by phagocytosis ofantibody-sensitized RBCs), autoimmune thrombocytopenic purpura (oftencharacterized, e.g., by phagocytosis of antibody-sensitized platelets.

Additional autoimmune disorders (that are probable) that may be treated,prevented, and/or diagnosed with the compositions of the inventioninclude, but are not limited to, rheumatoid arthritis (oftencharacterized, e.g., by immune complexes in joints), scleroderma withanti-collagen antibodies (often characterized, e.g., by nucleolar andother nuclear antibodies), mixed connective tissue disease (oftencharacterized, e.g., by antibodies to extractable nuclear antigens(e.g., ribonucleoprotein)), polymyositis (often characterized, e.g., bynonhistone ANA), pernicious anemia (often characterized, e.g., byantiparietal cell, microsomes, and intrinsic factor antibodies),idiopathic Addison's disease (often characterized, e.g., by humoral andcell-mediated adrenal cytotoxicity, infertility (often characterized,e.g., by antispermatozoal antibodies), glomerulonephritis (oftencharacterized, e.g., by glomerular basement membrane antibodies orimmune complexes), bullous pemphigoid (often characterized, e.g., by IgGand complement in basement membrane), Sjögren's syndrome (oftencharacterized, e.g., by multiple tissue antibodies, and/or a specificnonhistone ANA (SS-B)), diabetes millitus (often characterized, e.g., bycell-mediated and humoral islet cell antibodies), and adrenergic drugresistance (including adrenergic drug resistance with asthma or cysticfibrosis) (often characterized, e.g., by beta-adrenergic receptorantibodies).

Additional autoimmune disorders (that are possible) that may be treated,prevented, and/or diagnosed with the compositions of the inventioninclude, but are not limited to, chronic active hepatitis (oftencharacterized, e.g., by smooth muscle antibodies), primary biliarycirrhosis (often characterized, e.g., by mitchondrial antibodies), otherendocrine gland failure (often characterized, e.g., by specific tissueantibodies in some cases), vitiligo (often characterized, e.g., bymelanocyte antibodies), vasculitis (often characterized, e.g., by Ig andcomplement in vessel walls and/or low serum complement), post-MI (oftencharacterized, e.g., by myocardial antibodies), cardiotomy syndrome(often characterized, e.g., by myocardial antibodies), urticaria (oftencharacterized, e.g., by IgG and IgM antibodies to IgE), atopicdermatitis (often characterized, e.g., by IgG and IgM antibodies toIgE), asthma (often characterized, e.g., by IgG and IgM antibodies toIgE), and many other inflammatory, granulamatous, degenerative, andatrophic disorders.

In a preferred embodiment, the autoimmune diseases and disorders and/orconditions associated with the diseases and disorders recited above aretreated, prevented, and/or diagnosed using TNF-delta and/or TNF-epsilonantibodies and/or anti-TNF-delta and/or anti-TNF-epsilon antibodiesand/or soluble TNF-delta and/or TNF-epsilon polypeptides of theinvention.

Similarly, allergic reactions and conditions, such as asthma(particularly allergic asthma) or other respiratory problems, may alsobe treated by TNF-delta and/or TNF-epsilon polynucleotides orpolypeptides, or agonists or antagonists of TNF-delta and/orTNF-epsilon. Moreover, these molecules can be used to treat anaphylaxis,hypersensitivity to an antigenic molecule, or blood groupincompatibility.

In specific embodiments, TNF-delta and/or TNF-epsilon antibodies and/oranti-TNF-delta and/or anti-TNF-epsilon antibodies and/or solubleTNF-delta and/or TNF-epsilon polypeptides of the invention are useful totreat, diagnose, prevent, and/or prognose autoimmune and inflammatorydiseases, transplantation rejections, graft-versus-host disease,autoimmune and inflammatory diseases (e.g., immune complex-inducedvasculitis, glomerulonephritis, hemolytic anemia, myasthenia gravis,type II collagen-induced arthritis, experimental allergic and hyperacutexenograft rejection, rheumatoid arthritis, and systemic lupuserythematosus (SLE).

Moreover, inflammatory conditions may also be treated, diagnosed,prevented and/or prognosed with TNF-delta and/or TNF-epsilonpolynucleotides or polypeptides, or agonists or antagonists of TNF-deltaand/or TNF-epsilon (e.g., anti-TNF-delta and/or anti-TNF-epsilonantibodies) of the invention. Such inflammatory conditions include, butare not limited to, for example, respiratory disorders (such as, e.g.,asthma and allergy); gastrointestinal disorders (such as, e.g.,inflammatory bowel disease); cancers (such as, e.g., gastric, ovarian,lung, bladder, liver, and breast); CNS disorders (such as, e.g.,multiple sclerosis, blood-brain barrier permeability, ischemic braininjury and/or stroke, traumatic brain injury, neurodegenerativedisorders (such as, e.g., Parkinson's disease and Alzheimer's disease),AIDS-related dementia, and prion disease); cardiovascular disorders(such as, e.g., atherosclerosis, myocarditis, cardiovascular disease,and cardiopulmonary bypass complications); as well as many additionaldiseases, conditions, and disorders that are characterized byinflammation (such as, e.g., chronic hepatitis (B and C), rheumatoidarthritis, gout, trauma, septic shock, pancreatitis, sarcoidosis,dermatitis, renal ischemia-reperfusion injury, Grave's disease, systemiclupus erythematosis, diabetes mellitus (i.e., type 1 diabetes), andallogenic transplant rejection).

TNF-delta and/or TNF-epsilon polynucleotides or polypeptides, oragonists or antagonists of TNF-delta and/or TNF-epsilon, may also beused to treat and/or prevent organ rejection or graft-versus-hostdisease (GVHD). Organ rejection occurs by host immune cell destructionof the transplanted tissue through an immune response. Similarly, animmune response is also involved in GVHD, but, in this case, the foreigntransplanted immune cells destroy the host tissues. The administrationof TNF-delta and/or TNF-epsilon polynucleotides or polypeptides, oragonists or antagonists of TNF-delta and/or TNF-epsilon, that inhibitsan immune response, particularly the proliferation, differentiation, orchemotaxis of T-cells, may be an effective therapy in preventing organrejection or GVHD.

Similarly, TNF-delta and/or TNF-epsilon polynucleotides or polypeptides,or agonists or antagonists of TNF-delta and/or TNF-epsilon, may also beused to modulate inflammation. For example, TNF-delta and/or TNF-epsilonpolynucleotides or polypeptides, or agonists or antagonists of TNF-deltaand/or TNF-epsilon, may inhibit the proliferation and differentiation ofcells involved in an inflammatory response. These molecules can be usedto treat inflammatory conditions, both chronic and acute conditions,including inflammation associated with infection (e.g., septic shock,sepsis, or systemic inflammatory response syndrome (SIRS)),ischemia-reperfusion injury, endotoxin lethality, arthritis,complement-mediated hyperacute rejection, nephritis, cytokine orchemokine induced lung injury, inflammatory bowel disease, Crohn'sdisease, or resulting from over production of cytokines (e.g., TNF orIL-1.).”

A biological sample of persons afflicted with an autoimmune disease ordisorder is characterized by high levels of expression of TNF-deltaand/or TNF-epsilon when compared to that observed in individuals nothaving an autoimmune disease or disorder. Thus, TNF-delta and/orTNF-epsilon polynucleotides and/or polypeptides of the invention, and/oragonists or antagonists thereof, may be used according to the methods ofthe invention in the diagnosis and/or prognosis of an autoimmune diseaseor disorder. For example, a biological sample obtained from a personsuspected of being afflicted with an autoimmune disease or disorder(“the subject”) may be analyzed for the relative expression level(s) ofTNF-delta and/or TNF-epsilon polynucleotides and/or polypeptides of theinvention. The expression level(s) of one or more of these molecules ofthe invention is (are) then compared to the expression level(s) of thesame molecules of the invention as expressed in a person known not to beafflicted with an autoimmune disease or disorder. A significantdifference in expression level(s) of TNF-delta and/or TNF-epsilonpolynucleotides and/or polypeptides of the invention, and/or agonistsand/or antagonists thereof, between samples obtained from the subjectand the control suggests that the subject is afflicted with anautoimmune disease or disorder.

In another embodiment, TNF-delta and/or TNF-epsilon polynucleotides orpolypeptides or TNF-delta and/or TNF-epsilon antagonists (e.g.,anti-TNF-delta and/or anti-TNF-epsilon antibodies) of the invention areused to treat, diagnose, or prognose an individual having systemic lupuserythramatosus or a subset of this disease. According to thisembodiment, an individual having systemic lupus erythramatosus or asubset of individuals having systemic lupus erythramatosus expressesaberrantly high levels of TNF-delta and/or TNF-epsilon when compared toan individual not having systemic lupus erythramatosus or this subset ofsystemic lupus erythramatosus. Any means described herein or otherwiseknown in the art may be applied to detect TNF-delta and/or TNF-epsilonpolynucleotides or polypeptides of the invention (e.g., FACS analysis orELISA detection of TNF-delta and/or TNF-epsilon polypeptides of theinvention and hybridization or PCR detection of TNF-delta and/orTNF-epsilon polynucleotides of the invention) and to determine theexpression profile of TNF-delta and/or TNF-epsilon polynucleotidesand/or polypeptides of the invention in a biological sample.

A biological sample of persons afflicted with systemic lupuserythramatosus is characterized by high levels of expression ofTNF-delta and/or TNF-epsilon when compared to that observed inindividuals not having systemic lupus erythramatosus. Thus, TNF-deltaand/or TNF-epsilon polynucleotides and/or polypeptides of the invention,and/or agonists or antagonists thereof, may be used according to themethods of the invention in the diagnosis and/or prognosis of systemiclupus erythramatosus or a subset of systemic lupus erythramatosus. Forexample, a biological sample obtained from a person suspected of beingafflicted with systemic lupus erythramatosus (“the subject”) may beanalyzed for the relative expression level(s) of TNF-delta and/orTNF-epsilon polynucleotides and/or polypeptides of the invention. Theexpression level(s) of one or more of these molecules of the inventionis (are) then compared to the expression level(s) of the same moleculesof the invention as expressed in a person known not to be afflicted withsystemic lupus erythramatosus. A significant difference in expressionlevel(s) of TNF-delta and/or TNF-epsilon polynucleotides and/orpolypeptides of the invention, and/or agonists and/or antagoniststhereof, between samples obtained from the subject and the controlsuggests that the subject is afflicted with systemic lupuserythramatosus or a subset thereof.

Furthermore, there is a direct correlation between the severity ofsystemic lupus erythramatosus, or a subset of this disease, and theconcentration of TNF-delta and/or TNF-epsilon polynucleotides (RNA)and/or polypeptides of the invention. Thus, TNF-delta and/or TNF-epsilonpolynucleotides, (RNA), polypeptides and/or agonists or antagonists ofthe invention, may be used according to the methods of the invention inprognosis of the severity of ystemic lupus erythramatosus or a subset ofsystemic lupus erythramatosus. For example, a biological sample obtainedfrom a person suspected of being afflicted with systemic lupuserythramatosus (“the subject”) may be analyzed for the relativeexpression level(s) of TNF-delta and/or TNF-epsilon polynucleotidesand/or polypeptides of the invention. The expression level(s) of one ormore of these molecules of the invention is (are) then compared to theexpression level(s) of the same molecules of the invention as expressedin a panel of persons known to represent a range in severities of thisdisease.

In another embodiment, TNF-delta and/or TNF-epsilon polynucleotides orpolypeptides or TNF-delta and/or TNF-epsilon antagonists (e.g.,anti-TNF-delta and/or anti-TNF-epsilon antibodies) of the invention areused to treat, diagnose, or prognose an individual having rheumatoidarthritis or a subset of this disease. According to this embodiment, anindividual having rheumatoid arthritis or a subset of individuals havingrheumatoid arthritis expresses aberrantly high levels of TNF-deltaand/or TNF-epsilon when compared to an individual not having rheumatoidarthritis or this subset of rheumatoid arthritis. Any means describedherein or otherwise known in the art may be applied to detect TNF-deltaand/or TNF-epsilon polynucleotides or polypeptides of the invention(e.g., FACS analysis or ELISA detection of TNF-delta and/or TNF-epsilonpolypeptides of the invention and hybridization or PCR detection ofTNF-delta and/or TNF-epsilon polynucleotides of the invention) and todetermine the expression profile of TNF-delta and/or TNF-epsilonpolynucleotides and/or polypeptides of the invention in a biologicalsample.

A biological sample of persons afflicted with rheumatoid arthritis ischaracterized by high levels of expression of TNF-delta and/orTNF-epsilon when compared to that observed in individuals not havingrheumatoid arthritis. Thus, TNF-delta and/or TNF-epsilon polynucleotidesand/or polypeptides of the invention, and/or agonists or antagoniststhereof, may be used according to the methods of the invention in thediagnosis and/or prognosis of rheumatoid arthritis or a subset ofrheumatoid arthritis. For example, a biological sample obtained from aperson suspected of being afflicted with rheumatoid arthritis (“thesubject”) may be analyzed for the relative expression level(s) ofTNF-delta and/or TNF-epsilon polynucleotides and/or polypeptides of theinvention. The expression level(s) of one or more of these molecules ofthe invention is (are) then compared to the expression level(s) of thesame molecules of the invention as expressed in a person known not to beafflicted with rheumatoid arthritis. A significant difference inexpression level(s) of TNF-delta and/or TNF-epsilon polynucleotidesand/or polypeptides of the invention, and/or agonists and/or antagoniststhereof, between samples obtained from the subject and the controlsuggests that the subject is afflicted with rheumatoid arthritis or asubset thereof.

In other specific embodiments, antibodies of the invention whichspecifically bind to TNF delta and/or TNF epsilon can be used fordiagnostic purposes to detect, diagnose, prognose, or monitor Sjögren'sSyndrome or conditions associated therewith. The invention provides forthe detection of aberrant expression of TNF delta and/or TNF epsiloncomprising: (a) assaying the expression of TNF delta and/or TNF epsilonin a biological sample of an individual using one or more antibodies ofthe invention that immunospecifically binds to TNF delta and/or TNFepsilon; and (b) comparing the level of TNF delta and/or TNF epsilonwith a standard level TNF delta and/or TNF epsilon, e.g., in normalbiological samples, whereby an increase in the assayed level of TNFdelta and/or TNF epsilon compared to the standard level of TNF deltaand/or TNF epsilon is indicative of Sjögren's Syndrome.

In other specific embodiments, antibodies of the invention whichspecifically bind to TNF delta and/or TNF epsilon can be used fordiagnostic purposes to detect, diagnose, prognose, or monitor HIVinfection or conditions associated therewith (e.g., AIDS). The inventionprovides for the detection of aberrant expression of TNF delta and/orTNF epsilon comprising: (a) assaying the expression of TNF delta and/orTNF epsilon in a biological sample of an individual using one or moreantibodies of the invention that immunospecifically binds toNeutrokine-alpha and/or Neutrokine-alphaSV; and (b) comparing the levelof TNF delta and/or TNF epsilon with a standard level of TNF deltaand/or TNF epsilon, e.g., in normal biological samples, whereby anincrease in the assayed level of TNF delta and/or TNF epsilon comparedto the standard level of TNF delta and/or TNF epsilon is indicative ofHIV infection.

Thus, the invention provides a diagnostic method useful during diagnosisof a immune system disorder, including cancers of this system, whichinvolves measuring the expression level of the gene encoding theTNF-delta and/or TNF-epsilon polypeptide in immune system tissue orother cells or body fluid from an individual and comparing the measuredgene expression level with a standard TNF-delta and/or TNF-epsilon geneexpression level, whereby an increase or decrease in the gene expressionlevel compared to the standard is indicative of an immune systemdisorder.

Where a diagnosis of a disorder in the immune system, includingdiagnosis of a tumor, has already been made according to conventionalmethods, the present invention is useful as a prognostic indicator,whereby patients exhibiting enhanced or depressed TNF-delta and/orTNF-epsilon gene expression will experience a worse clinical outcomerelative to patients expressing the gene at a level nearer the standardlevel.

By “assaying the expression level of the gene encoding the TNF-deltaand/or TNF-epsilon polypeptide” is intended qualitatively orquantitatively measuring or estimating the level of the TNF-delta and/orTNF-epsilon polypeptide or the level of the mRNA encoding the TNF-deltaand/or TNF-epsilon polypeptide in a first biological sample eitherdirectly (e.g., by determining or estimating absolute protein level ormRNA level) or relatively (e.g., by comparing to the TNF-delta and/orTNF-epsilon polypeptide level or mRNA level in a second biologicalsample). Preferably, the TNF-delta and/or TNF-epsilon polypeptide levelor mRNA level in the first biological sample is measured or estimatedand compared to a standard TNF-delta and/or TNF-epsilon polypeptidelevel or mRNA level, the standard being taken from a second biologicalsample obtained from an individual not having the disorder or beingdetermined by averaging levels from a population of individuals nothaving a disorder of the immune system. As will be appreciated in theart, once a standard TNF-delta and/or TNF-epsilon polypeptide level ormRNA level is known, it can be used repeatedly as a standard forcomparison.

By “biological sample” is intended any biological sample obtained froman individual, body fluid, cell line, tissue culture, or other sourcewhich contains TNF-delta and/or TNF-epsilon polypeptide or mRNA. Asindicated, biological samples include body fluids (such as sera, plasma,urine, synovial fluid and spinal fluid) which contain free extracellulardomains of the TNF-delta and/or TNF-epsilon polypeptide, immune systemtissue, and other tissue sources found to express complete or freeextracellular domain of the TNF-delta and/or TNF-epsilon or a TNF-deltaand/or TNF-epsilon receptor. Methods for obtaining tissue biopsies andbody fluids from mammals are well known in the art. Where the biologicalsample is to include mRNA, a tissue biopsy is the preferred source.

The compounds of the present invention are useful for diagnosis ortreatment of various immune system-related disorders in mammals,preferably humans. Such disorders include but are not limited to tumors(e.g., T cell and monocytic cell leukemias and lymphomas) and tumormetastasis, infections by bacteria, viruses and other parasites,immunodeficiencies, inflammatory diseases, lymphadenopathy, autoimmunediseases, and graft versus host disease.

Total cellular RNA can be isolated from a biological sample using anysuitable technique such as the single-stepguanidinium-thiocyanate-phenol-chloroform method described inChomczynski and Sacchi, Anal Biochem. 162:156-159 (1987). Levels of mRNAencoding the TNF-delta and/or TNF-epsilon polypeptide are then assayedusing any appropriate method. These include Northern blot analysis, S1nuclease mapping, the polymerase chain reaction (PCR), reversetranscription in combination with the polymerase chain reaction(RT-PCR), and reverse transcription in combination with the ligase chainreaction (RT-LCR).

Assaying TNF-delta and/or TNF-epsilon polypeptide levels in a biologicalsample can occur using antibody-based techniques. For example, TNF-deltaand/or TNF-epsilon polypeptide expression in tissues can be studied withclassical immunohistological methods (Jalkanen, M., et al., J. Cell.Biol. 101:976-985 (1985); Jalkanen, M., et al., J. Cell. Biol.105:3087-3096 (1987)). Other antibody-based methods useful for detectingTNF-delta and/or TNF-epsilon polypeptide gene expression includeimmunoassays, such as the enzyme linked immunosorbent assay (ELISA) andthe radioimmunoassay (RIA). Suitable antibody assay labels are known inthe art and include enzyme labels, such as, glucose oxidase, andradioisotopes, such as iodine (¹³¹I, ¹²⁵I, ¹²³I, ¹²¹I), carbon (¹⁴C),sulfur (³⁵S), tritium (³H), indium (^(115m)In, ^(113m)In, ^(112m)In,¹¹¹In), and technetium (⁹⁹Tc, ^(99m)Tc), thallium (²⁰¹Ti), gallium(⁶⁸Ga, ⁶⁷Ga), palladium (¹⁰³Pd), molybdenum (⁹⁹Mo), xenon (¹³³Xe),fluorine (¹⁸F), ¹⁵³Sm, ¹⁷⁷Lu, ¹⁵⁹Gd, ¹⁴⁹Pm, ¹⁴⁰La, ¹⁷⁵Yb, ¹⁶⁶Ho, ⁹⁰Y,⁴⁷Sc, ¹⁸⁶Re, ¹⁸⁸Re, ¹⁴²Pr, ¹⁰⁵Rh, ⁹⁷Ru; luminescent labels, such asluminol; and fluorescent labels, such as fluorescein and rhodamine, andbiotin.

Techniques known in the art may be applied to label antibodies of theinvention. Such techniques include, but are not limited to, the use ofbifunctional conjugating agents (see e.g., U.S. Pat. Nos. 5,756,065;5,714,631; 5,696,239; 5,652,361; 5,505,931; 5,489,425; 5,435,990;5,428,139; 5,342,604; 5,274,119; 4,994,560; and 5,808,003; the contentsof each of which are hereby incorporated by reference in its entirety).

The tissue or cell type to be analyzed will generally include thosewhich are known, or suspected, to express the TNF-delta and/orTNF-epsilon gene (such as, for example, cells of T lineage) or cells ortissue which are known, or suspected, to express the TNF-delta and/orTNF-epsilon receptor gene (such as, for example, cells of B cell lineageand the spleen). The protein isolation methods employed herein may, forexample, be such as those described in Harlow and Lane (Harlow, E. andLane, D., 1988, “Antibodies: A Laboratory Manual”, Cold Spring HarborLaboratory Press, Cold Spring Harbor, N.Y.), which is incorporatedherein by reference in its entirety. The isolated cells can be derivedfrom cell culture or from a patient. The analysis of cells taken fromculture may be a necessary step in the assessment of cells that could beused as part of a cell-based gene therapy technique or, alternatively,to test the effect of compounds on the expression of the TNF-deltaand/or TNF-epsilon receptor gene.

For example, antibodies, or fragments of antibodies, such as thosedescribed herein, may be used to quantitatively or qualitatively detectthe presence of TNF-delta and/or TNF-epsilon gene products or conservedvariants or peptide fragments thereof. This can be accomplished, forexample, by immunofluorescence techniques employing a fluorescentlylabeled antibody coupled with light microscopic, flow cytometric, orfluorimetric detection.

The antibodies (or fragments thereof) or TNF-delta and/or TNF-epsilonpolypeptides or polypeptides of the present invention may, additionally,be employed histologically, as in immunofluorescence, immunoelectronmicroscopy or non-immunological assays, for in situ detection ofTNF-delta and/or TNF-epsilon gene products or conserved variants orpeptide fragments thereof, or for TNF-delta and/or TNF-epsilon bindingto TNF-delta and/or TNF-epsilon receptor. In situ detection may beaccomplished by removing a histological specimen from a patient, andapplying thereto a labeled antibody or TNF-delta and/or TNF-epsilonpolypeptide of the present invention. The antibody (or fragment) orTNF-delta and/or TNF-epsilon polypeptide is preferably applied byoverlaying the labeled antibody (or fragment) onto a biological sample.Through the use of such a procedure, it is possible to determine notonly the presence of the TNF-delta and/or TNF-epsilon gene product, orconserved variants or peptide fragments, or TNF-delta and/or TNF-epsilonpolypeptide binding, but also its distribution in the examined tissue.Using the present invention, those of ordinary skill will readilyperceive that any of a wide variety of histological methods (such asstaining procedures) can be modified in order to achieve such in situdetection.

Immunoassays and non-immunoassays for TNF-delta and/or TNF-epsilon geneproducts or conserved variants or peptide fragments thereof willtypically comprise incubating a sample, such as a biological fluid, atissue extract, freshly harvested cells, or lysates of cells which havebeen incubated in cell culture, in the presence of a detectably labeledantibody capable of identifying TNF-delta and/or TNF-epsilon geneproducts or conserved variants or peptide fragments thereof, anddetecting the bound antibody by any of a number of techniques well-knownin the art.

Immunoassays and non-immunoassays for TNF-delta and/or TNF-epsilonreceptor gene products or conserved variants or peptide fragmentsthereof will typically comprise incubating a sample, such as abiological fluid, a tissue extract, freshly harvested cells, or lysatesof cells which have been incubated in cell culture, in the presence of adetectable or labeled TNF-delta and/or TNF-epsilon polypeptide capableof identifying TNF-delta and/or TNF-epsilon receptor gene products orconserved variants or peptide fragments thereof, and detecting the boundTNF-delta and/or TNF-epsilon polypeptide by any of a number oftechniques well-known in the art.

The biological sample may be brought in contact with and immobilizedonto a solid phase support or carrier such as nitrocellulose, or othersolid support which is capable of immobilizing cells, cell particles orsoluble proteins. The support may then be washed with suitable buffersfollowed by treatment with the detectably labeled anti-TNF-delta and/oranti-TNF-epsilon antibody or detectable TNF-delta and/or TNF-epsilonpolypeptide. The solid phase support may then be washed with the buffera second time to remove unbound antibody or polypeptide. Optionally theantibody is subsequently labeled. The amount of bound label on solidsupport may then be detected by conventional means.

By “solid phase support or carrier” is intended any support capable ofbinding an antigen or an antibody. Well-known supports or carriersinclude glass, polystyrene, polypropylene, polyethylene, dextran, nylon,amylases, natural and modified celluloses, polyacrylamides, gabbros, andmagnetite. The nature of the carrier can be either soluble to someextent or insoluble for the purposes of the present invention. Thesupport material may have virtually any possible structuralconfiguration so long as the coupled molecule is capable of binding toan antigen or antibody. Thus, the support configuration may bespherical, as in a bead, or cylindrical, as in the inside surface of atest tube, or the external surface of a rod. Alternatively, the surfacemay be flat such as a sheet, test strip, etc. Preferred supports includepolystyrene beads. Those skilled in the art will know many othersuitable carriers for binding antibody or antigen, or will be able toascertain the same by use of routine experimentation.

The binding activity of a given lot of anti-TNF-delta and/oranti-TNF-epsilon antibody or TNF-delta and/or TNF-epsilon polypeptidemay be determined according to well-known methods. Those skilled in theart will be able to determine operative and optimal assay conditions foreach determination by employing routine experimentation.

In addition to assaying TNF-delta and/or TNF-epsilon polypeptide levelsor polynucleotide levels in a biological sample obtained from anobtained from an individual, TNF-delta and/or TNF-epsilon polypeptide orpolynucleotide can also be detected in vivo by imaging. For example, inone embodiment of the invention, TNF-delta and/or TNF-epsilonpolypeptide is used to image T cell lymphomas. In another embodiment,TNF-delta and/or TNF-epsilon polynucleotides o the invention (e.g.,polynucleotides complementary to all or a portion of TNF-delta and/orTNF-epsilon mRNA) is used to image T cell lymphomas.

Antibody labels or markers for in vivo imaging of TNF-delta and/orTNF-epsilon polypeptide include those detectable by X-radiography, NMR,MRI, CAT-scans or ESR. For X-radiography, suitable labels includeradioisotopes such as barium or cesium, which emit detectable radiationbut are not overtly harmful to the subject. Suitable markers for NMR andESR include those with a detectable characteristic spin, such asdeuterium, which may be incorporated into the antibody by labeling ofnutrients for the relevant hybridoma. Where in vivo imaging is used todetect enhanced levels of TNF-delta and/or TNF-epsilon polypeptide fordiagnosis in humans, it may be preferable to use human antibodies or“humanized” chimeric monoclonal antibodies. Such antibodies can beproduced using techniques described herein or otherwise known in theart. For example methods for producing chimeric antibodies are known inthe art. See, for review, Morrison, Science 229:1202 (1985); Oi et al.,BioTechniques 4:214 (1986); Cabilly et al., U.S. Pat. No. 4,816,567;Taniguchi et al., EP 171496; Morrison et al., EP 173494; Neuberger etal., WO 8601533; Robinson et al., WO 8702671; Boulianne et al., Nature312:643 (1984); Neuberger et al., Nature 314:268 (1985).

Additionally, any TNF-delta and/or TNF-epsilon polypeptide whosepresence can be detected, can be administered. For example, TNF-deltaand/or TNF-epsilon polypeptides labeled with a radio-opaque or otherappropriate compound can be administered and visualized in vivo, asdiscussed, above for labeled antibodies. Further such TNF-delta and/orTNF-epsilon polypeptides can be utilized for in vitro diagnosticprocedures.

A TNF-delta and/or TNF-epsilon polypeptide-specific antibody or antibodyfragment which has been labeled with an appropriate detectable imagingmoiety, such as a radioisotope (for example, ¹³¹I, ¹¹²In, ^(99m)Tc,(¹³¹I, ¹²⁵I, ¹²³I, ¹²¹I), carbon (¹⁴C), Sulfr (³⁵S), tritium (³H),indium (^(115m)In, ^(113m)In, ¹¹²In, ¹¹¹In), and technetium (⁹⁹Tc,^(99m)Tc), thallium (²⁰¹Ti), gallium (⁶⁸Ga, ⁶⁷Ga), palladium (¹⁰³Pd),molybdenum (99Mo), xenon (¹³³Xe), fluorine (¹⁸F), ¹⁵³Sm, ¹⁷⁷Lu, ¹⁵⁹Gd,¹⁴⁹Pm, ¹⁴⁰La, ¹⁷⁵Yb, ¹⁶⁶Ho, ⁹⁰Y, ⁴⁷Sc, ¹⁸⁶Re, ¹⁸⁸Re, ¹⁴²Pr, 105Rh,⁹⁷Ru), a radio-opaque substance, or a material detectable by nuclearmagnetic resonance, is introduced (for example, parenterally,subcutaneously or intraperitoneally) into the mammal to be examined forimmune system disorder. It will be understood in the art that the sizeof the subject and the imaging system used will determine the quantityof imaging moiety needed to produce diagnostic images. In the case of aradioisotope moiety, for a human subject, the quantity of radioactivityinjected will normally range from about 5 to 20 millicuries of ^(99m)Tc.The labeled antibody or antibody fragment will then preferentiallyaccumulate at the location of cells which contain TNF delta and/or TNFepsilon protein. In vivo tumor imaging is described in S. W. Burchiel etal., “Immunopharmacokinetics of Radiolabeled Antibodies and TheirFragments” (Chapter 13 in Tumor Imaging: The Radiochemical Detection ofCancer, S. W. Burchiel and B. A. Rhodes, eds., Masson Publishing Inc.(1982)).

With respect to antibodies, one of the ways in which the anti-TNF deltaand/or anti-TNF epsilon antibody can be detectably labeled is by linkingthe same to an enzyme and using the linked product in an enzymeimmunoassay (EIA) (Voller, A., “The Enzyme Linked Immunosorbent Assay(ELISA)”, 1978, Diagnostic Horizons 2:1-7, Microbiological AssociatesQuarterly Publication, Walkersville, Md.); Voller et al., J. Clin.Pathol. 31:507-520 (1978); Butler, J. E., Meth. Enzymol 73:482-523(1981); Maggio, E. (ed.), 1980, Enzyme Immunoassay, CRC Press, BocaRaton, Fla.,; Ishikawa, E. et al., (eds.), 1981, Enzyme Immunoassay,Kgaku Shoin, Tokyo). The enzyme which is bound to the antibody willreact with an appropriate substrate, preferably a chromogenic substrate,in such a manner as to produce a chemical moiety which can be detected,for example, by spectrophotometric, fluorimetric or by visual means.Enzymes which can be used to detectably label the antibody include, butare not limited to, malate dehydrogenase, staphylococcal nuclease,delta-S-steroid isomerase, yeast alcohol dehydrogenase,alpha-glycerophosphate, dehydrogenase, triose phosphate isomerase,horseradish peroxidase, alkaline phosphatase, asparaginase, glucoseoxidase, beta-galactosidase, ribonuclease, urease, catalase,glucose-6-phosphate dehydrogenase, glucoamylase andacetylcholinesterase. Additionally, the detection can be accomplished bycolorimetric methods which employ a chromogenic substrate for theenzyme. Detection may also be accomplished by visual comparison of theextent of enzymatic reaction of a substrate in comparison with similarlyprepared standards.

Detection may also be accomplished using any of a variety of otherimmunoassays. For example, by radioactively labeling the antibodies orantibody fragments, it is possible to detect TNF-delta and/orTNF-epsilon through the use of a radioimmunoassay (RIA) (see, forexample, Weintraub, B., Principles of Radioimmunoassays, SeventhTraining Course on Radioligand Assay Techniques, The Endocrine Society,March, 1986, which is incorporated by reference herein). The radioactiveisotope can be detected by means including, but not limited to, a gammacounter, a scintillation counter, or autoradiography.

It is also possible to label the antibody with a fluorescent compound.When the fluorescently labeled antibody is exposed to light of theproper wave-length, its presence can then be detected due tofluorescence. Among the most commonly used fluorescent labelingcompounds are fluorescein isothiocyanate, rhodamine, phycoerythrin,phycocyanin, allophycocyanin, ophthaldehyde and fluorescamine.

The antibody can also be detectably labeled using fluorescence emittingmetals such as ¹⁵²Eu, or others of the lanthanide series. These metalscan be attached to the antibody using such metal chelating groups asdiethylenetriaminepentacetic acid (DTPA) or ethylenediaminetetraaceticacid (EDTA).

The antibody also can be detectably labeled by coupling it to achemiluminescent compound. The presence of the chemiluminescent-taggedantibody is then determined by detecting the presence of luminescencethat arises during the course of a chemical reaction. Examples ofparticularly useful chemiluminescent labeling compounds are luminol,isoluminol, theromatic acridinium ester, imidazole, acridinium salt andoxalate ester.

Likewise, a bioluminescent compound may be used to label the antibody ofthe present invention. Bioluminescence is a type of chemiluminescencefound in biological systems in, which a catalytic protein increases theefficiency of the chemiluminescent reaction. The presence of abioluminescent protein is determined by detecting the presence ofluminescence. Important bioluminescent compounds for purposes oflabeling are luciferin, luciferase and aequorin.

Therapeutics

The Tumor Necrosis Factor (TNF) family ligands are known to be among themost pleiotropic cytokines, inducing a large number of cellularresponses, including cytotoxicity, anti-viral activity, immunoregulatoryactivities, and the transcriptional regulation of several genes(Goeddel, D. V. et al., “Tumor Necrosis Factors: Gene Structure andBiological Activities,” Symp. Quant. Biol. 51:597-609 (1986), ColdSpring Harbor; Beutler, B., and Cerami, A., Annu. Rev. Biochem.57:505-518 (1988); Old, L. J., Sci. Am. 258:59-75 (1988); Fiers, W.,FEBS Lett. 285:199-224 (1991)). The TNF-family ligands induce suchvarious cellular responses by binding to TNF-family receptors.

TNF delta and/or TNF epsilon polynucleotides, polypeptides, agonistsand/or antagonists of the invention may be administered to a patient(e.g., mammal, preferably human) afflicted with any disease or disordermediated (directly or indirectly) by defective, or deficient levels of,TNF delta and/or TNF epsilon. Alternatively, a gene therapy approach maybe applied to treat such diseases or disorders. In one embodiment of theinvention, TNF delta and/or TNF epsilon polynucleotide sequences areused to detect mutein TNF delta and/or TNF epsilon genes, includingdefective genes. Mutein genes may be identified in in vitro diagnosticassays, and by comparison of the TNF delta and/or TNF epsilon nucleotidesequence disclosed herein with that of a TNF delta and/or TNF epsilongene obtained from a patient suspected of harboring a defect in thisgene. Defective genes may be replaced with normal TNF delta and/or TNFepsilon-encoding genes using techniques known to one skilled in the art.

In another embodiment, the TNF delta and/or TNF epsilon polypeptides,polynucleotides, agonists and/or antagonists of the present inventionare used as research tools for studying the phenotypic effects thatresult from inhibiting TRAIL/TNF delta and/or TRAIL/TNF epsiloninteractions on various cell types. TNF delta and/or TNF epsilonpolypeptides and antagonists (e.g. monoclonal antibodies to TNF deltaand/or TNF epsilon) also may be used in in vitro assays for detectingTRAIL or TNF delta and/or TNF epsilon or the interactions thereof.

It has been reported that certain ligands of the TNF family (of whichTRAIL is a member) bind to more than one distinct cell surface receptorprotein. For example, a receptor protein designated DR4 reportedly bindsTRAIL, but is distinct from the TNF delta and/or TNF epsilon of thepresent invention (Pan et al., Science 276:111-113, (1997); herebyincorporated by reference). In another embodiment, a purified TNF deltaand/or TNF epsilon polypeptide, agonist and/or antagonist is used toinhibit binding of TRAIL to endogenous cell surface TRAIL. By competingfor TRAIL binding, soluble TNF delta and/or TNF epsilon polypeptides ofthe present invention may be employed to inhibit the interaction ofTRAIL not only with cell surface TNF delta and/or TNF epsilon, but alsowith TRAIL receptor proteins distinct from TNF delta and/or TNF epsilon.Thus, in a further embodiment, TNF delta and/or TNF epsilonpolynucleotides, polypeptides, agonists and/or antagonists of theinvention are used to inhibit a functional activity of TRAIL, in invitro or in vivo procedures. By inhibiting binding of TRAIL to cellsurface receptors, TNF delta and/or TNF epsilon also inhibits biologicaleffects that result from the binding of TRAIL to endogenous receptors.Various forms of TNF delta and/or TNF epsilon may be employed,including, for example, the above-described TNF delta and/or TNF epsilonfragments, derivatives, and variants that are capable of binding TRAIL.In a preferred embodiment, a soluble TNF delta and/or TNF epsilon, isemployed to inhibit a functional activity of TRAIL, e.g., to inhibitTRAIL-mediated apoptosis of cells susceptible to such apoptosis. Thus,in an additional embodiment, TNF delta and/or TNF epsilon isadministered to a mammal (e.g., a human) to treat a TRAIL-mediateddisorder. Such TRAIL-mediated disorders include conditions caused(directly or indirectly) or exacerbated by TRAIL.

Diseases associated with increased cell survival, or the inhibition ofapoptosis, include cancers (such as follicular lymphomas, carcinomaswith p53 mutations, and hormone-dependent tumors, including, but notlimited to colon cancer, cardiac tumors, pancreatic cancer, melanoma,retinoblastoma, glioblastoma, lung cancer, intestinal cancer, testicularcancer, stomach cancer, neuroblastoma, myxoma, myoma, lymphoma,endothelioma, osteoblastoma, osteoclastoma, osteosarcoma,chondrosarcoma, adenoma, breast cancer, prostate cancer, Kaposi'ssarcoma and ovarian cancer); autoimmune disorders (such as, multiplesclerosis, Sjögren's syndrome, Hashimoto's thyroiditis, biliarycirrhosis, Behcet's disease, Crohn's disease, polymyositis, systemiclupus erythematosus and immune-related glomerulonephritis and rheumatoidarthritis) and viral infections (such as herpes viruses, pox viruses andadenoviruses), inflammation, graft v. host disease, acute graftrejection, and chronic graft rejection. In preferred embodiments, TNFdelta and/or TNF epsilon polynucleotides, polypeptides, and/orantagonists of the invention are used to inhibit growth, progression,and/or metastasis of cancers, in particular those listed above.

Additional diseases or conditions associated with increased cellsurvival include, but are not limited to, progression, and/or metastasesof malignancies and related disorders such as leukemia (including acuteleukemias (e.g., acute lymphocytic leukemia, acute myelocytic leukemia(including myeloblastic, promyelocytic, myelomonocytic, monocytic, anderythroleukemia)) and chronic leukemias (e.g., chronic myelocytic(granulocytic) leukemia and chronic lymphocytic leukemia)), polycythemiavera, lymphomas (e.g., Hodgkin's disease and non-Hodgkin's disease),multiple myeloma, Waldenstrom's macroglobulinemia, heavy chain disease,and solid tumors including, but not limited to, sarcomas and carcinomassuch as fibrosarcoma, myxosarcoma, liposarcoma, chondrosarcoma,osteogenic sarcoma, chordoma, angiosarcoma, endotheliosarcoma,lymphangiosarcoma, lymphangioendotheliosarcoma, synovioma, mesothelioma,Ewing's tumor, leiomyosarcoma, rhabdomyosarcoma, colon carcinoma,pancreatic cancer, breast cancer, ovarian cancer, prostate cancer,squamous cell carcinoma, basal cell carcinoma, adenocarcinoma, sweatgland carcinoma, sebaceous gland carcinoma, papillary carcinoma,papillary adenocarcinomas, cystadenocarcinoma, medullary carcinoma,bronchogenic carcinoma, renal cell carcinoma, hepatoma, bile ductcarcinoma, choriocarcinoma, seminoma, embryonal carcinoma, Wilm's tumor,cervical cancer, testicular tumor, lung carcinoma, small cell lungcarcinoma, bladder carcinoma, epithelial carcinoma, glioma, astrocytoma,medulloblastoma, craniopharyngioma, ependymoma, pinealoma,hemangioblastoma, acoustic neuroma, oligodendroglioma, menangioma,melanoma, neuroblastoma, and retinoblastoma.

Diseases associated with increased apoptosis include AIDS;neurodegenerative disorders (such as Alzheimer's disease, Parkinson'sdisease, Amyotrophic lateral sclerosis, Retinitis pigmentosa, Cerebellardegeneration and brain tumor or prior associated disease); autoimmunedisorders (such as, multiple sclerosis, Sjögren's syndrome, Hashimoto'sthyroiditis, biliary cirrhosis, Behcet's disease, Crohn's disease,polymyositis, systemic lupus erythematosus and immune-relatedglomerulonephritis and rheumatoid arthritis) myelodysplastic syndromes(such as aplastic anemia), graft v. host disease, ischemic injury (suchas that caused by myocardial infarction, stroke and reperfusion injury),liver injury (such as hepatitis related liver injury,ischemia/reperfusion injury, cholestosis (bile duct injury) and livercancer); toxin-induced liver disease (such as that caused by alcohol),septic shock, cachexia and anorexia. In preferred embodiments, TNF deltaand/or TNF epsilon polynucleotides, polypeptides and/or agonists areused to treat the diseases and disorders listed above.

Many of the pathologies associated with HIV are mediated by apoptosis,including HIV-induced nephropathy and HIV encephalitis. Thus, inadditional preferred embodiments, DR4 polynucleotides, polypeptides,and/or DR4 agonists of the invention are used to treat AIDS andpathologies associated with AIDS. Another embodiment of the presentinvention is directed to the use of DR4 to reduce TRAIL-mediated deathof T cells in HIV-infected patients.

Another embodiment of the present invention is directed to the use ofTRID to reduce TRAIL-mediated death of T cells in HIV-infected patients.The role of T cell apoptosis in the development of AIDS has been thesubject of a number of studies (see, for example, Meyaard et al.,Science 257:217-219, 1992; Groux et al., J. Exp. Med., 175:331, 1992;and Oyaizu et al., in Cell Activation and Apoptosis in HIV Infection,Andrieu and Lu, Eds., Plenum Press, New York, 1995, pp. 101-114).Fas-mediated apoptosis has been implicated in the loss of T cells in HIVindividuals (Katsikis et al., J. Exp. Med. 181:2029-2036, 1995).

The state of immunodeficiency that defines AIDS is secondary to adecrease in the number and function of CD4⁺ T-lymphocytes. Recentreports estimate the daily loss of CD4⁺ T cells to be between 3.5×10⁷and 2×10⁹ cells (Wei X. et al., Nature 373:117-122 (1995)). One cause ofCD4⁺ T cell depletion in the setting of HIV infection is believed to beHIV-induced apoptosis (see, for example, Meyaard et al., Science257:217-219, 1992; Groux et al., J. Exp. Med., 175:331, 1992; and Oyaizuet al., in Cell Activation and Apoptosis in HIV Infection, Andrieu andLu, Eds., Plenum Press, New York, 1995, pp. 101-114). Indeed,HIV-induced apoptotic cell death has been demonstrated not only in vitrobut also, more importantly, in infected individuals (Ameisen, J. C.,AIDS 8:1197-1213 (1994); Finkel, T. H., and Banda, N. K., Curr. Opin.Immunol. 6:605-615(1995); Muro-Cacho, C. A. et al., J. Immunol.154:5555-5566 (1995)). Furthermore, apoptosis and CD4⁺ T-lymphocytedepletion is tightly correlated in different animal models of AIDS(Brunner, T., et al., Nature 373:441-444 (1995); Gougeon, M. L., et al.,AIDS Res. Hum. Retroviruses 9:553-563 (1993)) and, apoptosis is notobserved in those animal models in which viral replication does notresult in AIDS (Gougeon, M. L. et al., AIDS Res. Hum. Retroviruses9:553-563 (1993)). Further data indicates that uninfected but primed oractivated T lymphocytes from HIV-infected individuals undergo apoptosisafter encountering the TNF-family ligand FasL. Using monocytic celllines that result in death following HIV infection, it has beendemonstrated that infection of U937 cells with HIV results in the denovo expression of FasL and that FasL mediates HIV-induced apoptosis(Badley, A. D. et al, J. Virol. 70:199-206 (1996)). Further theTNF-family ligand was detectable in uninfected macrophages and itsexpression was upregulated following HIV infection resulting inselective killing of uninfected CD4 T-lymphocytes (Badley, A. D et al.,J. Virol. 70:199-206 (1996)). Further, additional studies haveimplicated Fas-mediated apoptosis in the loss of T cells in HIVindividuals (Katsikis et al., J. Exp. Med. 181:2029-2036 (1995)). It isalso possible that T cell apoptosis occurs through multiple mechanisms.Further, at least some of the T cell death seen in HIV patients may bemediated by TRAIL.

Thus, by the invention, a method for treating HIV+individuals isprovided which involves administering TNF delta and/or TNF epsilonagonists of the present invention to reduce selective killing of CD4⁺T-lymphocytes.

While not wanting to be bound by theory, activated human T cells arebelieved to be induced to undergo programmed cell death (apoptosis) upontriggering through the CD3/T cell receptor complex, a process termedactivated-induced cell death (AICD). AICD of CD4⁺ T cells isolated fromHIV-Infected asymptomatic individuals has been reported (Groux et al.,supra). Thus, AICD may play a role in the depletion of CD4⁺ T cells andthe progression to AIDS in HIV-infected individuals. Thus, the presentinvention provides a method of inhibiting TRAIL-mediated T cell death inHIV patients, comprising administering a DR4 polypeptide of theinvention (preferably, a soluble DR4 polypeptide) and/or DR4 antagonistof the invention to the patients. Modes of administration and dosagesare discussed in detail below. In one embodiment, the patient isasymptomatic when treatment with DR4 commences. If desired, prior totreatment, peripheral blood T cells may be extracted from an HIVpatient, and tested for susceptibility to TRAIL-mediated cell death byprocedures known in the art. In one embodiment, a patient's blood orplasma is contacted with DR4 polypeptides of the invention ex vivo. TheDR4 polypeptides of the invention may be bound to a suitablechromatography matrix by procedures known in the art. The patient'sblood or plasma flows through a chromatography column containing DR4bound to the matrix, before being returned to the patient. Theimmobilized DR4 polypeptide binds TRAIL, thus removing TRAIL proteinfrom the patient's blood.

In additional embodiments a DR4 polypeptide and/or antagonist of theinvention is administered in combination with other inhibitors of T cellapoptosis. For example, as discussed above, Fas-mediated apoptosis alsohas been implicated in loss of T cells in HIV individuals (Katsikis etal., J. Exp. Med. 181:2029-2036, 1995). Thus, a patient susceptible toboth Fas ligand mediated and TRAIL mediated T cell death may be treatedwith both an agent that blocks TRAIL/TRAIL receptor interactions and anagent that blocks Fas-ligand/Fas interactions. Suitable agents forblocking binding of Fas-ligand to Fas include, but are not limited to,soluble Fas polypeptides; mulitmeric forms of soluble Fas polypeptides(e.g., dimers of sFas/Fc); anti-Fas antibodies that bind Fas withouttransducing the biological signal that results in apoptosis;anti-Fas-ligand antibodies that block binding of Fas-ligand to Fas; andmuteins of Fas-ligand that bind Fas but do not transduce the biologicalsignal that results in apoptosis. Preferably, the antibodies employedaccording to this method are monoclonal antibodies. Examples of suitableagents for blocking Fas-ligand/Fas interactions, including blockinganti-Fas monoclonal antibodies, are described in Internationalapplication publication number WO 95/10540, hereby incorporated byreference.

Suitable agents, which also block binding of TRAIL to a TRAIL receptorthat may be administered with the polynucleotides and/or polypeptides ofthe present invention include, but are not limited to, soluble TRAILreceptor polypeptides (e.g., a soluble form of OPG, TR5 (Internationalapplication publication number WO 98/30693); DR5 (Internationalapplication publication number WO 98/41629); and TR10 (Internationalapplication publication number WO 98/54202)); multimeric forms ofsoluble TRAIL receptor polypeptides; and TRAIL receptor antibodies thatbind the TRAIL receptor without transducing the biological signal thatresults in apoptosis, anti-TRAIL antibodies that block binding of TRAILto one or more TRAIL receptors, and muteins of TRAIL that bind TRAILreceptors but do not transduce the biological signal that results inapoptosis. Preferably, the antibodies employed according to this methodare monoclonal antibodies.

Because TNF-delta and TNF-epsilon belong to the TNF superfamily, thepolypeptides should also modulate angiogenesis. In addition, sinceTNF-delta and/or TNF-epsilon inhibit immune cell functions, thepolypeptides will have a wide range of anti-inflammatory activities.TNF-delta and/or TNF-epsilon may be employed as an anti-neovascularizingagent to treat, prevent, and/or diagnose solid tumors by stimulating theinvasion and activation of host defense cells, e.g., cytotoxic T cellsand macrophages and by inhibiting the angiogenesis of tumors. Those ofskill in the art will recognize other non-cancer indications where bloodvessel proliferation is not wanted. They may also be employed to enhancehost defenses against resistant chronic and acute infections, forexample, myobacterial infections via the attraction and activation ofmicrobicidal leukocytes. TNF-delta and/or TNF-epsilon may also beemployed to inhibit T-cell proliferation by the inhibition of IL-2biosynthesis for the treatment of T-cell mediated auto-immune diseasesand lymphocytic leukemias (including, for example, chronic lymphocyticleukemia (CLL)). TNF-delta and/or TNF-epsilon may also be employed tostimulate wound healing, both via the recruitment of debris clearing andconnective tissue promoting inflammatory cells. In this same manner,TNF-delta and/or TNF-epsilon may also be employed to treat, prevent,and/or diagnose other fibrotic disorders, including liver cirrhosis,osteoarthritis and pulmonary fibrosis. TNF-delta and/or TNF-epsilon alsoincreases the presence of eosinophils that have the distinctive functionof killing the larvae of parasites that invade tissues, as inschistosomiasis, trichinosis and ascariasis. It may also be employed toregulate hematopoiesis, by regulating the activation and differentiationof various hematopoietic progenitor cells, for example, to releasemature leukocytes from the bone marrow following chemotherapy, i.e., instem cell mobilization. TNF-delta and/or TNF-epsilon may also beemployed to treat, prevent, and/or diagnose sepsis.

The invention also provides methods for blocking or inhibiting activatedB cells using compositions of the invention for the treatment of asthmaand other chronic airway diseases such as bronchitis and emphysema.

TNF-delta and/or TNF-epsilon polynucleotides or polypeptides, oragonists of TNF-delta and/or TNF-epsilon, can be used in the treatmentof infectious agents. For example, by increasing the immune response,particularly increasing the proliferation and differentiation of Bcells, infectious diseases may be treated. The immune response may beincreased by either enhancing an existing immune response, or byinitiating a new immune response. Alternatively, TNF-delta and/orTNF-epsilon polynucleotides or polypeptides, or agonists or antagonistsof TNF-delta and/or TNF-epsilon, may also directly inhibit theinfectious agent, without necessarily eliciting an immune response.

Viruses are one example of an infectious agent that can cause disease orsymptoms that can be treated by TNF-delta and/or TNF-epsilonpolynucleotides or polypeptides, or agonists of TNF-delta and/orTNF-epsilon. Examples of viruses, include, but are not limited to thefollowing DNA and RNA viruses and viral families: Arbovirus,Adenoviridae, Arenaviridae, Arterivirus, Bimaviridae, Bunyaviridae,Caliciviridae, Circoviridae, Coronaviridae, Dengue, EBV, HIV,Flaviviridae, Hepadnaviridae (Hepatitis), Herpesviridae (such as,Cytomegalovirus, Herpes Simplex, Herpes Zoster), Mononegavirus (e.g.,Paramyxoviridae, Morbillivirus, Rhabdoviridae), Orthomyxoviridae (e.g.,Influenza A, Influenza B, and parainfluenza), Papiloma virus,Papovaviridae, Parvoviridae, Picornaviridae, Poxviridae (such asSmallpox or Vaccinia), Reoviridae (e.g., Rotavirus), Retroviridae(HTLV-I, HTLV-II, Lentivirus), and Togaviridae (e.g., Rubivirus).Viruses falling within these families can cause a variety of diseases orsymptoms, including, but not limited to: arthritis, bronchiollitis,respiratory syncytial virus, encephalitis, eye infections ( e . g . ,conjunctivitis, keratitis), chronic fatigue syndrome, hepatitis (A, B,C, E, Chronic Active, Delta), Japanese B encephalitis, Junin,Chikungunya, Rift Valley fever, yellow fever, meningitis, opportunisticinfections (e.g., AIDS), pneumonia, Burkitt's Lymphoma, chickenpox,hemorrhagic fever, Measles, Mumps, Parainfluenza, Rabies, the commoncold, Polio, leukemia, Rubella, sexually transmitted diseases, skindiseases (e.g., Kaposi's, warts), and viremia. TNF-delta and/orTNF-epsilon polynucleotides or polypeptides, or agonists or antagonistsof TNF-delta and/or TNF-epsilon, can be used to treat, prevent,diagnose, and/or detect any of these symptoms or diseases. In specificembodiments, TNF-delta and/or TNF-epsilon polynucleotides, polypeptides,or agonists are used to treat, prevent, and/or diagnose: meningitis,Dengue, EBV, and/or hepatitis (e.g., hepatitis B). In an additionalspecific embodiment TNF-delta and/or TNF-epsilon polynucleotides,polypeptides, or agonists are used to treat patients nonresponsive toone or more other commercially available hepatitis vaccines. In afurther specific embodiment, TNF-delta and/or TNF-epsilonpolynucleotides, polypeptides, or agonists are used to treat, prevent,and/or diagnose AIDS. In an additional specific embodiment TNF-deltaand/or TNF-epsilon polynucleotides, polypeptides, agonists, and/orantagonists are used to treat, prevent, and/or diagnose patients withcryptosporidiosis.

Similarly, bacterial or fungal agents that can cause disease or symptomsand that can be treated by TNF-delta and/or TNF-epsilon polynucleotidesor polypeptides, or agonists or antagonists of TNF-delta and/orTNF-epsilon, include, but not limited to, the following Gram-Negativeand Gram-positive bacteria and bacterial families and fungi:Actinomycetales (e.g., Corynebacterium, Mycobacterium, Norcardia),Cryptococcus neoformans, Aspergillosis, Bacillaceae (e.g., Anthrax,Clostridium), Bacteroidaceae, Blastomycosis, Bordetella, Borrelia (e.g.,Borrelia burgdorferi, Brucellosis, Candidiasis, Campylobacter,Coccidioidomycosis, Cryptococcosis, Dermatocycoses, E. coli (e.g.,Enterotoxigenic E. coli and Enterohemorrhagic E. coli),Enterobacteriaceae (Klebsiella, Salmonella (e.g., Salmonella typhi, andSalmonella paratyphi), Serratia, Yersinia), Erysipelothrix,Helicobacter, Legionellosis, Leptospirosis, Listeria (e.g, Listeriamonocytogenes), Mycoplasmatales, Mycobacterium leprae, Vibrio cholerae,Neisseriaceae (e.g., Acinetobacter, Gonorrhea, Menigococcal), Meisseriameningitidis, Pasteurellacea Infections (e.g., Actinobacillus,Heamophilus (e.g., Heamophilus influenza type B), Pasteurella),Pseudomonas, Rickettsiaceae, Chlamydiaceae, Syphilis, Shigella spp.,Staphylococcal, Meningiococcal, Pneumococcal and Streptococcal (e.g.,Streptococcus pneumoniae and Group B Streptococcus). These bacterial orfungal families can cause the following diseases or symptoms, including,but not limited to: bacteremia, endocarditis, eye infections(conjunctivitis, tuberculosis, uveitis), gingivitis, opportunisticinfections (e.g., AIDS related infections), paronychia,prosthesis-related infections, Reiter's Disease, respiratory tractinfections, such as Whooping Cough or Empyema, sepsis, Lyme Disease,Cat-Scratch Disease, Dysentery, Paratyphoid Fever, food poisoning,Typhoid, pneumonia, Gonorrhea, meningitis (e.g., mengitis types A andB), Chlamydia, Syphilis, Diphtheria, Leprosy, Paratuberculosis,Tuberculosis, Lupus, Botulism, gangrene, tetanus, impetigo, RheumaticFever, Scarlet Fever, sexually transmitted diseases, skin diseases(e.g., cellulitis, dermatocycoses), toxemia, urinary tract infections,wound infections. TNF delta and/or TNF epsilon polynucleotides orpolypeptides, or agonists or antagonists of TNF-delta and/orTNF-epsilon, can be used to treat, prevent, diagnose, and/or detect anyof these symptoms or diseases. In specific embodiments, TNF-delta and/orTNF-epsilon polynucleotides, polypeptides, or agonists thereof are usedto treat, prevent, and/or diagnose: tetanus, Diptheria, botulism, and/ormeningitis type B.

Moreover, parasitic agents causing disease or symptoms that can betreated by TNF-delta and/or TNF-epsilon polynucleotides or polypeptides,or agonists of TNF-delta and/or TNF-epsilon, include, but not limitedto, the following families or class: Amebiasis, Babesiosis, Coccidiosis,Cryptosporidiosis, Dientamoebiasis, Dourine, Ectoparasitic, Giardiasis,Helminthiasis, Leishmaniasis, Theileriasis, Toxoplasmosis,Trypanosomiasis, and Trichomonas and Sporozoans (e.g., Plasmodium virax,Plasmodium falciparium, Plasmodium malariae and Plasmodium ovale). Theseparasites can cause a variety of diseases or symptoms, including, butnot limited to: Scabies, Trombiculiasis, eye infections, intestinaldisease (e.g., dysentery, giardiasis), liver disease, lung disease,opportunistic infections (e.g., AIDS related), malaria, pregnancycomplications, and toxoplasmosis. TNF-delta and/or TNF-epsilonpolynucleotides or polypeptides, or agonists or antagonists of TNF-deltaand/or TNF-epsilon, can be used to treat, prevent, diagnose, and/ordetect any of these symptoms or diseases. In specific embodiments,TNF-delta and/or TNF-epsilon polynucleotides, polypeptides, or agoniststhereof are used to treat, prevent, and/or diagnose malaria.

In another embodiment, the invention provides a method of deliveringcompositions containing the polypeptides of the invention (e.g.,compositions containing TNF-delta and/or TNF-epsilon polypeptides oranti-TNF-delta and/or anti-TNF-epsilon antibodies associated withheterologous polypeptides, heterologous nucleic acids, toxins, orprodrugs) to targeted cells, such as, for example, B cells expressingTNF-delta and/or TNF-epsilon receptor, or T cells expressing a cellsurface bound form of TNF-delta and/or TNF-epsilon. TNF-delta and/orTNF-epsilon polypeptides or anti-TNF-delta and/or anti-TNF-epsilonantibodies of the invention may be associated with heterologouspolypeptides, heterologous nucleic acids, toxins, radioisotopes, orprodrugs via hydrophobic, hydrophilic, ionic and/or covalentinteractions.

In one embodiment, the invention provides a method for the specificdelivery of compositions of the invention to cells by administeringpolypeptides of the invention (e.g., TNF-delta and/or TNF-epsilonpolypeptides or anti-TNF-delta and/or anti-TNF-epsilon antibodies) thatare associated with heterologous polypeptides or nucleic acids. In oneexample, the invention provides a method for delivering a therapeuticprotein into the targeted cell. In another example, the inventionprovides a method for delivering a single stranded nucleic acid (e.g.,antisense or ribozymes) or double stranded nucleic acid (e.g., DNA thatcan integrate into the cell's genome or replicate episomally and thatcan be transcribed) into the targeted cell.

In another embodiment, the invention provides a method for the specificdestruction of cells (e.g., the destruction of tumor cells) byadministering polypeptides of the invention (e.g., TNF-delta and/orTNF-epsilon polypeptides or anti-TNF-delta and/or anti-TNF-epsilonantibodies) in association with toxins, radioisotopes, or cytotoxicprodrugs.

In a specific embodiment, the invention provides a method for thespecific destruction of cells of B cell lineage (e.g., B cell relatedleukemias or lymphomas) by administering TNF-delta and/or TNF-epsilonpolypeptides in association with toxins, radioisotopes, or cytotoxicprodrugs.

In another specific embodiment, the invention provides a method for thespecific destruction of cells of T cell lineage (e.g., T cell leukemiasor lymphomas) by administering anti-TNF-delta and/or anti-TNF-epsilonantibodies and/or soluble receptor that binds TNF-delta and/orTNF-epsilon in association with toxins, radioisotopes, or cytotoxicprodrugs.

By “toxin” is meant compounds that bind and activate endogenouscytotoxic effector systems, radioisotopes, holotoxins, modified toxins,catalytic subunits of toxins, or any molecules or enzymes not normallypresent in or on the surface of a cell that under defined conditionscause the cell's death. Toxins that may be used according to the methodsof the invention include, but are not limited to, radioisotopes known inthe art, compounds such as, for example, antibodies (or complementfixing containing portions thereof) that bind an inherent or inducedendogenous cytotoxic effector system, thyrnidine kinase, endonuclease,RNAse, alpha toxin, ricin, abrin, Pseudomonas exotoxin A, diphtheriatoxin, saporin, momordin, gelonin, pokeweed antiviral protein,alpha-sarcin and cholera toxin. “Toxin” also includes a cytostatic orcytocidal agent, a therapeutic agent or a radioactive metal ion, e.g.,alpha-emitters such as, for example, ²¹³Bi, or other radioisotopes suchas, for example, ¹⁰³Pd, ¹³³Xe, ¹³¹I, ⁶⁸Ge, ⁵⁷Co, ⁶⁵Zn, ⁸⁵Sr, ³²P, ³⁵S,⁹⁰Y, ¹⁵³Sm, ¹⁵³Gd, ¹⁶⁹Yb, ⁵¹Cr, ⁵⁴Mn, ⁷⁵Se, ¹¹³Sn, ⁹⁰Yttrium, ¹¹⁷ Tin,¹⁸⁶Rhenium, ¹⁶⁶Holmium, and ¹⁸⁸Rhenium; luminescent labels, such asluminol; and fluorescent labels, such as fluorescein and rhodamine, andbiotin.

Techniques known in the art may be applied to label antibodies of theinvention. Such techniques include, but are not limited to, the use ofbifunctional conjugating agents (see e.g., U.S. Pat. Nos. 5,756,065;5,714,631; 5,696,239; 5,652,361; 5,505,931; 5,489,425; 5,435,990;5,428,139; 5,342,604; 5,274,119; 4,994,560; and 5,808,003; the contentsof each of which are hereby incorporated by reference in its entirety).A cytotoxin or cytotoxic agent includes any agent that is detrimental tocells. Examples include paclitaxol, cytochalasin B, gramicidin D,ethidium bromide, emetine, mitomycin, etoposide, tenoposide,vincristine, vinblastine, colchicin, doxorubicin, daunorubicin,dihydroxy anthracin dione, mitoxantrone, mithramycin, actinomycin D,1-dehydrotestosterone, glucocorticoids, procaine, tetracaine, lidocaine,propranolol, and puromycin and analogs or homologs thereof. Therapeuticagents include, but are not limited to, antimetabolites (e.g.,methotrexate, 6-mercaptopurine, 6-thioguanine, cytarabine,5-fluorouracil decarbazine), alkylating agents (e.g., mechlorethamine,thioepa chlorambucil, melphalan, carmustine (BSNU) and lomustine (CCNU),cyclothosphamide, busulfan, dibromomannitol, streptozotocin, mitomycinC, and cis- dichlorodiamine platinum (II) (DDP) cisplatin),anthracyclines (e.g., daunorubicin (formerly daunomycin) anddoxorubicin), antibiotics (e.g., dactinomycin (formerly actinomycin),bleomycin, mithramycin, and anthramycin (AMC)), and anti-mitotic agents(e.g., vincristine and vinblastine).

By “cytotoxic prodrug” is meant a non-toxic compound that is convertedby an enzyme, normally present in the cell, into a cytotoxic compound.Cytotoxic prodrugs that may be used according to the methods of theinvention include, but are not limited to, glutamyl derivatives ofbenzoic acid mustard alkylating agent, phosphate derivatives ofetoposide or mitomycin C, cytosine arabinoside, daunorubisin, andphenoxyacetamide derivatives of doxorubicin.

In specific embodiments, TNF-delta and/or TNF-epsilon polynucleotides orpolypeptides, or anti-TNF-delta and/or anti-TNF-epsilon polynucleotidesor polypeptides in association with radioisotopes, toxins or cytotoxicprodrugs are used to treat or ameliorate the symptoms of autoimmunediseases. In preferred emodiments, TNF-delta and/or TNF-epsilonpolynucleotides or polypeptides, or anti-TNF-delta and/oranti-TNF-epsilon polynucleotides or polypeptides in association withradioisotopes, toxins or cytotoxic prodrugs are used to treat orameliorate the symptoms of systemic lupus erythematosus In preferredemodiments, TNF-delta and/or TNF-epsilon polynucleotides orpolypeptides, or anti-TNF-delta and/or anti-TNF-epsilon polynucleotidesor polypeptides in association with radioisotopes, toxins or cytotoxicprodrugs are used to treat or ameliorate the symptoms of rheumatoidarthritis including advanced rheumatoid arthritis. In preferredemodiments, TNF-delta and/or TNF-epsilon polynucleotides orpolypeptides, or anti-TNF-delta and/or anti-TNF-epsilon polynucleotidesor polypeptides in association with radioisotopes, toxins or cytotoxicprodrugs are used to treat or ameliorate the symptoms of idiopathicthrombocytopenic purpura (ITP).

In other preferred embodiments TNF-delta and/or TNF-epsilonpolynucleotides or polypeptides, or anti-TNF-delta and/oranti-TNF-epsilon polynucleotides or polypeptides in association withradioisotopes, toxins or cytotoxic prodrugs are used to treat orameliorate the symptoms of Sjögren's syndrome. In other preferredembodiments, TNF-delta and/or TNF-epsilon polynucleotides orpolypeptides, or anti-TNF-delta and/or anti-TNF-epsilon polynucleotidesor polypeptides in association with radioisotopes, toxins or cytotoxicprodrugs are used to treat or ameliorate the symptoms of IgAnephropathy. In other preferred embodiments, TNF-delta and/orTNF-epsilon polynucleotides or polypeptides, or anti-TNF-delta and/oranti-TNF-epsilon polynucleotides or polypeptides in association withradioisotopes, toxins or cytotoxic prodrugs are used to treat orameliorate the symptoms of Myasthenia gravis. In preferred emodiments,TNF-delta and/or TNF-epsilon polynucleotides or polypeptides, oranti-TNF-delta and/or anti-TNF-epsilon polynucleotides or polypeptidesin association with radioisotopes, toxins or cytotoxic prodrugs are usedto treat or ameliorate the symptoms of multiple sclerosis. In stillother preferred embodiments, TNF delta, TNF epsilon, anti-TNF delta,and/or anti-TNF epsilon polypeptides in association with radioisotopes,toxins or cytotoxic prodrugs are used to treat or ameliorate thesymptoms of vasculitis.

An additional condition, disease or symptom that can be treated,prevented, and/or diagnosed by TNF-delta and/or TNF-epsilonpolynucleotides or polypeptides, or agonists of TNF-delta and/orTNF-epsilon, is osteomyelitis.

An additional condition, disease or symptom that can be treated,prevented, and/or diagnosed by TNF-delta and/or TNF-epsilonpolynucleotides or polypeptides, or agonists of TNF-delta and/orTNF-epsilon, is endocarditis.

Preferably, treatment using TNF-delta and/or TNF-epsilon polynucleotidesor polypeptides, or agonists of TNF-delta and/or TNF-epsilon, couldeither be by administering an effective amount of TNF-delta and/orTNF-epsilon polypeptide to the patient, or by removing cells from thepatient, supplying the cells with TNF-delta and/or TNF-epsilonpolynucleotide, and returning the engineered cells to the patient (exvivo therapy). Moreover, as further discussed herein, the TNF-deltaand/or TNF-epsilon polypeptide or polynucleotide can be used as anadjuvant in a vaccine to raise an immune response against infectiousdisease.

TNF delta and/or TNF epsilon polypeptides or polynucleotides encodingTNF delta and/or TNF epsilon of the invention may be used to treatcardiovascular disorders, including peripheral artery disease, such aslimb ischemia.

Cardiovascular disorders include cardiovascular abnormalities, such asarterio-arterial fistula, arteriovenous fistula, cerebral arteriovenousmalformations, congenital heart defects, pulmonary atresia, and ScimitarSyndrome. Congenital heart defects include aortic coarctation, cortriatriatum, coronary vessel anomalies, crisscross heart, dextrocardia,patent ductus arteriosus, Ebstein's anomaly, Eisenmenger complex,hypoplastic left heart syndrome, levocardia, tetralogy of fallot,transposition of great vessels, double outlet right ventricle, tricuspidatresia, persistent truncus arteriosus, and heart septal defects, suchas aortopulmonary septal defect, endocardial cushion defects,Lutembacher's Syndrome, trilogy of Fallot, thrombotic microangiopathies(e.g., thrombotic thrombocytopenic purpura (TTP)) and hemolytic-uremicsyndrome (HUS)), ventricular heart septal defects.

Cardiovascular disorders also include heart disease, such asarrhythmias, carcinoid heart disease, high cardiac output, low cardiacoutput, cardiac tamponade, endocarditis (including bacterial), heartaneurysm, cardiac arrest, congestive heart failure, congestivecardiomyopathy, paroxysmal dyspnea, cardiac edema, heart hypertrophy,congestive cardiomyopathy, left ventricular hypertrophy, rightventricular hypertrophy, post-infarction heart rupture, ventricularseptal rupture, heart valve diseases, myocardial diseases, myocardialischemia, pericardial effusion, pericarditis (including constrictive andtuberculous), pneumopericardium, postpericardiotomy syndrome, pulmonaryheart disease, rheumatic heart disease, ventricular dysfunction,hyperemia, cardiovascular pregnancy complications, Scimitar Syndrome,cardiovascular syphilis, and cardiovascular tuberculosis.

Arrhythmias include sinus arrhythmia, atrial fibrillation, atrialflutter, bradycardia, extrasystole, Adams-Stokes Syndrome, bundle-branchblock, sinoatrial block, long QT syndrome, parasystole,Lown-Ganong-Levine Syndrome, Mahaim-type pre-excitation syndrome,Wolff-Parkinson-White syndrome, sick sinus syndrome, tachycardias, andventricular fibrillation. Tachycardias include paroxysmal tachycardia,supraventricular tachycardia, accelerated idioventricular rhythm,atrioventricular nodal reentry tachycardia, ectopic atrial tachycardia,ectopic junctional tachycardia, sinoatrial nodal reentry tachycardia,sinus tachycardia, Torsades de Pointes, and ventricular tachycardia.

Heart valve disease include aortic valve insufficiency, aortic valvestenosis, hear murmurs, aortic valve prolapse, mitral valve prolapse,tricuspid valve prolapse, mitral valve insufficiency, mitral valvestenosis, pulmonary atresia, pulmonary valve insufficiency, pulmonaryvalve stenosis, tricuspid atresia, tricuspid valve insufficiency, andtricuspid valve stenosis.

Myocardial diseases include alcoholic cardiomyopathy, congestivecardiomyopathy, hypertrophic cardiomyopathy, aortic subvalvularstenosis, pulmonary subvalvular stenosis, restrictive cardiomyopathy,Chagas cardiomyopathy, endocardial fibroelastosis, endomyocardialfibrosis, Kearns Syndrome, myocardial reperfusion injury, andmyocarditis.

Myocardial ischemias include coronary disease, such as angina pectoris,coronary aneurysm, coronary arteriosclerosis, coronary thrombosis,coronary vasospasm, myocardial infarction and myocardial stunning.

Cardiovascular diseases also include vascular diseases such asaneurysms, angiodysplasia, angiomatosis, bacillary angiomatosis,Hippel-Lindau Disease, Klippel-Trenaunay-Weber Syndrome, Sturge-WeberSyndrome, angioneurotic edema, aortic diseases, Takayasu's Arteritis,aortitis, Leriche's Syndrome, arterial occlusive diseases, arteritis,enarteritis, polyarteritis nodosa, cerebrovascular disorders, diabeticangiopathies, diabetic retinopathy, embolisms, thrombosis,erythromelalgia, hemorrhoids, hepatic veno-occlusive disease,hypertension, hypotension, ischemia, peripheral vascular diseases,phlebitis, pulmonary veno-occlusive disease, Raynaud's disease, CRESTsyndrome, retinal vein occlusion, Scimitar syndrome, superior vena cavasyndrome, telangiectasia, atacia telangiectasia, hereditary hemorrhagictelangiectasia, varicocele, varicose veins, varicose ulcer, vasculitis,and venous insufficiency.

Aneurysms include dissecting aneurysms, false aneurysms, infectedaneurysms, ruptured aneurysms, aortic aneurysms, cerebral aneurysms,coronary aneurysms, heart aneurysms, and iliac aneurysms.

Arterial occlusive diseases include arteriosclerosis, intermittentclaudication, carotid stenosis, fibromuscular dysplasias, mesentericvascular occlusion, Moyammoya disease, renal artery obstruction, retinalartery occlusion, and thromboangiitis obliterans.

Cerebrovascular disorders include carotid artery diseases, cerebralamyloid angiopathy, cerebral aneurysm, cerebral anoxia, cerebralarteriosclerosis, cerebral arteriovenous malformation, cerebral arterydiseases, cerebral embolism and thrombosis, carotid artery thrombosis,sinus thrombosis, Wallenberg's syndrome, cerebral hemorrhage, epiduralhematoma, subdural hematoma, subaraxhnoid hemorrhage, cerebralinfarction, cerebral ischemia (including transient), subclavian stealsyndrome, periventricular leukomalacia, vascular headache, clusterheadache, migraine, and vertebrobasilar insufficiency.

Embolisms include air embolisms, amniotic fluid embolisms, cholesterolembolisms, blue toe syndrome, fat embolisms, pulmonary embolisms, andthromoboembolisms. Thrombosis include coronary thrombosis, hepatic veinthrombosis, retinal vein occlusion, carotid artery thrombosis, sinusthrombosis, Wallenberg's syndrome, and thrombophlebitis.

Ischemia includes cerebral ischemia, ischemic colitis, compartmentsyndromes, anterior compartment syndrome, myocardial ischemia,reperfusion injuries, and peripheral limb ischemia. Vasculitis includesaortitis, arteritis, Behcet's Syndrome, Churg-Strauss Syndrome,mucocutaneous lymph node syndrome, thromboangiitis obliterans,hypersensitivity vasculitis, Schoenlein-Henoch purpura, allergiccutaneous vasculitis, and Wegener's granulomatosis.

The naturally occurring balance between endogenous stimulators andinhibitors of angiogenesis is one in which inhibitory influencespredominate. Rastinej ad et al., Cell 56:345-355 (1989). In those rareinstances in which neovascularization occurs under normal physiologicalconditions, such as wound healing, organ regeneration, embryonicdevelopment, and female reproductive processes, angiogenesis isstringently regulated and spatially and temporally delimited. Underconditions of pathological angiogenesis such as that characterizingsolid tumor growth, these regulatory controls fail. Unregulatedangiogenesis becomes pathologic and sustains progression of manyneoplastic and non-neoplastic diseases. A number of serious diseases aredominated by abnormal neovascularization including solid tumor growthand metastases, arthritis, some types of eye disorders, and psoriasis.See, e.g., reviews by Moses et al, Biotech. 9:630-634 (1991); Folkman etal., N. Engl. J Med., 333:1757-1763 (1995); Auerbach et al., J.Microvasc. Res. 29:401-411 (1985); Folkman, Advances in Cancer Research,eds. Klein and Weinhouse, Academic Press, New York, pp. 175-203 (1985);Patz, Am. J Opthalmol. 94:715-743 (1982); and Folkman et al., Science221:719-725 (1983). In a number of pathological conditions, the processof angiogenesis contributes to the disease state. For example,significant data have accumulated which suggest that the growth of solidtumors is dependent on angiogenesis. Folkman and Klagsbrun, Science235:442-447 (1987).

The present invention provides for treatment of diseases or disordersassociated with neovascularization by administration of the TNF deltaand/or TNF epsilon polynucleotides and/or polypeptides of the invention(including TNF delta and/or TNF epsilon agonists and/or antagonists).Malignant and metastatic conditions which can be treated with thepolynucleotides and polypeptides of the invention include, but are notlimited to those malignancies, solid tumors, and cancers describedherein and otherwise known in the art (for a review of such disorders,see Fishman et al., Medicine, 2d Ed., J. B. Lippincott Co., Philadelphia(1985)).

Additionally, ocular disorders associated with neovascularization whichcan be treated with the TNF delta and/or TNF epsilon polynucleotides andpolypeptides of the present invention (including TNF delta and/or TNFepsilon agonists and TNF delta and/or TNF epsilon antagonists) include,but are not limited to: neovascular glaucoma, diabetic retinopathy,retinoblastoma, retrolental fibroplasia, uveitis, retinopathy ofprematurity macular degeneration, corneal graft neovascularization, aswell as other eye inflammatory diseases, ocular tumors and diseasesassociated with choroidal or iris neovascularization. See, e.g., reviewsby Waltman et al., Am. J. Ophthal. 85:704-710 (1978) and Gartner et al.,Surv. Ophthal. 22:291-312 (1978).

Additionally, disorders which can be treated with the TNF delta and/orTNF epsilon polynucleotides and polypeptides of the present invention(including TNF delta and/or TNF epsilon agonists and TNF delta and/orTNF epsilon antagonists) include, but are not limited to, hemangioma,arthritis, psoriasis, angiofibroma, atherosclerotic plaques, delayedwound healing, granulations, hemophilic joints, hypertrophic scars,nonunion fractures, Osler-Weber syndrome, pyogenic granuloma,scleroderma, trachoma, and vascular adhesions.

Additional preferred embodiments of the invention include, but are notlimited to, the use of TNF delta and/or TNF epsilon polypeptides, TNFdelta and/or TNF epsilon polynucleotides, and functional agoniststhereof, in the following applications:

Administration to an animal (e.g., mouse, rat, rabbit, hamster, guineapig, pigs, micro-pig, chicken, camel, goat, horse, cow, sheep, dog, cat,non-human primate, and human, most preferably human) to boost the immunesystem to produce increased quantities of one or more antibodies (e.g.,IgG, IgA, IgM, and IgE), to induce higher affinity antibody production(e.g., IgG, IgA, IgM, and IgE), and/or to increase an immune response.

Administration to an animal (including, but not limited to, those listedabove, and also including transgenic animals) incapable of producingfunctional endogenous antibody molecules or having an otherwisecompromised endogenous immune system, but which is capable of producinghuman immunoglobulin molecules by means of a reconstituted or partiallyreconstituted immune system from another animal (see, e.g., publishedPCT Application Nos. WO98/24893, WO/9634096, WO/9633735, and WO/9110741.

A vaccine adjuvant that enhances immune responsiveness to specificantigen. In a specific embodiment, the vaccine adjuvant is a TNF deltaand/or TNF epsilon polypeptide described herein. In another specificembodiment, the vaccine adjuvant is a TNF delta and/or TNF epsilonpolynucleotide described herein (i.e., the TNF delta and/or TNF epsilonpolynucleotide is a genetic vaccine adjuvant). As discussed herein, TNFdelta and/or TNF epsilon polynucleotides may be administered usingtechniques known in the art, including but not limited to, liposomaldelivery, recombinant vector delivery, injection of naked DNA, and genegun delivery.

An adjuvant to enhance tumor-specific immune responses.

An adjuvant to enhance anti-viral immune responses. Anti-viral immuneresponses that may be enhanced using the compositions of the inventionas an adjuvant, include virus and virus associated diseases or symptomsdescribed herein or otherwise known in the art. In specific embodiments,the compositions of the invention are used as an adjuvant to enhance animmune response to a virus, disease, or symptom selected from the groupconsisting of: AIDS, meningitis, Dengue, EBV, and hepatitis (e.g.,hepatitis B). In another specific embodiment, the compositions of theinvention are used as an adjuvant to enhance an immune response to avirus, disease, or symptom selected from the group consisting of:HIV/AIDS, Respiratory syncytial virus, Dengue, Rotavirus, Japanese Bencephalitis, Influenza A and B, Parainfluenza, Measles,Cytomegalovirus, Rabies, Junin, Chikungunya, Rift Valley fever, Herpessimplex, and yellow fever. In another specific embodiment, thecompositions of the invention are used as an adjuvant to enhance animmune response to the HIV gp120 antigen.

An adjuvant to enhance anti-bacterial or anti-fungal immune responses.Anti-bacterial or anti-fungal immune responses that may be enhancedusing the compositions of the invention as an adjuvant, include bacteriaor fungus and bacteria or fungus associated diseases or symptomsdescribed herein or otherwise known in the art. In specific embodiments,the compositions of the invention are used as an adjuvant to enhance animmune response to a bacteria or fungus, disease, or symptom selectedfrom the group consisting of: tetanus, Diphtheria, botulism, andmeningitis type B. In another specific embodiment, the compositions ofthe invention are used as an adjuvant to enhance an immune response to abacteria or fungus, disease, or symptom selected from the groupconsisting of: Vibrio cholerae, Mycobacterium leprae, Salmonella typhi,Salmonella paratyphi, Meisseria meningitidis, Streptococcus pneumoniae,Group B streptococcus, Shigella spp., Enterotoxigenic Escherichia coli,Enterohemorrhagic E. coli, Borrelia burgdorferi, and Plasmodium(malaria).

An adjuvant to enhance anti-parasitic immune responses. Anti-parasiticimmune responses that may be enhanced using the compositions of theinvention as an adjuvant, include parasite and parasite associateddiseases or symptoms described herein or otherwise known in the art. Inspecific embodiments, the compositions of the invention are used as anadjuvant to enhance an immune response to a parasite. In anotherspecific embodiment, the compositions of the invention are used as anadjuvant to enhance an immune response to Plasmodium (malaria).

As a stimulator of B cell responsiveness to pathogens.

As an agent that elevates the immune status of an individual prior totheir receipt of immunosuppressive therapies.

As an agent to induce higher affinity antibodies.

As an agent to increase serum immunoglobulin concentrations.

As an agent to accelerate recovery of immunocompromised individuals.

As an agent to boost immunoresponsiveness among aged populations.

As an immune system enhancer prior to, during, or after bone marrowtransplant and/or other transplants (e.g., allogeneic or xenogeneicorgan transplantation). With respect to transplantation, compositions ofthe invention may be administered prior to, concomitant with, and/orafter transplantation. In a specific embodiment, compositions of theinvention are administered after transplantation, prior to the beginningof recovery of T-cell populations. In another specific embodiment,compositions of the invention are first administered aftertransplantation after the beginning of recovery of T cell populations,but prior to full recovery of B cell populations.

As an agent to boost immunoresponsiveness among B cell immunodeficientindividuals, such as, for example, an individual who has undergone apartial or complete splenectomy. B cell immunodeficiencies that may beameliorated or treated by administering the TNF delta and/or TNF epsilonpolypeptides or polynucleotides of the invention, or agonists thereof,include, but are not limited to, severe combined immunodeficiency(SCID)-X linked, SCID-autosomal, adenosine deaminase deficiency (ADAdeficiency), X-linked agammaglobulinemia (XLA), Bruton's disease,congenital agammaglobulinemia, X-linked infantile agammaglobulinemia,acquired agammaglobulinemia, adult onset agammaglobulinemia, late-onsetagammaglobulinemia, dysgammaglobulinemia, hypogammaglobulinemia,transient hypogammaglobulinemia of infancy, unspecifiedhypogammaglobulinemia, agammaglobulinemia, common variableimmunodeficiency (CVI) (acquired), chronic granulomatous disease,Wiskott-Aldrich Syndrome (WAS), X-linked immunodeficiency with hyperIgM, non X-linked immunodeficiency with hyper IgM, selective IgAdeficiency, IgG subclass deficiency (with or without IgA deficiency),antibody deficiency with normal or elevated Igs, immunodeficiency withthymoma, Ig heavy chain deletions, kappa chain deficiency, B celllymphoproliferative disorder (BLPD), selective IgM immunodeficiency,recessive agammaglobulinemia (Swiss type), reticular dysgenesis,neonatal neutropenia, severe congenital leukopenia, thymicalymophoplasia-aplasia or dysplasia with immunodeficiency,ataxia-telangiectasia, short limbed dwarfism, X-linkedlymphoproliferative syndrome (XLP), Nezelof syndrome-combinedimmunodeficiency with Igs, purine nucleoside phosphorylase deficiency(PNP), MHC Class II deficiency (Bare Lymphocyte Syndrome) and severecombined immunodeficiency.

As an agent to boost immunoresponsiveness among individuals having anacquired loss of B cell function. Conditions resulting in an acquiredloss of B cell function that may be ameliorated or treated byadministering the TNF delta and/or TNF epsilon polypeptides orpolynucleotides of the invention, or agonists thereof, include, but arenot limited to, HIV Infection, AIDS, bone marrow transplant, multiplemyeloma and B cell chronic lymphocytic leukemia (CLL).

Patients with CLL and myeloma are at risk for increased infections.Thus, one aspect of the present invention provides for the use TNF-deltaand/or TNF-epsilon polynucleotides or polypeptides, or anti-TNF-deltaand/or anti-TNF-epsilon polynucleotides or polypeptides as an agent toboost immunoresponsiveness in CLL and myeloma patients.

As an agent to boost immunoresponsiveness among individuals having atemporary immune deficiency or compromised immune system. Conditionsresulting in a temporary immune deficiency/compromised immune systemthat may be ameliorated or treated by administering the TNF delta and/orTNF epsilon polypeptides or polynucleotides of the invention, oragonists thereof, include, but are not limited to, recovery from viralinfections (e.g., influenza), conditions associated with malnutrition,recovery from infectious mononucleosis, or conditions associated withstress, recovery from measles, recovery from blood transfusion, recoveryfrom surgery, and recovery from bums.

As a regulator of antigen presentation by monocytes, dendritic cells,and/or B-cells. In one embodiment, TNF delta and/or TNF epsilonpolypeptides (in soluble, membrane-bound or transmembrane forms) orpolynucleotides enhance antigen presentation or antagonize antigenpresentation in vitro or in vivo. Moreover, in related embodiments, saidenhancement or antagonization of antigen presentation may be useful asan anti-tumor treatment or to modulate the immune system.

As an agent to direct an individual's immune system towards developmentof a humoral response (i.e. TH2) as opposed to a TH1 cellular response.

As a means to induce tumor proliferation and thus make it moresusceptible to anti-neoplastic agents. For example, multiple myeloma isa slowly dividing disease and is thus refractory to virtually allanti-neoplastic regimens. If these cells were forced to proliferate morerapidly their susceptibility profile would likely change.

As a B cell specific binding protein to which specific activators orinhibitors of cell growth may be attached. The result would be to focusthe activity of such activators or inhibitors onto normal, diseased, orneoplastic B cell populations.

As a means of detecting B-lineage cells by virtue of its specificity.This application may require labeling the protein with biotin or otheragents to afford a means of detection.

As a stimulator of B cell production in pathologies such as AIDS,chronic lymphocyte disorder and/or Common Variable Immunodificiency.

As part of a B cell selection device the function of which is to isolateB cells from a heterogenous mixture of cell types. TNF delta and/or TNFepsilon could be coupled to a solid support to which B cells would thenspecifically bind. Unbound cells would be washed out and the bound cellssubsequently eluted. This technique would allow purging of tumor cellsfrom, for example, bone marrow or peripheral blood prior to transplant.

As a therapy for generation and/or regeneration of lymphoid tissuesfollowing surgery, trauma or genetic defect.

As a gene-based therapy for genetically inherited disorders resulting inimmuno-incompetence such as observed among SCID patients.

As an antigen for the generation of antibodies to inhibit or enhance TNFdelta- and/or TNF epsilon-mediated responses.

As a means of activating monocytes/macrophages to defend againstparasitic diseases that effect monocytes such as Leshmania.

As pretreatment of bone marrow samples prior to transplant. Suchtreatment would increase B cell representation and thus acceleraterecover.

As a means of regulating secreted cytokines that are elicited by TNFdelta and/or TNF epsilon.

TNF delta and/or TNF epsilon polypeptides or polynucleotides of theinvention, or agonists may be used to modulate IgE concentrations invitro or in vivo.

Additionally, TNF delta and/or TNF epsilon polypeptides orpolynucleotides of the invention, or agonists thereof, may be used totreat, prevent, and/or diagnose IgE-mediated allergic reactions. Suchallergic reactions include, but are not limited to, asthma, rhinitis,and eczema.

In a specific embodiment, TNF delta and/or TNF epsilon polypeptides orpolynucleotides of the invention, or agonists thereof, is administeredto treat, prevent, diagnose, and/or ameliorate selective IgA deficiency.

In another specific embodiment, TNF delta and/or TNF epsilonpolypeptides or polynucleotides of the invention, or agonists thereof,is administered to treat, prevent, diagnose, and/or ameliorateataxia-telangiectasia.

In another specific embodiment, TNF delta and/or TNF epsilonpolypeptides or polynucleotides of the invention, or agonists thereof,is administered to treat, prevent, diagnose, and/or ameliorate commonvariable immunodeficiency.

In another specific embodiment, TNF delta and/or TNF epsilonpolypeptides or polynucleotides of the invention, or agonists thereof,is administered to treat, prevent, diagnose, and/or ameliorate X-linkedagammaglobulinemia.

In another specific embodiment, TNF delta and/or TNF epsilonpolypeptides or polynucleotides of the invention, or agonists thereof,is administered to treat, prevent, diagnose, and/or ameliorate severecombined immunodeficiency (SCID).

In another specific embodiment, TNF delta and/or TNF epsilonpolypeptides or polynucleotides of the invention, or agonists thereof,is administered to treat, prevent, diagnose, and/or ameliorateWiskott-Aldrich syndrome.

In another specific embodiment, TNF delta and/or TNF epsilonpolypeptides or polynucleotides of the invention, or agonists thereof,is administered to treat, prevent, diagnose, and/or ameliorate X-linkedIg deficiency with hyper IgM.

In another specific embodiment, TNF delta and/or TNF epsilonpolypeptides or polynucleotides of the invention, or agonists orantagonists (e.g., anti-TNF delta and/or anti-TNF epsilon antibodies)thereof, is administered to treat, prevent, and/or diagnose chronicmyelogenous leukemia, acute myelogenous leukemia, leukemia, hystiocyticleukemia, monocytic leukemia (e.g., acute monocytic leukemia), leukemicreticulosis, Shilling Type monocytic leukemia, and/or other leukemiasderived from monocytes and/or monocytic cells and/or tissues.

In another specific embodiment, TNF delta and/or TNF epsilonpolypeptides or polynucleotides of the invention, or agonists thereof,is administered to treat, prevent, diagnose, and/or ameliorate monocyticleukemoid reaction, as seen, for example, with tuberculosis.

In another specific embodiment, TNF delta and/or TNF epsilonpolypeptides or polynucleotides of the invention, or agonists thereof,is administered to treat, prevent, diagnose, and/or ameliorate monocyticleukocytosis, monocytic leukopenia, monocytopenia, and/or monocytosis.

In a specific embodiment, TNF delta and/or TNF epsilon polynucleotidesor polypeptides of the invention, and/or anti-TNF delta and/or anti-TNFepsilon antibodies and/or agonists or antagonists thereof, are used totreat, prevent, detect, and/or diagnose primary B lymphocyte disordersand/or diseases, and/or conditions associated therewith. In oneembodiment, such primary B lymphocyte disorders, diseases, and/orconditions are characterized by a complete or partial loss of humoralimmunity. Primary B lymphocyte disorders, diseases, and/or conditionsassociated therewith that are characterized by a complete or partialloss of humoral immunity and that may be prevented, treated, detectedand/or diagnosed with compositions of the invention include, but are notlimited to, X-Linked Agammaglobulinemia (XLA), severe combinedimmunodeficiency disease (SCID), and selective IgA deficiency.

In a preferred embodiment, TNF delta and/or TNF epsilon polynucleotides,polypeptides, and/or agonists and/or antagonists thereof are used totreat, prevent, and/or diagnose diseases or disorders affecting orconditions associated with any one or more of the various mucousmembranes of the body. Such diseases or disorders include, but are notlimited to, for example, mucositis, mucoclasis, mucocolitis,mucocutaneous leishmaniasis (such as, for example, Americanleishmaniasis, leishmaniasis americana, nasopharyngeal leishmaniasis,and New World leishmaniasis), mucocutaneous lymph node syndrome (forexample, Kawasaki disease), mucoenteritis, mucoepidermoid carcinoma,mucoepidermoid tumor, mucoepithelial dysplasia, mucoid adenocarcinoma,mucoid degeneration, myxoid degeneration; myxomatous degeneration;myxomatosis, mucoid medial degeneration (for example, cystic medialnecrosis), mucolipidosis (including, for example, mucolipidosis I,mucolipidosis II, mucolipidosis III, and mucolipidosis IV), mucolysisdisorders, mucomembranous enteritis, mucoenteritis,mucopolysaccharidosis (such as, for example, type Imucopolysaccharidosis (i.e., Hurler's syndrome), type ISmucopolysaccharidosis (i.e., Scheie's syndrome or type Vmucopolysaccharidosis), type II mucopolysaccharidosis (i.e., Hunter'ssyndrome), type III mucopolysaccharidosis (i.e., Sanfilippo's syndrome),type IV mucopolysaccharidosis (i.e., Morquio's syndrome), type VImucopolysaccharidosis (i.e., Maroteaux-Lamy syndrome), type VIImucopolysaccharidosis (i.e., mucopolysaccharidosis due tobeta-glucuronidase deficiency), and mucosulfatidosis),mucopolysacchariduria, mucopurulent conjunctivitis, mucopus,mucormycosis (i.e., zygomycosis), mucosal disease (i.e., bovine virusdiarrhea), mucous colitis (such as, for example, mucocolitis andmyxomembranous colitis), and mucoviscidosis (such as, for example,cystic fibrosis, cystic fibrosis of the pancreas, Clarke-Hadfieldsyndrome, fibrocystic disease of the pancreas, mucoviscidosis, andviscidosis). In a highly preferred embodiment, TNF delta and/or TNFepsilon polynucleotides, polypeptides, and/or agonists and/orantagonists thereof are used to treat, prevent, and/or diagnosemucositis, especially as associated with chemotherapy.

In a preferred embodiment, TNF delta and/or TNF epsilon polynucleotides,polypeptides, and/or agonists and/or antagonists thereof are used totreat, prevent, and/or diagnose diseases or disorders affecting orconditions associated with sinusitis.

All of the above described applications as they may apply to veterinarymedicine.

Antagonists of TNF delta and/or TNF epsilon include binding and/orinhibitory antibodies, antisense nucleic acids, ribozymes or solubleforms of the TNF delta and/or TNF epsilon receptor(s). These would beexpected to reverse many of the activities of the ligand described aboveas well as find clinical or practical application as:

A means of blocking various aspects of immune responses to foreignagents or self. Examples include autoimmune disorders such as lupus, andarthritis, as well as immunoresponsiveness to skin allergies,inflammation, bowel disease, injury and pathogens. Although our currentdata speaks directly to the potential role of TNF delta and/or TNFepsilon in B cell and monocyte related pathologies, it remains possiblethat other cell types may gain expression or responsiveness to TNF deltaand/or TNF epsilon. Thus, TNF delta and/or TNF epsilon may, like CD40and its ligand, be regulated by the status of the immune system and themicroenvironment in which the cell is located.

A therapy for preventing the B cell proliferation and Ig secretionassociated with autoimmune diseases such as idiopathic thrombocytopenicpurpura, systemic lupus erythramatosus and MS.

An inhibitor of graft versus host disease or transplant rejection.

A therapy for B cell malignancies such as ALL, Hodgkins disease,non-Hodgkins lymphoma, Chronic lymphocyte leukemia, plasmacytomas,multiple myeloma, Burkitt's lymphoma, and EBV-transformed diseases.

A therapy for chronic hypergammaglobulinemeia evident in such diseasesas monoclonalgammopathy of undetermined significance (MGUS),Waldenstrom's disease, related idiopathic monoclonalgammopathies, andplasmacytomas.

A therapy for decreasing cellular proliferation of Large B-cellLymphomas.

A means of decreasing the involvement of B cells and Ig associated withChronic Myelogenous Leukemia.

An immunosuppressive agent(s).

TNF delta and/or TNF epsilon polypeptides or polynucleotides of theinvention, or antagonists may be used to modulate IgE concentrations invitro or in vivo.

In another embodiment, administration of TNF delta and/or TNF epsilonpolypeptides or polynucleotides of the invention, or antagoniststhereof, may be used to treat, prevent, and/or diagnose IgE-mediatedallergic reactions including, but not limited to, asthma, rhinitis, andeczema.

An inhibitor of signaling pathways involving ERK1, COX2 and Cyclin D2which have been associated with TNF delta and/or TNF epsilon induced Bcell activation.

The above-recited applications have uses in a wide variety of hosts.Such hosts include, but are not limited to, human, murine, rabbit, goat,guinea pig, camel, horse, mouse, rat, hamster, pig, micro-pig, chicken,goat, cow, sheep, dog, cat, non-human primate, and human. In specificembodiments, the host is a mouse, rabbit, goat, guinea pig, chicken,rat, hamster, pig, sheep, dog or cat. In preferred embodiments, the hostis a mammal. In most preferred embodiments, the host is a human.

The agonists and antagonists may be employed in a composition with apharmaceutically acceptable carrier, e.g., as described above.

The antagonists may be employed for instance to inhibit TNF delta-and/or TNF epsilon-mediated chemotaxis and activation of macrophages andtheir precursors, and of neutrophils, basophils, B lymphocytes and someT-cell subsets, e.g., activated and CD8 cytotoxic T cells and naturalkiller cells, in certain auto-immune and chronic inflammatory andinfective diseases. Examples of auto-immune diseases include multiplesclerosis, and insulin-dependent diabetes. The antagonists may also beemployed to treat, prevent, and/or diagnose infectious diseasesincluding silicosis, sarcoidosis, idiopathic pulmonary fibrosis bypreventing the recruitment and activation of mononuclear phagocytes.They may also be employed to treat, prevent, and/or diagnose idiopathichyper-eosinophilic syndrome by preventing eosinophil production andmigration. Endotoxic shock may also be treated by the antagonists bypreventing the migration of macrophages and their production of the TNFdelta and/or TNF epsilon polypeptides of the present invention. Theantagonists may also be employed for treating atherosclerosis, bypreventing monocyte infiltration in the artery wall. The antagonists mayalso be employed to treat, prevent, and/or diagnose histamine-mediatedallergic reactions and immunological disorders including late phaseallergic reactions, chronic urticaria, and atopic dermatitis byinhibiting chemokine-induced mast cell and basophil degranulation andrelease of histamine. IgE-mediated allergic reactions such as allergicasthma, rhinitis, and eczema may also be treated. The antagonists mayalso be employed to treat, prevent, and/or diagnose chronic and acuteinflammation by preventing the attraction of monocytes to a wound area.They may also be employed to regulate normal pulmonary macrophagepopulations, since chronic and acute inflammatory pulmonary diseases areassociated with sequestration of mononuclear phagocytes in the lung.Antagonists may also be employed to treat, prevent, and/or diagnoserheumatoid arthritis by preventing the attraction of monocytes intosynovial fluid in the joints of patients. Monocyte influx and activationplays a significant role in the pathogenesis of both degenerative andinflammatory arthropathies. The antagonists may be employed to interferewith the deleterious cascades attributed primarily to IL-I and TNF,which prevents the biosynthesis of other inflammatory cytokines. In thisway, the antagonists may be employed to prevent inflammation. Theantagonists may also be employed to inhibit prostaglandin-independentfever induced by TNF delta and/or TNF epsilon. The antagonists may alsobe employed to treat, prevent, and/or diagnose cases of bone marrowfailure, for example, aplastic anemia and myelodysplastic syndrome. Theantagonists may also be employed to treat, prevent, and/or diagnoseasthma and allergy by preventing eosinophil accumulation in the lung.The antagonists may also be employed to treat, prevent, and/or diagnosesubepithelial basement membrane fibrosis which is a prominent feature ofthe asthmatic lung. The antagonists may also be employed to treat,prevent, and/or diagnose lymphomas (e.g., one or more of the extensive,but not limiting, list of lymphomas provided herein).

All of the above described applications as they may apply to veterinarymedicine. Moreover, all applications described herein may also apply toveterinary medicine.

Antibodies against TNF delta and/or TNF epsilon may be employed to bindto and inhibit TNF delta and/or TNF epsilon activity to treat, prevent,and/or diagnose ARDS, by preventing infiltration of neutrophils into thelung after injury. The antagonists and antagonists of the instant may beemployed in a composition with a pharmaceutically acceptable carrier,e.g., as described hereinafter.

TNF delta and/or TNF epsilon polynucleotides or polypeptides of theinvention and/or agonists and/or antagonists thereof, are used to treat,prevent, and/or diagnose diseases and disorders of the pulmonary system(e.g., bronchi such as, for example, sinopulmonary and bronchialinfections and conditions associated with such diseases and disordersand other respiratory diseases and disorders. In specific embodiments,such diseases and disorders include, but are not limited to, bronchialadenoma, bronchial asthma, pneumonia (such as, e.g., bronchialpneumonia, bronchopneumonia, and tuberculous bronchopneumonia), chronicobstructive pulmonary disease (COPD), bronchial polyps, bronchiectasia(such as, e.g., bronchiectasia sicca, cylindrical bronchiectasis, andsaccular bronchiectasis), bronchiolar adenocarcinoma, bronchiolarcarcinoma, bronchiolitis (such as, e.g., exudative bronchiolitis,bronchiolitis fibrosa obliterans, and proliferative bronchiolitis),bronchiolo-alveolar carcinoma, bronchitic asthma, bronchitis (such as,e.g., asthmatic bronchitis, Castellani's bronchitis, chronic bronchitis,croupous bronchitis, fibrinous bronchitis, hemorrhagic bronchitis,infectious avian bronchitis, obliterative bronchitis, plasticbronchitis, pseudomembranous bronchitis, putrid bronchitis, andverminous bronchitis), bronchocentric granulomatosis, bronchoedema,bronchoesophageal fistula, bronchogenic carcinoma, bronchogenic cyst,broncholithiasis, bronchomalacia, bronchomycosis (such as, e.g.,bronchopulmonary aspergillosis), bronchopulmonary spirochetosis,hemorrhagic bronchitis, bronchorrhea, bronchospasm, bronchostaxis,bronchostenosis, Biot's respiration, bronchial respiration, Kussmaulrespiration, Kussmaul-Kien respiration, respiratory acidosis,respiratory alkalosis, respiratory distress syndrome of the newborn,respiratory insufficiency, respiratory scleroma, respiratory syncytialvirus, and the like.

In a specific embodiment, TNF delta and/or TNF epsilon polynucleotidesor polypeptides of the invention and/or agonists and/or antagoniststhereof, are used to treat, prevent, and/or diagnose chronic obstructivepulmonary disease (COPD).

In another embodiment, TNF delta and/or TNF epsilon polynucleotides orpolypeptides of the invention and/or agonists and/or antagoniststhereof, are used to treat, prevent, and/or diagnose fibroses andconditions associated with fibroses, such as, for example, but notlimited to, cystic fibrosis (including such fibroses as cystic fibrosisof the pancreas, Clarke-Hadfield syndrome, fibrocystic disease of thepancreas, mucoviscidosis, and viscidosis), endomyocardial fibrosis,idiopathic retroperitoneal fibrosis, leptomeningeal fibrosis,mediastinal fibrosis, nodular subepidermal fibrosis, pericentralfibrosis, perimuscular fibrosis, pipestem fibrosis, replacementfibrosis, subadventitial fibrosis, and Symmers' clay pipestem fibrosis.

In another embodiment, TNF delta and/or TNF epsilon polynucleotides orpolypeptides of the invention and/or agonists and/or antagoniststhereof, are used to treat, prevent, and/or diagnose inner ear infection(such as, for example, otitis media), as well as other infectionscharacterized by infection with Streptococcus pneumoniae and otherpathogenic organisms.

TNF delta and/or TNF epsilon polynucleotides or polypeptides of theinvention and/or agonists and/or antagonists thereof, are used to treat,prevent, and/or diagnose various immune system-related disorders and/orconditions associated with these disorders, in mammals, preferablyhumans. Many autoimmune disorders result from inappropriate recognitionof self as foreign material by immune cells. This inappropriaterecognition results in an immune response leading to the destruction ofthe host tissue. Therefore, the administration of TNF delta and/or TNFepsilon polynucleotides or polypeptides of the invention and/or agonistsand/or antagonists thereof that can inhibit an immune response,particularly the proliferation, differentiation, or chemotaxis of Tcells, may be an effective therapy in treating and/or preventingautoimmune disorders. Thus, in preferred embodiments, TNF delta and/orTNF epsilon antagonists of the invention (e.g., polypeptide fragments ofTNF delta and/or TNF epsilon and anti-TNF delta and/or anti-TNF epsilonantibodies) are used to treat, prevent, and/or diagnose an autoimmunedisorder.

Such autoimmune disorders include, but are not limited to, autoimmunediseases such as, for example, autoimmune hemolytic anemia, autoimmuneneonatal thrombocytopenia, autoimmunocytopenia, hemolytic anemia,antiphospholipid syndrome, dermatitis, allergic encephalomyelitis,glomerulonephritis, Multiple Sclerosis, Neuritis, Ophthalmia,Polyendocrinopathies, Purpura, Reiter's Disease, Stiff-Man Syndrome,Autoimmune Pulmonary Inflammation, Guillain-Barre Syndrome, insulindependent diabetes mellitis, and autoimmune inflammatory eye disease.

Additional autoimmune disorders (that are highly probable) that may betreated, prevented, and/or diagnosed with the compositions of theinvention include, but are not limited to, autoimmune thyroiditis (i.e.,Hashimoto's thyroiditis) (often characterized, e.g., by cell-mediatedand humoral thyroid cytotoxicity), systemic lupus erhthematosus (oftencharacterized, e.g., by circulating and locally generated immunecomplexes), Goodpasture's syndrome (often characterized, e.g., byanti-basement membrane antibodies), Pemphigus (often characterized,e.g., by epidermal acantholytic antibodies), Receptor autoimmunitiessuch as, for example, (a) Graves' Disease (often characterized, e.g., byTSH receptor antibodies), (b) Myasthenia Gravis (often characterized,e.g., by acetylcholine receptor antibodies), and (c) insulin resistance(often characterized, e.g., by insulin receptor antibodies), autoimmunehemolytic anemia (often characterized, e.g., by phagocytosis ofantibody-sensitized RBCs), autoimmune thrombocytopenic purpura (oftencharacterized, e.g., by phagocytosis of antibody-sensitized platelets.

Additional autoimmune disorders (that are probable) that may be treated,prevented, and/or diagnosed with the compositions of the inventioninclude, but are not limited to, rheumatoid arthritis (oftencharacterized, e.g., by immune complexes in joints), scleroderma withanti-collagen antibodies (often characterized, e.g., by nucleolar andother nuclear antibodies), mixed connective tissue disease (oftencharacterized, e.g., by antibodies to extractable nuclear antigens(e.g., ribonucleoprotein)), polymyositis (often characterized, e.g., bynonhistone ANA), pernicious anemia (often characterized, e.g., byantiparietal cell, microsomes, and intrinsic factor antibodies),idiopathic Addison's disease (often characterized, e.g., by humoral andcell-mediated adrenal cytotoxicity, infertility (often characterized,e.g., by antispermatozoal antibodies), glomerulonephritis (oftencharacterized, e.g., by glomerular basement membrane antibodies orimmune complexes), bullous pemphigoid (often characterized, e.g., by IgGand complement in basement membrane), Sjögren's syndrome (oftencharacterized, e.g., by multiple tissue antibodies, and/or a specificnonhistone ANA (SS-B)), diabetes millitus (often characterized, e.g., bycell-mediated and humoral islet cell antibodies), and adrenergic drugresistance (including adrenergic drug resistance with asthma or cysticfibrosis) (often characterized, e.g., by beta-adrenergic receptorantibodies).

Additional autoimmune disorders (that are possible) that may be treated,prevented, and/or diagnosed with the compositions of the inventioninclude, but are not limited to, chronic active hepatitis (oftencharacterized, e.g., by smooth muscle antibodies), primary biliarycirrhosis (often characterized, e.g., by mitchondrial antibodies), otherendocrine gland failure (often characterized, e.g., by specific tissueantibodies in some cases), vitiligo (often characterized, e.g., bymelanocyte antibodies), vasculitis (often characterized, e.g., by Ig andcomplement in vessel walls and/or low serum complement), post-MI (oftencharacterized, e.g., by myocardial antibodies), cardiotomy syndrome(often characterized, e.g., by myocardial antibodies), urticaria (oftencharacterized, e.g., by IgG and IgM antibodies to IgE), atopicdermatitis (often characterized, e.g., by IgG and IgM antibodies toIgE), asthma (often characterized, e.g., by IgG and IgM antibodies toIgE), and many other inflammatory, granulamatous, degenerative, andatrophic disorders.

In a preferred embodiment, the autoimmune diseases and disorders and/orconditions associated with the diseases and disorders recited above aretreated, prevented, and/or diagnosed using anti-TNF-delta antibodiesand/or anti-TNF-epsilon antibodies and/or a soluble TNF delta and/or TNFepsilon receptor polypeptide of the invention.

In a specific preferred embodiment, rheumatoid arthritis is treated,prevented, and/or diagnosed using anti-TNF delta antibodies and/oranti-TNF epsilon antibodies and/or a soluble TNF delta and/or TNFepsilon receptor polypeptide and/or other antagonist of the invention.

In a specific preferred embodiment, lupus is treated, prevented, and/ordiagnosed using anti-TNF delta antibodies and/or anti-TNF epsilonantibodies and/or a soluble TNF delta and/or TNF epsilon receptorpolypeptide and/or other antagonist of the invention.

In a specific preferred embodiment, nephritis associated with lupus istreated, prevented, and/or diagnosed using anti-TNF delta antibodiesand/or anti-TNF epsilon antibodies and/or a soluble TNF delta and/or TNFepsilon receptor polypeptide and/or other antagonist of the invention.

In a specific preferred embodiment, Sjögren's Syndrome is treated,prevented, and/or diagnosed using anti-TNF delta antibodies and/oranti-TNF epsilon antibodies and/or other antagonist of the invention.

In a specific preferred embodiment, AIDS is treated, prevented, and/ordiagnosed using anti-TNF delta antibodies and/or anti-TNF epsilonantibodies and/or other antagonist of the invention.

In a specific preferred embodiment, HIV infection is treated, prevented,and/or diagnosed using anti-TNF delta antibodies and/or anti-TNF epsilonantibodies and/or other antagonist of the invention.

In another specific preferred embodiment, therapeutic and pharmaceuticalcompositions of the invention, are used to treat, prevent, ameliorate,diagnose or prognose, Myasthenia gravis and/or medical conditionsassociated therewith.

In another specific preferred embodiment, therapeutic and pharmaceuticalcompositions of the invention, are used to treat, prevent, ameliorate,diagnose or prognose, IgA nephropathy and/or medical conditionsassociated therewith.

In another specific preferred embodiment, therapeutic and pharmaceuticalcompositions of the invention, are used to treat, prevent, ameliorate,diagnose or prognose, hemolytic anemia and/or medical conditionsassociated therewith.

In another specific preferred embodiment, therapeutic and pharmaceuticalcompositions of the invention, are used to treat, prevent, ameliorate,diagnose or prognose, thyroiditis and/or medical conditions associatedtherewith.

In another specific preferred embodiment, therapeutic and pharmaceuticalcompositions of the invention, are used to treat, prevent, ameliorate,diagnose or prognose, Goodpasture's Syndrome and/or medical conditionsassociated therewith.

In another specific preferred embodiment, therapeutic and pharmaceuticalcompositions of the invention, are used to treat, prevent, ameliorate,diagnose or prognose, multiple sclerosis and/or medical conditionsassociated therewith.

In another specific preferred embodiment, therapeutic and pharmaceuticalcompositions of the invention, are used to treat, prevent, ameliorate,diagnose or prognose, chronic lymphocytic leukemia (CLL) and/or medicalconditions associated therewith.

In another specific preferred embodiment, therapeutic and pharmaceuticalcompositions of the invention, are used to treat, prevent, ameliorate,diagnose or prognose, multiple myeloma and/or medical conditionsassociated therewith.

In another specific preferred embodiment, therapeutic and pharmaceuticalcompositions of the invention, are used to treat, prevent, ameliorate,diagnose or prognose, Non-Hodgkin's lymphoma and/or medical conditionsassociated therewith.

In another specific preferred embodiment, therapeutic and pharmaceuticalcompositions of the invention, are used to treat, prevent, ameliorate,diagnose or prognose, Hodgkin's disease and/or medical conditionsassociated therewith.

In a specific embodiment, TNF delta and/or TNF epsilon polynucleotidesor polypeptides, or antagonists thereof (e.g., anti-TNF delta and/oranti-TNF epsilon antibodies) are used to treat or prevent systemic lupuserythramatosus and/or diseases, disorders or conditions associatedtherewith. Lupus-associated diseases, disorders, or conditions that maybe treated or prevented with TNF delta and/or TNF epsilonpolynucleotides or polypeptides, or antagonists of the invention,include, but are not limited to, hematologic disorders (e.g., hemolyticanemia, leukopenia, lymphopenia, and thrombocytopenia), immunologicdisorders (e.g., anti-DNA antibodies, and anti-Sm antibodies), rashes,photosensitivity, oral ulcers, arthritis, fever, fatigue, weight loss,serositis (e.g., pleuritus (pleuricy)), renal disorders (e.g.,nephritis), neurological disorders (e.g., seizures, peripheralneuropathy, CNS related disorders), gastroinstestinal disorders, Raynaudphenomenon, and pericarditis. In a preferred embodiment, the TNF deltaand/or TNF epsilon polynucleotides or polypeptides, or antagoniststhereof (e.g., anti-TNF delta and/or anti-TNF epsilon antibodies) areused to treat or prevent renal disorders associated with systemic lupuserythramatosus. In a most preferred embodiment, TNF delta and/or TNFepsilon polynucleotides or polypeptides, or antagonists thereof (e.g.,anti-TNF delta and/or anti-TNF epsilon antibodies) are used to treat orprevent nephritis associated with systemic lupus erythramatosus.

In one embodiment, the invention provides methods and compositions forinhibiting or reducing immunoglobulin production (e.g. IgM, IgG, and/orIgA production), comprising, or alternatively consisting of, contactingan effective amount of TNF delta and/or TNF epsilon polypeptide oragonist or antagonist thereof with cells of hematopoietic origin,wherein the effective amount of TNF delta and/or TNF epsilon polypeptideinhibits or reduces TNF delta and/or TNF epsilon mediated immunoglobulinproduction. In specific embodiments, the invention provides methods andcompositions for inhibiting or reducing immunoglobulin production (e.g.IgM, IgG, and/or IgA production) in response to T cell dependentantigens, comprising, or alternatively consisting of, contacting aneffective amount of TNF delta and/or TNF epsilon polypeptide or agonistor antagonist thereof with cells of hematopoietic origin, wherein theeffective amount of TNF delta and/or TNF epsilon polypeptide or agonistor antagonist thereof inhibits or reduces TNF delta and/or TNF epsilonmediated immunoglobulin production in response to T cell dependentantigens. In specific embodiments, the invention provides methods andcompositions for inhibiting or reducing immunoglobulin production (e.g.IgM, IgG, and/or IgA production) in response to T cell independentantigens, comprising, or alternatively consisting of, contacting aneffective amount of TNF delta and/or TNF epsilon polypeptide or agonistor antagonist thereof with cells of hematopoietic origin, wherein theeffective amount of TNF delta and/or TNF epsilon polypeptide inhibits orreduces TNF delta and/or TNF epsilon mediated immunoglobulin productionin response to T cell independent antigens.

In another embodiment, the invention provides methods and compositionsfor inhibiting or reducing immunoglobulin production (e.g. IgM, IgG,and/or IgA production), comprising, or alternatively consisting of,administering to an animal in which such inhibition or reduction isdesired, a TNF delta and/or TNF epsilon polypeptide or agonist orantagonist thereof in an amount effective to inhibit or reduceimmunoglobulin production. In another embodiment, the invention providesmethods and compositions for inhibiting or reducing immunoglobulinproduction (e.g. IgM, IgG, and/or IgA production) in response to T celldependent antigens, comprising, or alternatively consisting of,administering to an animal in which such inhibition or reduction isdesired, a TNF delta and/or TNF epsilon polypeptide or agonist orantagonist thereof in an amount effective to inhibit or reduceimmunoglobulin production in response to T cell dependent antigens. Inanother embodiment, the invention provides methods and compositions forinhibiting or reducing immunoglobulin production (e.g. IgM, IgG, and/orIgA production) in response to T cell independent antigens, comprising,or alternatively consisting of, administering to an animal in which suchinhibition or reduction is desired, a TNF delta and/or TNF epsilonpolypeptide or agonist or antagonist thereof in an amount effective toinhibit or reduce immunoglobulin production in response to T cellindependent antigens.

In another embodiment, the invention provides methods and compositionsfor stimulating immunoglobulin production (e.g. IgM, IgG, IgG, and/orIgA production) in response to T cell dependent antigens comprising, oralternatively consisting of, contacting an effective amount of TNF deltaand/or TNF epsilon polypeptide with cells of hematopoietic origin,wherein the effective amount of the TNF delta and/or TNF epsilonpolypeptide stimulates TNF delta and/or TNF epsilon mediatedimmunoglobulin production in response to T cell dependent antigens. Inanother embodiment, the invention provides methods and compositions forstimulating immunoglobulin production (e.g. IgM, IgG, and/or IgAproduction) in response to T cell independent antigens comprising, oralternatively consisting of, contacting an effective amount of TNF deltaand/or TNF epsilon polypeptide with cells of hematopoietic origin,wherein the effective amount of the TNF delta and/or TNF epsilonpolypeptide stimulates TNF delta and/or TNF epsilon mediatedimmunoglobulin production in response to T cell independent antigens.

In another embodiment, the invention provides methods and compositionsfor stimulating immunoglobulin production (e.g. IgM, and/or IgAproduction), comprising, or alternatively consisting of, contacting aneffective amount of TNF delta and/or TNF epsilon polypeptide or agonistthereof with cells of hematopoietic origin, wherein the effective amountof the TNF delta and/or TNF epsilon polypeptide or agonist thereofstimulates TNF delta and/or TNF epsilon mediated immunoglobulinproduction. In another embodiment, the invention provides methods andcompositions for stimulating immunoglobulin production (e.g. IgM, IgG,and/or IgA production) comprising, or alternatively consisting of,administering to an animal in which such stimulation is desired, a TNFdelta and/or TNF epsilon polypeptide or agonist thereof in an amounteffective to stimulate immunoglobulin production. In another embodiment,the invention provides methods and compositions for stimulatingimmunoglobulin production (e.g. IgM, IgG, and/or IgA production) inresponse to T cell dependent antigens comprising, or alternativelyconsisting of, administering to an animal in which such stimulation isdesired, a TNF delta and/or TNF epsilon polypeptide or agonist thereofin an amount effective to stimulate immunoglobulin production inresponse to T cell dependent antigens.

In another embodiment, the invention provides methods and compositionsfor stimulating immunoglobulin production (e.g. IgM, IgG, and/or IgAproduction) in response to T cell independent antigens comprising, oralternatively consisting of, administering to an animal in which suchstimulation is desired, a TNF delta and/or TNF epsilon polypeptide oragonist thereof in an amount effective to stimulate immunoglobulinproduction in response to T cell independent antigens.

Determination of immunoglobulin levels are most often performed bycomparing the level of immunoglobulin in a sample to a standardcontaining a known amount of immunoglobulin using ELISA assays.Determination of immunoglobulin levels in a given sample, can readily bedetermined using ELISA or other method known in the art.

In one embodiment, the invention provides methods and compositions forinhibiting or reducing proliferation of cells of hematopoietic origin,comprising, or alternatively consisting of, contacting an effectiveamount of TNF delta and/or TNF epsilon polypeptide or agonist orantagonist thereof with cells of hematopoietic origin, wherein theeffective amount of TNF delta and/or TNF epsilon polypeptide or agonistor antagonist thereof inhibits or reduces TNF delta and/or TNF epsilonmediated proliferation of cells of hemtopoietic origin. In anotherembodiment, the invention provides methods and compositions forinhibiting or reducing proliferation of cells of hematopoietic origincomprising, or alternatively consisting of, administering to an animalin which such inhibition or reduction is desired, a TNF delta and/or TNFepsilon polypeptide or agonist or antagonist thereof in an amounteffective to inhibit or reduce B cell proliferation. In preferredembodiments, the cells of hematopoietic origin are B cells.

In one embodiment, the invention provides methods and compositions forstimulating proliferation of cells of hematopoietic origin, comprising,or alternatively consisting of, contacting an effective amount of TNFdelta and/or TNF epsilon polypeptide or agonist thereof with cells ofhematopoietic origin, wherein the effective amount of TNF delta and/orTNF epsilon polypeptide or agonist thereof stimulates TNF delta and/orTNF epsilon mediated proliferation of cells of hemtopoietic origin. Inanother embodiment, the invention provides methods and compositions forstimulating proliferation of cells of hematopoietic origin comprising,or alternatively consisting of, administering to an animal in which suchstimulation is desired, a TNF delta and/or TNF epsilon polypeptide oragonist thereof in an amount effective to stimulate B cellproliferation. In preferred embodiments, the cells of hematopoieticorigin are B cells. B cell proliferation is most commonly assayed in theart by measuring tritiated thymidine incorporation (see Examples 6 & 7).This and other assays are commonly known in the art and could beroutinely adapted for the use of determining the effect of TNF deltaand/or TNF epsilon polypeptides on B cell proliferation.

In one embodiment, the invention provides methods and compositions forinhibiting or reducing activation of cells of hematopoietic origin,comprising, or alternatively consisting of, contacting an effectiveamount of TNF delta and/or TNF epsilon polypeptide or agonist orantagonist thereof with cells of hematopoietic origin, wherein theeffective amount of TNF delta and/or TNF epsilon polypeptide or agonistor antagonist thereof inhibits or reduces TNF delta and/or TNF epsilonmediated activation of cells of hematopoietic origin. In one embodiment,the invention provides methods and compositions for inhibiting orreducing activation of cells of hematopoietic origin, comprising, oralternatively consisting of, administering to an animal in which suchinhibition or reduction is desired, a TNF delta and/or TNF epsilonpolypeptide or agonist or antagonist thereof in an amount effective toinhibit or reduce activation of cells of hematopoietic origin. Inpreferred embodiments, the cells of hematopoietic origin are B cells.

In one embodiment, the invention provides methods and compositions forincreasing activation of cells of hematopoietic origin, comprising, oralternatively consisting of, contacting an effective amount of TNF deltaand/or TNF epsilon polypeptide or agonist thereof with cells ofhematopoietic origin, wherein the effective amount of TNF delta and/orTNF epsilon polypeptide or agonist thereof increases TNF delta and/orTNF epsilon mediated activation of cells of hematopoietic origin. In oneembodiment, the invention provides methods and compositions forincreasing activation of cells of hematopoietic origin, comprising, oralternatively consisting of, administering to an animal in which suchincrease is desired, a TNF delta and/or TNF epsilon polypeptide oragonist thereof in an amount effective to increase activation of cellsof hematopoietic origin. In preferred embodiments, the cells ofhematopoietic origin are B cells.

B cell activation can measured in a variety of ways, such as FACSanalysis of activation markers expressed on B cells. B cells activationmarkers include, but are not limited to, CD26, CD 28, CD 30, CD 38, CD39, CD 69, CD70 CD71, CD 77, CD 83, CD126, CDw130, and B220.Additionally, B cell activation maybe measured by analysis of theactivation of signaling molecules involved in B cell activation. By wayof non-limiting example, such analysis may take the form of analyzingmRNA levels of signaling molecules by Northern analysis or real time PCR(See Example 11). One can also measure, for example, the phosphorylationof signaling molecules using anti-phosphotyrosine antibodies in aWestern blot. B cell activation may also be measured by measuring thecalcium levels in B cells. These and other methods of determining B cellactivation are commonly known in the art and could be routinely adaptedfor the use of determining the effect of TNF delta and/or TNF epsilonpolypeptides on B cell activation.

In one embodiment, the invention provides methods and compositions fordecreasing lifespan of cells of hematopoietic origin, comprising, oralternatively consisting of, contacting an effective amount of TNF deltaand/or TNF epsilon polypeptide or agonist or antagonist thereof withcells of hematopoietic origin, wherein the effective amount of TNF deltaand/or TNF epsilon polypeptide or agonist or antagonist thereof inhibitsor reduces TNF delta and/or TNF epsilon regulated lifespan of cells ofhematopoietic origin. In one embodiment, the invention provides methodsand compositions for decreasing lifespan of cells of hematopoieticorigin, comprising, or alternatively consisting of, administering to ananimal in which such decrease is desired, a TNF delta and/or TNF epsilonpolypeptide or agonist or antagonist thereof in an amount effective todecrease lifespan of cells of hematopoietic origin. In preferredembodiments, the cells of hematopoietic origin are B cells.

In one embodiment, the invention provides methods and compositions forincreasing lifespan of cells of hematopoietic origin, comprising, oralternatively consisting of, contacting an effective amount of TNF deltaand/or TNF epsilon polypeptide or agonist thereof with cells ofhematopoietic origin, wherein the effective amount of TNF delta and/orTNF epsilon polypeptide or agonist thereof increases TNF delta and/orTNF epsilon regulated lifespan of cells of hematopoietic origin. In oneembodiment, the invention provides methods and compositions forincreasing lifespan of cells of hematopoietic origin, comprising, oralternatively consisting of, administering to an animal in which suchincrease is desired, a TNF delta and/or TNF epsilon polypeptide oragonist thereof in an amount effective to increase lifespan of cells ofhematopoietic origin. In preferred embodiments, the cells ofhematopoietic origin are B cells.

B cell life span in vivo may be measured by 5-bromo-2′-deoxyuridine(BrdU) labeling experiments which are well known to one skilled in theart. BrdU is a thymidine analogue that gets incorporated into the DNA ofdividing cells. Cells containing BrdU in their DNA can be detectedusing, for example fluorescently labeled anti-BrdU antibody and flowcytometry. Briefly, an animal is injected with BrdU in an amountsufficient to label developing B cells. Then, a sample of B cells iswithdrawn from the animal, for example, from peripheral blood, andanalyzed for the percentage of cells that contain BrdU. Such an analysisperformed at several time points can be used to calculate the half lifeof B cells. Alternatively, B cell survival may be measured in vitro. Forexample B cells may be cultured under conditions where proliferationdoes not occur, (for example the media should contain no reagents thatcrosslink the immunoglobulin receptor, such as anti-IgM antibodies) fora period of time (usually 2-4 days). At the end of this time, thepercent of surviving cells is determined, using for instance, the vitaldye Trypan Blue, or by staining cells with propidium iodide or any otheragent designed to specifically stain apoptotic cells and analyzing thepercentage of cells stained using flow cytometry. One could perform thisexperiment under several conditions, such as B cells treated with TNFdelta, B cells treated with TNF delta and/or TNF epsilon polypeptidecomplexes, and untreated B cells in order to determine the effects ofTNF delta and/or TNF epsilon polypeptides on B cells survival. These andother methods for determining B cell lifespan are commonly known in theart and could routinely be adapted to determining the effect of TNFdelta and/or TNF epsilon polypeptides on TNF delta and/or TNF epsilonregulated B cell lifespan.

It will be appreciated that conditions caused by a decrease in thestandard or normal level of TNF delta and/or TNF epsilon activity in anindividual, particularly disorders of the immune system, can be treatedby administration of TNF delta and/or TNF epsilon polypeptide (in theform of soluble extracellular domain or cells expressing the completeprotein) or agonist. Thus, the invention also provides a method oftreatment of an individual in need of an increased level of TNF deltaand/or TNF epsilon activity comprising administering to such anindividual a pharmaceutical composition comprising an amount of anisolated TNF delta and/or TNF epsilon polypeptide of the invention, oragonist thereof, effective to increase the TNF delta and/or TNF epsilonactivity level in such an individual.

It will also be appreciated that conditions caused by a increase in thestandard or normal level of TNF delta and/or TNF epsilon activity in anindividual, particularly disorders of the immune system, can be treatedby administration of TNF delta and/or TNF epsilon polypeptides (in theform of soluble extracellular domain or cells expressing the completeprotein) or antagonist (e.g, an anti-TNF delta and /or anti-TNF epsilonantibody). Thus, the invention also provides a method of treatment of anindividual in need of an decreased level of TNF delta and/or TNF epsilonactivity comprising administering to such an individual a pharmaceuticalcomposition comprising an amount of an isolated TNF delta and/or TNFepsilon polypeptide of the invention, or antagonist thereof, effectiveto decrease the TNF delta and/or TNF epsilon activity level in such anindividual. A non-limiting example of a TNF delta and/or TNF epsilonpolypeptide of the invention that can be administered to an individualin need of an decreased level of TNF delta and/or TNF epsilon activity,is a dominant negative mutant of a TNF delta and/or TNF epsilon, whichbinds to a TNF delta and/or TNF epsilon receptor but that does notinduce signal transduction.

Autoantibody production is common to several autoimmune diseases andcontributes to tissue destruction and exacerbation of disease.Autoantibodies can also lead to the occurrence of immune complexdeposition complications and lead to many symptoms of systemic lupuserythomatosis, including kidney failure, neuralgic symptoms and death.Modulating antibody production independent of cellular response wouldalso be beneficial in many disease states. B cells have also been shownto play a role in the secretion of arthritogenic immunoglobulins inrheumatoid arthritis, (Korganow et al., Immunity 10:451-61, 1999). Assuch, inhibition of TNF delta and/or TNF epsilon mediated antibodyproduction would be beneficial in treatment of autoimmune diseases suchas myasthenia gravis and rheumatoid arthritis. Compounds of theinvention that selectively block or neutralize the action ofB-lymphocytes would be useful for such purposes. To verify thesecapabilities in compositions of the present invention, such compositionsare evaluated using assays known in the art and described herein.

The invention provides methods employing compositions of the invention(e.g., TNF delta and/or TNF epsilon polynucleotides or polypeptides ofthe invention and/or agonists and/or antagonists thereof) forselectively blocking or neutralizing the actions of B-cells inassociation with end stage renal diseases, which may or may not beassociated with autoimmune diseases. Such methods would also be usefulfor treating immunologic renal diseases. Such methods would be would beuseful for treating glomerulonephritis associated with diseases such asmembranous nephropathy, IgA nephropathy or Berger's Disease, IgMnephropathy, Goodpasture's Disease, post-infectious glomerulonephritis,mesangioproliferative disease, minimal-change nephrotic syndrome. Suchmethods would also serve as therapeutic applications for treatingsecondary glomerulonephritis or vasculitis associated with such diseasesas lupus, polyarteritis, Henoch-Schonlein, Scleroderma, HIV-relateddiseases, amyloidosis or hemolytic uremic syndrome. The methods of thepresent invention would also be useful as part of a therapeuticapplication for treating interstitial nephritis or pyelonephritisassociated with chronic pyelonephritis, analgesic abuse,nephrocalcinosis, nephropathy caused by other agents, nephrolithiasis,or chronic or acute interstitial nephritis.

The methods of the present invention also include use of compositions ofthe invention in the treatment of hypertensive or large vessel diseases,including renal artery stenosis or occlusion and cholesterol emboli orrenal emboli.

The present invention also provides methods for diagnosis and treatmentof renal or urological neoplasms, multiple mylelomas, lymphomas, lightchain neuropathy or amyloidosis.

Similarly, allergic reactions and conditions, such as asthma(particularly allergic asthma) or other respiratory problems, may alsobe treated by TNF delta and/or TNF epsilon polynucleotides orpolypeptides of the invention and/or agonists and/or antagoniststhereof. Moreover, these molecules can be used to treat, prevent, and/ordiagnose anaphylaxis, hypersensitivity to an antigenic molecule, orblood group incompatibility.

TNF delta and/or TNF epsilon polynucleotides or polypeptides of theinvention and/or agonists and/or antagonists thereof, may also be usedto treat, prevent, and/or diagnose organ rejection or graft-versus-hostdisease (GVHD) and/or conditions associated therewith. Organ rejectionoccurs by host immune cell destruction of the transplanted tissuethrough an immune response. Similarly, an immune response is alsoinvolved in GVHD, but, in this case, the foreign transplanted immunecells destroy the host tissues. The administration of TNF delta and/orTNF epsilon polynucleotides or polypeptides of the invention and/oragonists and/or antagonists thereof, that inhibits an immune response,particularly the proliferation, differentiation, or chemotaxis ofT-cells, may be an effective therapy in preventing organ rejection orGVHD.

Similarly, TNF delta and/or TNF epsilon polynucleotides or polypeptidesof the invention and/or agonists and/or antagonists thereof, may also beused to modulate inflammation. For example, TNF delta and/or TNF epsilonpolynucleotides or polypeptides of the invention and/or agonists and/orantagonists thereof, may inhibit the proliferation and differentiationof cells involved in an inflammatory response. These molecules can beused to treat, prevent, and/or diagnose inflammatory conditions, bothchronic and acute conditions, including chronic prostatitis,granulomatous prostatitis and malacoplakia, inflammation associated withinfection (e.g., septic shock, sepsis, or systemic inflammatory responsesyndrome (SIRS)), ischemia-reperfusion injury, endotoxin lethality,arthritis, complement-mediated hyperacute rejection, nephritis, cytokineor chemokine induced lung injury, inflammatory bowel disease, Crohn'sdisease, or resulting from over production of cytokines (e.g., TNF orIL-1.)

In a specific embodiment, anti-TNF delta and/or anti-TNF epsilonantibodies of the invention are used to treat, prevent, modulate,detect, and/or diagnose inflammation.

In a specific embodiment, anti-TNF delta and/or anti-TNF epsilonantibodies of the invention are used to treat, prevent, modulate,detect, and/or diagnose inflamatory disorders.

In another specific embodiment, anti-TNF delta and/or anti-TNF epsilonantibodies of the invention are used to treat, prevent, modulate,detect, and/or diagnose allergy and/or hypersensitivity.

The TNF family ligands are known to be among the most pleiotropiccytokines, inducing a large number of cellular responses, includingcytotoxicity, anti-viral activity, immunoregulatory activities, and thetranscriptional regulation of several genes (D. V. Goeddel et al.,“Tumor Necrosis Factors: Gene Structure and Biological Activities,”Symp. Quant. Biol. 51:597-609 (1986), Cold Spring Harbor; B. Beutler andA. Cerami, Annu. Rev. Biochem. 57:505-518 (1988); L. J. Old, Sci. Am.258:59-75 (1988); W. Fiers, FEBS Lett. 285:199-224 (1991)). TheTNF-family ligands, including TNF delta and/or TNF epsilon of thepresent invention, induce such various cellular responses by binding toTNF-family receptors. TNF delta and/or TNF epsilon polypeptides arebelieved to elicit a potent cellular response including any genotypic,phenotypic, and/or morphologic change to the cell, cell line, tissue,tissue culture or patient. As indicated, such cellular responses includenot only normal physiological responses to TNF-family ligands, but alsodiseases associated with increased apoptosis or the inhibition ofapoptosis. Apoptosis-programmed cell death-is a physiological mechanisminvolved in the deletion of peripheral B and/or T lymphocytes of theimmune system, and its disregulation can lead to a number of differentpathogenic processes (J. C. Ameisen, AIDS 8:1197-1213 (1994); P. H.Krammer et al, Curr. Opin. Immunol. 6:279-289 (1994)).

Diseases associated with increased cell survival, or the inhibition ofapoptosis, include cancers (such as follicular lymphomas, carcinomaswith p53 mutations, and hormone-dependent tumors, including, but notlimited to, colon cancer, cardiac tumors, pancreatic cancer, melanoma,retinoblastoma, glioblastoma, lung cancer, intestinal cancer, testicularcancer, stomach cancer, neuroblastoma, myxoma, myoma, lymphoma,endothelioma, osteoblastoma, osteoclastoma, osteosarcoma,chondrosarcoma, adenoma, breast cancer, prostate cancer, Kaposi'ssarcoma and ovarian cancer); autoimmune disorders (such as systemiclupus erythematosus and immune-related glomerulonephritis rheumatoidarthritis); viral infections (such as herpes viruses, pox viruses andadenoviruses); inflammation; graft vs. host disease; acute graftrejection and chronic graft rejection. Thus, in preferred embodimentsTNF delta and/or TNF epsilon polynucleotides or polypeptides of theinvention are used to treat, prevent, and/or diagnose autoimmunediseases and/or inhibit the growth, progression, and/or metastasis ofcancers, including, but not limited to, those cancers disclosed herein,such as, for example, lymphocytic leukemias (including, for example, MLLand chronic lymphocytic leukemia (CLL)) and follicular lymphomas. Inanother embodiment TNF delta and/or TNF epsilon polynucleotides orpolypeptides of the invention are used to activate, differentiate orproliferate cancerous cells or tissue (e.g., B cell lineage relatedcancers (e.g., CLL and MLL), lymphocytic leukemia, or lymphoma) andthereby render the cells more vulnerable to cancer therapy (e.g.,chemotherapy or radiation therapy).

Moreover, in other embodiments, TNF delta and/or TNF epsilonpolynucleotides or polypeptides of the invention are used to inhibit thegrowth, progression, and/or metastases of malignancies and relateddisorders such as leukemia (including acute leukemias (e.g., acutelymphocytic leukemia, acute myelocytic leukemia (including myeloblastic,promyelocytic, myelomonocytic, monocytic, and erythroleukemia)) andchronic leukemias (e.g., chronic myelocytic (granulocytic) leukemia andchronic lymphocytic leukemia)), polycythemia vera, lymphomas (e.g.,Hodgkin's disease and non-Hodgkin's disease), multiple myeloma,Waldenstrom's macroglobulinemia, heavy chain disease, and solid tumorsincluding, but not limited to, sarcomas and carcinomas such asfibrosarcoma, myxosarcoma, liposarcoma, chondrosarcoma, osteogenicsarcoma, chordoma, angiosarcoma, endotheliosarcoma, lymphangiosarcoma,lymphangioendotheliosarcoma, synovioma, mesothelioma, Ewing's tumor,leiomyosarcoma, rhabdomyosarcoma, colon carcinoma, pancreatic cancer,breast cancer, ovarian cancer, prostate cancer, squamous cell carcinoma,basal cell carcinoma, adenocarcinoma, sweat gland carcinoma, sebaceousgland carcinoma, papillary carcinoma, papillary adenocarcinomas,cystadenocarcinoma, medullary carcinoma, bronchogenic carcinoma, renalcell carcinoma, hepatoma, bile duct carcinoma, choriocarcinoma,seminoma, embryonal carcinoma, Wilm's tumor, cervical cancer, testiculartumor, lung carcinoma, small cell lung carcinoma, bladder carcinoma,epithelial carcinoma, glioma, astrocytoma, medulloblastoma,craniopharyngioma, ependymoma, pinealoma, hemangioblastoma, acousticneuroma, oligodendroglioma, menangioma, melanoma, neuroblastoma, andretinoblastoma.

Diseases associated with increased apoptosis include AIDS;neurodegenerative disorders (such as Alzheimer's disease, Parkinson'sdisease, Amyotrophic lateral sclerosis, Retinitis pigmentosa, Cerebellardegeneration); myelodysplastic syndromes (such as aplastic anemia),ischemic injury (such as that caused by myocardial infarction, strokeand reperfusion injury), toxin-induced liver disease (such as thatcaused by alcohol), septic shock, cachexia and anorexia. Thus, inpreferred embodiments TNF delta and/or TNF epsilon polynucleotides orpolypeptides of the invention are used to treat, prevent, and/ordiagnose the diseases and disorders listed above.

Thus, in additional preferred embodiments, the present invention isdirected to a method for enhancing apoptosis induced by a TNF-familyligand, which involves administering to a cell which expresses a TNFdelta and/or TNF epsilon receptor an effective amount of TNF deltaand/or TNF epsilon, analog or an agonist capable of increasing TNFdelta- and/or TNF epsilon-mediated signaling. Preferably, TNF deltaand/or TNF epsilon mediated signaling is increased to treat, prevent,and/or diagnose a disease wherein decreased apoptosis or decreasedcytokine and adhesion molecule expression is exhibited. An agonist caninclude soluble forms of TNF delta and/or TNF epsilon and monoclonalantibodies directed against the TNF delta and/or TNF epsilonpolypeptide.

In a further aspect, the present invention is directed to a method forinhibiting apoptosis induced by a TNF-family ligand, which involvesadministering to a cell which expresses the TNF delta and/or TNF epsilonreceptor an effective amount of an antagonist capable of decreasing TNFdelta- and/or TNF epsilon-mediated signaling. Preferably, TNF delta-and/or TNF epsilon-mediated signaling is decreased to treat, prevent,and/or diagnose a disease wherein increased apoptosis or NF-kappaBexpression is exhibited. An antagonist can include soluble forms of TNFdelta and/or TNF epsilon and monoclonal antibodies directed against theTNF delta and/or TNF epsilon polypeptides.

Polynucleotides and/or polypeptides of the invention and/or agonistsand/or antagonists thereof are useful in the diagnosis and treatment orprevention of a wide range of diseases and/or conditions. Such diseasesand conditions include, but are not limited to, cancer (e.g., immunecell related cancers, breast cancer, prostate cancer, ovarian cancer,follicular lymphoma, cancer associated with mutation or alteration ofp53, brain tumor, bladder cancer, uterocervical cancer, colon cancer,colorectal cancer, non-small cell carcinoma of the lung, small cellcarcinoma of the lung, stomach cancer, etc.), lymphoproliferativedisorders (e.g., lymphadenopathy), microbial (e.g., viral, bacterial,etc.) infection (e.g., HIV-1 infection, HIV-2 infection, herpesvirusinfection (including, but not limited to, HSV-1, HSV-2, CMV, VZV, HHV-6,HHV-7, EBV), adenovirus infection, poxvirus infection, human papillomavirus infection, hepatitis infection (e.g., HAV, HBV, HCV, etc.),Helicobacter pylori infection, invasive Staphylococcia, etc.), parasiticinfection, nephritis, bone disease (e.g., osteoporosis),atherosclerosis, pain, cardiovascular disorders (e.g.,neovascularization, hypovascularization or reduced circulation (e.g.,ischemic disease (e.g., myocardial infarction, stroke, etc.)), AIDS,allergy, inflammation, neurodegenerative disease (e.g., Alzheimer'sdisease, Parkinson's disease, amyotrophic lateral sclerosis, pigmentaryretinitis, cerebellar degeneration, etc.), graft rejection (acute andchronic), graft vs. host disease, diseases due to osteomyelodysplasia(e.g., aplastic anemia, etc.), joint tissue destruction in rheumatism,liver disease (e.g., acute and chronic hepatitis, liver injury, andcirrhosis), autoimmune disease (e.g., multiple sclerosis, rheumatoidarthritis, systemic lupus erythematosus, immune complexglomerulonephritis, autoimmune diabetes, autoimmune thrombocytopenicpurpura, Grave's disease, Hashimoto's thyroiditis, etc.), cardiomyopathy(e.g., dilated cardiomyopathy), diabetes, diabetic complications (e.g.,diabetic nephropathy, diabetic neuropathy, diabetic retinopathy),influenza, asthma, psoriasis, glomerulonephritis, septic shock, andulcerative colitis.

In a preferrred embodiments, TNF delta and/or TNF epsilon antagonists(e.g., anti-TNF delta and/or anti-TNF epsilon antibodies) used toprevent, detect, diagnose, and/or treat immune-based rheumatologicdiseases, including but not limited to, SLE, rheumatoid arthritis, CRESTsyndrome (a variant of scleroderma characterized by calcinosis,Raynaud's phenomenon, esophageal motility disorders, sclerodactyly, andtelangiectasia.), seronegative spondyloarthropathy (SpA),polymyositis/dermatomyositis, microscopic polyangiitis, hepatitisC-asociated arthritis, Takayasu's arteritis, and undifferentiatedconnective tissue disorder.

Polynucleotides and/or polypeptides of the invention and/or agonistsand/or antagonists thereof are useful in promoting angiogenesis, woundhealing (e.g., wounds, bums, and bone fractures). Polynucleotides and/orpolypeptides of the invention and/or agonists and/or antagonists thereofare also useful as an adjuvant to enhance immune responsiveness tospecific antigen, anti-viral immune responses.

More generally, polynucleotides and/or polypeptides of the inventionand/or agonists and/or antagonists thereof are useful in regulating(i.e., elevating or reducing) immune response. For example,polynucleotides and/or polypeptides of the invention may be useful inpreparation or recovery from surgery, trauma, radiation therapy,chemotherapy, and transplantation, or may be used to boost immuneresponse and/or recovery in the elderly and immunocompromisedindividuals. Alternatively, polynucleotides and/or polypeptides of theinvention and/or agonists and/or antagonists thereof are useful asimmunosuppressive agents, for example in the treatment or prevention ofautoimmune disorders. In specific embodiments, polynucleotides and/orpolypeptides of the invention are used to treat or prevent chronicinflammatory, allergic or autoimmune conditions, such as those describedherein or are otherwise known in the art.

Combinatorial formulations:

The TNF delta and/or TNF epsilon polypeptide composition (preferablycontaining a polypeptide which is a soluble form of the TNF delta and/orTNF epsilon extracellular domains) will be formulated and dosed in afashion consistent with good medical practice, taking into account theclinical condition of the individual patient (especially the sideeffects of treatment with TNF delta and/or TNF epsilon polypeptidealone), the site of delivery of the TNF delta and/or TNF epsilonpolypeptide composition, the method of administration, the scheduling ofadministration, and other factors known to practitioners. The “effectiveamount” of TNF delta and/or TNF epsilon polypeptide for purposes hereinis thus determined by such considerations.

As a general proposition, the total pharmaceutically effective amount ofTNF delta and/or TNF epsilon polypeptide administered parenterally perdose will be in the range of about 1 microgram/kg/day to 10 mg/kg/day ofpatient body weight, although, as noted above, this will be subject totherapeutic discretion. More preferably, this dose is at least 0.01mg/kg/day, and most preferably for humans between about 0.01 and 1mg/kg/day.

In another embodiment, the TNF delta and/or TNF epsilon polypeptide ofthe invention is administered to a human at a dose betweeen 0.0001 and0.045 mg/kg/day, preferably, at a dose between 0.0045 and 0.045mg/kg/day, and more preferably, at a dose of about 45 microgram/kg/dayin humans; and at a dose of about 3 mg/kg/day in mice.

If given continuously, the TNF delta and/or TNF epsilon polypeptide istypically administered at a dose rate of about 1 microgram/kg/hour toabout 50 micrograms/kg/hour, either by 1-4 injections per day or bycontinuous subcutaneous infusions, for example, using a mini-pump. Anintravenous bag solution may also be employed.

The length of treatment needed to observe changes and the intervalfollowing treatment for responses to occur appears to vary depending onthe desired effect.

In a specific embodiment, the total pharmaceutically effective amount ofTNF delta and/or TNF epsilon polypeptide administered parenterally perdose will be in the range of about 0.1 microgram/kg/day to 45micrograms/kg/day of patient body weight, although, as noted above, thiswill be subject to therapeutic discretion. More preferably, this dose isat least 0.1 microgram/kg/day, and most preferably for humans betweenabout 0.01 and 50 micrograms/kg/day for the protein. TNF delta and/orTNF epsilon may be administered as a continuous infusion, multipledicreet injections per day (e.g., three or more times daily, or twicedaily), single injection per day, or as discreet injections givenintermitently (e.g., twice daily, once daily, every other day, twiceweekly, weekly, biweekly, monthly, bimonthly, and quarterly). If givencontinuously, the TNF delta and/or TNF epsilon polypeptide is typicallyadministered at a dose rate of about 0.001 to 10 microgram/kg/hour toabout 50 micrograms/kg/hour, either by 1-4 injections per day or bycontinuous subcutaneous infusions, for example, using a mini-pump.

Effective dosages of the compositions of the present invention to beadministered may be determined through procedures well known to those inthe art which address such parameters as biological half-life,bioavailability, and toxicity. Such determination is well within thecapability of those skilled in the art, especially in light of thedetailed disclosure provided herein.

Bioexposure of an organism to TNF delta and/or TNF epsilon polypeptideduring therapy may also play an important role in determining atherapeutically and/or pharmacologically effective dosing regime.Variations of dosing such as repeated administrations of a relativelylow dose of TNF delta and/or TNF epsilon polypeptide for a relativelylong period of time may have an effect which is therapeutically and/orpharmacologically distinguishable from that achieved with repeatedadministrations of a relatively high dose of TNF delta and/or TNFepsilon for a relatively short period of time. See, for instance, theserum immunoglobulin level experiments presented in Example 6.

Using the equivalent surface area dosage conversion factors supplied byFreireich, E. J., et al. (Cancer Chemotherapy Reports 50(4):219-44(1966)), one of ordinary skill in the art is able to convenientlyconvert data obtained from the use of TNF delta and/or TNF epsilon in agiven experimental system into an accurate estimation of apharmaceutically effective amount of TNF delta and/or TNF epsilonpolypeptide to be administered per dose in another experimental system.Experimental data obtained through the administration ofNeutrokine-alpha in mice (see, for instance, Example 6) may convertedthrough the conversion factors supplied by Freireich, et al., toaccurate estimates of pharmaceutically effective doses ofNeutrokine-alpha in rat, monkey, dog, and human. The followingconversion table (Table III) is a summary of the data provided byFreireich, et al. Table III gives approximate factors for convertingdoses expressed in terms of mg/kg from one species to an equivalentsurface area dose expressed as mg/kg in another species tabulated.

TABLE III Equivalent Surface Area Dosage Conversion Factors. TO MouseRat Monkey Dog Human FROM (20 g) (150 g) (3.5 kg) (8 kg) (60 kg) Mouse 1½ ¼ ⅙  {fraction (1/12)} Rat 2 1 ½ ¼ {fraction (1/7)} Monkey 4 2 1 ⅗ ⅓Dog 6 4 {fraction (5/3)} 1 ½ Human 12  7 3 2 1

Thus, for example, using the conversion factors provided in Table III, adose of 50 mg/kg in the mouse converts to an appropriate dose of 12.5mg/kg in the monkey because (50 mg/kg)×(¼)=12.5 mg/kg. As an additionalexample, doses of 0.02, 0.08, 0.8, 2, and 8 mg/kg in the mouse equate toeffect doses of 1.667 micrograms/kg, 6.67 micrograms/kg, 66.7micrograms/kg, 166.7 micrograms/kg, and 0.667 mg/kg, respectively, inthe human.

Pharmaceutical compositions containing TNF delta and/or TNF epsilonpolypeptides of the invention may be administered orally, rectally,parenterally, subcutaneously, intracistemally, intravaginally,intraperitoneally, topically (as by powders, ointments, drops ortransdermal patch), bucally, or as an oral or nasal spray (e.g., viainhalation of a vapor or powder). In one embodiment, “pharmaceuticallyacceptable carrier” means a non-toxic solid, semisolid or liquid filler,diluent, encapsulating material or formulation auxiliary of any type. Ina specific embodiment, “pharmaceutically acceptable” means approved by aregulatory agency of the federal or a state government or listed in theU.S. Pharmacopeia or other generally recognized pharmacopeia for use inanimals, and more particularly humans. Nonlimiting examples of suitablepharmaceutical carriers according to this embodiment are provided in“Remington's Pharmaceutical Sciences” by E. W. Martin, and includesterile liquids, such as water and oils, including those of petroleum,animal, vegetable or synthetic origin, such as peanut oil, soybean oil,mineral oil, sesame oil and the like. Water is a preferred carrier whenthe pharmaceutical composition is administered intravenously. Salinesolutions and aqueous dextrose and glycerol solutions can be employed asliquid carriers, particularly for injectable solutions. The composition,if desired, can also contain minor amounts of wetting or emulsifyingagents, or pH buffering agents. These compositions can take the form ofsolutions, suspensions, emulsion, tablets, pills, capsules, powders,sustained-release formulations and the like.

The term “parenteral” as used herein refers to modes of administrationwhich include intravenous, intramuscular, intraperitoneal, intrastemal,subcutaneous and intraarticular injection and infusion.

In a preferred embodiment, TNF delta and/or TNF epsilon compositions ofthe invention (including polypeptides, polynucleotides, and antibodies,and agonists and/or antagonists thereof) are administeredsubcutaneously.

In another preferred embodiment, TNF delta and/or TNF epsiloncompositions of the invention (including polypeptides, polynucleotides,and antibodies, and agonists and/or antagonists of TNF delta or TNFepsilon) are administered intravenously.

TNF delta and/or TNF epsilon compositions of the invention are alsosuitably administered by sustained-release systems. Suitable examples ofsustained-release compositions include suitable polymeric materials(such as, for example, semi-permeable polymer matrices in the form ofshaped articles, e.g., films, or mirocapsules), suitable hydrophobicmaterials (for example as an emulsion in an acceptable oil) or ionexchange resins, and sparingly soluble derivatives (such as, forexample, a sparingly soluble salt).

Sustained-release matrices include polylactides (U.S. Pat. No.3,773,919, EP 58,481), copolymers of L-glutamic acid andgamma-ethyl-L-glutamate (Sidman, U. et al., Biopolymers 22:547-556(1983)), poly (2-hydroxyethyl methacrylate) (R. Langer et al., J.Biomed. Mater. Res. 15:167-277 (1981), and R. Langer, Chem. Tech.12:98-105 (1982)), ethylene vinyl acetate (R. Langer et al., Id.) orpoly-D- (-)-3-hydroxybutyric acid (EP 133,988).

Sustained-release compositions also include liposomally entrappedcompositions of the invention (see generally, Langer, Science249:1527-1533 (1990); Treat et al., in Liposomes in the Therapy ofInfectious Disease and Cancer, Lopez-Berestein and Fidler (eds.), Liss,New York, pp. 317-327 and 353-365 (1989)). Liposomes containing TNFdelta and/or TNF epsilon polypeptide my be prepared by methods known perse: DE 3,218,121; Epstein et al., Proc. Natl. Acad. Sci. (USA)82:3688-3692 (1985); Hwang et al., Proc. Natl. Acad. Sci. (USA)77:4030-4034 (1980); EP 52,322; EP 36,676; EP 88,046; EP 143,949; EP142,641; Japanese Pat. Appl. 83-118008; U.S. Pat. Nos. 4,485,045 and4,544,545; and EP 102,324. Ordinarily, the liposomes are of the small(about 200-800 Angstroms) unilamellar type in which the lipid content isgreater than about 30 mol. percent cholesterol, the selected proportionbeing adjusted for the optimal TNF delta and/or TNF epsilon polypeptidetherapy.

In another embodiment sustained release compositions of the inventioninclude crystal formulations known in the art.

In yet an additional embodiment, the compositions of the invention aredelivered by way of a pump (see Langer, supra; Sefton, CRC Crit. Ref.Biomed. Eng. 14:201 (1987); Buchwald et al., Surgery 88:507 (1980);Saudek et al., N. Engl. J. Med. 321:574 (1989)).

Other controlled release systems are discussed in the review by Langer(Science 249:1527-1533 (1990)).

For parenteral administration, in one embodiment, the TNF delta and/orTNF epsilon polypeptide is formulated generally by mixing it at thedesired degree of purity, in a unit dosage injectable form (solution,suspension, or emulsion), with a pharmaceutically acceptable carrier,i.e., one that is non-toxic to recipients at the dosages andconcentrations employed and is compatible with other ingredients of theformulation. For example, the formulation preferably does not includeoxidizing agents and other compounds that are known to be deleterious topolypeptides.

Generally, the formulations are prepared by contacting the TNF deltaand/or TNF epsilon polypeptide uniformly and intimately with liquidcarriers or finely divided solid carriers or both. Then, if necessary,the product is shaped into the desired formulation. Preferably thecarrier is a parenteral carrier, more preferably a solution that isisotonic with the blood of the recipient. Examples of such carriervehicles include water, saline, Ringer's solution, and dextrosesolution. Non-aqueous vehicles such as fixed oils and ethyl oleate arealso useful herein, as well as liposomes.

The carrier suitably contains minor amounts of additives such assubstances that enhance isotonicity and chemical stability. Suchmaterials are non-toxic to recipients at the dosages and concentrationsemployed, and include buffers such as phosphate, citrate, succinate,acetic acid, and other organic acids or their salts; antioxidants suchas ascorbic acid; low molecular weight (less than about ten residues)polypeptides, e.g., polyarginine or tripeptides; proteins, such as serumalbumin, gelatin, or immunoglobulins; hydrophilic polymers such aspolyvinylpyrrolidone; amino acids, such as glycine, glutamic acid,aspartic acid, or arginine; monosaccharides, disaccharides, and othercarbohydrates including cellulose or its derivatives, glucose, manose,sucrose, or dextrins; chelating agents such as EDTA; sugar alcohols suchas mannitol or sorbitol; counterions such as sodium; preservatives, suchas cresol, phenol, chlorobutanol, benzyl alcohol and parabens, and/ornonionic surfactants such as polysorbates, poloxamers, or PEG.

The TNF delta and/or TNF epsilon polypeptide is typically formulated insuch vehicles at a concentration of about 0.001 mg/ml to 100 mg/ml, or0.1 mg/ml to 100 mg/ml, preferably 1-10 mg/ml or 1-10 mg/ml, at a pH ofabout 3 to 10, or 3 to 8, more preferably 5-8, most preferably 6-7. Itwill be understood that the use of certain of the foregoing excipients,carriers, or stabilizers will result in the formation of TNF deltaand/or TNF epsilon polypeptide salts.

TNF delta and/or TNF epsilon polypeptide to be used for therapeuticadministration must be sterile. Sterility is readily accomplished byfiltration through sterile filtration membranes (e.g., 0.2 micronmembranes). Therapeutic TNF delta and/or TNF epsilon polypeptidecompositions generally are placed into a container having a sterileaccess port, for example, an intravenous solution bag or vial having astopper pierceable by a hypodermic injection needle.

TNF delta and/or TNF epsilon polypeptide ordinarily will be stored inunit or multi-dose containers, for example, sealed ampoules or vials, asan aqueous solution or as a lyophilized formulation for reconstitution.As an example of a lyophilized formulation, 10-ml vials are filled with5 ml of sterile-filtered 1% (w/v) aqueous TNF delta and/or TNF epsilonpolypeptide solution, and the resulting mixture is lyophilized. Theinfusion solution is prepared by reconstituting the lyophilized TNFdelta and/or TNF epsilon polypeptide using bacteriostaticWater-for-Injection.

Alternatively, TNF delta and/or TNF epsilon polypeptide is stored insingle dose containers in lyophilized form. The infusion selection isreconstituted using a sterile carrier for injection.

The invention also provides a pharmaceutical pack or kit comprising oneor more containers filled with one or more of the ingredients of thepharmaceutical compositions of the invention. Optionally, associatedwith such container(s) is a notice in the form prescribed by agovernmental agency regulating the manufacture, use or sale ofpharmaceuticals or biological products, which notice reflects approvalby the agency of manufacture, use or sale for human administration. Inaddition, the polypeptides of the present invention may be employed inconjunction with other therapeutic compounds.

The compositions of the invention may be administered alone or incombination with other adjuvants. Adjuvants that may be administeredwith the compositions of the invention include, but are not limited to,alum, alum plus deoxycholate (ImmunoAg), MTP-PE (Biocine Corp.), QS21(Genentech, Inc.), BCG, and MPL. In a specific embodiment, compositionsof the invention are administered in combination with alum. In anotherspecific embodiment, compositions of the invention are administered incombination with QS-21. Further adjuvants that may be administered withthe compositions of the invention include, but are not limited to,Monophosphoryl lipid immunomodulator, AdjuVax 100a, QS-21, QS-18,CRL1005, Aluminum salts, MF-59, and Virosomal adjuvant technology.Vaccines that may be administered with the compositions of the inventioninclude, but are not limited to, vaccines directed toward protectionagainst MMR (measles, mumps, rubella), polio, varicella,tetanus/diptheria, hepatitis A, hepatitis B, haemophilus influenzae B,whooping cough, pneumonia, influenza, Lyme's Disease, rotavirus,cholera, yellow fever, Japanese encephalitis, poliomyelitis, rabies,typhoid fever, and pertussis, and/or PNEUMOVAX-23™. Combinations may beadministered either concomitantly, e.g., as an admixture, separately butsimultaneously or concurrently; or sequentially. This includespresentations in which the combined agents are administered together asa therapeutic mixture, and also procedures in which the combined agentsare administered separately but simultaneously, e.g., as throughseparate intravenous lines into the same individual. Administration “incombination” further includes the separate administration of one of thecompounds or agents given first, followed by the second.

In a specific embodiment, compositions of the invention (e.g., TNF deltaand/or TNF epsilon polypeptides of the invention, TNF delta and/or TNFepsilon fragments and variants, and anti-Neutokine-alpha and/oranti-Netrokine-alphaSV antibodies) may be administered to patients asvaccine adjuvants. In a further specific embodiment, compositions of theinvention may be administered as vaccine adjuvants to patients sufferingfrom an immune-deficiency. In a further specific embodiment,compositions of the invention may be administered as vaccine adjuvantsto patients suffering from HIV.

In a specific embodiment, compositions of the invention may be used toincrease or enhance antigen-specific antibody responses to standard andexperimental vaccines. In a specific embodiment, compositions of theinvention may be used to enhance seroconversion in patients treated withstandard and experimental vaccines. In another specific embodiment,compositions of the invention may be used to increase the number ofunique epitopes recognized by antibodies elicited by standard andexperimental vaccination.

In another specific embodiment, compositions of the invention are usedin combination with PNEUMOVAX-23™ to treat, prevent, and/or diagnoseinfection and/or any disease, disorder, and/or condition associatedtherewith. In one embodiment, compositions of the invention are used incombination with PNEUMOVAX-23™ to treat, prevent, and/or diagnose anyGram positive bacterial infection and/or any disease, disorder, and/orcondition associated therewith. In another embodiment, compositions ofthe invention are used in combination with PNEUMOVAX-23™ to treat,prevent, and/or diagnose infection and/or any disease, disorder, and/orcondition associated with one or more members of the genus Enterococcusand/or the genus Streptococcus. In another embodiment, compositions ofthe invention are used in any combination with PNEUMOVAX-23™ to treat,prevent, and/or diagnose infection and/or any disease, disorder, and/orcondition associated with one or more members of the Group Bstreptococci. In another embodiment, compositions of the invention areused in combination with PNEUMOVAX-23™ to treat, prevent, and/ordiagnose infection and/or any disease, disorder, and/or conditionassociated with Streptococcus pneumoniae.

The compositions of the invention may be administered alone or incombination with other therapeutic agents. Therapeutic agents that maybe administered in combination with the compositions of the invention,include but are not limited to, other members of the TNF family,chemotherapeutic agents, antibiotics, steroidal and non-steroidalanti-inflammatories, conventional immunotherapeutic agents, cytokines,chemokines and/or growth factors. Combinations may be administeredeither concomitantly, e.g., as an admixture, separately butsimultaneously or concurrently; or sequentially. This includespresentations in which the combined agents are administered together asa therapeutic mixture, and also procedures in which the combined agentsare administered separately but simultaneously, e.g., as throughseparate intravenous lines into the same individual. Administration “incombination” further includes the separate administration of one of thecompounds or agents given first, followed by the second.

In one embodiment, the compositions of the invention are administered incombination with other members of the TNF family. TNF, TNF-related orTNF-like molecules that may be administered with the compositions of theinvention include, but are not limited to, soluble forms of TNF-alpha,lymphotoxin-alpha (LT-alpha, also known as TNF-beta), LT-beta (found incomplex heterotrimer LT-alpha2-beta), OPGL, FasL, CD27L, CD30L, CD40L,4-1BBL, DcR3, OX40L, TNF-gamma (International Publication No. WO96/14328), AIM-I (International Publication No. WO 97/33899), AIM-II(International Publication No. WO 97/34911), endokine-alpha(International Publication No. WO 98/07880), TR6 (InternationalPublication No. WO 98/30694), OPG, OX40, and nerve growth factor (NGF),and soluble forms of Fas, CD30, CD27, CD40 and 4-IBB, TR2 (InternationalPublication No. WO 96/34095), DR3 (International Publication No. WO97/33904), DR4 (International Publication No. WO 98/32856), TR5(International Publication No. WO 98/30693), TR6 (InternationalPublication No. WO 98/30694),TR7 (International Publication No. WO98/41629), TRANK, TR9 (International Publication No. WO 98/56892), TR10(International Publication No. WO 98/54202), 312C2 (InternationalPublication No. WO 98/06842), and TR12, and soluble forms CD154, CD70,and CD153.

In a preferred embodiment, the compositions of the invention areadministered in combination with TACI (See e.g., U.S. Pat. No.5,969,102; and von Bulow et al., Science 278:138-141 (1997)), a solubleform of TACI, biologically active fragments, variants, or derivatives ofTACI (e.g., TACI-Fc), and/or anti-TACI antibodies (e.g., agonistic orantagonistic antibodies).

In a preferred embodiment, the compositions of the invention areadministered in combination with B-cell maturation antigen (BCMA,GenBank accession number NP_(—)001183)), a soluble form of BCMA,biologically active fragments, variants, or derivatives of BCMA (e.g.,BCMA-Fc), and/or anti-BCMA antibodies (e.g., agonistic or antagonisticantibodies).

In a preferred embodiment, the compositions of the invention areadministered in combination with Neutrokine-alpha (InternationalPublication No. WO 98/18921), a soluble form of Neutrokine alpha,biologically active fragments, variants, or derivatives ofNeutrokine-alpha, and/or anti-Neutrokine alpha antibodies (e.g.,agonistic or antagonistic antibodies).

In an additional embodiment, the compositions of the invention areadministered alone or in combination with an anti-angiogenic agent(s).Anti-angiogenic agents that may be administered with the compositions ofthe invention include, but are not limited to, Angiostatin (Entremed,Rockville, Md.), Troponin-1 (Boston Life Sciences, Boston, Mass.),anti-Invasive Factor, retinoic acid and derivatives thereof, paclitaxel(Taxol), Suramin, Tissue Inhibitor of Metalloproteinase-1, TissueInhibitor of Metalloproteinase-2, VEGI, Plasminogen ActivatorInhibitor-1, Plasminogen Activator Inhibitor-2, and various forms of thelighter “d group” transition metals.

Lighter “d group” transition metals include, for example, vanadium,molybdenum, tungsten, titanium, niobium, and tantalum species. Suchtransition metal species may form transition metal complexes. Suitablecomplexes of the above-mentioned transition metal species include oxotransition metal complexes.

Representative examples of vanadium complexes include oxo vanadiumcomplexes such as vanadate and vanadyl complexes. Suitable vanadatecomplexes include metavanadate and orthovanadate complexes such as, forexample, ammonium metavanadate, sodium metavanadate, and sodiumorthovanadate. Suitable vanadyl complexes include, for example, vanadylacetylacetonate and vanadyl sulfate including vanadyl sulfate hydratessuch as vanadyl sulfate mono- and trihydrates.

Representative examples of tungsten and molybdenum complexes alsoinclude oxo complexes. Suitable oxo tungsten complexes include tungstateand tungsten oxide complexes. Suitable tungstate complexes includeammonium tungstate, calcium tungstate, sodium tungstate dihydrate, andtungstic acid. Suitable tungsten oxides include tungsten (IV) oxide andtungsten (VI) oxide. Suitable oxo molybdenum complexes includemolybdate, molybdenum oxide, and molybdenyl complexes. Suitablemolybdate complexes include ammonium molybdate and its hydrates, sodiummolybdate and its hydrates, and potassium molybdate and its hydrates.Suitable molybdenum oxides include molybdenum (VI) oxide, molybdenum(VI) oxide, and molybdic acid. Suitable molybdenyl complexes include,for example, molybdenyl acetylacetonate. Other suitable tungsten andmolybdenum complexes include hydroxo derivatives derived from, forexample, glycerol, tartaric acid, and sugars.

A wide variety of other anti-angiogenic factors may also be utilizedwithin the context of the present invention. Representative examplesinclude, but are not limited to, platelet factor 4; protamine sulphate;sulphated chitin derivatives (prepared from queen crab shells), (Murataet al., Cancer Res. 51:22-26, 1991); Sulphated PolysaccharidePeptidoglycan Complex (SP- PG) (the function of this compound may beenhanced by the presence of steroids such as estrogen, and tamoxifencitrate); Staurosporine; modulators of matrix metabolism, including forexample, proline analogs, cishydroxyproline, d,L-3,4-dehydroproline,Thiaproline, alpha,alpha-dipyridyl, aminopropionitrile fumarate;4-propyl-5-(4-pyridinyl)-2(3H)-oxazolone; Methotrexate; Mitoxantrone;Heparin; Interferons; 2 Macroglobulin-serum; ChIMP-3 (Pavloff et al., J.Bio. Chem. 267:17321-17326, 1992); Chymostatin (Tomkinson et al.,Biochem J. 286:475-480, 1992); Cyclodextrin Tetradecasulfate;Eponemycin; Camptothecin; Fumagillin (Ingber et al., Nature 348:555-557,1990); Gold Sodium Thiomalate (“GST”; Matsubara and Ziff, J. Clin.Invest. 79:1440-1446, 1987); anticollagenase-serum; alpha2-antiplasmin(Holmes et al., J. Biol. Chem. 262(4):1659-1664, 1987); Bisantrene(National Cancer Institute); Lobenzarit disodium (N-(2)-carboxyphenyl-4-chloroanthronilic acid disodium or “CCA”; (Takeuchi et al., AgentsActions 36:312-316, 1992); and metalloproteinase inhibitors such asBB94.

Additional anti-angiogenic factors that may also be utilized within thecontext of the present invention include Thalidomide, (Celgene, Warren,N.J.); Angiostatic steroid; AGM-1470 (H. Brem and J. Folkinan J Pediatr.Surg. 28:445-51 (1993)); an integrin alpha v beta 3 antagonist (C.Storgard et al., J Clin. Invest. 103:47-54 (1999));carboxynaminolmidazole; Carboxyamidotriazole (CAI) (National CancerInstitute, Bethesda, Md.); Conbretastatin A-4 (CA4P) (OXiGENE, Boston,Mass.); Squalamine (Magainin Pharmaceuticals, Plymouth Meeting, Pa.);TNP-470, (Tap Pharmaceuticals, Deerfield, Ill.); ZD-0101 AstraZeneca(London, UK); APRA (CT2584); Benefin, Byrostatin-1 (SC339555); CGP-41251(PKC 412); CM101; Dexrazoxane (ICRF187); DMXAA; Endostatin;Flavopridiol; Genestein; GTE; ImmTher; Iressa (ZD1839); Octreotide(Somatostatin); Panretin; Penacillamine; Photopoint; PI-88; Prinomastat(AG-3340) Purlytin; Suradista (FCE26644); Tamoxifen (Nolvadex);Tazarotene; Tetrathiomolybdate; Xeloda (Capecitabine); and5-Fluorouracil.

Anti-angiogenic agents that may be administered in combination with thecompounds of the invention may work through a variety of mechanismsincluding, but not limited to, inhibiting proteolysis of theextracellular matrix, blocking the function of endothelialcell-extracellular matrix adhesion molecules, by antagonizing thefunction of angiogenesis inducers such as growth factors, and inhibitingintegrin receptors expressed on proliferating endothelial cells.Examples of anti-angiogenic inhibitors that interfere with extracellularmatrix proteolysis and which may be administered in combination with thecompositions of the invention include, but are not limited to, AG-3340(Agouron, La Jolla, Calif.), BAY-12-9566 (Bayer, West Haven, Conn.),BMS-275291 (Bristol Myers Squibb, Princeton, N.J.), CGS-27032A(Novartis, East Hanover, N.J.), Marimastat (British Biotech, Oxford,UK), and Metastat (Aetema, St-Foy, Quebec). Examples of anti-angiogenicinhibitors that act by blocking the function of endothelialcell-extracellular matrix adhesion molecules and which may beadministered in combination with the compositions of the inventioninclude, but are not limited to, EMD-121974 (Merck KcgaA Darmstadt,Germany) and Vitaxin (Ixsys, La Jolla, Calif./Medimmune, Gaithersburg,Md.). Examples of anti-angiogenic agents that act by directlyantagonizing or inhibiting angiogenesis inducers and which may beadministered in combination with the compositions of the inventioninclude, but are not limited to, Angiozyme (Ribozyme, Boulder, Colo.),Anti-VEGF antibody (Genentech, S. San Francisco, Calif.),PTK-787/ZK-225846 (Novartis, Basel, Switzerland), SU-101 (Sugen, S. SanFrancisco, Calif.), SU-5416 (Sugen/Pharmacia Upjohn, Bridgewater, N.J.),and SU-6668 (Sugen). Other anti-angiogenic agents act to indirectlyinhibit angiogenesis. Examples of indirect inhibitors of angiogenesiswhich may be administered in combination with the compositions of theinvention include, but are not limited to, IM-862 (Cytran, Kirkland,Wash.), Interferon-alpha, IL-12 (Roche, Nutley, N.J.), and Pentosanpolysulfate (Georgetown University, Washington, D.C.).

In particular embodiments, the use of compositions of the invention incombination with anti-angiogenic agents is contemplated for thetreatment, prevention, and/or amelioration of an autoimmune disease,such as for example, an autoimmune disease described herein.

In a particular embodiment, the use of compositions of the invention incombination with anti-angiogenic agents is contemplated for thetreatment, prevention, and/or amelioration of arthritis. In a moreparticular embodiment, the use of compositions of the invention incombination with anti-angiogenic agents is contemplated for thetreatment, prevention, and/or amelioration of rheumatoid arthritis orconditions associated therewith.

In a particular embodiment, the use of compositions of the invention incombination with anti-angiogenic agents is contemplated for thetreatment, prevention, and/or amelioration of arthritis. In a moreparticular embodiment, the use of compositions of the invention incombination with anti-angiogenic agents is contemplated for thetreatment, prevention, and/or amelioration of systemic lupuserythematosus or conditions associated therewith.

In another embodiment, compositions of the invention are administered incombination with an anticoagulant. Anticoagulants that may beadministered with the compositions of the invention include, but are notlimited to, heparin, warfarin, and aspirin. In a specific embodiment,compositions of the invention are administered in combination withheparin and/or warfarin. In another specific embodiment, compositions ofthe invention are administered in combination with warfarin. In anotherspecific embodiment, compositions of the invention are administered incombination with warfarin and aspirin. In another specific embodiment,compositions of the invention are administered in combination withheparin. In another specific embodiment, compositions of the inventionare administered in combination with heparin and aspirin.

In another embodiment, compositions of the invention are administered incombination with an agent that suppresses the production ofanticardiolipin antibodies. In specific embodiments, the polynucleotidesof the invention are administered in combination with an agent thatblocks and/or reduces the ability of anticardiolipin antibodies to bindphospholipid-binding plasma protein beta 2-glycoprotein I (b2GPI).

In another embodiment, therapeutic or pharmaceutical compositions of theinvention are administered to an animal to treat, prevent or ameliorateischemia and arteriosclerosis. Examples of such disorders include, butare not limited to, reperfusion damage (e.g., in the heart and/or brain)and cardiac hypertrophy.

Therapeutic or pharmaceutical compositions of the invention, may also beadministered to to modulate blood clotting and to treat or prevent bloodclotting disorders, such as, for example, antibody-mediated thrombosis(i.e., antiphospholipid antibody syndrome (APS)). For example,therapeutic or pharmaceutical compositions of the invention, may inhibitthe proliferation and differentiation of cells involved in producinganticardiolipin antibodies. These compositions of the invention can beused to treat, prevent, ameliorate, diagnose, and/or prognose thromboticrelated events including, but not limited to, stroke (and recurrentstroke), heart attack, deep vein thrombosis, pulmonary embolism,myocardial infarction, coronary artery disease (e.g., antibody-mediatedcoronary artery disease), thrombosis, graft reocclusion followingcardiovascular surgery (e.g., coronary arterial bypass grafts, recurrentfetal loss, and recurrent cardiovascular thromboembolic events.

Conventional nonspecific immunosuppressive agents, that may beadministered in combination with the compositions of the inventioninclude, but are not limited to, steroids, cyclosporine, cyclosporineanalogs cyclophosphamide, cyclophosphamide IV, methylprednisolone,prednisolone, azathioprine, FK-506, 15-deoxyspergualin, and otherimmunosuppressive agents that act by suppressing the function ofresponding T cells. Other immunosuppressive agents, that may beadministered in combination with the compositions of the inventioninclude, but are not limited to, prednisolone, methotrexate,thalidomide, methoxsalen, rapamycin, leflunomide, mizoribine(BREDININ™), brequinar, deoxyspergualin, and azaspirane (SKF 105685).

In specific embodiments, Therapeutics of the invention are administeredin combination with immunosuppressants. Immunosuppressant preparationsthat may be administered with the Therapeutics of the invention include,but are not limited to, ORTHOCLONE OKT® 3 (muromonab-CD3), SANDIMMUNE™,NEORAL™, SANGDYA™ (cyclosporine), PROGRAF® (FK506, tacrolimus),CELLCEPT® (mycophenolate motefil, of which the active metabolite ismycophenolic acid), IMURAN™ (azathioprine), glucorticosteroids,adrenocortical steroids such as DELTASONE™ (prednisone) and HYDELTRASOL™(prednisolone), FOLEX™ and MEXATE™ (methotrxate), OXSORALEN-ULTRA™(methoxsalen) and RAPAMUNE™ (sirolimus). In a specific embodiment,immunosuppressants maybe used to prevent rejection of organ or bonemarrow transplantation.

In a preferred embodiment, the compositions of the invention areadministered in combination with steroid therapy. Steroids that may beadministered in combination with the compositions of the invention,include, but are not limited to, oral corticosteroids, prednisone, andmethylprednisolone (e.g., IV methylprednisolone). In a specificembodiment, compositions of the invention are administered incombination with prednisone. In a further specific embodiment, thecompositions of the invention are administered in combination withprednisone and an immunosuppressive agent. Immunosuppressive agents thatmay be administered with the compositions of the invention andprednisone are those described herein, and include, but are not limitedto, azathioprine, cylophosphamide, and cyclophosphamide IV. In a anotherspecific embodiment, compositions of the invention are administered incombination with methylprednisolone. In a further specific embodiment,the compositions of the invention are administered in combination withmethylprednisolone and an immunosuppressive agent. Immunosuppressiveagents that may be administered with the compositions of the inventionand methylprednisolone are those described herein, and include, but arenot limited to, azathioprine, cylophosphamide, and cyclophosphamide IV.

In a preferred embodiment, the compositions of the invention areadministered in combination with an antimalarial. Antimalarials that maybe administered with the compositions of the invention include, but arenot limited to, hydroxychloroquine, chloroquine, and/or quinacrine.

In a preferred embodiment, the compositions of the invention areadministered in combination with an NSAID.

In a nonexclusive embodiment, the compositions of the invention areadministered in combination with one, two, three, four, five, ten, ormore of the following drugs: NRD-101 (Hoechst Marion Roussel),diclofenac (Dimethaid), oxaprozin potassium (Monsanto), mecasermin(Chiron), T-614 (Toyama), pemetrexed disodium (Eli Lilly), atreleuton(Abbott), valdecoxib (Monsanto), eltenac (Byk Gulden), campath, AGM-1470(Takeda), CDP-571 (Celltech Chiroscience), CM-101 (CarboMed), ML-3000(Merckle), CB-2431 (KS Biomedix), CBF-BS2 (KS Biomedix), IL-IRa genetherapy (Valentis), JTE-522 (Japan Tobacco), paclitaxel (Angiotech),DW-166HC (Dong Wha), darbufelone mesylate (Warner-Lambert), soluble TNFreceptor 1 (synergen; Amgen), IPR-6001 (Institute for PharmaceuticalResearch), trocade (Hoffinan-La Roche), EF-5 (Scotia Pharmaceuticals),BIIL-284 (Boehringer Ingelheim), BIIF-1 149 (Boehringer Ingelheim),LeukoVax (Inflammatics), MK-663 (Merck), ST-1482 (Sigma-Tau), andbutixocort propionate (WarnerLambert).

In one embodiment, the compositions of the invention are administered incombination with one or more of the following drugs: infliximab (alsoknown as Remicade™ Centocor, Inc.), Trocade (Roche, RO-32-3555),Leflunomide (also known as Arava™ from Hoechst Marion Roussel), Kineret™(an IL-I Receptor antagonist also known as Anakinra from Amgen, Inc.),SCIO-469 (p38 kinase inhibitor from Scios, Inc), and/or ASLERA™(prasterone, dehydroepiandrosterone, GL701) from Genelabs TechnologiesInc.

In a preferred embodiment, the compositions of the invention areadministered in combination with one, two, three, four, five or more ofthe following drugs: methotrexate, sulfasalazine, sodium aurothiomalate,auranofin, cyclosporine, penicillamine, azathioprine, an antimalarialdrug (e.g., as described herein), cyclophosphamide, chlorambucil, gold,ENBREL™ (Etanercept), anti-TNF antibody, LJP 394 (La JollaPharmaceutical Company, San Diego, Calif.), and prednisolone.

In a more preferred embodiment, the compositions of the invention areadministered in combination with an antimalarial, methotrexate, anti-TNFantibody, ENBREL™ and/or suflasalazine. In one embodiment, thecompositions of the invention are administered in combination withmethotrexate. In another embodiment, the compositions of the inventionare administered in combination with anti-TNF antibody. In anotherembodiment, the compositions of the invention are administered incombination with methotrexate and anti-TNF antibody. In anotherembodiment, the compositions of the invention are administered incombination with suflasalazine. In another specific embodiment, thecompositions of the invention are administered in combination withmethotrexate, anti-TNF antibody, and suflasalazine. In anotherembodiment, the compositions of the invention are administered incombination ENBREL™. In another embodiment, the compositions of theinvention are administered in combination with ENBREL™ and methotrexate.In another embodiment, the compositions of the invention areadministered in combination with ENBREL™, methotrexate andsuflasalazine. In another embodiment, the compositions of the inventionare administered in combination with ENBREL™, and suflasalazine. Inother embodiments, one or more antimalarials is combined with one of theabove-recited combinations. In a specific embodiment, the compositionsof the invention are administered in combination with an antimalarial(e.g., hydroxychloroquine), ENBREL™, methotrexate and suflasalazine. Inanother specific embodiment, the compositions of the invention areadministered in combination with an antimalarial (e.g.,hydroxychloroquine), sulfasalazine, anti-TNF antibody, and methotrexate.

In an additional embodiment, compositions of the invention areadministered alone or in combination with one or more intravenous immuneglobulin preparations. Intravenous immune globulin preparations that maybe administered with the compositions of the invention include, but notlimited to, GAMMAR™, IVEEGAM™, SANDOGLOBUL™, GAMMAGARD S/D™, andGAMIMUNE™. In a specific embodiment, compositions of the invention areadministered in combination with intravenous immune globulinpreparations in transplantation therapy (e.g., bone marrow transplant).

In certain embodiments, compositions of the invention are administeredin combination with antiretroviral agents, nucleoside reversetranscriptase inhibitors, non-nucleoside reverse transcriptaseinhibitors, and/or protease inhibitors. Nucleoside reverse transcriptaseinhibitors that may be administered in combination with the compositionsof the invention, include, but are not limited to, RETROVIR™(zidovudine/AZT), VIDEX™ (didanosine/ddl), HIVID™ (zalcitabine/ddC),ZERIT™ (stavudine/d4T), EPIVIR™ (lamivudine/3TC), and COMBIVIR™(zidovudine/lamivudine). Non-nucleoside reverse transcriptase inhibitorsthat may be administered in combination with the compositions of theinvention, include, but are not limited to, VIRAMUNE™ (nevirapine),RESCRIPTOR™ (delavirdine), and SUSTIVA™ (efavirenz). Protease inhibitorsthat may be administered in combination with the compositions of theinvention, include, but are not limited to, CRIXIVAN™ (indinavir),NORVIR™ (ritonavir), INVIRASE™ (saquinavir), and VIRACEPT™ (nelfinavir).In a specific embodiment, antiretroviral agents, nucleoside reversetranscriptase inhibitors, non-nucleoside reverse transcriptaseinhibitors, and/or protease inhibitors may be used in any combinationwith compositions of the invention to treat, prevent, and/or diagnoseAIDS and/or to treat, prevent, and/or diagnose HIV infection.

In certain embodiments, compositions of the invention are administeredin combination with antiretroviral agents, nucleoside/nucleotide reversetranscriptase inhibitors (NRTIs), non-nucleoside reverse transcriptaseinhibitors (NNRTIs), and/or protease inhibitors (PIs). NRTIs that may beadministered in combination with the Therapeutics of the invention,include, but are not limited to, RETROVIR™ (zidovudine/AZT), VIDEX™(didanosine/ddI), HIVID™ (zalcitabine/ddC), ZERIT™ (stavudine/d4T),EPIVIR™ (lamivudine/3TC), and COMBIVIR™ (zidovudine/lamivudine). NNRTIsthat may be administered in combination with the Therapeutics of theinvention, include, but are not limited to, VIRAMUNE™ (nevirapine),RESCRIPTOR™ (delavirdine), and SUSTIVA™ (efavirenz). Protease inhibitorsthat may be administered in combination with the Therapeutics of theinvention, include, but are not limited to, CRIXIVAN™ (indinavir),NORVIR™ (ritonavir), INVIRASE™ (saquinavir), and VIRACEPT™ (nelfinavir).In a specific embodiment, antiretroviral agents, nucleoside reversetranscriptase inhibitors, non-nucleoside reverse transcriptaseinhibitors, and/or protease inhibitors may be used in any combinationwith Therapeutics of the invention to treat AIDS and/or to prevent ortreat HIV infection.

Additional NRTIs include LODENOSINE™ (F-ddA; an acid-stable adenosineNRTI; Triangle/Abbott; COVIRACIL™ (emtricitabine/FTC; structurallyrelated to lamivudine (3TC) but with 3- to 10-fold greater activity invitro; Triangle/Abbott); dOTC (BCH-10652, also structurally related tolamivudine but retains activity against a substantial proportion oflamivudine-resistant isolates; Biochem Pharma); Adefovir (refusedapproval for anti-HIV therapy by FDA; Gilead Sciences); PREVEON®(Adefovir Dipivoxil, the active prodrug of adefovir; its active form isPMEA-pp); TENOFOVIR™ (bis-POC PMPA, a PMPA prodrug; Gilead); DAPD/DXG(active metabolite of DAPD; Triangle/Abbott); D-D4FC (related to 3TC,with activity against AZT/3TC-resistant virus); GW420867X (GlaxoWellcome); ZIAGEN™ (abacavir/159U89; Glaxo Wellcome Inc.); CS-87(3′azido-2′,3′-dideoxyuridine; WO 99/66936); and S-acyl-2-thioethyl(SATE)-bearing prodrug forms of β-L-FD4C and β-L-FddC (WO 98/17281).

Additional NNRTIs include COACTINON™ (Emivirine/MKC-442, potent NNRTI ofthe HEPT class; Triangle/Abbott); CAPRAVIRE™ (AG- 1549/S-1 153, a nextgeneration NNRTI with activity against viruses containing the K103Nmutation; Agouron); PNU-142721 (has 20- to 50-fold greater activity thanits predecessor delavirdine and is active against K103N mutants;Pharmacia & Upjohn); DPC-961 and DPC-963 (second-generation derivativesof efavirenz, designed to be active against viruses with the K103Nmutation; DuPont); GW-420867X (has 25-fold greater activity than HBY097and is active against K103N mutants; Glaxo Wellcome); CALANOLIDE A(naturally occurring agent from the latex tree; active against virusescontaining either or both the Y181C and K103N mutations); and Propolis(WO 99/49830).

Additional protease inhibitors include LOPINAVIR™ (ABT378/r; AbbottLaboratories); BMS-232632 (an azapeptide; Bristol-Myres Squibb);TIPRANAVIR™ (PNU-140690, a non-peptic dihydropyrone; Pharmacia &Upjohn); PD-178390 (a nonpeptidic dihydropyrone; Parke-Davis); BMS232632 (an azapeptide; Bristol-Myers Squibb); L-756,423 (an indinaviranalog; Merck); DMP-450 (a cyclic urea compound; Avid & DuPont); AG-1776(a peptidomimetic with in vitro activity against proteaseinhibitor-resistant viruses; Agouron); VX-175/GW-433908 (phosphateprodrug of amprenavir; Vertex & Glaxo Welcome); CGP61755 (Ciba); andAGENERASE™ (amprenavir; Glaxo Wellcome Inc.).

Additional antiretroviral agents include fusion inhibitors/gp41 binders.Fusion inhibitors/gp4l binders include T-20 (a peptide from residues643-678 of the HIV gp41 transmembrane protein ectodomain which binds togp41 in its resting state and prevents transformation to the fusogenicstate; Trimeris) and T-1249 (a second-generation fusion inhibitor;Trimeris).

Additional antiretroviral agents include fusion inhibitors/chemokinereceptor antagonists. Fusion inhibitors/chemokine receptor antagonistsinclude CXCR4 antagonists such as AMD 3100 (a bicyclam), SDF-1 and itsanalogs, and ALX40-4C (a cationic peptide), T22 (an 18 amino acidpeptide; Trimeris) and the T22 analogs T134 and T140; CCR5 antagonistssuch as RANTES (9-68), AOP-RANTES, NNY-RANTES, and TAK-779; andCCR5/CXCR4 antagonists such as NSC 651016 (a distamycin analog). Alsoincluded are CCR2B, CCR3, and CCR6 antagonists. Chemokine recpetoragonists such as RANTES, SDF-1, MIP-1α, MIP-1β, etc., may also inhibitfusion.

Additional antiretroviral agents include integrase inhibitors. Integraseinhibitors include dicaffeoylquinic (DFQA) acids; L-chicoric acid (adicaffeoyltartaric (DCTA) acid); quinalizarin (QLC) and relatedanthraquinones; ZINTEVIR™ (AR 177, an oligonucleotide that probably actsat cell surface rather than being a true integrase inhibitor; Arondex);and naphthols such as those disclosed in WO 98/50347.

Additional antiretroviral agents include hydroxyurea-like compunds suchas BCX-34 (a purine nucleoside phosphorylase inhibitor; Biocryst);ribonucleotide reductase inhibitors such as DIDOX™ (Molecules forHealth); inosine monophosphate dehydrogenase (IMPDH) inhibitors sucha asVX-497 (Vertex); and myvopholic acids such as CellCept (mycophenolatemofetil; Roche).

Additional antiretroviral agents include inhibitors of viral integrase,inhibitors of viral genome nuclear translocation such as arylenebis(methylketone) compounds; inhibitors of HIV entry such as AOP-RANTES,NNY-RANTES, RANTES-IgG fusion protein, soluble complexes of RANTES andglycosaminoglycans (GAG), and AMD-3100; nucleocapsid zinc fingerinhibitors such as dithiane compounds; targets of HIV Tat and Rev; andpharmacoenhancers such as ABT-378.

Other antiretroviral therapies and adjunct therapies include cytokinesand lymphokines such as MIP-1α, MIP-1β, SDF-1α, IL-2, PROLEUKIN™(aldesleukin/L2-7001; Chiron), IL-4, IL-10, IL-12, and IL-13;interferons such as IFN-α2a; antagonists of TNFs, NFκB, GM-CSF, M-CSF,and IL-10; agents that modulate immune activation such as cyclosporinand prednisone; vaccines such as Remune™ (HIV Immunogen), APL 400-003(Apollon), recombinant gp120 and fragments, bivalent (B/E) recombinantenvelope glycoprotein, rgp120CM235, MN rgp120, SF-2 rgp120,gp120/soluble CD4 complex, Delta JR-FL protein, branched syntheticpeptide derived from discontinuous gp120 C3/C4 domain, fusion-competentimmunogens, and Gag, Pol, Nef, and Tat vaccines; gene-based therapiessuch as genetic suppressor elements (GSEs; WO 98/54366), and intrakines(genetically modified CC chemokines targetted to the ER to block surfaceexpression of newly synthesized CCR5 (Yang et al., PNAS 94:11567-72(1997); Chen et al., Nat. Med. 3:1110-16 (1997)); antibodies such as theanti-CXCR4 antibody 12G5, the anti-CCR5 antibodies 2D7, 5C7, PA8, PA9,PA10, PA11, PA12, and PA1 4, the anti-CD4 antibodies Q4120 and RPA-T4,the anti-CCR3 antibody 7B11, the anti-gp120 antibodies 17b, 48d,447-52D, 257-D, 268-D and 50.1, anti-Tat antibodies, anti-TNF-αantibodies, and monoclonal antibody 33A; aryl hydrocarbon (AH) receptoragonists and antagonists such as TCDD, 3,3′,4,4′,5-pentachlorobiphenyl,3,3′,4,4′-tetrachlorobiphenyl, and α-naphthoflavone (WO 98/30213); andantioxidants such as γ-L-glutamyl-L-cysteine ethyl ester (γ-GCE; WO99/56764).

In other embodiments, compositions of the invention may be administeredin combination with anti-opportunistic infection agents.Anti-opportunistic agents that may be administered in combination withthe compositions of the invention, include, but are not limited to,TRIMETHOPRIM-SULFAMETHOXAZOLE™, DAPSONE™, PENTAMIDINE™, ATOVAQUONE™,ISONIAZID™, RIFAMPI™, PYRAZINAMIDE™, ETHAMBUTOL™, RIFABUTIN™,CLARITHROMYCIN™, AZITHROMYCIN™, GANCICLOVIR™, FOSCARNET™, CIDOFOVIR™,FLUCONAZOLE™, ITRACONAZOLE™, KETOCONAZOLE™, ACYCLOVIR™, FAMCICOLVIR™,PYRIMETHAMINE™, LEUCOVORIN™, NEUPOGEN™ (filgrastim/G-CSF), and LEUKINE™(sargramostim/GM-CSF). In a specific embodiment, compositions of theinvention are used in any combination withTRIMETHOPRIMSULFAMETHOXAZOLE™, DAPSONE™, PENTAMIDINE™, and/orATOVAQUONE™ to prophylactically treat, prevent, and/or diagnose anopportunistic Pneumocystis carini pneumonia infection. In anotherspecific embodiment, compositions of the invention are used in anycombination with ISONLAZID™, RIFAMPIN™, PYRAZINAMIDE™, and/orETHAMBUTOL™ to prophylactically treat, prevent, and/or diagnose anopportunistic Mycobacterium avium complex infection. In another specificembodiment, compositions of the invention are used in any combinationwith RIFABUTIN™, CLARITHROMYCIN™, and/or AZITHROMYCIN™ toprophylactically treat, prevent, and/or diagnose an opportunisticMycobacterium tuberculosis infection. In another specific embodiment,compositions of the invention are used in any combination withGANCICLOVIR™, FOSCARNET™, and/or CIDOFOVIR™ to prophylactically treat,prevent, and/or diagnose an opportunistic cytomegalovirus infection. Inanother specific embodiment, compositions of the invention are used inany combination with FLUCONAZOLE™, ITRACONAZOLE™, and/or KETOCONAZOLE™to prophylactically treat, prevent, and/or diagnose an opportunisticfungal infection. In another specific embodiment, compositions of theinvention are used in any combination with ACYCLOVIR™ and/orFAMCICOLVIR™ to prophylactically treat, prevent, and/or diagnose anopportunistic herpes simplex virus type I and/or type II infection. Inanother specific embodiment, compositions of the invention are used inany combination with PYRIMETHAMINE™ and/or LEUCOVORIN™ toprophylactically treat, prevent, and/or diagnose an opportunisticToxoplasma gondii infection. In another specific embodiment,compositions of the invention are used in any combination withLEUCOVORIN™ and/or NEUPOGEN™ to prophylactically treat, prevent, and/ordiagnose an opportunistic bacterial infection.

In a further embodiment, the compositions of the invention areadministered in combination with an antiviral agent. Antiviral agentsthat may be administered with the compositions of the invention include,but are not limited to, acyclovir, ribavirin, amantadine, andremantidine.

In a further embodiment, the compositions of the invention areadministered in combination with an antibiotic agent. Antibiotic agentsthat may be administered with the compositions of the invention include,but are not limited to, tetracycline, metronidazole, amoxicillin,beta-lactamases, aminoglycosides, macrolides, quinolones,fluoroquinolones, cephalosporins, erythromycin, ciprofloxacin, andstreptomycin.

In an additional embodiment, the compositions of the invention areadministered alone or in combination with an anti-inflammatory agent.Anti-inflammatory agents that may be administered with the compositionsof the invention include, but are not limited to, glucocorticoids andthe nonsteroidal anti-inflammatories, aminoarylcarboxylic acidderivatives, arylacetic acid derivatives, arylbutyric acid derivatives,arylcarboxylic acids, arylpropionic acid derivatives, pyrazoles,pyrazolones, salicylic acid derivatives, thiazinecarboxamides,e-acetamidocaproic acid, S-adenosylmethionine, 3-amino-4-hydroxybutyricacid, amixetrine, bendazac, benzydamine, bucolome, difenpiramide,ditazol, emorfazone, guaiazulene, nabumetone, nimesulide, orgotein,oxaceprol, paranyline, perisoxal, pifoxime, proquazone, proxazole, andtenidap.

In another embodiment, compositions of the invention are administered incombination with a chemotherapeutic agent. Chemotherapeutic agents thatmay be administered with the compositions of the invention include, butare not limited to, antibiotic derivatives (e.g., doxorubicin,bleomycin, daunorubicin, and dactinomycin); antiestrogens (e.g.,tamoxifen); antimetabolites (e.g., fluorouracil, 5-FU, methotrexate,floxuridine, interferon alpha-2b, glutamic acid, plicamycin,mercaptopurine, and 6-thioguanine); cytotoxic agents (e.g., carmustine,BCNU, lomustine, CCNU, cytosine arabinoside, cyclophosphamide,estramustine, hydroxyurea, procarbazine, mitomycin, busulfan,cis-platin, and vincristine sulfate); hormones (e.g.,medroxyprogesterone, estramustine phosphate sodium, ethinyl estradiol,estradiol, megestrol acetate, methyltestosterone, diethylstilbestroldiphosphate, chlorotrianisene, and testolactone); nitrogen mustardderivatives (e.g., mephalen, chorambucil, mechlorethamine (nitrogenmustard) and thiotepa); steroids and combinations (e.g., bethamethasonesodium phosphate); and others (e.g., dicarbazine, asparaginase,mitotane, vincristine sulfate, vinblastine sulfate, and etoposide).

In a specific embodiment, compositions of the invention are administeredin combination with CHOP (cyclophosphamide, doxorubicin, vincristine,and prednisone) or combination of one or more of the components of CHOP.In one embodiment, the compositions of the invention are administered incombination with anti-CD20 antibodies, human monoclonal anti-CD20antibodies. In another embodiment, the compositions of the invention areadministered in combination with anti-CD20 antibodies and CHOP, oranti-CD20 antibodies and any combination of one or more of thecomponents of CHOP, particularly cyclophosphamide and/or prednisone. Ina specific embodiment, compositions of the invention are administered incombination with Rituximab. In a further embodiment, compositions of theinvention are administered with Rituximab and CHOP, or Rituximab and anycombination of one or more of the components of CHOP, particularlycyclophosphamide and/or prednisone. In a specific embodiment,compositions of the invention are administered in combination withtositumomab (anti-CD20 antibody from Coulter Pharmaceuticals, SanFrancisco, Calif.). In a further embodiment, compositions of theinvention are administered with tositumomab and CHOP, or tositumomab andany combination of one or more of the components of CHOP, particularlycyclophosphamide and/or prednisone. Tositumomab may optionally beassociated with ¹¹³I. The anti-CD20 antibodies may optionally beassociated with radioisotopes, toxins or cytotoxic prodrugs.

In another specific embodiment, the compositions of the invention areadministered in combination Zevalin™. In a further embodiment,compositions of the invention are administered with Zevalin™ and CHOP,or Zevalin™ and any combination of one or more of the components ofCHOP, particularly cyclophosphamide and/or prednisone. Zevalin™ may beassociated with one or more radisotopes. Particularly preferred isotopesare ⁹⁰Y and ¹¹¹In.

In an additional embodiment, the compositions of the invention areadministered in combination with cytokines. Cytokines that may beadministered with the compositions of the invention include, but are notlimited to, IL-2, IL-3, IL-4, IL-5, IL-6, IL-7, IL-10, IL-12, IL-13,IL-15, anti-CD40, CD40L, IFN-gamma and TNF-alpha. In one embodiment, thecompositions of the invention are administered in combination with oneor more chemokines. In specific embodiments, the compositions of theinvention are administered in combination with an alpha(C×C) chemokineselected from the group consisting of gamma-interferon inducibleprotein-10 (gammaIP-10), interleukin-8 (IL-8), platelet factor-4 (PF4),neutrophil activating protein (NAP-2), GRO-alpha, GRO-beta, GRO-gamma,neutrophil-activating peptide (ENA-78), granulocyte chemoattractantprotein-2 (GCP-2), and stromal cell-derived factor-1 (SDF-1, or pre-Bcell stimulatory factor (PBSF)); and/or a beta (CC) selected from thegroup consisting of: RANTES (regulated on activation, normal T expressedand secreted), macrophage inflammatory protein-1 alpha (MP-1 alpha),macrophage inflammatory protein-1 beta (MIP-1beta), monocyte chemotacticprotein-1 (MCP-1), monocyte chemotactic protein-2 (MCP-2), monocytechemotactic protein-3 (MCP-3), monocyte chemotactic protein-4 (MCP-4)macrophage inflammatory protein-1 gamma (MIP-1 gamma), macrophageinflammatory protein-3-alpha (MIP-3-alpha), macrophage inflammatoryprotein-3-beta (MIP-3-beta), macrophage inflammatory protein-4(MIP-4/DC-CK-1/PARC), eotaxin, Exodus, and 1-309; and/or the gamma(C)chemokine, lymphotactin.

In an additional embodiment, the compositions of the invention areadministered in combination with Fibroblast Growth Factors. FibroblastGrowth Factors that may be administered with the compositions of theinvention include, but are not limited to, FGF-1, FGF-2, FGF-3, FGF-4,FGF-5, FGF-6, FGF-7, FGF-8, FGF-9, FGF-10, FGF-11, FGF-12, FGF-13,FGF-14, and FGF-15.

In additional embodiments, the compositions of the invention areadministered in combination with other therapeutic or prophylacticregimens, such as, for example, radiation therapy.

The invention also provides a method of screening compounds to identifythose which enhance or block the action of TNF delta or TNF epsilon oncells, such as its interaction with TNF delta or TNF epsilon bindingmolecules such as receptor molecules. An agonist is a compound whichincreases the natural biological functions of polypeptides of thepresent invention or which functions in a manner similar to polypeptidesof the present invention, while antagonists decrease or eliminate suchfunctions.

For example, a cellular compartment, such as a membrane or a preparationthereof, such as a membrane-preparation, may be prepared from a cellthat expresses a molecule that binds TNF delta or TNF epsilon, such as amolecule of a signaling or regulatory pathway modulated by TNF delta orTNF epsilon. The preparation is incubated with labeled TNF delta or TNFepsilon in the absence or the presence of a candidate molecule which maybe a TNF delta or TNF epsilon agonist or antagonist. The ability of thecandidate molecule to bind the binding molecule is reflected indecreased binding of the labeled ligand. Molecules which bindgratuitously, i.e., without inducing the effects of TNF delta or TNFepsilon on binding the TNF delta or TNF epsilon binding molecule, aremost likely to be good antagonists. Molecules that bind well and eliciteffects that are the same as or closely related to TNF delta or TNFepsilon are agonists.

TNF delta or TNF epsilon-like effects of potential agonists andantagonists may by measured, for instance, by determining activity of asecond messenger system following interaction of the candidate moleculewith a cell or appropriate cell preparation, and comparing the effectwith that of TNF delta or TNF epsilon or molecules that elicit the sameeffects as TNF delta or TNF epsilon. Second messenger systems that maybe useful in this regard include but are not limited to AMP guanylatecyclase, ion channel or phosphoinositide hydrolysis second messengersystems.

Another example of an assay for TNF delta or TNF epsilon antagonists isa competitive assay that combines TNF delta or TNF epsilon and apotential antagonist with membrane-bound TNF delta or TNF epsilonreceptor molecules or recombinant TNF delta or TNF epsilon receptormolecules under appropriate conditions for a competitive inhibitionassay. TNF delta or TNF epsilon can be labeled, such as byradioactivity, such that the number of TNF delta or TNF epsilonmolecules bound to a receptor molecule can be determined accurately toassess the effectiveness of the potential antagonist.

Potential antagonists include small organic molecules, peptides,polypeptides and antibodies that bind to a polypeptide of the inventionand thereby inhibit or extinguish its activity. Potential antagonistsalso may be small organic molecules, a peptide, a polypeptide such as aclosely related protein or antibody that binds the same sites on abinding molecule, such as a receptor molecule, without inducing TNFdelta or TNF epsilon-induced activities, thereby preventing the actionof a polypeoptide of the present invention by excluding it from bindingto its receptor.

Another potential antagonist is a soluble form of the TNF delta or TNFepsilon receptor which binds to TNF delta or TNF epsilon and prevents itfrom interacting with membrane-bound TNF delta or TNF epsilon receptors.In this way, the receptors are not stimulated by their ligand.

Potential antagonists include a small molecule which binds to andoccupies the binding site of the polypeptide thereby preventing bindingto cellular binding molecules, such as receptor molecules, such thatnormal biological activity is prevented. Examples of small moleculesinclude but are not limited to small organic molecules, peptides ornon-peptide antagonists.

Other potential antagonists include antisense molecules. Antisensetechnology can be used to control gene expression through antisense DNAor RNA or through triple-helix formation. Antisense techniques arediscussed, for example, in Okano, J. Neurochem., 56:560, 1991;Oligodeoxynucleotides as Antisense Inhibitors of Gene Expression, CRCPress, Boca Raton, Fla. (1988). Triple helix formation is discussed in,for instance Lee et al., Nucleic Acids Research, 6:3073 (1979); Cooneyet al., Science, 241:456 (1988); and Dervan et al., Science, 251:1360(1991). The methods are based on binding of a polynucleotide to acomplementary DNA or RNA. For example, the 5′ coding portion of apolynucleotide that encodes the mature polypeptide of the presentinvention may be used to design an antisense RNA oligonucleotide of fromabout 10 to 40 base pairs in length. A DNA oligonucleotide is designedto be complementary to a region of the gene involved in transcriptionthereby preventing transcription and the production of TNF delta or TNFepsilon. The antisense RNA oligonucleotide hybridizes to the mRNA invivo and blocks translation of the mRNA molecule into TNF delta or TNFepsilon polypeptide. The oligonucleotides described above can also bedelivered to cells such that the antisense RNA or DNA may be expressedin vivo to inhibit production of a polypeptide of the present invention.

Antisense technology can be used to control gene expression throughantisense DNA or RNA or through triple-helix formation. Antisensetechniques are discussed, for example, in Okano, J. Neurochem. 56: 560(1991); “Oligodeoxynucleotides as Antisense Inhibitors of GeneExpression, CRC Press, Boca Raton, Fla. (1988). Antisense technology canbe used to control gene expression through antisense DNA or RNA, orthrough triple-helix formation. Antisense techniques are discussed forexample, in Okano, J., Neurochem. 56:560 (1991); Oligodeoxynucleotidesas Antisense Inhibitors of Gene Expression, CRC Press, Boca Raton, Fla.(1988). Triple helix formation is discussed in, for instance Lee et al.,Nucleic Acids Research 6: 3073 (1979); Cooney et al., Science 241: 456(1988); and Dervan et al., Science 251: 1360 (1991). The methods arebased on binding of a polynucleotide to a complementary DNA or RNA. Forexample, the 5′ coding portion of a polynucleotide that encodes theextracellular domain of the polypeptide of the present invention may beused to design an antisense RNA oligonucleotide of from about 10 to 40base pairs in length. A DNA oligonucleotide is designed to becomplementary to a region of the gene involved in transcription therebypreventing transcription and the production of TNF delta and/or TNFepsilon. The antisense RNA oligonucleotide hybridizes to the mRNA invivo and blocks translation of the mRNA molecule into TNF delta and/orTNF epsilon polypeptide. The oligonucleotides described above can alsobe delivered to cells such that the antisense RNA or DNA may beexpressed in vivo to inhibit production of TNF delta and/or TNF epsilon.

In one embodiment, the TNF delta and/or TNF epsilon antisense nucleicacid of the invention is produced intracellularly by transcription froman exogenous sequence. For example, a vector or a portion thereof, istranscribed, producing an antisense nucleic acid (RNA) of the invention.Such a vector would contain a sequence encoding the TNF delta and/or TNFepsilon antisense nucleic acid. Such a vector can remain episomal orbecome chromosomally integrated, as long as it can be transcribed toproduce the desired antisense RNA. Such vectors can be constructed byrecombinant DNA technology methods standard in the art. Vectors can beplasmid, viral, or others know in the art, used for replication andexpression in vertebrate cells. Expression of the sequence encoding TNFdelta and/or TNF epsilon, or fragments thereof, can be by any promoterknown in the art to act in vertebrate, preferably human cells. Suchpromoters can be inducible or constitutive. Such promoters include, butare not limited to, the SV40 early promoter region (Bemoist and Chambon,Nature 29:304-310 (1981), the promoter contained in the 3′ long terminalrepeat of Rous sarcoma virus (Yamamoto et al., Cell 22:787-797 (1980),the herpes thymidine promoter (Wagner et al., Proc. Natl. Acad. Sci.U.S.A. 78:1441-1445 (1981), the regulatory sequences of themetallothionein gene (Brinster, et al., Nature 296:39-42 (1982)), etc.

The antisense nucleic acids of the invention comprise a sequencecomplementary to at least a portion of an RNA transcript of a TNF deltaand/or TNF epsilon gene. However, absolute complementarity, althoughpreferred, is not required. A sequence “complementary to at least aportion of an RNA,” referred to herein, means a sequence havingsufficient complementarity to be able to hybridize with the RNA, forminga stable duplex; in the case of double stranded TNF delta and/or TNFepsilon antisense nucleic acids, a single strand of the duplex DNA maythus be tested, or triplex formation may be assayed. The ability tohybridize will depend on both the degree of complementarity and thelength of the antisense nucleic acid. Generally, the larger thehybridizing nucleic acid, the more base mismatches with a TNF deltaand/or TNF epsilon RNA it may contain and still form a stable duplex (ortriplex as the case may be). One skilled in the art can ascertain atolerable degree of mismatch by use of standard procedures to determinethe melting point of the hybridized complex.

Oligonucleotides that are complementary to the 5′ end of the message,e.g., the 5′ untranslated sequence up to and including the AUGinitiation codon, should work most efficiently at inhibitingtranslation. However, sequences complementary to the 3′ untranslatedsequences of mRNAs have been shown to be effective at inhibitingtranslation of mRNAs as well. See generally, Wagner, R., 1994, Nature372:333-335. Thus, oligonucleotides complementary to either the 5′- or3′-non-translated, non-coding regions of TNF delta and/or TNF epsiloncould be used in an antisense approach to inhibit translation ofendogenous TNF delta and/or TNF epsilon mRNA. Oligonucleotidescomplementary to the 5′ untranslated region of the mRNA should includethe complement of the AUG start codon. Antisense oligonucleotidescomplementary to mRNA coding regions are less efficient inhibitors oftranslation but could be used in accordance with the invention. Whetherdesigned to hybridize to the 5′-, 3′- or coding region of TNF deltaand/or TNF epsilon mRNA, antisense nucleic acids should be at least sixnucleotides in length, and are preferably oligonucleotides ranging from6 to about 50 nucleotides in length. In specific aspects theoligonucleotide is at least 10 nucleotides, at least 17 nucleotides, atleast 25 nucleotides or at least 50 nucleotides.

The polynucleotides of the invention can be DNA or RNA or chimericmixtures or derivatives or modified versions thereof, single-stranded ordouble-stranded. The oligonucleotide can be modified at the base moiety,sugar moiety, or phosphate backbone, for example, to improve stabilityof the molecule, hybridization, etc. The oligonucleotide may includeother appended groups such as peptides (e.g., for targeting host cellreceptors in vivo), or agents facilitating transport across the cellmembrane (see, e.g., Letsinger et al., 1989, Proc. Natl. Acad. Sci.U.S.A. 86:6553-6556; Lemaitre et al., Proc. Natl. Acad. Sci. 84:648-652(1987); PCT Publication No. W088/09810, published December 15, 1988) orthe blood-brain barrier (see, e.g., PCT Publication No. WO89/10134,published April 25, 1988), hybridization-triggered cleavage agents.(See, e.g., Krol et al., BioTechniques 6:958-976 (1988)) orintercalating agents. (See, e.g., Zon, Pharm. Res. 5:539-549 (1988)). Tothis end, the oligonucleotide may be conjugated to another molecule,e.g., a peptide, hybridization triggered cross-linking agent, transportagent, hybridization-triggered cleavage agent, etc.

The antisense oligonucleotide may comprise at least one modified basemoiety which is selected from the group including, but not limited to,5-fluorouracil, 5-bromouracil, 5-chlorouracil, 5-iodouracil,hypoxanthine, xantine, 4-acetylcytosine, 5-(carboxyhydroxylmethyl)uracil, 5-carboxymethylaminomethyl-2-thiouridine,5-carboxymethylaminomethyluracil, dihydrouracil,beta-D-galactosylqueosine, inosine, N6-isopentenyladenine,1-methylguanine, 1-methylinosine, 2,2-dimethylguanine, 2-methyladenine,2-methylguanine, 3-methylcytosine, 5-methylcytosine, N6-adenine,7-methylguanine, 5-methylaminomethyluracil,5-methoxyaminomethyl-2-thiouracil, beta-D-mannosylqueosine,5-methoxycarboxymethyluracil, 5-methoxyuracil,2-methylthio-N6-isopentenyladenine, uracil-5-oxyacetic acid (v),wybutoxosine, pseudouracil, queosine, 2-thiocytosine,5-methyl-2-thiouracil, 2-thiouracil, 4-thiouracil, 5-methyluracil,uracil-5-oxyacetic acid methylester, uracil-5-oxyacetic acid (v),5-methyl-2-thiouracil, 3-(3-amino-3-N-2-carboxypropyl) uracil, (acp3)w,and 2,6-diaminopurine.

The antisense oligonucleotide may also comprise at least one modifiedsugar moiety selected from the group including, but not limited to,arabinose, 2-fluoroarabinose, xylulose, and hexose.

In yet another embodiment, the antisense oligonucleotide comprises atleast one modified phosphate backbone selected from the group including,but not limited to, a phosphorothioate, a phosphorodithioate, aphosphoramidothioate, a phosphoramidate, a phosphordiamidate, amethylphosphonate, an alkyl phosphotriester, and a formacetal or analogthereof.

In yet another embodiment, the antisense oligonucleotide is analpha-anomeric oligonucleotide. An alpha-anomeric oligonucleotide formsspecific double-stranded hybrids with complementary RNA in which,contrary to the usual beta-units, the strands run parallel to each other(Gautier et al., Nucl. Acids Res. 15:6625-6641 (1987)). Theoligonucleotide is a 2-0-methylribonucleotide (Inoue et al., Nucl. AcidsRes. 15:6131-6148 (1987)), or a chimeric RNA-DNA analogue (Inoue et al.,FEBS Lett. 215:327-330 (1997)).

Polynucleotides of the invention may be synthesized by standard methodsknown in the art, e.g. by use of an automated DNA synthesizer (such asare commercially available from Biosearch, Applied Biosystems, etc.). Asexamples, phosphorothioate oligonucleotides may be synthesized by themethod of Stein et al. (Nucl. Acids Res. 16:3209 (1988)),methylphosphonate oligonucleotides can be prepared by use of controlledpore glass polymer supports (Sarin et al., Proc. Natl. Acad. Sci. U.S.A.85:7448-7451 (1988)), etc.

While antisense nucleotides complementary to the TNF delta and/or TNFepsilon coding region sequence could be used, those complementary to thetranscribed untranslated region are most preferred.

Potential antagonists according to the invention also include catalyticRNA, or a ribozyme (See, e.g., PCT International Publication WO90/11364, published Oct. 4, 1990; Sarver et al, Science 247:1222-1225(1990). While ribozymes that cleave mRNA at site specific recognitionsequences can be used to destroy TNF delta and/or TNF epsilon mRNAs, theuse of hammerhead ribozymes is preferred. Hammerhead ribozymes cleavemRNAs at locations dictated by flanking regions that form complementarybase pairs with the target mRNA. The sole requirement is that the targetmRNA have the following sequence of two bases: 5′-UG-3′. Theconstruction and production of hammerhead ribozymes is well known in theart and is described more fully in Haseloff and Gerlach, Nature334:585-591 (1988). There are numerous potential hammerhead ribozymecleavage sites within the nucleotide sequence of TNF delta and/or TNFepsilon. Preferably, the ribozyme is engineered so that the cleavagerecognition site is located near the 5′ end of the TNF delta and/or TNFepsilon mRNA; i.e., to increase efficiency and minimize theintracellular accumulation of non-functional mRNA transcripts.

As in the antisense approach, the ribozymes of the invention can becomposed of modified oligonucleotides (e.g. for improved stability,targeting, etc.) and should be delivered to cells which express TNFdelta and/or TNF epsilon in vivo. DNA constructs encoding the ribozymemay be introduced into the cell in the same manner as described abovefor the introduction of antisense encoding DNA. A preferred method ofdelivery involves using a DNA construct “encoding” the ribozyme underthe control of a strong constitutive promoter, such as, for example, polIII or pol II promoter, so that transfected cells will producesufficient quantities of the ribozyme to destroy endogenous TNF deltaand/or TNF epsilon messages and inhibit translation. Since ribozymesunlike antisense molecules, are catalytic, a lower intracellularconcentration is required for efficiency.

Endogenous gene expression can also be reduced by inactivating or“knocking out” the TNF delta and/or TNF epsilon gene and/or its promoterusing targeted homologous recombination. (e.g., see Smithies et al.,Nature 317:230-234 (1985); Thomas & Capecchi, Cell 51:503-512 (1987);Thompson et al., Cell 5:313-321 (1989); each of which is incorporated byreference herein in its entirety). For example, a mutant, non-functionalpolynucleotide of the invention (or a completely unrelated DNA sequence)flanked by DNA homologous to the endogenous polynucleotide sequence(either the coding regions or regulatory regions of the gene) can beused, with or without a selectable marker and/or a negative selectablemarker, to transfect cells that express polypeptides of the invention invivo. In another embodiment, techniques known in the art are used togenerate knockouts in cells that contain, but do not express the gene ofinterest. Insertion of the DNA construct, via targeted homologousrecombination, results in inactivation of the targeted gene. Suchapproaches are particularly suited in research and agricultural fieldswhere modifications to embryonic stem cells can be used to generateanimal offspring with an inactive targeted gene (e.g., see Thomas &Capecchi 1987 and Thompson 1989, supra). However this approach can beroutinely adapted for use in humans provided the recombinant DNAconstructs are directly administered or targeted to the required site invivo using appropriate viral vectors that will be apparent to those ofskill in the art. The contents of each of the documents recited in thisparagraph is herein incorporated by reference in its entirety.

Antagonists of the present invention also include antibodies specificfor TNF-family receptors or the TNF delta and/or TNF epsilonpolypeptides of the invention. Antibodies according to the presentinvention may be prepared by any of a variety of standard methods usingTNF delta and/or TNF epsilon immunogens of the present invention. Asindicated, such TNF delta and/or TNF epsilon immunogens include thecomplete TNF delta and/or TNF epsilon polypeptides and TNF delta and/orTNF epsilon polypeptide fragments comprising, for example, the ligandbinding domain, TNF-conserved domain, extracellular domain,transmembrane domain, and/or intracellular domain, or any combinationthereof.

Polyclonal and monoclonal antibody agonists or antagonists according tothe present invention can be raised according to the methods disclosedin Tartaglia and Goeddel, J. Biol. Chem. 267(7):4304-4307(1992));Tartaglia et al., Cell 73:213-216 (1993)), and PCT Application WO94/09137 and are preferably specific to (i.e., bind uniquely topolypeptides of the invention having the amino acid sequence of SEQ IDNO:2. The term “antibody” (Ab) or “monoclonal antibody” (mAb) as usedherein is meant to include intact molecules as well as fragments thereof(such as, for example, Fab and F(ab′) fragments) which are capable ofbinding an antigen. Fab, Fab′ and F(ab′) fragments lack the Fc fragmentintact antibody, clear more rapidly from the circulation, and may haveless non-specific tissue binding of an intact antibody (Wahl et al., J.Nucl. Med., 24:316-325 (1983)).

In a preferred method, antibodies according to the present invention aremAbs. Such mAbs can be prepared using hybridoma technology (Kohler andMillstein, Nature 256:495-497 (1975) and U.S. Pat. No. 4,376,110; Harlowet al., Antibodies: A Laboratory Manual, Cold Spring Harbor LaboratoryPress, Cold Spring Harbor, N.Y., 1988; Monoclonal Antibodies andHybridomas: A New Dimension in Biological Analyses, Plenum Press, NewYork, N.Y., 1980; Campbell, “Monoclonal Antibody Technology,” In:Laboratory Techniques in Biochemistry and Molecular Biology, Volume 13(Burdon et al., eds.), Elsevier, Amsterdam (1984)).

Proteins and other compounds which bind the TNF delta and/or TNF epsilondomains are also candidate agonists and antagonists according to thepresent invention. Such binding compounds can be “captured” using theyeast two-hybrid system (Fields and Song, Nature 340:245-246 (1989)). Amodified version of the yeast two- hybrid system has been described byRoger Brent and his colleagues (Gyuris, Cell 75:791-803 (1993); Zervoset al., Cell 72:223-232 (1993)). Preferably, the yeast two-hybrid systemis used according to the present invention to capture compounds whichbind to the ligand binding domain, extracellular, intracellular,transmembrane, and death domain of the TNF delta and/or TNF epsilon.Such compounds are good candidate agonists and antagonists of thepresent invention.

For example, using the two-hybrid assay described above, theextracellular or intracellular domain of the TNF delta and/or TNFepsilon receptor, or a portion thereof, may be used to identify cellularproteins which interact with TNF delta and/or TNF epsilon the receptorin vivo. Such an assay may also be used to identify ligands withpotential agonistic or antagonistic activity of TNF delta and/or TNFepsilon receptor function. This screening assay has previously been usedto identify protein which interact with the cytoplasmic domain of themurine TNF-RII and led to the identification of two receptor associatedproteins. Rothe et al., Cell 78:681 (1994). Such proteins and amino acidsequences which bind to the cytoplasmic domain of the TNF delta and/orTNF epsilon receptors are good candidate agonist and antagonist of thepresent invention.

Other screening techniques include the use of cells which express thepolypeptide of the present invention (for example, transfected CHOcells) in a system which measures extracellular pH changes caused byreceptor activation, for example, as described in Science, 246:181-296(1989). In another example, potential agonists or antagonists may becontacted with a cell which expresses the polypeptide of the presentinvention and a second messenger response, e.g., signal transduction maybe measured to determine whether the potential antagonist or agonist iseffective.

Agonists according to the present invention include naturally occurringand synthetic compounds such as, for example, TNF family ligand peptidefragments, transforming growth factor, neurotransmitters (such asglutamate, dopamine, N-methyl-D-aspartate), tumor suppressors (p53),cytolytic T cells and antimetabolites. Preferred agonists includechemotherapeutic drugs such as, for example, cisplatin, doxorubicin,bleomycin, cytosine arabinoside, nitrogen mustard, methotrexate andvincristine. Others include ethanol and -amyloid peptide. (Science267:1457-1458 (1995)).

Preferred agonists are fragments of TNF delta and/or TNF epsilonpolypeptides of the invention which stimulate lymphocyte (e.g., B cell)proliferation, differentiation and/or activation. Further preferredagonists include polyclonal and monoclonal antibodies raised against theTNF delta and/or TNF epsilon polypeptides of the invention, or afragment thereof. Such agonist antibodies raised against a TNF-familyreceptor are disclosed in Tartaglia et al., Proc. Natl. Acad. Sci. USA88:9292-9296 (1991); and Tartaglia et al., J. Biol. Chem.267:4304-4307(1992). See, also, PCT Application WO 94/09137.

In an additional embodiment, immunoregulatory molecules such as, forexample, IL2, IL3, IL4, IL5, IL6, IL7, IL0, IL12, IL13, IL15, anti-CD40,CD40L, IFN-gamma and TNF-alpha, may be used as agonists of TNF deltaand/or TNF epsilon polypeptides of the invention which stimulatelymphocyte (e.g., B cell) proliferation, differentiation and/oractivation. In a specific embodiment, IL4 and/or IL10 are used toenhance the TNF delta- and/or TNF epsilon-mediated proliferation of Bcells.

In further embodiments of the invention, cells that are geneticallyengineered to express the polypeptides of the invention, oralternatively, that are genetically engineered not to express thepolypeptides of the invention (e.g., knockouts) are administered to apatient in vivo. Such cells may be obtained from the patient (i.e.,animal, including human) or an MHC compatible donor and can include, butare not limited to fibroblasts, bone marrow cells, blood cells (e.g.,lymphocytes), adipocytes, muscle cells, endothelial cells etc. The cellsare genetically engineered in vitro using recombinant DNA techniques tointroduce the coding sequence of polypeptides of the invention into thecells, or alternatively, to disrupt the coding sequence and/orendogenous regulatory sequence associated with the polypeptides of theinvention, e.g., by transduction (using viral vectors, and preferablyvectors that integrate the transgene into the cell genome) ortransfection procedures, including, but not limited to, the use ofplasmids, cosmids, YACs, naked DNA, electroporation, liposomes, etc. Thecoding sequence of the polypeptides of the invention can be placed underthe control of a strong constitutive or inducible promoter orpromoter/enhancer to achieve expression, and preferably secretion, ofthe polypeptides of the invention. The engineered cells which expressand preferably secrete the polypeptides of the invention can beintroduced into the patient systemically, e.g., in the circulation, orintraperitoneally.

Alternatively, the cells can be incorporated into a matrix and implantedin the body, e.g., genetically engineered fibroblasts can be implantedas part of a skin graft; genetically engineered endothelial cells can beimplanted as part of a lymphatic or vascular graft. (See, for example,Anderson et al. U.S. Pat. No. 5,399,349; and Mulligan & Wilson, U.S.Pat. No. 5,460,959 each of which is incorporated by reference herein inits entirety).

When the cells to be administered are non-autologous or non-MHCcompatible cells, they can be administered using well known techniqueswhich prevent the development of a host immune response against theintroduced cells. For example, the cells may be introduced in anencapsulated form which, while allowing for an exchange of componentswith the immediate extracellular environment, does not allow theintroduced cells to be recognized by the host immune system.

In yet another embodiment of the invention, the activity of TNF deltaand/or TNF epsilon polypeptide can be reduced using a “dominantnegative.” To this end, constructs which encode defective TNF deltaand/or TNF epsilon polypeptide, such as, for example, mutants lackingall or a portion of the TNF-conserved domain, can be used in genetherapy approaches to diminish the activity of TNF delta and/or TNFepsilon on appropriate target cells. For example, nucleotide sequencesthat direct host cell expression of TNF delta and/or TNF epsilonpolypeptide in which all or a portion of the TNF-conserved domain isaltered or missing can be introduced into monocytic cells or other cellsor tissues (either by in vivo or ex vivo gene therapy methods describedherein or otherwise known in the art). Alternatively, targetedhomologous recombination can be utilized to introduce such deletions ormutations into the subject's endogenous TNF delta and/or TNF epsilongene in monocytes. The engineered cells will express non-functional TNFdelta and/or TNF epsilon polypeptides (i.e., a ligand (e.g., multimer)that may be capable of binding, but which is incapable of inducingsignal transduction).

The antagonists may be employed in a composition with a pharmaceuticallyacceptable carrier, e.g., as hereinafter described.

The antagonists may be employed for instance to treat cachexia which isa lipid clearing defect resulting from a systemic deficiency oflipoprotein lipase, which is suppressed by TNF delta or TNF epsilon. Theantagonists may also be employed to treat cerebral malaria in whichpolypeptides of the present invention appear to play a pathogenic role.The antagonists may also be employed to treat rheumatoid arthritis byinhibiting TNF delta or TNF epsilon induced production of inflammatorycytokines, such as IL1 in the synovial cells. When treating arthritis,the polypeptides of the present invention are preferably injectedintra-articularly.

The antagonists may also be employed to prevent graft-host rejection bypreventing the stimulation of the immune system in the presence of agraft.

The antagonists may also be employed to inhibit bone resorption and,therefore, to treat and/or prevent osteoporosis.

The antagonists may also be employed as anti-inflammatory agents, and totreat endotoxic shock. This critical condition results from anexaggerated response to bacterial and other types of infection.

The invention also relates to compositions comprising the polynucleotideor the polypeptides discussed above or the agonists or antagonists.Thus, the polypeptides of the present invention may be employed incombination with a non-sterile or sterile carrier or carriers for usewith cells, tissues or organisms, such as a pharmaceutical carriersuitable for administration to a subject. Such compositions comprise,for instance, a media additive or a therapeutically effective amount ofa polypeptide of the invention and a pharmaceutically acceptable carrieror excipient. Such carriers may include, but are not limited to, saline,buffered saline, dextrose, water, glycerol, ethanol and combinationsthereof. The formulation should suit the mode of administration.

The invention further relates to pharmaceutical packs and kitscomprising one or more containers filled with one or more of theingredients of the aforementioned compositions of the invention.Associated with such container(s) can be a notice in the form prescribedby a governmental agency regulating the manufacture, use or sale ofpharmaceuticals or biological products, reflecting approval by theagency of the manufacture, use or sale of the product for humanadministration.

Polypeptides and other compounds of the present invention may beemployed alone or in conjunction with other compounds, such astherapeutic compounds.

The pharmaceutical compositions may be administered in any effective,convenient manner including, for instance, administration by topical,oral, anal, vaginal, intravenous, intraperitoneal, intramuscular,subcutaneous, intranasal or intradermal routes among others.

The pharmaceutical compositions generally are administered in an amounteffective for treatment or prophylaxis of a specific indication orindications. In general, the compositions are administered in an amountof at least about 10 Fg/kg body weight. In most cases they will beadministered in an amount not in excess of about 8 mg/kg body weight perday. Preferably, in most cases, dose is from about 10 Fg/kg to about 1mg/kg body weight, daily. It will be appreciated that optimum dosagewill be determined by standard methods for each treatment modality andindication, taking into account the indication, its severity, route ofadministration, complicating conditions and the like.

Using the equivalent surface area dosage conversion factors supplied byFreireich, E. J., et al. (Cancer Chemotherapy Reports 50(4):219-44(1966)), one of ordinary skill in the art is able to convenientlyconvert data obtained from the use of TNF-delta and/or TNF-epsilon in agiven experimental system into an accurate estimation of apharmaceutically effective amount of TNF-delta and/or TNF-epsilonpolypeptide to be administered per dose in another experimental system.Experimental data obtained through the administration of TNF-deltaand/or TNF-epsilon in mice may be converted through the conversionfactors supplied by Freireich, et al., to accurate estimates ofpharmaceutically effective doses of TNF-delta and/or TNF-epsilon in rat,monkey, dog, and human. The following conversion table (Table IV) is asummary of the data provided by Freireich, et al. Table IV givesapproximate factors for converting doses expressed in terms of mg/kgfrom one species to an equivalent surface area dose expressed as mg/kgin another species tabulated.

TABLE IV Equivalent Surface Area Dosage Conversion Factors. TO Mouse RatMonkey Dog Human FROM (20 g) (150 g) (3.5 kg) (8 kg) (60 kg) Mouse 1 ½ ¼⅙  {fraction (1/12)} Rat 2 1 ½ ¼ {fraction (1/7)} Monkey 4 2 1 ⅗ ⅓ Dog 64 {fraction (5/3)} 1 ½ Human 12  7 3 2 1

Thus, for example, using the conversion factors provided in Table IV, adose of 50 mg/kg in the mouse converts to an appropriate dose of 12.5mg/kg in the monkey because (50 mg/kg)×(¼)=12.5 mg/kg. As an additionalexample, doses of 0.02, 0.08, 0.8, 2, and 8 mg/kg in the mouse equate toeffect doses of 1.667 micrograms/kg, 6.67 micrograms/kg, 66.7micrograms/kg, 166.7 micrograms/kg, and 0.667 mg/kg, respectively, inthe human.

The polynucleotides, polypeptides, agonists and antagonists that arepolypeptides of this invention may be employed in accordance with thepresent invention by expression of such polypeptides in vivo, intreatment modalities often referred to as “gene therapy.”

Thus, for example, cells from a patient may be engineered with apolynucleotide, such as a DNA or RNA, encoding a polypeptide ex vivo,and the engineered cells then can be provided to a patient to be treatedwith the polypeptide. For example, cells may be engineered ex vivo bythe use of a retroviral plasmid vector containing RNA encoding apolypeptide of the present invention. Such methods are well-known in theart and their use in the present invention will be apparent from theteachings herein.

Similarly, cells may be engineered in vivo for expression of apolypeptide in vivo by procedures known in the art. For example, apolynucleotide of the invention may be engineered for expression in areplication defective retroviral vector, as discussed above. Theretroviral expression construct then may be isolated and introduced intoa packaging cell is transduced with a retroviral plasmid vectorcontaining RNA encoding a polypeptide of the present invention such thatthe packaging cell now produces infectious viral particles containingthe gene of interest. These producer cells may be administered to apatient for engineering cells in vivo and expression of the polypeptidein vivo. These and other methods for administering a polypeptide of thepresent invention by such method should be apparent to those skilled inthe art from the teachings of the present invention.

Retroviruses from which the retroviral plasmid vectors herein abovementioned may be derived include, but are not limited to, Moloney MurineLeukemia Virus, spleen necrosis virus, retroviruses such as Rous SarcomaVirus, Harvey Sarcoma Virus, avian leukosis virus, gibbon ape leukemiavirus, human immunodeficiency virus, adenovirus, MyeloproliferativeSarcoma Virus, and mammary tumor virus. In one embodiment, theretroviral plasmid vector is derived from Moloney Murine Leukemia Virus.

Such vectors well include one or more promoters for expressing thepolypeptide. Suitable promoters which may be employed include, but arenot limited to, the retroviral LTR; the SV40 promoter; and the humancytomegalovirus (CMV) promoter described in Miller et al.,Biotechniques, 7: 980-990 (1989), or any other promoter (e.g., cellularpromoters such as eukaryotic cellular promoters including, but notlimited to, the histone, RNA polymerase III, and β-actin promoters).Other viral promoters which may be employed include, but are not limitedto, adenovirus promoters, thymidine kinase (TK) promoters, and B19parvovirus promoters. The selection of a suitable promoter will beapparent to those skilled in the art from the teachings containedherein.

The nucleic acid sequence encoding the polypeptide of the presentinvention will be placed under the control of a suitable promoter.Suitable promoters which may be employed include, but are not limitedto, adenoviral promoters, such as the adenoviral major late promoter; orheterologous promoters, such as the cytomegalovirus (CMV) promoter; therespiratory syncytial virus (RSV) promoter; inducible promoters, such asthe MMT promoter, the metallothionein promoter; heat shock promoters;the albumin promoter; the ApoAI promoter; human globin promoters; viralthymidine kinase promoters, such as the Herpes Simplex thymidine kinasepromoter; retroviral LTRs (including the modified retroviral LTRs hereinabove described); the 13-actin promoter; and human growth hormonepromoters. The promoter also may be the native promoter which controlsthe gene encoding the polypeptide.

The retroviral plasmid vector is employed to transduce packaging celllines to form producer cell lines. Examples of packaging cells which maybe transfected include, but are not limited to, the PE501, PA317, Y-2,Y-AM, PA12, T19-14X, VT-1 9-17-H2, YCRE, YCRIP, GP+E-86, GP+envAm12, andDAN cell lines as described in Miller, A., Human Gene Therapy, 1: 5-14(1990). The vector may be transduced into the packaging cells throughany means known in the art. Such means include, but are not limited to,electroporation, the use of liposomes, and CaPO₄ precipitation. In onealternative, the retroviral plasmid vector may be encapsulated into aliposome, or coupled to a lipid, and then administered to a host.

The producer cell line will generate infectious retroviral vectorparticles, which include the nucleic acid sequence(s) encoding thepolypeptides. Such retroviral vector particles then may be employed totransduce eukaryotic cells, either in vitro or in vivo. The transducedeukaryotic cells will express the nucleic acid sequence(s) encoding thepolypeptide. Eukaryotic cells which may be transduced include, but arenot limited to, embryonic stem cells, embryonic carcinoma cells, as wellas hematopoietic stem cells, hepatocytes, fibroblasts, myoblasts,keratinocytes, endothelial cells, and bronchial epithelial cells.

The present invention is further described by the following examples.The examples are provided solely to illustrate the invention byreference to specific embodiments. These exemplification's, whileillustrating certain specific aspects of the invention, do not portraythe limitations or circumscribe the scope of the disclosed invention.

All examples were carried out using standard techniques, which are wellknown and routine to those of skill in the art, except where otherwisedescribed in detail. Routine molecular biology techniques of thefollowing examples can be carried out as described in standardlaboratory manuals, such as Sambrook et al., Molecular Cloning: ALaboratory Manual, 2nd Ed.; Cold Spring Harbor Laboratory Press, ColdSpring Harbor, N.Y. (1989), herein referred to as “Sambrook.”

All parts or amounts set out in the following examples are by weight,unless otherwise specified. Unless otherwise stated size separation offragments in the examples below was carried out using standardtechniques of agarose and polyacrylamide gel electrophoresis (“PAGE”) inSambrook and numerous other references such as, for instance, by Goeddelet al., Nucleic Acids Res., 8: 4057 (1980). Unless described otherwise,ligations were accomplished using standard buffers, incubationtemperatures and times, approximately equimolar amounts of the DNAfragments to be ligated and approximately 10 units of T4 DNA ligase(“ligase”) per 0.5 Fg of DNA.

EXAMPLE 1 Expression and Purification of Soluble Form of Human TNF Deltaand TNF Epsilon Using Bacteria

The DNA sequence encoding human TNF delta or TNF epsilon in thedeposited polynucleotide was amplified using PCR oligonucleotide primersspecific to the amino acid carboxyl terminal sequence of the human TNFdelta or TNF epsilon protein and to vector sequences 3′ to the gene.Additional nucleotides containing restriction sites to facilitatecloning were added to the 5′ and 3′ sequences respectively.

The 5′ oligonucleotide primer had the sequence 5′ GCG GGA TCC CAG AGCCTC ACC ACA G 3′ (SEQ ID NO:7) containing the underlined restrictionsite, followed by 16 nucleotides of coding sequence set out in theFigures beginning with the 115th base of the ATG codon.

The 3′ primer has the sequence 5′ CGC AAG CTT ACA ATC ACA GTT TCA CAA AC3′ (SEQ ID NO:8) contains the underlined HindIII restriction sitefollowed by 20 nucleotides complementary to the last 13 nucleotides ofthe coding sequence set out in FIGS. 1A and 1B and 2A and 2B, includingthe stop codon.

The restrictions sites were convenient to restriction enzyme sites inthe bacterial expression vectors pQE-9, which were used for bacterialexpression in these examples. (Qiagen, Inc. Chatsworth, Calif.). pQE-9encodes ampicillin antibiotic resistance (“Amp^(r)”) and contains abacterial origin of replication (“ori”), an IPTG inducible promoter, aribosome binding site (“RBS”), a 6-His tag and restriction enzyme sites.

The amplified human TNF delta DNA and the vector pQE-9 both weredigested with BamHI and HindIII and the digested DNAs then were ligatedtogether. Insertion of the TNF delta DNA into the pQE-9 restrictedvector placed the TNF delta coding region downstream of and operablylinked to the vector's IPTG-inducible promoter and in-frame with aninitiating AUG appropriately positioned for translation of TNF delta.

The ligation mixture was transformed into competent E. coli cells usingstandard procedures. Such procedures are described in Sambrook et al.,Molecular Cloning: A Laboratory Manual, 2nd Ed.; Cold Spring HarborLaboratory Press, Cold Spring Harbor, N.Y. (1989). E. coli strain Ml5/rep4, containing multiple copies of the plasmid pREP4, which expresseslac repressor and confers kanamycin resistance (“Kan^(r)”), was used incarrying out the illustrative example described here. This strain, whichis only one of many that are suitable for expressing TNF delta, isavailable commercially from Qiagen. Transformants were identified bytheir ability to grow on LB plates in the presence of ampicillin.Plasmid DNA was isolated from resistant colonies and the identity of thecloned DNA was confirmed by restriction analysis.

Clones containing the desired constructs were grown overnight (“O/N”) inliquid culture in LB media supplemented with both ampicillin (100micrograms per milliliter) and kanamycin (25 micrograms per milliliter).The O/N culture was used to inoculate a large culture, at a dilution ofapproximately 1:100 to 1:250. The cells were grown to an optical densityat 600 nm (“OD₆₀₀”) of between 0.4 and 0.6.Isopropyl-B-D-thiogalactopyranoside (“IPTG”) was then added to a finalconcentration of 1 mM to induce transcription from lac repressorsensitive promoters, by inactivating the lacI repressor. Cellssubsequently were incubated further for 3 to 4 hours. Cells then wereharvested by centrifugation and disrupted, by standard methods.Inclusion bodies were purified from the disrupted cells using routinecollection techniques, and protein was solubilized from the inclusionbodies into 8M urea. The 8M urea solution containing the solubilizedprotein was passed over a PD-10 column in 2× phosphate buffered saline(“PBS”), thereby removing the urea, exchanging the buffer and refoldingthe protein. The protein was purified by a further step ofchromatography to remove endotoxin. Then, it was sterile filtered. Thesterile filtered protein preparation was stored in 2X PBS at aconcentration of 95 micrograms per mL.

Analysis of the preparation of TNF delta by standard methods ofpolyacrylamide gel electrophoresis revealed that the preparationcontained about 80% monomer having the expected molecular weight of,approximately, 20.8 kDa.

The protein is purified by chromatography on a nickel-chelate columnunder conditions that allow for type-binding by proteins containing the6-HIS tag. The protein is eluted from the column in 6-molar guanidineHCl pH 5.0 and renatured.

EXAMPLE 2 Cloning and Expression of Soluble Human TNF Delta and TNFEpsilon in a Baculovirus Expression System

The cDNA sequence encoding the full length human TNF delta or TNFepsilon protein, in the deposited clone is amplified using PCRoligonucleotide primers corresponding to the 5′ and 3′ sequences of thegene:

The 5′ primer has the sequence 5′ GCG GGA TCC CCA GAG CCT CAC CAC AG 3′(SEQ ID NO:9) containing the underlined BamHI restriction enzyme sitefollowed by 16 bases of the sequence of TNF delta or TNF epsilon ofFIGS. 1A and 1B and 2A and 2B. Inserted into an expression vector, asdescribed below, the 5′ end of the amplified fragment encoding human TNFdelta or TNF epsilon provides an efficient signal peptide. An efficientsignal for initiation of translation in eukaryotic cells, as describedby Kozak, M., J. Mol. Biol. 196: 947-950 (1987) is appropriately locatedin the vector portion of the construct.

The 3′ primer has the sequence 5′ CGC TCT AGA ACA ATC ACA GTT TCA CAA AC3′ (SEQ ID NO:10) containing the underlined XbaI restriction sitefollowed by nucleotides complementary to the last 13 nucleotides of theTNF delta or TNF epsilon coding sequence set out in FIGS. 1A and 1B and2A and 2B, including the stop codon.

The amplified fragment is isolated from a 1% agarose gel using acommercially available kit (“Geneclean,” BIO 101 Inc., La Jolla,Calif.). The fragment then is digested with BamHI and Asp718 and againis purified on a 1% agarose gel. This fragment is designated herein F2.

The vector pA2GP is used to express the TNF delta or TNF epsilon proteinin the baculovirus expression system, using standard methods, such asthose described in Summers et al, A Manual of Methods for BaculovirusVectors and Insect Cell Culture Procedures, Texas AgriculturalExperimental Station Bulletin No. 1555 (1987). This expression vectorcontains the strong polyhedrin promoter of the Autographa californicanuclear polyhedrosis virus (AcMNPV) followed by convenient restrictionsites. The signal peptide of AcMNPV gp67, including the N-terminalmethionine, is located just upstream of a BamHI site. Thepolyadenylation site of the simian virus 40 (“SV40”) is used forefficient polyadenylation. For an easy selection of recombinant virusthe beta-galactosidase gene from E. coli is inserted in the sameorientation as the polyhedrin promoter and is followed by thepolyadenylation signal of the polyhedrin gene. The polyhedrin sequencesare flanked at both sides by viral sequences for cell-mediatedhomologous recombination with wild-type viral DNA to generate viablevirus that express the cloned polynucleotide.

Many other baculovirus vectors could be used in place of pA2-GP, such aspAc373, pVL941 and pAcIM1 provided, as those of skill readily willappreciate, that construction provides appropriately located signals fortranscription, translation, trafficking and the like, such as anin-frame AUG and a signal peptide, as required. Such vectors aredescribed in Luckow et al., Virology, 170:31-39, among others.

The plasmid is digested with the restriction enzymes BamHI and XbaI andthen is dephosphorylated using calf intestinal phosphatase, usingroutine procedures known in the art. The DNA is then isolated from a 1%agarose gel using a commercially available kit (“Geneclean” BIO 101Inc., La Jolla, Calif.). This vector DNA is designated herein “V2”.

Fragment F2 and the dephosphorylated plasmid V2 are ligated togetherwith T4 DNA ligase. E. coli HB 101 cells are transformed with ligationmix and spread on culture plates. Bacteria are identified that containthe plasmid with the human TNF delta or TNF epsilon gene by digestingDNA from individual colonies using BamHI and XhaI and then analyzing thedigestion product by gel electrophoresis. The sequence of the clonedfragment is confirmed by DNA sequencing. This plasmid is designatedherein pBacTNF delta.

Five micrograms of the plasmid pBacTNF delta is co-transfected with 1.0microgram of a commercially available linearized baculovirus DNA(“BaculoGold™ baculovirus DNA”, Pharmingen, San Diego, Calif.), usingthe lipofection method described by Felgner et al., Proc. Natl. Acad.Sci. USA, 84:7413-7417 (1987). 1 microgram of BaculoGold™ virus DNA and5 micrograms of the plasmid pBacTNF delta are mixed in a sterile well ofa microtiter plate containing 50 microliters of serum free Grace'smedium (Life Technologies Inc., Gaithersburg, Md.). Afterwards 10microliters Lipofectin plus 90 microliters Grace's medium are added,mixed and incubated for 15 minutes at room temperature. Then thetransfection mixture is added drop-wise to Sf9 insect cells (ATCC CRL1711) seeded in a 35 mm tissue culture plate with 1 ml Grace's mediumwithout serum. The plate is rocked back and forth to mix the newly addedsolution. The plate is then incubated for 5 hours at 27° C. After 5hours the transfection solution is removed from the plate and 1 ml ofGrace's insect medium supplemented with 10% fetal calf serum is added.The plate is put back into an incubator and cultivation is continued at27° C. for four days.

After four days the supernatant is collected and a plaque assay isperformed, as described by Summers and Smith, cited above. An agarosegel with “Blue Gal” (Life Technologies Inc., Gaithersburg) is used toallow easy identification and isolation of gal-expressing clones, whichproduce blue-stained plaques. (A detailed description of a “plaqueassay” of this type can also be found in the user's guide for insectcell culture and baculovirology distributed by Life Technologies Inc.,Gaithersburg, page 9-10).

Four days after serial dilution, the virus is added to the cells. Afterappropriate incubation, blue stained plaques are picked with the tip ofan Eppendorf pipette. The agar containing the recombinant viruses isthen resuspended in an Eppendorf tube containing 200 microliters ofGrace's medium. The agar is removed by a brief centrifugation and thesupernatant containing the recombinant baculovirus is used to infect Sf9cells seeded in 35 mm dishes. Four days later the supernatants of theseculture dishes are harvested and then they are stored at 4° C. A clonecontaining properly inserted TNF delta or TNF epsilon is identified byDNA or TNF epsilon analysis including restriction mapping andsequencing. This is designated herein as V-TNF delta.

Sf9 cells are grown in Grace's medium supplemented with 10%heat-inactivated FBS. The cells are infected with the recombinantbaculovirus V-TNF delta at a multiplicity of infection (“MOI”) of about2 (about 1 to about 3). Six hours later the medium is removed and isreplaced with SF900 II medium minus methionine and cysteine (availablefrom Life Technologies Inc., Gaithersburg). 42 hours later, 5 FCi of35S-methionine and 5 FCi 35S cysteine (available from Amersham) areadded. The cells are further incubated for 16 hours and then they areharvested by centrifugation, lysed and the labeled proteins arevisualized by SDS-PAGE and autoradiography.

EXAMPLE 3 Tissue Distribution of TNF Delta Expression

Northern blot analysis was carried out to examine the levels ofexpression of TNF delta in human tissues, using methods described by,among others, Sambrook et al., cited above. Total cellular RNA samplesare isolated with RNAzol™ B system (Biotecx Laboratories, Inc. 6023South Loop East, Houston, Tex. 77033).

About 10 micrograms of Total RNA was isolated from tissue samples. TheRNA was size resolved by electrophoresis through a 1% agarose gel understrongly denaturing conditions. RNA was blotted from the gel onto anylon filter, and the filter then is prepared for hybridization to adetectably labeled polynucleotide probe.

As a probe to detect mRNA that encodes TNF delta, the antisense strandof the coding region of the cDNA insert in the deposited clone waslabeled to a high specific activity. The cDNA was labeled by primerextension, using the Prime-It kit, available from Stratagene. Thereaction was carried out using 50 nanograms of the cDNA, following thestandard reaction protocol as recommended by the supplier. The labeledpolynucleotide was purified away from other labeled reaction componentsby column chromatography using a Select-G-50 column, obtained from5-Prime - 3-Prime, Inc. of 5603 Arapahoe Road, Boulder, Colo. 80303.

The labeled probe was hybridized to the filter, at a concentration of1,000,000 cpm/ml, in a small volume of 7% SDS, 0.5 M NaPO₄, pH 7.4 at65° C, overnight.

Thereafter the probe solution was drained and the filter is washed twiceat room temperature and twice at 60° C. with 0.5×SSC, 0.1% SDS. Thefilter then is dried and exposed to film at −70° C. overnight with anintensifying screen.

Autoradiography shows that mRNA for TNF delta was detected in all 16tissues with highest expression in heart followed by placenta andkidney.

EXAMPLE 4 Gene Therapeutic Expression of Human TNF Delta or TNF Epsilon

Fibroblasts are obtained from a subject by skin biopsy. The resultingtissue is placed in tissue-culture medium and separated into smallpieces. Small chunks of the tissue are placed on a wet surface of atissue culture flask, approximately ten pieces are placed in each flask.The flask is turned upside down, closed tight and left at roomtemperature overnight. After 24 hours at room temperature, the flask isinverted—the chunks of tissue remain fixed to the bottom of theflask—and fresh media is added (e.g., Ham's F12 media, with 10% FBS,penicillin and streptomycin). The tissue is then incubated at 37° C. forapproximately one week. At this time, fresh media is added andsubsequently changed every several days. After an additional two weeksin culture, a monolayer of fibroblasts emerges. The monolayer istrypsinized and scaled into larger flasks.

A vector for gene therapy is digested with restriction enzymes forcloning a fragment to be expressed. The digested vector is treated withcalf intestinal phosphatase to prevent self-ligation. Thedephosphorylated, linear vector is fractionated on an agarose gel andpurified.

cDNA capable of expressing active TNF delta or TNF epsilon, is isolated.The ends of the fragment are modified, if necessary, for cloning intothe vector. For instance, 5” overhanging may be treated with DNApolymerase to create blunt ends. 3′ overhanging ends may be removedusing S1 nuclease. Linkers may be ligated to blunt ends with T4 DNAligase.

Equal quantities of the Moloney murine leukemia virus linear backboneand the TNF delta or TNF epsilon fragment are mixed together and joinedusing T4 DNA ligase. The ligation mixture is used to transform E. Coliand the bacteria are then plated onto agar-containing kanamycin.Kanamycin phenotype and restriction analysis confirm that the vector hasthe properly inserted gene.

Packaging cells are grown in tissue culture to confluent density inDulbecco's Modified Eagle's Medium (DMEM) with 10% calf serum (CS),penicillin and streptomycin. The vector containing the TNF delta or TNFepsilon gene is introduced into the packaging cells by standardtechniques. Infectious viral particles containing the TNF delta or TNFepsilon gene are collected from the packaging cells, which now arecalled producer cells.

Fresh media is added to the producer cells, and after an appropriateincubation period media is harvested from the plates of confluentproducer cells. The media, containing the infectious viral particles, isfiltered through a Millipore filter to remove detached producer cells.The filtered media then is used to infect fibroblast cells. Media isremoved from a sub-confluent plate of fibroblasts and quickly replacedwith the filtered media. Polybrene (Aldrich) may be included in themedia to facilitate transduction. After appropriate incubation, themedia is removed and replaced with fresh media. If the titer of virus ishigh, then virtually all fibroblasts will be infected and no selectionis required. If the titer is low, then it is necessary to use aretroviral vector that has a selectable marker, such as neo or his, toselect out transduced cells for expansion.

Engineered fibroblasts then may be injected into rats, either alone orafter having been grown to confluence on microcarrier beads, such ascytodex 3 beads. The injected fibroblasts produce TNF delta or TNFepsilon product, and the biological actions of the protein are conveyedto the host.

EXAMPLE 5 Gene Therapy Using Endogenous Human TNF Delta or TNF EpsilonGene

Another method of gene therapy according to the present inventioninvolves operably associating the endogenous TNF Delta and/or TNFEpsilon sequences with a promoter via homologous recombination asdescribed, for example, in U.S. Pat. No. 5,641,670, issued Jun. 24,1997; International Publication Number WO 96/29411, published Sep. 26,1996; International Publication Number WO 94/12650, published Aug. 4,1994; Koller et al., Proc. Natl. Acad. Sci. USA 86:8932-8935 (1989); andZijlstra et al., Nature 342:435-438 (1989). This method involves theactivation of a gene which is present in the target cells, but which isnot expressed in the cells, or is expressed at a lower level thandesired. Polynucleotide constructs are made which contain a promoter andtargeting sequences, which are homologous to the 5′ non-coding sequenceof endogenous TNF Delta and/or TNF Epsilon, flanking the promoter. Thetargeting sequence will be sufficiently near the 5′ end of TNF Deltaand/or TNF Epsilon so the promoter will be operably linked to theendogenous sequence upon homologous recombination. The promoter and thetargeting sequences can be amplified using PCR. Preferably, theamplified promoter contains distinct restriction enzyme sites on the 5′and 3′ ends. Preferably, the 3′ end of the first targeting sequencecontains the same restriction enzyme site as the 5′ end of the amplifiedpromoter and the 5′ end of the second targeting sequence contains thesame restriction site as the 3′ end of the amplified promoter.

The amplified promoter and the amplified targeting sequences aredigested with the appropriate restriction enzymes and subsequentlytreated with calf intestinal phosphatase. The digested promoter anddigested targeting sequences are added together in the presence of T4DNA ligase. The resulting mixture is maintained under conditionsappropriate for ligation of the two fragments. The construct is sizefractionated on an agarose gel then purified by phenol extraction andethanol precipitation.

In this Example, the polynucleotide constructs are administered as nakedpolynucleotides via electroporation. However, the polynucleotideconstructs may also be administered with transfection-facilitatingagents, such as liposomes, viral sequences, viral particles,precipitating agents, etc. Such methods of delivery are known in theart.

Once the cells are transfected, homologous recombination will take placewhich results in the promoter being operably linked to the endogenousTNF Delta and/or TNF Epsilon sequence. This results in the expression ofTNF Delta and/or TNF Epsilon in the cell. Expression may be detected byimmunological staining, or any other method known in the art.

Fibroblasts are obtained from a subject by skin biopsy. The resultingtissue is placed in DMEM+10% fetal calf serum. Exponentially growing orearly stationary phase fibroblasts are trypsinized and rinsed from theplastic surface with nutrient medium. An aliquot of the cell suspensionis removed for counting, and the remaining cells are subjected tocentrifugation. The supernatant is aspirated and the pellet isresuspended in 5 ml of electroporation buffer (20 mM HEPES pH 7.3, 137mM NaCl, 5 mM KCl, 0.7 mM Na2 HPO4, 6 mM dextrose). The cells arerecentrifuged, the supernatant aspirated, and the cells resuspended inelectroporation buffer containing 1 mg/ml acetylated bovine serumalbumin. The final cell suspension contains approximately 3×106cells/ml. Electroporation should be performed immediately followingresuspension.

Plasmid DNA is prepared according to standard techniques. For example,to construct a plasmid for targeting to the TNF Delta and/or TNF Epsilonlocus, plasmid pUC18 (MBI Fermentas, Amherst, N.Y.) is digested with HindIII. The CMV promoter is amplified by PCR with an Xba I site on the 5′end and a Bam HI site on the 3′end. Two TNF Delta and/or TNF Epsilonnon-coding sequences are amplified via PCR: one TNF Delta and/or TNFEpsilon non-coding sequence (TNF Delta and/or TNF Epsilon fragment 1) isamplified with a Hin dIII site at the 5′ end and an Xba site at the3′end; the other TNF Delta and/or TNF Epsilon non-coding sequence (TNFDelta and/or TNF Epsilon fragment 2) is amplified with a Bam HI site atthe 5′end and a Hin dIII site at the 3′end. The CMV promoter and TNFDelta and/or TNF Epsilon fragments are digested with the appropriateenzymes (CMV promoter—Xb aI and BamHI; TNF Delta and/or TNF Epsilonfragment 1—XbaI; TNF Delta and/or TNF Epsilon fragment 2—Bam HI) andligated together. The resulting ligation product is digested with HindIII, and ligated with the Hin dIII-digested pUC18 plasmid.

Plasmid DNA is added to a sterile cuvette with a 0.4 cm electrode gap(Bio-Rad). The final DNA concentration is generally at least 120microgram/milliliter. 0.5 ml of the cell suspension (containingapproximately 1.5.×10⁶ cells) is then added to the cuvette, and the cellsuspension and DNA solutions are gently mixed. Electroporation isperformed with a Gene-Pulser apparatus (Bio-Rad). Capacitance andvoltage are set at 960 microF and 250-300 V, respectively. As voltageincreases, cell survival decreases, but the percentage of survivingcells that stably incorporate the introduced DNA into their genomeincreases dramatically. Given these parameters, a pulse time ofapproximately 14-20 mSec should be observed.

Electroporated cells are maintained at room temperature forapproximately 5 min, and the contents of the cuvette are then gentlyremoved with a sterile transfer pipette. The cells are added directly to10 ml of prewarmed nutrient media (DMEM with 15% calf serum) in a 10 cmdish and incubated at 37 C. The following day, the media is aspiratedand replaced with 10 ml of fresh media and incubated for a further 16-24hours.

The engineered fibroblasts are then injected into the host, either aloneor after having been grown to confluence on cytodex 3 microcarrierbeads. The fibroblasts now produce the protein product. The fibroblastscan then be introduced into a patient as described above.

EXAMPLE 6 Assays to Detect Stimulation or Inhibition of B CellProliferation and Differentiation

Background:

Generation of functional humoral immune responses requires both solubleand cognate signaling between B-lineage cells and theirmicroenviromnent. Signals may impart a positive stimulus that allows aB-lineage cell to continue its programmed development, or a negativestimulus that instructs the cell to arrest its current developmentalpathway. To date, numerous stimulatory and inhibitory signals have beenfound to influence B cell responsiveness including IL-2, IL-4, IL-5,IL-6, IL-7, IL-10, IL-13, IL-14 and IL-15. Interestingly, these signalsare by themselves weak effectors but can, in combination with variousco-stimulatory proteins, induce activation, proliferation,differentiation, homing, tolerance and death among B cell populations.One of the best studied classes of B-cell co-stimulatory proteins is theTNF-superfamily. Within this family CD40, CD27, and CD30 along withtheir respective ligands CD154, CD70, and CD153 have been found toregulate a variety of immune responses. Assays which allow for thedetection and/or observation of the proliferation and differentiation ofthese B-cell populations and their precursors are valuable tools indetermining the effects various proteins may have on these B-cellpopulations in terms of proliferation and differentiation. Listed beloware two assays designed to allow for the detection of thedifferentiation, proliferation, or inhibition of B-cell populations andtheir precursors.

Experimental Procedures:

In Vitro assay: Purified TNF Delta and/or TNF Epsilon protein, ortruncated forms thereof, is assessed for its ability to induceactivation, proliferation, differentiation or inhibition and/or death inB-cell populations and their precursors. The activity of TNF Deltaand/or TNF Epsilon protein on purified human tonsillar B cells, measuredqualitatively over the dose range from 0.1 to 10,000 ng/mL, is assessedin a standard B-lymphocyte co-stimulation assay in which purifiedtonsillar B cells are cultured in the presence of either formalin-fixedStaphylococcus aureus Cowan I (SAC) or immobilized anti-human IgMantibody as the priming agent. Second signals such as IL-2 and L-15synergize with SAC and IgM crosslinking to elicit B cell proliferationas measured by tritiated-thymidine incorporation. Novel synergizingagents can be readily identified using this assay. The assay involvesisolating human tonsillar B cells by magnetic bead (MACS) depletion ofCD3-positive cells. The resulting cell population is greater than 95% Bcells as assessed by expression of CD45R(B220). Various dilutions ofeach sample are placed into individual wells of a 96-well plate to whichare added 10⁵ B-cells suspended in culture medium (RPMI 1640 containing10% FBS, 5×10⁻⁵M 2ME, 100 U/ml penicillin, 10 ug/ml streptomycin, and10⁻⁵ dilution of SAC) in a total volume of 150 ul. Proliferation orinhibition is quantitated by a 20 h pulse (1 uCi/well) with ³H-thymidine(6.7 Ci/mM) beginning 72 h post factor addition. The positive andnegative controls are IL2 and medium respectively.

In Vivo assay: BALB/c mice are injected (i.p.) twice per day with bufferonly, or 2 mg/Kg of TNF Delta and/or TNF Epsilon protein, or truncatedforms thereof. Mice receive this treatment for 4 consecutive days, atwhich time they are sacrificed and various tissues and serum collectedfor analyses. Comparison of H&E sections from normal and TNF Deltaand/or TNF Epsilon protein-treated spleens identify the results of theactivity of TNF Delta and/or TNF Epsilon protein on spleen cells, suchas the diffusion of peri-arterial lymphatic sheaths, and/or significantincreases in the nucleated cellularity of the red pulp regions, whichmay indicate the activation of the differentiation and proliferation ofB-cell populations. Immunohistochemical studies using a B cell marker,anti-CD45R(B220), are used to determine whether any physiologicalchanges to splenic cells, such as splenic disorganization, are due toincreased B-cell representation within loosely defined B-cell zones thatinfiltrate established T-cell regions.

Flow cytometric analyses of the spleens from TNF Delta and/or TNFEpsilon protein-treated mice is used to indicate whether TNF Deltaand/or TNF Epsilon protein specifically increases the proportion ofThB+, CD45R(B220)dull B cells over that which is observed in controlmice.

Likewise, a predicted consequence of increased mature B-cellrepresentation in vivo is a relative increase in serum Ig titers.Accordingly, serum IgM and IgA levels are compared between buffer andTNF Delta and/or TNF Epsilon protein-treated mice.

EXAMPLE 7 Protein Fusions of TNF Delta and/or TNF Epsilon

TNF Delta and/or TNF Epsilon polypeptides of the invention areoptionally fused to other proteins. These fusion proteins can be usedfor a variety of applications. For example, fusion of TNF Delta and/orTNF Epsilon polypeptides to His-tag, HA-tag, protein A, IgG domains, andmaltose binding protein facilitates purification. (See EP A 394,827;Traunecker, et al., Nature 331:84-86 (1988).) Similarly, fusion toIgG-1, IgG-3, and albumin increases the halflife time in vivo. Nuclearlocalization signals fused to TNF Delta and/or TNF Epsilon polypeptidescan target the protein to a specific subcellular localization, whilecovalent heterodimer or homodimers can increase or decrease the activityof a fusion protein. Fusion proteins can also create chimeric moleculeshaving more than one function. Finally, fusion proteins can increasesolubility and/or stability of the fused protein compared to thenon-fused protein. All of the types of fusion proteins described abovecan be made using techniques known in the art or by using or routinelymodifying the following protocol, which outlines the fusion of apolypeptide to an IgG molecule

GGGATCCGGAGCCCAAATCTTCTGACAAAACTCACACATGCCCACCGTGCCCAGCACCTGAATTCGAGGGTGCACCGTCAGT(SEQ ID NO:14)CTTCCTCTTCCCCCCAAAACCCAAGGACACCCTCATGATCTCCCGGACTCCTGAGGTCACATGCGTGGTGGTGGACGTAAGCCACGAAGACCCTGAGGTCAAGTTCAACTGGTACGTGGACGGCGTGGAGGTGCATAATGCCAAGACAAAGCCGCGGGAGGAGCAGTACAACAGCACGTACCGTGTGGTCAGCGTCCTCACCGTCCTGCACCAGGACTGGCTGAATGGCAAGGAGTACAAGTGCAAGGTCTCCAACAAAGCCCTCCCAACCCCCATCGAGAAAACCATCTCCAAAGCCAAAGGGCAGCCCCGAGAACCACAGGTGTACACCCTGCCCCCATCCCGGGATGAGCTGACCAAGAACCAGGTCAGCCTGACCTGCCTGGTCAAAGGCTTCTATCCAAGCGACATCGCCGTGGAGTGGGAGAGCAATGGGCAGCCGGAGAACAACTACAAGACCACGCCTCCCGTGCTGGACTCCGACGGCTCCTTCTTCCTCTACAGCAAGCTCACCGTGGACAAGAGCAGGTGGCAGCAGGGGAACGTCTTCTCATGCTCCGTGATGCATGAGGCTCTGCACAACCACTACACGCAGAAGAGCCTCTCCCTGTCTCCGGGTAAATGAGTGCGACGGCCGCGACTCTAGAGGAT.

Briefly, the human Fc portion of the IgG molecule can be PCR amplified,using primers that span the 5′ and 3′ ends of the sequence describedbelow. These primers also preferably contain convenient restrictionenzyme sites that will facilitate cloning into an expression vector,preferably a mammalian expression vector.

For example, if the pC4 (ATCC Accession No. 209646) expression vector isused, the human Fc portion can be ligated into the Bam HI cloning site.Note that the 3′ Bam HI site should be destroyed. Next, the vectorcontaining the human Fc portion is re-restricted with Bam HI,linearizing the vector, and TNF Delta and/or TNF Epsilon polynucleotide,isolated by the PCR protocol described in Example 1, is ligated intothis BamHI site. Note that the polynucleotide is cloned without a stopcodon, otherwise a fusion protein will not be produced.

If the naturally occurring signal sequence is used to produce thesecreted protein, pC4 does not need a second signal peptide.Alternatively, if the naturally occurring signal sequence is not used,the vector can be modified to include a heterologous signal sequence.(See, e.g., WO 96/34891.)

EXAMPLE 8 Isolation of Antibody Fragments Directed Against TNF Deltaand/or TNF Epsilon Polypeptides from a Library of scFvs

Naturally occuring V-genes isolated from human PBLs are constructed intoa large library of antibody fragments which contain reactivities againstpolypeptides of the present invention to which the donor may or may nothave been exposed (see e.g., U.S. Pat. No. 5,885,793 incorporated hereinin its entirety by reference).

Rescue of the library

A library of scFvs is constructed from the RNA of human PBLs asdescribed in WO92/01047. To rescue phage displaying antibody fragments,approximately 10⁹ E. coli harbouring the phagemid are used to inoculate50 ml of 2×TY containing 1% glucose and 100 ug/ml of ampicillin(2×TY-AMP-GLU) and grown to an O.D. of 0.8 with shaking. Five ml of thisculture is used to innoculate 50 ml of 2×TY-AMP-GLU, 2×10⁸ TU of Deltagene 3 helper phage (M13 Delta gene III, see WO92/01047) are added andthe culture incubated at 37 C for 45 minutes without shaking and then at37 C for 45 minutes with shaking. The culture is centrifuged at 4000r.p.m. for 10 minutes and the pellet resuspended in 2 liters of 2×TYcontaining 100 ug/ml ampicillin and 50 ug/ml kanamycin and grownovernight. Phage are prepared as described in WO92/01047.

M13 Delta gene III is prepared as follows: M13 delta gene III helperphage does not encode gene III protein, hence the phage(mid) displayingantibody fragments have a greater avidity of binding to antigen.Infectious M13 delta gene III particles are made by growing the helperphage in cells harbouring a pUC19 derivative supplying the wild typegene III protein during phage morphogenesis. The culture is incubatedfor 1 hour at 37 C without shaking and then for a further hour at 37 Cwith shaking. Cells are pelleted (IEC-Centra 8, 4000 revs/min for 10min), resuspended in 300 ml 2×TY broth containing 100 ug ampicillin/mland 25 ug kanamycin/ml (2×TY-AMP-KAN) and grown overnight, shaking at 37C. Phage particles are purified and concentrated from the culture mediumby two PEG-precipitations (Sambrook et al., 1990), resuspended in 2 mlPBS and passed through a 0.45 um filter (Minisart NML; Sartorius) togive a final concentration of approximately 10¹³ transducing units/ml(ampicillin-resistant clones).

Panning of the library

Immunotubes (Nunc) are coated overnight in PBS with 4 ml of either 100mg/ml or 10 mg/ml of a polypeptide of the present invention. Tubes areblocked with 2% Marvel-PBS for 2 hours at 37 C and then washed 3 timesin PBS. Approximately 10¹³ TU of phage are applied to the tube andincubated for 30 minutes at room temperature tumbling on an over andunder turntable and then left to stand for another 1.5 hours. Tubes arewashed 10 times with PBS 0.1% Tween-20 and 10 times with PBS. Phage areeluted by adding 1 ml of 100 mM triethylarnine and rotating 15 minuteson an under and over turntable after which the solution is immediatelyneutralized with 0.5 ml of 1.0M Tris-HCl, pH 7.4. Phage are then used toinfect 10 ml of mid-log E. coli TG1 by incubating eluted phage withbacteria for 30 minutes at 37 C. The E. coli are then plated on TYEplates containing 1% glucose and 100 ug/ml ampicillin. The resultingbacterial library is then rescued with delta gene III helper phage asdescribed above to prepare phage for a subsequent round of selection.This process is then repeated for a total of 4 rounds of affinitypurification with tube-washing increased to 20 times with PBS, 0. 1%Tween-20 and 20 times with PBS for rounds 3 and 4.

Characterization of binders

Eluted phage from the 3rd and 4th rounds of selection are used to infectE. coli HB 2151 and soluble scFv is produced (Marks, et al., 1991) fromsingle colonies for assay. ELISAs are performed with microtitre platescoated with either 10 pg/ml of the polypeptide of the present inventionin 50 mM bicarbonate pH 9.6. Clones positive in ELISA are furthercharacterized by PCR fingerprinting (see e.g., WO92/01047) and then bysequencing.

EXAMPLE 9 Method of Determining Alterations in the TNF Delta and/or TNFEpsilon Gene

RNA is isolated from entire families or individual patients presentingwith a phenotype of interest (such as a disease). cDNA is then generatedfrom these RNA samples using protocols known in the art. (See,Sambrook.) The cDNA is then used as a template for PCR, employingprimers surrounding regions of interest in SEQ ID NO: 1. Suggested PCRconditions consist of 35 cycles at 95° C. for 30 seconds; 60-120 secondsat 52-58° C.; and 60-120 seconds at 70° C., using buffer solutionsdescribed in Sidransky, D., et al., Science 252:706 (1991).

PCR products are then sequenced using primers labeled at their 5′ endwith T4 polynucleotide kinase, employing SequiTherm Polymerase.(Epicentre Technologies). The intron-exon borders of selected exons ofTNF Delta and/or TNF Epsilon are also determined and genomic PCRproducts analyzed to confirm the results. PCR products harboringsuspected mutations in TNF Delta and/or TNF Epsilon is then cloned andsequenced to validate the results of the direct sequencing.

PCR products of TNF Delta and/or TNF Epsilon are cloned into T-tailedvectors as described in Holton, T. A. and Graham, M. W., Nucleic AcidsResearch, 19:1156 (1991) and sequenced with T7 polymerase (United StatesBiochemical). Affected individuals are identified by mutations in TNFDelta and/or TNF Epsilon not present in unaffected individuals.

Genomic rearrangements are also observed as a method of determiningalterations in the TNF Delta and/or TNF Epsilon gene. Genomic clonesisolated using techniques known in the art are nick-translated withdigoxigenindeoxy-uridine 5′-triphosphate (Boehringer Manheim), and FISHperformed as described in Johnson, Cg. et al., Methods Cell Biol.35:73-99 (1991). Hybridization with the labeled probe is carried outusing a vast excess of human cot-I DNA for specific hybridization to theTNF Delta and/or TNF Epsilon genomic locus.

Chromosomes are counterstained with 4,6-diamino-2-phenylidole andpropidium iodide, producing a combination of C- and R-bands. Alignedimages for precise mapping are obtained using a triple-band filter set(Chroma Technology, Brattleboro, Vt.) in combination with a cooledcharge-coupled device camera (Photometrics, Tucson, Ariz.) and variableexcitation wavelength filters. (Johnson, Cv. et al., Genet. Anal. Tech.Appl., 8:75 (1991).) Image collection, analysis and chromosomalfractional length measurements are performed using the ISee GraphicalProgram System. (Inovision Corporation, Durham, N.C.) Chromosomealterations of the genomic region of TNF Delta and/or TNF Epsilon(hybridized by the probe) are identified as insertions, deletions, andtranslocations. These TNF Delta and/or TNF Epsilon alterations are usedas a diagnostic marker for an associated disease.

EXAMPLE 10 Method of Detecting Abnormal Levels of TNF Delta and/or TNFEpsilon in a Biological Sample

TNF Delta and/or TNF Epsilon polypeptides can be detected in abiological sample, and if an increased or decreased level of TNF Deltaand/or TNF Epsilon is detected, this polypeptide is a marker for aparticular phenotype. Methods of detection are numerous, and thus, it isunderstood that one skilled in the art can modify the following assay tofit their particular needs.

For example, antibody-sandwich ELISAs are used to detect TNF Deltaand/or TNF Epsilon in a sample, preferably a biological sample. Wells ofa microtiter plate are coated with specific antibodies to TNF Deltaand/or TNF Epsilon, at a final concentration of 0.2 to 10 ug/ml. Theantibodies are either monoclonal or polyclonal and are produced usingtechnique known in the art. The wells are blocked so that non-specificbinding of TNF Delta and/or TNF Epsilon to the well is reduced.

The coated wells are then incubated for >2 hours at RT with a samplecontaining TNF Delta and/or TNF Epsilon. Preferably, serial dilutions ofthe sample should be used to validate results. The plates are thenwashed three times with deionized or distilled water to remove unboundedTNF Delta and/or TNF Epsilon.

Next, 50 ul of specific antibody-alkaline phosphatase conjugate, at aconcentration of 25-400 ng, is added and incubated for 2 hours at roomtemperature. The plates are again washed three times with deionized ordistilled water to remove unbounded conjugate.

75 ul of 4-methylumbelliferyl phosphate (MUP) or p-nitrophenyl phosphate(NPP) substrate solution is then added to each well and incubated 1 hourat room temperature to allow cleavage of the substrate and flourescence.The flourescence is measured by a microtiter plate reader. A standardcurve is preparded using the experimental results from serial dilutionsof a control sample with the sample concentration plotted on the X-axis(log scale) and fluorescence or absorbance on the Y-axis (linear scale).The TNF Delta and/or TNF Epsilon polypeptide concentration in a sampleis then interpolated using the standard curve based on the measuredflourescence of that sample.

EXAMPLE 11 Method of Treating Decreased Levels of TNF Delta and/or TNFEpsilon

The present invention relates to a method for treating an individual inneed of a decreased level of TNF Delta and/or TNF Epsilon biologicalactivity in the body comprising, administering to such an individual acomposition comprising a therapeutically effective amount of TNF Deltaand/or TNF Epsilon antagonist. Preferred antagonists for use in thepresent invention are TNF Delta- and/or TNF Epsilon-specific antibodies.

Moreover, it will be appreciated that conditions caused by a decrease inthe standard or normal expression level of TNF Delta and/or TNF Epsilonin an individual can be treated by administering TNF Delta and/or TNFEpsilon, preferably in a soluble and/or secreted form. Thus, theinvention also provides a method of treatment of an individual in needof an increased level of TNF Delta and/or TNF Epsilon polypeptidecomprising administering to such an individual a pharmaceuticalcomposition comprising an amount of TNF Delta and/or TNF Epsilon toincrease the biological activity level of TNF Delta and/or TNF Epsilonin such an individual.

For example, a patient with decreased levels of TNF Delta and/or TNFEpsilon polypeptide receives a daily dose 0.1-100 ug/kg of thepolypeptide for six consecutive days. Preferably, the polypeptide is ina soluble and/or secreted form.

EXAMPLE 12 Method of Treating Increased Levels of TNF Delta and/or TNFEpsilon

The present invention also relates to a method for treating anindividual in need of an increased level of TNF Delta and/or TNF Epsilonbiological activity in the body comprising administering to such anindividual a composition comprising a therapeutically effective amountof TNF Delta and/or TNF Epsilon or an agonist thereof.

Antisense technology is used to inhibit production of TNF Delta and/orTNF Epsilon. This technology is one example of a method of decreasinglevels of TNF Delta and/or TNF Epsilon polypeptide, preferably a solubleand/or secreted form, due to a variety of etiologies, such as cancer.

For example, a patient diagnosed with abnormally increased levels of TNFDelta and/or TNF Epsilon is administered intravenously antisensepolynucleotides at 0.5, 1.0, 1.5, 2.0 and 3.0 mg/kg day for 21 days.This treatment is repeated after a 7-day rest period if the isdetermined to be well tolerated.

EXAMPLE 13 Method of Treatment Using Gene Therapy—Ex Vivo

One method of gene therapy transplants fibroblasts, which are capable ofexpressing soluble and/or mature TNF Delta and/or TNF Epsilonpolypeptides, onto a patient. Generally, fibroblasts are obtained from asubject by skin biopsy. The resulting tissue is placed in tissue-culturemedium and separated into small pieces. Small chunks of the tissue areplaced on a wet surface of a tissue culture flask, approximately tenpieces are placed in each flask. The flask is turned upside down, closedtight and left at room temperature over night. After 24 hours at roomtemperature, the flask is inverted and the chunks of tissue remain fixedto the bottom of the flask and fresh media (e.g., Ham's F12 media, with10% FBS, penicillin and streptomycin) is added. The flasks are thenincubated at 37 C for approximately one week.

At this time, fresh media is added and subsequently changed everyseveral days. After an additional two weeks in culture, a monolayer offibroblasts emerge. The monolayer is trypsinized and scaled into largerflasks.

pMV-7 (Kirschmeier, P. T. et al., DNA, 7:219-25 (1988)), flanked by thelong terminal repeats of the Moloney murine sarcoma virus, is digestedwith EcoRI and HindIII and subsequently treated with calf intestinalphosphatase. The linear vector is fractionated on agarose gel andpurified, using glass beads.

The cDNA encoding TNF Delta and/or TNF Epsilon can be amplified usingPCR primers which correspond to the 5′ and 3′ end encoding sequencesrespectively. Preferably, the 5′ primer contains an EcoRI site and the3′ primer includes a HindIII site. Equal quantities of the Moloneymurine sarcoma virus linear backbone and the amplified EcoRI and HindIIIfragment are added together, in the presence of T4 DNA ligase. Theresulting mixture is maintained under conditions appropriate forligation of the two fragments. The ligation mixture is then used totransform E. coli HB101, which are then plated onto agar containingkanamycin for the purpose of confirming that the vector containsproperly inserted TNF Delta and/or TNF Epsilon.

The amphotropic pA317 or GP+am12 packaging cells are grown in tissueculture to confluent density in Dulbecco's Modified Eagles Medium (DMEM)with 10% calf serum (CS), penicillin and streptomycin. The MSV vectorcontaining the TNF Delta and/or TNF Epsilon gene is then added to themedia and the packaging cells transduced with the vector. The packagingcells now produce infectious viral particles containing the TNF Deltaand/or TNF Epsilon gene (the packaging cells are now referred to asproducer cells).

Fresh media is added to the transduced producer cells, and subsequently,the media is harvested from a 10 cm plate of confluent producer cells.The spent media, containing the infectious viral particles, is filteredthrough a millipore filter to remove detached producer cells and thismedia is then used to infect fibroblast cells. Media is removed from asub-confluent plate of fibroblasts and quickly replaced with the mediafrom the producer cells. This media is removed and replaced with freshmedia. If the titer of virus is high, then virtually all fibroblastswill be infected and no selection is required. If the titer is very low,then it is necessary to use a retroviral vector that has a selectablemarker, such as neo or his. Once the fibroblasts have been efficientlyinfected, the fibroblasts are analyzed to determine whether TNF Deltaand/or TNF Epsilon protein is produced. The engineered fibroblasts arethen transplanted onto the host, either alone or after having been grownto confluence on cytodex 3 microcarrier beads.

EXAMPLE 14 Method of Treatment Using Gene Therapy—In Vivo

Another aspect of the present invention is using in vivo gene therapymethods to treat disorders, diseases and conditions. The gene therapymethod relates to the introduction of naked nucleic acid (DNA, RNA, andantisense DNA or RNA) TNF Delta and/or TNF Epsilon sequences into ananimal to increase or decrease the expression of the TNF Delta and/orTNF Epsilon polypeptide. The TNF Delta and/or TNF Epsilon polynucleotidemay be operatively linked to a promoter or any other genetic elementsnecessary for the expression of the TNF Delta and/or TNF Epsilonpolypeptide by the target tissue. Such gene therapy and deliverytechniques and methods are known in the art, see, for example,WO90/11092, WO98/11779; U.S. Pat. Nos. 5,693,622, 5,705,151, 5,580,859;Tabata H. et al., Cardiovasc. Res. 35:470-479 (1997); Chao J. et al.,Pharmacol. Res. 35:517-522 (1997); Wolff J. A. Neuromuscul. Disord.7:314-318 (1997); Schwartz B. et al., Gene Ther. 3:405-411 (1996);Tsurumi Y. et al., Circulation 94:3281-3290 (1996) (incorporated hereinby reference).

The TNF Delta and/or TNF Epsilon polynucleotide constructs may bedelivered by any method that delivers injectable materials to the cellsof an animal, such as, injection into the interstitial space of tissues(heart, muscle, skin, lung, liver, intestine and the like). The TNFDelta and/or TNF Epsilon polynucleotide constructs can be delivered in apharmaceutically acceptable liquid or aqueous carrier.

The term “naked” polynucleotide, DNA or RNA, refers to sequences thatare free from any delivery vehicle that acts to assist, promote, orfacilitate entry into the cell, including viral sequences, viralparticles, liposome formulations, lipofectin or precipitating agents andthe like. However, the TNF Delta and/or TNF Epsilon polynucleotides mayalso be delivered in liposome formulations (such as those taught inFelgner P. L., et al. Ann. NY Acad. Sci. 772:126-139 (1995), andAbdallah B., et al. Biol. Cell 85(l):1-7 (1995)) which can be preparedby methods well known to those skilled in the art.

The TNF Delta and/or TNF Epsilon polynucleotide vector constructs usedin the gene therapy method are preferably constructs that will notintegrate into the host genome nor will they contain sequences thatallow for replication. Any strong promoter known to those skilled in theart can be used for driving the expression of DNA. Unlike other genetherapies techniques, one major advantage of introducing naked nucleicacid sequences into target cells is the transitory nature of thepolynucleotide synthesis in the cells. Studies have shown thatnon-replicating DNA sequences can be introduced into cells to provideproduction of the desired polypeptide for periods of up to six months.

The TNF Delta and/or TNF Epsilon polynucleotide construct can bedelivered to the interstitial space of tissues within the an animal,including of muscle, skin, brain, lung, liver, spleen, bone marrow,thymus, heart, lymph, blood, bone, cartilage, pancreas, kidney, gallbladder, stomach, intestine, testis, ovary, uterus, rectum, nervoussystem, eye, gland, and connective tissue. Interstitial space of thetissues comprises the intercellular fluid, mucopolysaccharide matrixamong the reticular fibers of organ tissues, elastic fibers in the wallsof vessels or chambers, collagen fibers of fibrous tissues, or that samematrix within connective tissue ensheathing muscle cells or in thelacunae of bone. It is similarly the space occupied by the plasma of thecirculation and the lymph fluid of the lymphatic channels. Delivery tothe interstitial space of muscle tissue is preferred for the reasonsdiscussed below. They may be conveniently delivered by injection intothe tissues comprising these cells. They are preferably delivered to andexpressed in persistent, non-dividing cells which are differentiated,although delivery and expression may be achieved in non-differentiatedor less completely differentiated cells, such as, for example, stemcells of blood or skin fibroblasts. In vivo muscle cells areparticularly competent in their ability to take up and expresspolynucleotides.

For the naked TNF Delta and/or TNF Epsilon polynucleotide injection, aneffective dosage amount of DNA or RNA will be in the range of from about0.05 g/kg body weight to about 50 mg/kg body weight. Preferably thedosage will be from about 0.005 mg/kg to about 20 mg/kg and morepreferably from about 0.05 mg/kg to about 5 mg/kg. Of course, as theartisan of ordinary skill will appreciate, this dosage will varyaccording to the tissue site of injection. The appropriate and effectivedosage of nucleic acid sequence can readily be determined by those ofordinary skill in the art and may depend on the condition being treatedand the route of administration. The preferred route of administrationis by the parenteral route of injection into the interstitial space oftissues. However, other parenteral routes may also be used, such as,inhalation of an aerosol formulation particularly for delivery to lungsor bronchial tissues, throat or mucous membranes of the nose. Inaddition, naked TNF Delta and/or TNF Epsilon polynucleotide constructscan be delivered to arteries during angioplasty by the catheter used inthe procedure.

The dose response effects of injected TNF Delta and/or TNF Epsilonpolynucleotide in muscle in vivo is determined as follows. Suitable TNFDelta and/or TNF Epsilon template DNA for production of mRNA coding forTNF Delta and/or TNF Epsilon polypeptide is prepared in accordance witha standard recombinant DNA methodology. The template DNA, which may beeither circular or linear, is either used as naked DNA or complexed withliposomes. The quadriceps muscles of mice are then injected with variousamounts of the template DNA.

Five to six week old female and male Balb/C mice are anesthetized byintraperitoneal injection with 0.3 ml of 2.5% Avertin. A 1.5 cm incisionis made on the anterior thigh, and the quadriceps muscle is directlyvisualized. The template DNA is injected in 0.1 ml of carrier in a 1 ccsyringe through a 27 gauge needle over one minute, approximately 0.5 cmfrom the distal insertion site of the muscle into the knee and about 0.2cm deep. A suture is placed over the injection site for futurelocalization, and the skin is closed with stainless steel clips.

After an appropriate incubation time (e.g., 7 days) muscle extracts areprepared by excising the entire quadriceps. Every fifth 15 umcross-section of the individual quadriceps muscles is histochemicallystained for TNF Delta and/or TNF Epsilon protein expression. A timecourse for TNF Delta and/or TNF Epsilon protein expression may be donein a similar fashion except that quadriceps from different mice areharvested at different times. Persistence of TNF Delta and/or TNFEpsilon DNA in muscle following injection may be determined by Southernblot analysis after preparing total cellular DNA and HIRT supernatantsfrom injected and control mice. The results of the above experimentationin mice can be use to extrapolate proper dosages and other treatmentparameters in humans and other animals using TNF Delta and/or TNFEpsilon naked DNA.

EXAMPLE 15 T Cell Proliferation, Costimulation, and PrestimulationProliferation Assays

Proliferation assay for Resting PBLs.

A CD3-induced proliferation assay is performed on PBMCs and is measuredby the uptake of ³H-thymidine. The assay is performed as follows.Ninety-six well plates are coated with 100 microliters per well of mAbto CD3 (HIT3a, Pharmingen) or isotype-matched control mAb (B33.1)overnight at 4 C (1 microgram/ml in 0.05M bicarbonate buffer, pH 9.5),then washed three times with PBS. PBMC are isolated by F/H gradientcentrifugation from human peripheral blood and added to quadruplicatewells (5×10⁴/well) of mAb coated plates in RPMI containing 10% FCS andP/S in the presence of varying concentrations of TNF Delta and/or TNFEpsilon protein (total volume 200 microliters). Relevant protein bufferand medium alone are controls. After 48 hr. culture at 37 C, plates arespun for 2 min. at 1000 rpm and 100 microliters of supernatant isremoved and stored −20 C for measurement of IL-2 (or other cytokines) ifeffect on proliferation is observed. Wells are supplemented with 100microliters of medium containing 0.5 microcuries of ³H-thymidine andcultured at 37 C for 18-24 hr. Wells are harvested and incorporation of³H-thymidine used as a measure of proliferation. Anti-CD3 alone is thepositive control for proliferation. IL-2 (100 U/ml) is also used as acontrol which enhances proliferation. Control antibody which does notinduce proliferation of T cells is used as the negative controls for theeffects of TNF Delta and/or TNF Epsilon proteins.

Alternatively, a proliferation assay on resting PBL (peripheral bloodlymphocytes) is measured by the up-take of ³H-thymidine. The assay isperformed as follows. PBMC are isolated by F/H gradient centrifugationfrom human peripheral blood, and are cultured overnight in 10% FCS/RPMI.This overnight incubation period allows the adherent cells to attach tothe plastic, which results in a lower background in the assay as thereare fewer cells that can act as antigen presenting cells or that mightbe producing growth factors. The following day the non-adherent cellsare collected, washed and used in the proliferation assay. The assay isperformed in a 96 well plate using 2 x104 cells/well in a final volumeof 200 microliters. A supernatant expressing TNF-delta and/orTNF-epsilon is tested at a 30% final dilution, therefore 60 microlitersare added to 140 microliters of medium containing the cells. Controlsupernatants are used at the same final dilution and express thefollowing proteins: vector only (negative control), IL-2, IFNgamma,TNF-alpha, IL-10 and TR2. In addition to the control supernatantsrecombinant human IL-2 at a final concentration of 100 ng/ml is alsoused. After 24 hours of culture, each well is pulsed with 1 microcurieof ³H-thymidine. Cells are then harvested 20 hours following pulsing andincorporation of ³H-thymidine is used as a measure of proliferation.Results are expressed as an average of triplicate samples plus or minusstandard error.

Costimulation assay.

A costimulation assay on resting PBL (peripheral blood lymphocytes) isperformed in the presence of immobilized antibodies to CD3 and CD28. Theuse of antibodies specific for the invariant regions of CD3 mimic theinduction of T cell activation that would occur through stimulation ofthe T cell receptor by an antigen. Cross-linking of the TCR (firstsignal) in the absence of a costimulatory signal (second signal) causesvery low induction of proliferation and will eventually result in astate of “anergy”, which is characterized by the absence of growth andinability to produce cytokines. The addition of a costimulatory signalsuch as an antibody to CD28, which mimics the action of thecostimulatory molecule B7-1 expressed on activated APCs, results inenhancement of T cell responses including cell survival and productionof IL-2. Therefore this type of assay allows to detect both positive andnegative effects caused by addition of supernatants expressing theproteins of interest on T cell proliferation.

The assay is performed as follows. Ninety-six well plates are coatedwith 100 ng/ml anti-CD3 and 5 micrograms per milliliter anti-CD28 in afinal volume of 100 microliters and incubated overnight at 4 C. Platesare washed twice with PBS before use. PBMC are isolated by F/H gradientcentrifugation from human peripheral blood, and are cultured overnightin 10% FCS/RPMI. This overnight incubation period allows the adherentcells to attach to the plastic, which results in a lower background inthe assay as there are fewer cells that can act as antigen presentingcells or that might be producing growth factors. The following day thenon-adherent cells are collected, washed and used in the proliferationassay. The assay is performed in a 96 well plate using 2 x104 cells/wellin a final volume of 200 microliters. A supernatant expressing TNF-deltaand/or TNF-epsilon is tested at a 30% final dilution, therefore 60microliters are added to 140 microliters of medium containing the cells.Control supernatants are used at the same final dilution and express thefollowing proteins: vector only (negative control), IL-2, IFN-gamma,TNF-alpha, IL-10 and TR2. In addition to the control supernatantsrecombinant human IL-2 at a final concentration of 10 ng/ml is alsoused. After 24 hours of culture, each well is pulsed with 1 microcurieof ³H-thymidine. Cells are then harvested 20 hours following pulsing andincorporation of ³H-thymidine is used as a measure of proliferation.Results are expressed as an average of triplicate samples plus or minusstandard error.

Proliferation assay for preactivated-resting T cells.

A proliferation assay on preactivated-resting T cells is performed oncells that are previously activated with the lectin phytohemagglutinin(PHA). Lectins are polymeric plant proteins that can bind to residues onT cell surface glycoproteins including the TCR and act as polyclonalactivators. PBLs treated with PHA and then cultured in the presence oflow doses of IL-2 resemble effector T cells. These cells are generallymore sensitive to further activation induced by growth factors such asIL-2. This is due to the expression of high affinity IL-2 receptors thatallows this population to respond to amounts of IL-2 that are 100 foldlower than what would have an effect on a naive T cell. Therefore theuse of this type of cells might enable to detect the effect of very lowdoses of an unknown growth factor, that would not be sufficient toinduce proliferation on resting (naive) T cells.

The assay is performed as follows. PBMC are isolated by F/H gradientcentrifugation from human peripheral blood, and are cultured in thepresence of 2 micrograms per milliliter PHA for three days. The cellsare then washed and cultured in the presence of 5 ng/ml of humanrecombinant IL-2 for 3 days. The cells are washed and rested instarvation medium (1% FCS/RPMI) for 16 hours prior to the beginning ofthe proliferation assay. An aliquot of the cells is analyzed by FACS todetermine the percentage of T cells (CD3 positive cells), usually itranges between 93-97% depending on the donor. The assay is performed ina 96 well plate using 2×10⁴ cells/well in a final volume of 200microliters. A supernatant expressing TNF-delta and/or TNF-epsilon istested at a 30% final dilution, therefore 60 microliters are added to140 microliters of medium containing the cells. Control supernatants areused at the same final dilution and express the following proteins:vector only (negative control), IL-2, IFN-gamma, TNF-alpha, IL-10 andTR2. In addition to the control supernatants recombinant human IL-2 at afinal concentration of 10 ng/ml is also used. After 24 hours of culture,each well is pulsed with 1 microcurie of ³H-thymidine. Cells are thenharvested 20 hours following pulsing and incorporation of ³H-thymidineis used as a measure of proliferation. Results are expressed as anaverage of triplicate samples plus or minus standard error.

Although the studies described in this example test the activity in TNFDelta and/or TNF Epsilon protein, one skilled in the art could easilymodify the exemplified studies to test the activity of TNF Delta and/orTNF Epsilon polynucleotides (e.g., gene therapy), agonists, and/orantagonists of TNF Delta and/or TNF Epsilon.

EXAMPLE 16 The Effect of TNF Delta and/or TNF Epsilon on the Growth ofVascular Endothelial Cells

On day 1, human umbilical vein endothelial cells (HUVEC) are seeded at2-5×10⁴ cells/35 mm dish density in M199 medium containing 4% fetalbovine serum (FBS), 16 units/ml heparin, and 50 units/ml endothelialcell growth supplements (ECGS, Biotechnique, Inc.). On day 2, the mediumis replaced with M199 containing 10% FBS, 8 units/ml heparin. TNF Deltaand/or TNF Epsilon protein, and positive controls, such as VEGF andbasic FGF (bFGF) are added, at varying concentrations. On days 4 and 6,the medium is replaced. On day 8, cell number is determined with aCoulter Counter.

An increase in the number of HUVEC cells indicates that TNF Delta and/orTNF Epsilon may proliferate vascular endothelial cells.

The studies described in this example test the activity in TNF Deltaand/or TNF Epsilon protein. However, one skilled in the art could easilymodify the exemplified studies to test the activity of TNF Delta and/orTNF Epsilon polynucleotides (e.g., gene therapy), agonists, and/orantagonists of TNF Delta and/or TNF Epsilon.

EXAMPLE 17 Stimulatory Effect of TNF Delta and/or TNF Epsilon on theProliferation of Vascular Endothelial Cells

For evaluation of mitogenic activity of growth factors, the calorimetricMTS(3-(4,5-dimethylthiazol-2-yl)-5-(3-carboxymethoxyphenyl)-2-(4-sulfophenyl)2H-tetrazolium)assay with the electron coupling reagent PMS (phenazine methosulfate)was performed (CellTiter 96 AQ, Promega). Cells are seeded in a 96-wellplate (5,000 cells/well) in 0.1 ml serum-supplemented medium and areallowed to attach overnight. After serum-starvation for 12 hours in 0.5%FBS, conditions (bFGF, VEGF₁₆₅ or TNF Delta and/or TNF Epsilon in 0.5%FBS) with or without Heparin (8 U/ml) are added to wells for 48 hours.20 mg of MTS/PMS mixture (1:0.05) are added per well and allowed toincubate for 1 hour at 37° C. before measuring the absorbance at 490 nmin an ELISA plate reader. Background absorbance from control wells (somemedia, no cells) is subtracted, and seven wells are performed inparallel for each condition. See, Leak et al. In Vitro Cell. Dev. Biol.30A:512-518 (1994).

The studies described in this example test the activity in TNF Deltaand/or TNF Epsilon protein. However, one skilled in the art could easilymodify the exemplified studies to test the activity of TNF Delta and/orTNF Epsilon polynucleotides (e.g., gene therapy), agonists, and/orantagonists of TNF Delta and/or TNF Epsilon.

EXAMPLE 18 Inhibition of PDGF-induced Vascular Smooth Muscle CellProliferation Stimulatory Effect

HAoSMC proliferation can be measured, for example, by BrdUrdincorporation. Briefly, subconfluent, quiescent cells grown on the4-chamber slides are transfected with CRP or FITC-labeled AT2-3LP. Then,the cells are pulsed with 10% calf serum and 6 mg/ml BrdUrd. After 24 h,immunocytochemistry is performed by using BrdUrd Staining Kit (ZymedLaboratories). In brief, the cells are incubated with the biotinylatedmouse anti-BrdUrd antibody at 4 ° C. for 2 h after exposing todenaturing solution and then with the streptavidin-peroxidase anddiaminobenzidine. After counterstaining with hematoxylin, the cells aremounted for microscopic examination, and the BrdUrd-positive cells arecounted. The BrdUrd index is calculated as a percent of theBrdUrd-positive cells to the total cell number. In addition, thesimultaneous detection of the BrdUrd staining (nucleus) and the FITCuptake (cytoplasm) is performed for individual cells by the concomitantuse of bright field illumination and dark field-UV fluorescentillumination. See, Hayashida et al., J. Biol. Chem.6;271(36):21985-21992 (1996).

The studies described in this example test the activity in TNF Deltaand/or TNF Epsilon protein. However, one skilled in the art could easilymodify the exemplified studies to test the activity of TNF Delta and/orTNF Epsilon polynucleotides (e.g., gene therapy), agonists, and/orantagonists of TNF Delta and/or TNF Epsilon.

EXAMPLE 19 Stimulation of Endothelial Migration

This example will be used to explore the possibility that TNF Deltaand/or TNF Epsilon may stimulate lymphatic endothelial cell migration.Endothelial cell migration assays are performed using a 48 wellmicrochemotaxis chamber (Neuroprobe Inc., Cabin John, Md.; Falk, W.,Goodwin, R. H. J., and Leonard, E. J. “A 48 well micro chemotaxisassembly for rapid and accurate measurement of leukocyte migration.” J.Immunological Methods 1980;33 :239-247). Polyvinylpyrrolidone-freepolycarbonate filters with a pore size of 8 um (Nucleopore Corp.Cambridge, Mass.) are coated with 0. 1% gelatin for at least 6 hours atroom temperature and dried under sterile air. Test substances arediluted to appropriate concentrations in Ml99 supplemented with 0.25%bovine serum albumin (BSA), and 25 ul of the final dilution is placed inthe lower chamber of the modified Boyden apparatus. Subconfluent, earlypassage (2-6) HUVEC or BMEC cultures are washed and trypsinized for theminimum time required to achieve cell detachment. After placing thefilter between lower and upper chamber, 2.5×10⁵ cells suspended in 50 ulM199 containing 1% FBS are seeded in the upper compartment. Theapparatus is then incubated for 5 hours at 37° C. in a humidifiedchamber with 5% CO2 to allow cell migration. After the incubationperiod, the filter is removed and the upper side of the filter with thenon-migrated cells is scraped with a rubber policeman. The filters arefixed with methanol and stained with a Giemsa solution (Diff-Quick,Baxter, McGraw Park, Ill.). Migration is quantified by counting cells ofthree random high-power fields (40×) in each well, and all groups areperformed in quadruplicate.

The studies described in this example test the activity in TNF Deltaand/or TNF Epsilon protein. However, one skilled in the art could easilymodify the exemplified studies to test the activity of TNF Delta and/orTNF Epsilon polynucleotides (e.g., gene therapy), agonists, and/orantagonists of TNF Delta and/or TNF Epsilon.

EXAMPLE 20 Stimulation of Nitric Oxide Production by Endothelial Cells

Nitric oxide released by the vascular endothelium is believed to be amediator of vascular endothelium relaxation. Thus, TNF Delta and/or TNFEpsilon activity can be assayed by determining nitric oxide productionby endothelial cells in response to TNF Delta and/or TNF Epsilon.

Nitric oxide is measured in 96-well plates of confluent microvascularendothelial cells after 24 hours starvation and a subsequent 4 hrexposure to various levels of a positive control (such as VEGF-1) andTNF Delta and/or TNF Epsilon. Nitric oxide in the medium is determinedby use of the Griess reagent to measure total nitrite after reduction ofnitric oxide-derived nitrate by nitrate reductase. The effect of TNFDelta and/or TNF Epsilon on nitric oxide release is examined on HUVEC.

Briefly, NO release from cultured HUVEC monolayer is measured with aNO-specific polarographic electrode connected to a NO meter (Iso-NO,World Precision Instruments Inc.). Calibration of the NO element isperformed according to the following equation:

2 KNO₂+2 KI+2 H₂SO₄ 6 2 NO+I₂+2 H₂O+2 K₂SO₄

The standard calibration curve is obtained by adding gradedconcentrations of KNO₂ (0, 5, 10, 25, 50, 100, 250, and 500 nmol/L) intothe calibration solution containing KI and H₂SO₄. The specificity of theIso-NO electrode to NO is previously determined by measurement of NOfrom authentic NO gas. The culture medium is removed and HUVECs arewashed twice with Dulbecco's phosphate buffered saline. The cells arethen bathed in 5 ml of filtered Krebs-Henseleit solution in 6-wellplates, and the cell plates are kept on a slide warmer (Lab LineInstruments Inc.) to maintain the temperature at 37° C. The NO sensorprobe is inserted vertically into the wells, keeping the tip of theelectrode 2 mm under the surface of the solution, before addition of thedifferent conditions. S-nitroso acetyl penicillamin (SNAP) is used as apositive control. The amount of released NO is expressed as picomolesper 1×10⁶ endothelial cells. All values reported are means of four tosix measurements in each group (number of cell culture wells). See, Leaket al. Biochem. and Biophys. Res. Comm. 217:96-105 (1995).

The studies described in this example test the activity in TNF Deltaand/or TNF Epsilon protein. However, one skilled in the art could easilymodify the exemplified studies to test the activity of TNF Delta and/orTNF Epsilon polynucleotides (e.g., gene therapy), agonists, and/orantagonists of TNF Delta and/or TNF Epsilon.

EXAMPLE 21 Effect of TNF Delta and/or TNF Epsilon on Cord Formation inAngiogenesis

Another step in angiogenesis is cord formation, marked bydifferentiation of endothelial cells. This bioassay measures the abilityof microvascular endothelial cells to form capillary-like structures(hollow structures) when cultured in vitro.

CADMEC (microvascular endothelial cells) are purchased from CellApplications, Inc. as proliferating (passage 2) cells and are culturedin Cell Applications' CADMEC Growth Medium and used at passage 5. Forthe in vitro angiogenesis assay, the wells of a 48-well cell cultureplate are coated with Cell Applications' Attachment Factor Medium (200microliter/well) for 30 min. at 37° C. CADMEC are seeded onto the coatedwells at 7,500 cells/well and cultured overnight in Growth Medium. TheGrowth Medium is then replaced with 300 micrograms Cell Applications°Chord Formation Medium containing control buffer or TNF Delta and/or TNFEpsilon (0.1 to 100 ng/ml) and the cells are cultured for an additional48 hr. The numbers and lengths of the capillary-like chords arequantitated through use of the Boeckeler VIA-170 video image analyzer.All assays are done in triplicate.

Commercial (R&D) VEGF (50 ng/ml) is used as a positive control.beta-esteradiol (1 ng/ml) is used as a negative control. The appropriatebuffer (without protein) is also utilized as a control.

The studies described in this example test the activity in TNF Deltaand/or TNF Epsilon protein. However, one skilled in the art could easilymodify the exemplified studies to test the activity of TNF Delta and/orTNF Epsilon polynucleotides (e.g., gene therapy), agonists, and/orantagonists of TNF Delta and/or TNF Epsilon.

EXAMPLE 22 Angiogenic Effect on Chick Chorioallantoic Membrane

Chick chorioallantoic membrane (CAM) is a well-established system toexamine angiogenesis. Blood vessel formation on CAM is easily visibleand quantifiable. The ability of TNF Delta and/or TNF Epsilon tostimulate angiogenesis in CAM can be examined.

Fertilized eggs of the White Leghorn chick (Gallus gallus) and theJapanese quail (Coturnix coturnix) are incubated at 37.8° C. and 80%humidity. Differentiated CAM of 16-day-old chick and 13-day-old quailembryos is studied with the following methods.

On Day 4 of development, a window is made into the egg shell of chickeggs. The embryos are checked for normal development and the eggs sealedwith cellotape. They are further incubated until Day 13. Thermanoxcoverslips (Nunc, Naperville, Ill.) are cut into disks of about 5 mm indiameter. Sterile and salt-free growth factors, and the protein to betested, are dissolved in distilled water and about 3.3 mg/ 5 ml arepipetted on the disks. After air-drying, the inverted disks are appliedon CAM. After 3 days, the specimens are fixed in 3% glutaraldehyde and2% formaldehyde and rinsed in 0.12 M sodium cacodylate buffer. They arephotographed with a stereo microscope [Wild M8] and embedded for semi-and ultrathin sectioning as described above. Controls are performed withcarrier disks alone.

The studies described in this example test the activity in TNF Deltaand/or TNF Epsilon protein. However, one skilled in the art could easilymodify the exemplified studies to test the activity of TNF Delta and/orTNF Epsilon polynucleotides (e.g., gene therapy), agonists, and/orantagonists of TNF Delta and/or TNF Epsilon.

EXAMPLE 23 Angiogenesis Assay Using a Matrigel Implant in Mouse

In order to establish an in vivo model for angiogenesis to test TNFDelta and/or TNF Epsilon protein activities, mice and rats are implantedsubcutaneously with methylcellulose disks containing either 20 mg of BSA(negative control), 1 mg of TNF Delta and/or TNF Epsilon or 0.5 mg ofVEGF-1 (positive control). The negative control disks should containlittle vascularization, while the positive control disks should showsigns of vessel formation.

The studies described in this example test the activity in TNF Deltaand/or TNF Epsilon protein. However, one skilled in the art could easilymodify the exemplified studies to test the activity of TNF Delta and/orTNF Epsilon polynucleotides (e.g., gene therapy), agonists, and/orantagonists of TNF Delta and/or TNF Epsilon.

EXAMPLE 24 Rescue of Ischemia in Rabbit Lower Limb Model

To study the in vivo effects of TNF Delta and/or TNF Epsilon onischemia, a rabbit hindlimb ischemia model is created by surgicalremoval of one femoral arteries as described previously (Takeshita, S.et al., Am J. Pathol 147:1649-1660 (1995)). The excision of the femoralartery results in retrograde propagation of thrombus and occlusion ofthe external iliac artery. Consequently, blood flow to the ischemic limbis dependent upon collateral vessels originating from the internal iliacartery (Takeshita, S. et al., Am J. Pathol 147:1649-1660 (1995)). Aninterval of 10 days is allowed for post-operative recovery of rabbitsand development of endogenous collateral vessels. At 10 daypost-operatively (day 0), after performing a baseline angiogram, theinternal iliac artery of the ischemic limb is transfected with 500 mgnaked TNF Delta and/or TNF Epsilon expression plasmid by arterial genetransfer technology using a hydrogel-coated balloon catheter asdescribed (Riessen, R. et al., Hum Gene Ther. 4:749-758 (1993); Leclerc,G. et al., J. Clin. Invest. 90: 936-944 (1992)). When TNF Delta and/orTNF Epsilon is used in the treatment, a single bolus of 500 mg TNF Deltaand/or TNF Epsilon protein or control is delivered into the internaliliac artery of the ischemic limb over a period of 1 min. through aninfusion catheter. On day 30, various parameters are measured in theserabbits: (a) BP ratio—The blood pressure ratio of systolic pressure ofthe ischemic limb to that of normal limb; (b) Blood Flow and FlowReserve—Resting FL: the blood flow during undilated condition and MaxFL: the blood flow during fully dilated condition (also an indirectmeasure of the blood vessel amount) and Flow Reserve is reflected by theratio of max FL: resting FL; (c) Angiographic Score—This is measured bythe angiogram of collateral vessels. A score is determined by thepercentage of circles in an overlaying grid that with crossing opacifiedarteries divided by the total number m the rabbit thigh; (d) Capillarydensity—The number of collateral capillaries determined in lightmicroscopic sections taken from hindlimbs.

The studies described in this example test the activity in TNF Deltaand/or TNF Epsilon protein. However, one skilled in the art could easilymodify the exemplified studies to test the activity of TNF Delta and/orTNF Epsilon polynucleotides (e.g., gene therapy), agonists, and/orantagonists of TNF Delta and/or TNF Epsilon.

EXAMPLE 25 Rat Ischemic Skin Flap Model

The evaluation parameters include skin blood flow, skin temperature, andfactor VIII immunohistochemistry or endothelial alkaline phosphatasereaction. TNF Delta and/or TNF Epsilon expression, during the skinischemia, is studied using in situ hybridization.

The study in this model is divided into three parts as follows:

Ischemic skin

Ischemic skin wounds

Normal wounds

The experimental protocol includes:

Raising a 3×4 cm, single pedicle full-thickness random skin flap(myocutaneous flap over the lower back of the animal).

An excisional wounding (4-6 mm in diameter) in the ischemic skin(skin-flap).

Topical treatment with TNF Delta and/or TNF Epsilon of the excisionalwounds (day 0, 1, 2, 3, 4 post-wounding) at the following various dosageranges: 1 mg to 100 mg.

Harvesting the wound tissues at day 3, 5, 7, 10, 14 and 21 post-woundingfor histological, immunohistochemical, and in situ studies.

The studies described in this example test the activity in TNF Deltaand/or TNF Epsilon protein. However, one skilled in the art could easilymodify the exemplified studies to test the activity of TNF Delta and/orTNF Epsilon polynucleotides (e.g., gene therapy), agonists, and/orantagonists of TNF Delta and/or TNF Epsilon.

EXAMPLE 26 Peripheral Arterial Disease Model

Angiogenic therapy using TNF Delta and/or TNF Epsilon is a noveltherapeutic strategy to obtain restoration of blood flow around theischemia in case of peripheral arterial diseases. The experimentalprotocol includes:

One side of the femoral artery is ligated to create ischemic muscle ofthe hindlimb, the other side of hindlimb serves as a control.

TNF Delta and/or TNF Epsilon protein, in a dosage range of 20 mg-500 mg,is delivered intravenously and/or intramuscularly 3 times (perhaps more)per week for 2-3 weeks.

The ischemic muscle tissue is collected after ligation of the femoralartery at 1, 2, and 3 weeks for the analysis of TNF Delta and/or TNFEpsilon expression and histology. Biopsy is also performed on the otherside of normal muscle of the contralateral hindlimb.

The studies described in this example test the activity in TNF Deltaand/or TNF Epsilon protein. However, one skilled in the art could easilymodify the exemplified studies to test the activity of TNF Delta and/orTNF Epsilon polynucleotides (e.g., gene therapy), agonists, and/orantagonists of TNF Delta and/or TNF Epsilon.

EXAMPLE 27 Ischemic Myocardial Disease Model

TNF Delta and/or TNF Epsilon is evaluated as a potent mitogen capable ofstimulating the development of collateral vessels, and restructuring newvessels after coronary artery occlusion. Alteration of TNF Delta and/orTNF Epsilon expression is investigated in situ. The experimentalprotocol includes:

The heart is exposed through a left-side thoracotomy in the rat.Immediately, the left coronary artery is occluded with a thin suture(6-0) and the thorax is closed.

TNF Delta and/or TNF Epsilon protein, in a dosage range of 20 mg-500 mg,is delivered intravenously and/or intramuscularly 3 times (perhaps more)per week for 2-4 weeks.

Thirty days after the surgery, the heart is removed and cross-sectionedfor morphometric and in situ analyzes.

The studies described in this example test the activity in TNF Deltaand/or TNF Epsilon protein. However, one skilled in the art could easilymodify the exemplified studies to test the activity of TNF Delta and/orTNF Epsilon polynucleotides (e.g., gene therapy), agonists, and/orantagonists of TNF Delta and/or TNF Epsilon.

EXAMPLE 28 Rat Corneal Wound Healing Model

This animal model shows the effect of TNF Delta and/or TNF Epsilon onneovascularization. The experimental protocol includes:

Making a 1-1.5 mm long incision from the center of cornea into thestromal layer.

Inserting a spatula below the lip of the incision facing the outercorner of the eye.

Making a pocket (its base is 1-1.5 mm form the edge of the eye).

Positioning a pellet, containing 50 ng-5 ug of TNF Delta and/or TNFEpsilon, within the pocket.

TNF Delta and/or TNF Epsilon treatment can also be applied topically tothe corneal wounds in a dosage range of 20 mg-500 mg (daily treatmentfor five days).

The studies described in this example test the activity in TNF Deltaand/or TNF Epsilon protein. However, one skilled in the art could easilymodify the exemplified studies to test the activity of TNF Delta and/orTNF Epsilon polynucleotides (e.g., gene therapy), agonists, and/orantagonists of TNF Delta and/or TNF Epsilon.

EXAMPLE 29 Analysis of Binding of TNF Epsilon to TNF ReceptorSuperfamily Member TACI

The orphan receptor transmembrane activator and CAML-interactor (“TACI”)has been previously characterized as a receptor present on B cells and asubset of T cells that is involved in the calcium activation pathway.See, U.S. Pat. No. 5,969,102; International Patent ApplicationPublication No. WO98/39361; and von Bulow, G. U. and Bram, R. J.,Science 278:138-41 (1997). An analysis of whether TNF Epsilon binds toTNF Receptor Superfamily (TNFR) member TACI was performed using twoindependent in vitro methods.

A full-length TACI cDNA clone (SEQ ID NO:21) was generated by PCR usingthe primers 5′-ATG AGT GGC CTG GGC CGG AGC AGG CGA GGT GGC CGG AGC CGTGTG GAC CAG G-3′ (SEQ ID NO:15) and 5′-AAG CTT AGA TCT GCC ACC ATG AGTGGC CTG GGC CGG AGC-3′ (SEQ ID NO: 16) at the 5′ end together with the3′ primer 5′-GAA TTC TCT AGA CCC CCA TTT ATG CAC CTG G-3′ (SEQ IDNO:17). The PCR product was cut with Bgl II and Xba I restrictionendonucleases and subcloned into the CMV-based mammalian expressionvector pC4.

A full-length TACI-Fc fusion cDNA was generated by a two-step PCRreaction using the following primers to sequentially add on a signalsequence from MPIF. 5′ Primer: 5′-CCC TCT CCT GCC TCA TGC TTG TTA CTGCCC TTG GAT CTC AGG CCA TGA GTG GCC TGG GCC GGA GCA GGG AAT TCA GAT CTGCCA CCA TGA AGG TCT CCG TGG CTG CCC TCT CCT GCC TCA TGC TTG TTA CTGCC-3′ (SEQ ID NO:18), and 3′ Primer: 5′-AAG CTT TCT AGA CTG ATC TGC ACTCAG CTT CAG CCC-3′ (SEQ ID NO:19). A truncated form of TACI-Fc with anMPIF signal sequence was generated using the following 5′ primer inplace of the 5′ primer recited supra. 5′ Primer: 5′-CTG CCT CAT GCT TGTTAC TGC CCT TGG ATC TCA GGC CAT GAG ATC CTG CCC CGA AGA GCA G-3′ (SEQ IDNO:20). The PCR products were cut with Bgl II and Xba I and ligated intothe mammalian expression vector pC4-Fc linearized with Bam HI and Xba I.

Full-length TACI-Fc (Met-1 to Gln-159 of SEQ ID NO:22) or truncatedTACI-Fc (Met-31 to Gln-159 of SEQ ID NO:22) were purified fromtransiently transfected culture supernatants by capture on Protein AHyperD resin (Life Technologies, Inc., Rockville, Md.) and eluted with0.1 M citrate buffer, pH =3.5. To further enrich the dimeric TACI-FCfusion protein, the pool was subject to size-exclusion chromatography ona Superdex S200 column (Amersham-Pharmacia, Piscataway, N.J.). Theprotein preparation was subsequently purified by capture on cationexchange resin (HS-50 Poros) and the trimeric form of TNF-Epsilon wasisolated by size exclusion chromatography. All protein preparations weresubject to N-terminal sequence analysis to verify sequence using a modelABI-494 sequencer (Perkin-Elmer Applied Biosystems, Inc., Foster City,Calif.).

The TACI-Fc fusion protein was used to assess the specificity ofinteraction between TACI and TNF-epsilon. A panel of four conditionedmedia-containing FLAG-epitope-tagged proteins, i.e., TNF-epsilon, LIGHT(See, Hahne, M., et al., J. Exp. Med. 188:1185-90 (1998)), FasL (Suda,T., et al., Cell 75:1169-78 (1993)), and Neutrokine-alpha (See,WO98/18921), was used to assess interaction specificity.Immunoprecipitations were carried out using the M2 anti-FLAG peptideantibody available from Sigma, St. Louis, Mo. Immunoprecipitates weredetected by Western analysis unsing anti-FLAG antibody. Results of theseexperiments show that the anti-FLAG antibody immunoprecipitated aTACI-Fc-TNF-epsilon complex that accounted for approximately 20% of theTNF-epsilon present in the conditioned medium.

BIAcore analysis was performed essentially as follows. TACI-Fc proteinwas immobilized to the BIAcore sensor chip (CM5 chip) via amine groupsusing N-ethyl-N′-(dimethlaminopropyl)carbodiimide/N-hydroxysuccinimidechemistry. Various dilutions of TNF-epsilon or other TNF ligands wereflowed over the receptor-derivatized flow cells at a rate of 15microliters per minute for a total volume of 50 microliters. The amountof bound protein was determined during washing of the flow cell with HBSbuffer (10 mM HEPES, pH 7.4, 150 mM NaCl, 3.4 mM EDTA, 0.005% SurfactantP20). Binding specificity of TNF-epsilon to TACI was determined bycompetition with soluble competitor. The flow cell surface wasregenerated by displacing bound protein by washing with 20 microlitersof 10 mM glycine-HCl, pH=2.3.

Results from the BIAcore analysis demonstrate that TNF-epsilon binds tothe TACI-Fc BIAcore chip. Furthermore, this interaction was shown to bespecific since soluble TACI-Fc inhibited TNF-epsilon from binding to theTACI-Fc chip. These experiments showed that the Kd for theTACI-TNF-epsilon interaction is 6 nM.

It will be clear that the invention may be practiced otherwise than asparticularly described in the foregoing description and examples.Numerous modifications

                   #             SEQUENCE LISTING<160> NUMBER OF SEQ ID NOS: 26 <210> SEQ ID NO 1 <211> LENGTH: 1717<212> TYPE: DNA <213> ORGANISM: Homo sapiens <400> SEQUENCE: 1acctctgtcc ttagagggga ctggaaccta attctcctga gcctgaggga gg#gtggaggg     60tctcaagaca acgctgtccc cacgacggag tgccaggagc actaacagta cc#cttagatt    120gctttcctcc tccctccttt tttattttca agttcctttt tatttctcct tg#cgtaacaa    180ccttcttccc ttctgcacca ctgcccgtac ccttacccgc gccgccacct cc#ttgctaca    240ccactcttga aaccacagct gttggcaggg tcccccagct catgccagcc tc#atctcctt    300tcttgctagc ccccaaaggg cctccaggca acatgggggg cccagtcaga ga#gccggcac    360tctcagttgc cctctggttg agttgggggg cagctctggg ggccgtggct tg#tgccatgg    420ctctgctgac ccaacaaaca gagctgcaga gcctcaggag agaggtgagc cg#gctgcaga    480ggacaggagg cccctcccag aatggggaag ggtatccctg gcagagtctc cc#ggagcaga    540gttccgatgc cctggaagcc tgggagaatg gggagagatc ccggaaaagg ag#agcagtgc    600tcacccaaaa acagaagaag cagcactctg tcctgcacct ggttcccatt aa#cgccacct    660ccaaggatga ctccgatgtg acagaggtga tgtggcaacc agctcttagg cg#tgggagag    720gcctacaggc ccaaggatat ggtgtccgaa tccaggatgc tggagtttat ct#gctgtata    780gccaggtcct gtttcaagac gtgactttca ccatgggtca ggtggtgtct cg#agaaggcc    840aaggaaggca ggagactcta ttccgatgta taagaagtat gccctcccac cc#ggaccggg    900cctacaacag ctgctatagc gcaggtgtct tccatttaca ccaaggggat at#tctgagtg    960tcataattcc ccgggcaagg gcgaaactta acctctctcc acatggaacc tt#cctggggt   1020ttgtgaaact gtgattgtgt tataaaaagt ggctcccagc ttggaagacc ag#ggtgggta   1080catactggag acagccaaga gctgagtata taaaggagag ggaatgtgca gg#aacagagg   1140cgtcttcctg ggtttggctc cccgttcctc acttttccct tttcattccc ac#cccctaga   1200ctttgatttt acggatatct tgcttctgtt ccccatggag ctccgaattc tt#gcgtgtgt   1260gtagatgagg ggcgggggac gggcgccagg cattgtccag acctggtcgg gg#cccactgg   1320aagcatccag aacagcacca ccatctagcg gccgctctag aggatccctc ga#ggggccca   1380agcttacgcg tgcatgcgac gtcatagctc tctccctata gtgagtcgta tt#ataagcta   1440gcttgggatc tttgtgaagg aaccttactt ctgtggtgtg acataattgg ac#aaactacc   1500tacagagatt taaagctcta aggtaaatat aaaattttta agtgtataat gt#gttaaact   1560agctgcatat gcttgctgct tgagagtttg gcttactgag tatgattatg aa#aatattat   1620acacaggagc tagtgatcta tgttggtttt agatcaagcc aaggtcattc ag#gcctcagc   1680 tcaagctgtc atgatcatat cagcatacaa ttgtgag      #                   #    1717 <210> SEQ ID NO 2 <211> LENGTH: 233<212> TYPE: PRT <213> ORGANISM: Homo sapiens <400> SEQUENCE: 2Met Gly Gly Pro Val Arg Glu Pro Ala Leu Se #r Val Ala Leu Trp Leu  1               5  #                 10  #                 15Ser Trp Gly Ala Ala Leu Gly Ala Val Ala Cy #s Ala Met Ala Leu Leu             20      #             25      #             30Thr Gln Gln Thr Glu Leu Gln Ser Leu Arg Ar #g Glu Val Ser Arg Leu         35          #         40          #         45Gln Arg Thr Gly Gly Pro Ser Gln Asn Gly Gl #u Gly Tyr Pro Trp Gln     50              #     55              #     60Ser Leu Pro Glu Gln Ser Ser Asp Ala Leu Gl #u Ala Trp Glu Asn Gly 65                  # 70                  # 75                  # 80Glu Arg Ser Arg Lys Arg Arg Ala Val Leu Th #r Gln Lys Gln Lys Lys                 85  #                 90  #                 95Gln His Ser Val Leu His Leu Val Pro Ile As #n Ala Thr Ser Lys Asp            100       #           105       #           110Asp Ser Asp Val Thr Glu Val Met Trp Gln Pr #o Ala Leu Arg Arg Gly        115           #       120           #       125Arg Gly Leu Gln Ala Gln Gly Tyr Gly Val Ar #g Ile Gln Asp Ala Gly    130               #   135               #   140Val Tyr Leu Leu Tyr Ser Gln Val Leu Phe Gl #n Asp Val Thr Phe Thr145                 1 #50                 1 #55                 1 #60Met Gly Gln Val Val Ser Arg Glu Gly Gln Gl #y Arg Gln Glu Thr Leu                165   #               170   #               175Phe Arg Cys Ile Arg Ser Met Pro Ser His Pr #o Asp Arg Ala Tyr Asn            180       #           185       #           190Ser Cys Tyr Ser Ala Gly Val Phe His Leu Hi #s Gln Gly Asp Ile Leu        195           #       200           #       205Ser Val Ile Ile Pro Arg Ala Arg Ala Lys Le #u Asn Leu Ser Pro His    210               #   215               #   220Gly Thr Phe Leu Gly Phe Val Lys Leu 225                 2 #30<210> SEQ ID NO 3 <211> LENGTH: 1281 <212> TYPE: DNA<213> ORGANISM: Homo sapiens <400> SEQUENCE: 3ggggacagga ggcccctccc agaatgggga agggtatccc tggcagagtc tc#ccggagca     60gagttccgat gccctggaag cctgggagag tggggagaga tcccggaaaa gg#agagcagt    120gctcacccaa aaacagaaga atgactccga tgtgacagag gtgatgtggc aa#ccagctct    180taggcgtggg agaggcctac aggcccaagg atatggtgtc cgaatccagg at#gctggagt    240ttatctcctg tatagccagg tcctgtttca agacgtgact ttcaccatgg gt#caggtggt    300gtctcgagaa ggccaaggaa ggcaggagac tctattccga tgtataagaa gt#atgccctc    360ccacccggac cgggcctaca acagctgcta tagcgcaggt gtcttccatt ta#caccaagg    420ggatattctg agtgtcataa ttccccgggc aagggcgaaa cttaacctct ct#ccacatgg    480aaccttcctg gggtttgtga aactgtgatt gtgttataaa aagtggctcc ca#gcttggaa    540gaccagggtg ggtacatact ggagacagcc aagagctgag tatataaagg ag#agggaatg    600tgcaggaaca gaggcgtctt cctgggtttg gctccccgtt cctcactttt cc#cttttcat    660tcccaccccc tagactttgg attttacgga tatcttgctt ctgttcccca tg#gagctccg    720aattcttgcg tgtgtgtaga tgaggggcgg gggacgggcg ccaggcattg tt#cagacctg    780gtcggggccc actggaagca tccagaacag caccaccatc tagcggcgct cg#agggaagc    840accgcgggtt ggccgaagtc cacgaagccg cctctgctag ggaaaaccct gg#ttctccat    900gccacaactc tctccagggt ggcctctgcc tcttcaaccc cacaaagaag cc#ttaaccta    960cgtccttctc tccatctatc ggaccccagt ttccatcact atctccagag at#gtagctat   1020tatgcgcccg tctacagggg gtgcccgacg atgacggtgc cttcgcagtc aa#attactct   1080tcgggtccca aggtttggct ttcacgcgct ccattgcccc ggcgtggcag gc#cattccaa   1140gcccttccgg gctggaactg gtgtcggagg agcctcgggt gtatcgtacg cc#ctggtgtt   1200ggtgttgcct cactcctctg agctcttctt tctgatcaag ccctgcttaa ag#ttaaataa   1260 aatagaatga atgataaaaa a            #                  #                1281 <210> SEQ ID NO 4 <211> LENGTH: 168<212> TYPE: PRT <213> ORGANISM: Homo sapiens <400> SEQUENCE: 4Gly Thr Gly Gly Pro Ser Gln Asn Gly Glu Gl #y Tyr Pro Trp Gln Ser  1               5  #                 10  #                 15Leu Pro Glu Gln Ser Ser Asp Ala Leu Glu Al #a Trp Glu Ser Gly Glu             20      #             25      #             30Arg Ser Arg Lys Arg Arg Ala Val Leu Thr Gl #n Lys Gln Lys Asn Asp         35          #         40          #         45Ser Asp Val Thr Glu Val Met Trp Gln Pro Al #a Leu Arg Arg Gly Arg     50              #     55              #     60Gly Leu Gln Ala Gln Gly Tyr Gly Val Arg Il #e Gln Asp Ala Gly Val 65                  # 70                  # 75                  # 80Tyr Leu Leu Tyr Ser Gln Val Leu Phe Gln As #p Val Thr Phe Thr Met                 85  #                 90  #                 95Gly Gln Val Val Ser Arg Glu Gly Gln Gly Ar #g Gln Glu Thr Leu Phe            100       #           105       #           110Arg Cys Ile Arg Ser Met Pro Ser His Pro As #p Arg Ala Tyr Asn Ser        115           #       120           #       125Cys Tyr Ser Ala Gly Val Phe His Leu His Gl #n Gly Asp Ile Leu Ser    130               #   135               #   140Val Ile Ile Pro Arg Ala Arg Ala Lys Leu As #n Leu Ser Pro His Gly145                 1 #50                 1 #55                 1 #60Thr Phe Leu Gly Phe Val Lys Leu                 165 <210> SEQ ID NO 5<211> LENGTH: 233 <212> TYPE: PRT <213> ORGANISM: Homo sapiens<400> SEQUENCE: 5 Met Ser Thr Glu Ser Met Ile Arg Asp Val Gl#u Leu Ala Glu Glu Ala   1               5  #                 10 #                 15 Leu Pro Lys Lys Thr Gly Gly Pro Gln Gly Se#r Arg Arg Cys Leu Phe              20      #             25     #             30 Leu Ser Leu Phe Ser Phe Leu Ile Val Ala Gl#y Ala Thr Thr Leu Phe          35          #         40         #         45 Cys Leu Leu His Phe Gly Val Ile Gly Pro Gl#n Arg Glu Glu Ser Pro      50              #     55             #     60 Arg Asp Leu Ser Leu Ile Ser Pro Leu Ala Gl#n Ala Val Arg Ser Ser  65                  # 70                 # 75                  # 80 Ser Arg Thr Pro Ser Asp Lys Pro Val Ala Hi#s Val Val Ala Asn Pro                  85  #                 90 #                 95 Gln Ala Glu Gly Gln Leu Gln Trp Leu Asn Ar#g Arg Ala Asn Ala Leu             100       #           105      #           110 Leu Ala Asn Gly Val Glu Leu Arg Asp Asn Gl#n Leu Val Val Pro Ser         115           #       120          #       125 Glu Gly Leu Tyr Leu Ile Tyr Ser Gln Val Le#u Phe Lys Gly Gln Gly     130               #   135              #   140 Cys Pro Ser Thr His Val Leu Leu Thr His Th#r Ile Ser Arg Ile Ala 145                 1 #50                 1#55                 1 #60 Val Ser Tyr Gln Thr Lys Val Asn Leu Leu Se#r Ala Ile Lys Ser Pro                 165   #               170  #               175 Cys Gln Arg Glu Thr Pro Glu Gly Ala Glu Al#a Lys Pro Trp Tyr Glu             180       #           185      #           190 Pro Ile Tyr Leu Gly Gly Val Phe Gln Leu Gl#u Lys Gly Asp Arg Leu         195           #       200          #       205 Ser Ala Glu Ile Asn Arg Pro Asp Tyr Leu As#p Phe Ala Glu Ser Gly     210               #   215              #   220 Gln Val Tyr Phe Gly Ile Ile Ala Leu 225                 2 #30<210> SEQ ID NO 6 <211> LENGTH: 205 <212> TYPE: PRT<213> ORGANISM: Homo sapiens <400> SEQUENCE: 6Met Thr Pro Pro Glu Arg Leu Phe Leu Pro Ar #g Val Cys Gly Thr Thr  1               5  #                 10  #                 15Leu His Leu Leu Leu Leu Gly Leu Leu Leu Va #l Leu Leu Pro Gly Ala             20      #             25      #             30Gln Gly Leu Pro Gly Val Gly Leu Thr Pro Se #r Ala Ala Gln Thr Ala         35          #         40          #         45Arg Gln His Pro Lys Met His Leu Ala His Se #r Thr Leu Lys Pro Ala     50              #     55              #     60Ala His Leu Ile Gly Asp Pro Ser Lys Gln As #n Ser Leu Leu Trp Arg 65                  # 70                  # 75                  # 80Ala Asn Thr Asp Arg Ala Phe Leu Gln Asp Gl #y Phe Ser Leu Ser Asn                 85  #                 90  #                 95Asn Ser Leu Leu Val Pro Thr Ser Gly Ile Ty #r Phe Val Tyr Ser Gln            100       #           105       #           110Val Val Phe Ser Gly Lys Ala Tyr Ser Pro Ly #s Ala Pro Ser Ser Pro        115           #       120           #       125Leu Tyr Leu Ala His Glu Val Gln Leu Phe Se #r Ser Gln Tyr Pro Phe    130               #   135               #   140His Val Pro Leu Leu Ser Ser Gln Lys Met Va #l Tyr Pro Gly Leu Gln145                 1 #50                 1 #55                 1 #60Glu Pro Trp Leu His Ser Met Tyr His Gly Al #a Ala Phe Gln Leu Thr                165   #               170   #               175Gln Gly Asp Gln Leu Ser Thr His Thr Asp Gl #y Ile Pro His Leu Val            180       #           185       #           190Leu Ser Pro Ser Thr Val Phe Phe Gly Ala Ph #e Ala Leu        195           #       200           #       205<210> SEQ ID NO 7 <211> LENGTH: 25 <212> TYPE: DNA<213> ORGANISM: Homo sapiens <400> SEQUENCE: 7gcgggatccc agagcctcac cacag           #                  #               25 <210> SEQ ID NO 8 <211> LENGTH: 29 <212> TYPE: DNA<213> ORGANISM: Homo sapiens <400> SEQUENCE: 8cgcaagctta caatcacagt ttcacaaac          #                  #            29 <210> SEQ ID NO 9 <211> LENGTH: 26 <212> TYPE: DNA<213> ORGANISM: Homo sapiens <400> SEQUENCE: 9gcgggatccc cagagcctca ccacag           #                  #              26 <210> SEQ ID NO 10 <211> LENGTH: 29 <212> TYPE: DNA<213> ORGANISM: Homo sapiens <400> SEQUENCE: 10cgctctagaa caatcacagt ttcacaaac          #                  #            29 <210> SEQ ID NO 11 <211> LENGTH: 250 <212> TYPE: PRT<213> ORGANISM: Homo sapiens <400> SEQUENCE: 11Met Pro Ala Ser Ser Pro Phe Leu Leu Ala Pr #o Lys Gly Pro Pro Gly  1               5  #                 10  #                 15Asn Met Gly Gly Pro Val Arg Glu Pro Ala Le #u Ser Val Ala Leu Trp             20      #             25      #             30Leu Ser Trp Gly Ala Ala Leu Gly Ala Val Al #a Cys Ala Met Ala Leu         35          #         40          #         45Leu Thr Gln Gln Thr Glu Leu Gln Ser Leu Ar #g Arg Glu Val Ser Arg     50              #     55              #     60Leu Gln Arg Thr Gly Gly Pro Ser Gln Asn Gl #y Glu Gly Tyr Pro Trp 65                  # 70                  # 75                  # 80Gln Ser Leu Pro Glu Gln Ser Ser Asp Ala Le #u Glu Ala Trp Glu Asn                 85  #                 90  #                 95Gly Glu Arg Ser Arg Lys Arg Arg Ala Val Le #u Thr Gln Lys Gln Lys            100       #           105       #           110Lys Gln His Ser Val Leu His Leu Val Pro Il #e Asn Ala Thr Ser Lys        115           #       120           #       125Asp Asp Ser Asp Val Thr Glu Val Met Trp Gl #n Pro Ala Leu Arg Arg    130               #   135               #   140Gly Arg Gly Leu Gln Ala Gln Gly Tyr Gly Va #l Arg Ile Gln Asp Ala145                 1 #50                 1 #55                 1 #60Gly Val Tyr Leu Leu Tyr Ser Gln Val Leu Ph #e Gln Asp Val Thr Phe                165   #               170   #               175Thr Met Gly Gln Val Val Ser Arg Glu Gly Gl #n Gly Arg Gln Glu Thr            180       #           185       #           190Leu Phe Arg Cys Ile Arg Ser Met Pro Ser Hi #s Pro Asp Arg Ala Tyr        195           #       200           #       205Asn Ser Cys Tyr Ser Ala Gly Val Phe His Le #u His Gln Gly Asp Ile    210               #   215               #   220Leu Ser Val Ile Ile Pro Arg Ala Arg Ala Ly #s Leu Asn Leu Ser Pro225                 2 #30                 2 #35                 2 #40His Gly Thr Phe Leu Gly Phe Val Lys Leu                 245  #               250 <210> SEQ ID NO 12 <211> LENGTH: 1126<212> TYPE: DNA <213> ORGANISM: Homo sapiens <400> SEQUENCE: 12cccacccgtc cgcccacgcg tccgccactg cccgtaccct tacccgcccc gc#cacctact     60tgctacccca ctcttgaaac cacagctgtt ggcagggtcc ccagctcatg cc#agcctcat    120ctcctttctt gctagccccc aaagggcctc caggcaacat ggggggccca gt#cagagagc    180cggcactctc agttgccctc tggttgagtt ggggggcagc tctgggggcc gt#ggcttgtg    240ccatggctct gctgacccaa caaacagagc tgcagagcct caggagagag gt#gagccggc    300tgcagaggac aggaggcccc tcccagaatg gggaagggta tccctggcag ag#tctcccgg    360agcagagttc cgatgccctg gaagcctggg agagtgggga gagatcccgg aa#aaggagag    420cagtgctcac ccaaaaacag aagaatgact ccgatgtgac agaggtgatg tg#gcaaccag    480ctcttaggcg tgggagaggc ctacaggccc aaggatatgg tgtccgaatc ca#ggatgctg    540gagtttatct gctgtatagc caggtcctgt ttcaagacgt gactttcacc at#gggtcagg    600tggtgtctcg agaaggccaa ggaaggcagg agactctatt ccgatgtata ag#aagtatgc    660cctcccaccc ggaccgggcc tacaacagct gctatagcgc aggtgtcttc ca#tttacacc    720aaggggatat tctgagtgtc ataattcccc gggcaagggc gaaacttaac ct#ctctccac    780atggaacctt cctggggttt gtgaaactgt gattgtgtta taaaaagtgg ct#cccagctt    840ggaagaccag ggtgggtaca tactggagac agccaagagc tgagtatata aa#ggagaggg    900aatgtgcagg aacagaggcg tcttcctggg tttggctccc cgttcctcac tt#ttcccttt    960tcattcccac cccctagact ttgattttac ggatatcttg cttctgttcc cc#atggagct   1020ccgaattctt gcgtgtgtgt agatgagggg cggggggacg ggcgccaggc at#tgttcaga   1080 cctggtcggg gcccactgga agcatccaga acagcaccac catcta   #               1126 <210> SEQ ID NO 13 <211> LENGTH: 234<212> TYPE: PRT <213> ORGANISM: Homo sapiens <400> SEQUENCE: 13Met Pro Ala Ser Ser Pro Phe Leu Leu Ala Pr #o Lys Gly Pro Pro Gly  1               5  #                 10  #                 15Asn Met Gly Gly Pro Val Arg Glu Pro Ala Le #u Ser Val Ala Leu Trp             20      #             25      #             30Leu Ser Trp Gly Ala Ala Leu Gly Ala Val Al #a Cys Ala Met Ala Leu         35          #         40          #         45Leu Thr Gln Gln Thr Glu Leu Gln Ser Leu Ar #g Arg Glu Val Ser Arg     50              #     55              #     60Leu Gln Arg Thr Gly Gly Pro Ser Gln Asn Gl #y Glu Gly Tyr Pro Trp 65                  # 70                  # 75                  # 80Gln Ser Leu Pro Glu Gln Ser Ser Asp Ala Le #u Glu Ala Trp Glu Ser                 85  #                 90  #                 95Gly Glu Arg Ser Arg Lys Arg Arg Ala Val Le #u Thr Gln Lys Gln Lys            100       #           105       #           110Asn Asp Ser Asp Val Thr Glu Val Met Trp Gl #n Pro Ala Leu Arg Arg        115           #       120           #       125Gly Arg Gly Leu Gln Ala Gln Gly Tyr Gly Va #l Arg Ile Gln Asp Ala    130               #   135               #   140Gly Val Tyr Leu Leu Tyr Ser Gln Val Leu Ph #e Gln Asp Val Thr Phe145                 1 #50                 1 #55                 1 #60Thr Met Gly Gln Val Val Ser Arg Glu Gly Gl #n Gly Arg Gln Glu Thr                165   #               170   #               175Leu Phe Arg Cys Ile Arg Ser Met Pro Ser Hi #s Pro Asp Arg Ala Tyr            180       #           185       #           190Asn Ser Cys Tyr Ser Ala Gly Val Phe His Le #u His Gln Gly Asp Ile        195           #       200           #       205Leu Ser Val Ile Ile Pro Arg Ala Arg Ala Ly #s Leu Asn Leu Ser Pro    210               #   215               #   220His Gly Thr Phe Leu Gly Phe Val Lys Leu 225                 2 #30<210> SEQ ID NO 14 <211> LENGTH: 733 <212> TYPE: DNA<213> ORGANISM: Homo sapiens <400> SEQUENCE: 14gggatccgga gcccaaatct tctgacaaaa ctcacacatg cccaccgtgc cc#agcacctg     60aattcgaggg tgcaccgtca gtcttcctct tccccccaaa acccaaggac ac#cctcatga    120tctcccggac tcctgaggtc acatgcgtgg tggtggacgt aagccacgaa ga#ccctgagg    180tcaagttcaa ctggtacgtg gacggcgtgg aggtgcataa tgccaagaca aa#gccgcggg    240aggagcagta caacagcacg taccgtgtgg tcagcgtcct caccgtcctg ca#ccaggact    300ggctgaatgg caaggagtac aagtgcaagg tctccaacaa agccctccca ac#ccccatcg    360agaaaaccat ctccaaagcc aaagggcagc cccgagaacc acaggtgtac ac#cctgcccc    420catcccggga tgagctgacc aagaaccagg tcagcctgac ctgcctggtc aa#aggcttct    480atccaagcga catcgccgtg gagtgggaga gcaatgggca gccggagaac aa#ctacaaga    540ccacgcctcc cgtgctggac tccgacggct ccttcttcct ctacagcaag ct#caccgtgg    600acaagagcag gtggcagcag gggaacgtct tctcatgctc cgtgatgcat ga#ggctctgc    660acaaccacta cacgcagaag agcctctccc tgtctccggg taaatgagtg cg#acggccgc    720 gactctagag gat               #                  #                   #     733 <210> SEQ ID NO 15 <211> LENGTH: 52<212> TYPE: DNA <213> ORGANISM: Homo sapiens <400> SEQUENCE: 15atgagtggcc tgggccggag caggcgaggt ggccggagcc gtgtggacca gg#             52 <210> SEQ ID NO 16 <211> LENGTH: 39 <212> TYPE: DNA<213> ORGANISM: Homo sapiens <400> SEQUENCE: 16aagcttagat ctgccaccat gagtggcctg ggccggagc       #                  #    39 <210> SEQ ID NO 17 <211> LENGTH: 31 <212> TYPE: DNA<213> ORGANISM: Homo sapiens <400> SEQUENCE: 17gaattctcta gacccccatt tatgcacctg g         #                  #          31 <210> SEQ ID NO 18 <211> LENGTH: 134 <212> TYPE: DNA<213> ORGANISM: Homo sapiens <400> SEQUENCE: 18ccctctcctg cctcatgctt gttactgccc ttggatctca ggccatgagt gg#cctgggcc     60ggagcaggga attcagatct gccaccatga aggtctccgt ggctgccctc tc#ctgcctca    120 tgcttgttac tgcc               #                  #                   #    134 <210> SEQ ID NO 19 <211> LENGTH: 36<212> TYPE: DNA <213> ORGANISM: Homo sapiens <400> SEQUENCE: 19aagctttcta gactgatctg cactcagctt cagccc       #                  #       36 <210> SEQ ID NO 20 <211> LENGTH: 61 <212> TYPE: DNA<213> ORGANISM: Homo sapiens <400> SEQUENCE: 20ctgcctcatg cttgttactg cccttggatc tcaggccatg agatcctgcc cc#gaagagca     60 g                   #                  #                   #               61 <210> SEQ ID NO 21<211> LENGTH: 1377 <212> TYPE: DNA <213> ORGANISM: Homo sapiens<400> SEQUENCE: 21agcatcctga gtaatgagtg gcctgggccg gagcaggcga ggtggccgga gc#cgtgtgga     60ccaggaggag cgctttccac agggcctgtg gacgggggtg gctatgagat cc#tgccccga    120agagcagtac tgggatcctc tgctgggtac ctgcatgtcc tgcaaaacca tt#tgcaacca    180tcagagccag cgcacctgtg cagccttctg caggtcactc agctgccgca ag#gagcaagg    240caagttctat gaccatctcc tgagggactg catcagctgt gcctccatct gt#ggacagca    300ccctaagcaa tgtgcatact tctgtgagaa caagctcagg agcccagtga ac#cttccacc    360agagctcagg agacagcgga gtggagaagt tgaaaacaat tcagacaact cg#ggaaggta    420ccaaggattg gagcacagag gctcagaagc aagtccagct ctcccggggc tg#aagctgag    480tgcagatcag gtggccctgg tctacagcac gctggggctc tgcctgtgtg cc#gtcctctg    540ctgcttcctg gtggcggtgg cctgcttcct caagaagagg ggggatccct gc#tcctgcca    600gccccgctca aggccccgtc aaagtccggc caagtcttcc caggatcacg cg#atggaagc    660cggcagccct gtgagcacat cccccgagcc agtggagacc tgcagcttct gc#ttccctga    720gtgcagggcg cccacgcagg agagcgcagt cacgcctggg acccccgacc cc#acttgtgc    780tggaaggtgg gggtgccaca ccaggaccac agtcctgcag ccttgcccac ac#atcccaga    840cagtggcctt ggcattgtgt gtgtgcctgc ccaggagggg ggcccaggtg ca#taaatggg    900ggtcagggag ggaaaggagg agggagagag atggagagga ggggagagag aa#agagaggt    960ggggagaggg gagagagata tgaggagaga gagacagagg aggcagaaag gg#agagaaac   1020agaggagaca gagagggaga gagagacaga gggagagaga gacagagggg aa#gagaggca   1080gagagggaaa gaggcagaga aggaaagaga caggcagaga aggagagagg ca#gagaggga   1140gagaggcaga gagggagaga ggcagagaga cagagaggga gagagggaca ga#gagagata   1200gagcaggagg tcggggcact ctgagtccca gttcccagtg cagctgtagg tc#gtcatcac   1260ctaaccacac gtgcaataaa gtcctcgtgc ctgctgctca cagcccccga ga#gcccctcc   1320tcctggagaa taaaaccttt ggcagctgcc cttcctcaaa aaaaaaaaaa aa#aaaaa      1377 <210> SEQ ID NO 22 <211> LENGTH: 293 <212> TYPE: PRT<213> ORGANISM: Homo sapiens <400> SEQUENCE: 22Met Ser Gly Leu Gly Arg Ser Arg Arg Gly Gl #y Arg Ser Arg Val Asp  1               5  #                 10  #                 15Gln Glu Glu Arg Phe Pro Gln Gly Leu Trp Th #r Gly Val Ala Met Arg             20      #             25      #             30Ser Cys Pro Glu Glu Gln Tyr Trp Asp Pro Le #u Leu Gly Thr Cys Met         35          #         40          #         45Ser Cys Lys Thr Ile Cys Asn His Gln Ser Gl #n Arg Thr Cys Ala Ala     50              #     55              #     60Phe Cys Arg Ser Leu Ser Cys Arg Lys Glu Gl #n Gly Lys Phe Tyr Asp 65                  # 70                  # 75                  # 80His Leu Leu Arg Asp Cys Ile Ser Cys Ala Se #r Ile Cys Gly Gln His                 85  #                 90  #                 95Pro Lys Gln Cys Ala Tyr Phe Cys Glu Asn Ly #s Leu Arg Ser Pro Val            100       #           105       #           110Asn Leu Pro Pro Glu Leu Arg Arg Gln Arg Se #r Gly Glu Val Glu Asn        115           #       120           #       125Asn Ser Asp Asn Ser Gly Arg Tyr Gln Gly Le #u Glu His Arg Gly Ser    130               #   135               #   140Glu Ala Ser Pro Ala Leu Pro Gly Leu Lys Le #u Ser Ala Asp Gln Val145                 1 #50                 1 #55                 1 #60Ala Leu Val Tyr Ser Thr Leu Gly Leu Cys Le #u Cys Ala Val Leu Cys                165   #               170   #               175Cys Phe Leu Val Ala Val Ala Cys Phe Leu Ly #s Lys Arg Gly Asp Pro            180       #           185       #           190Cys Ser Cys Gln Pro Arg Ser Arg Pro Arg Gl #n Ser Pro Ala Lys Ser        195           #       200           #       205Ser Gln Asp His Ala Met Glu Ala Gly Ser Pr #o Val Ser Thr Ser Pro    210               #   215               #   220Glu Pro Val Glu Thr Cys Ser Phe Cys Phe Pr #o Glu Cys Arg Ala Pro225                 2 #30                 2 #35                 2 #40Thr Gln Glu Ser Ala Val Thr Pro Gly Thr Pr #o Asp Pro Thr Cys Ala                245   #               250   #               255Gly Arg Trp Gly Cys His Thr Arg Thr Thr Va #l Leu Gln Pro Cys Pro            260       #           265       #           270His Ile Pro Asp Ser Gly Leu Gly Ile Val Cy #s Val Pro Ala Gln Glu        275           #       280           #       285Gly Gly Pro Gly Ala     290 <210> SEQ ID NO 23 <211> LENGTH: 285<212> TYPE: PRT <213> ORGANISM: Homo sapiens <400> SEQUENCE: 23Met Asp Asp Ser Thr Glu Arg Glu Gln Ser Ar #g Leu Thr Ser Cys Leu  1               5  #                 10  #                 15Lys Lys Arg Glu Glu Met Lys Leu Lys Glu Cy #s Val Ser Ile Leu Pro             20      #             25      #             30Arg Lys Glu Ser Pro Ser Val Arg Ser Ser Ly #s Asp Gly Lys Leu Leu         35          #         40          #         45Ala Ala Thr Leu Leu Leu Ala Leu Leu Ser Cy #s Cys Leu Thr Val Val     50              #     55              #     60Ser Phe Tyr Gln Val Ala Ala Leu Gln Gly As #p Leu Ala Ser Leu Arg 65                  # 70                  # 75                  # 80Ala Glu Leu Gln Gly His His Ala Glu Lys Le #u Pro Ala Gly Ala Gly                 85  #                 90  #                 95Ala Pro Lys Ala Gly Leu Glu Glu Ala Pro Al #a Val Thr Ala Gly Leu            100       #           105       #           110Lys Ile Phe Glu Pro Pro Ala Pro Gly Glu Gl #y Asn Ser Ser Gln Asn        115           #       120           #       125Ser Arg Asn Lys Arg Ala Val Gln Gly Pro Gl #u Glu Thr Val Thr Gln    130               #   135               #   140Asp Cys Leu Gln Leu Ile Ala Asp Ser Glu Th #r Pro Thr Ile Gln Lys145                 1 #50                 1 #55                 1 #60Gly Ser Tyr Thr Phe Val Pro Trp Leu Leu Se #r Phe Lys Arg Gly Ser                165   #               170   #               175Ala Leu Glu Glu Lys Glu Asn Lys Ile Leu Va #l Lys Glu Thr Gly Tyr            180       #           185       #           190Phe Phe Ile Tyr Gly Gln Val Leu Tyr Thr As #p Lys Thr Tyr Ala Met        195           #       200           #       205Gly His Leu Ile Gln Arg Lys Lys Val His Va #l Phe Gly Asp Glu Leu    210               #   215               #   220Ser Leu Val Thr Leu Phe Arg Cys Ile Gln As #n Met Pro Glu Thr Leu225                 2 #30                 2 #35                 2 #40Pro Asn Asn Ser Cys Tyr Ser Ala Gly Ile Al #a Lys Leu Glu Glu Gly                245   #               250   #               255Asp Glu Leu Gln Leu Ala Ile Pro Arg Glu As #n Ala Gln Ile Ser Leu            260       #           265       #           270Asp Gly Asp Val Thr Phe Phe Gly Ala Leu Ly #s Leu Leu        275           #       280           #       285<210> SEQ ID NO 24 <211> LENGTH: 266 <212> TYPE: PRT<213> ORGANISM: Homo sapiens <400> SEQUENCE: 24Met Asp Asp Ser Thr Glu Arg Glu Gln Ser Ar #g Leu Thr Ser Cys Leu  1               5  #                 10  #                 15Lys Lys Arg Glu Glu Met Lys Leu Lys Glu Cy #s Val Ser Ile Leu Pro             20      #             25      #             30Arg Lys Glu Ser Pro Ser Val Arg Ser Ser Ly #s Asp Gly Lys Leu Leu         35          #         40          #         45Ala Ala Thr Leu Leu Leu Ala Leu Leu Ser Cy #s Cys Leu Thr Val Val     50              #     55              #     60Ser Phe Tyr Gln Val Ala Ala Leu Gln Gly As #p Leu Ala Ser Leu Arg 65                  # 70                  # 75                  # 80Ala Glu Leu Gln Gly His His Ala Glu Lys Le #u Pro Ala Gly Ala Gly                 85  #                 90  #                 95Ala Pro Lys Ala Gly Leu Glu Glu Ala Pro Al #a Val Thr Ala Gly Leu            100       #           105       #           110Lys Ile Phe Glu Pro Pro Ala Pro Gly Glu Gl #y Asn Ser Ser Gln Asn        115           #       120           #       125Ser Arg Asn Lys Arg Ala Val Gln Gly Pro Gl #u Glu Thr Gly Ser Tyr    130               #   135               #   140Thr Phe Val Pro Trp Leu Leu Ser Phe Lys Ar #g Gly Ser Ala Leu Glu145                 1 #50                 1 #55                 1 #60Glu Lys Glu Asn Lys Ile Leu Val Lys Glu Th #r Gly Tyr Phe Phe Ile                165   #               170   #               175Tyr Gly Gln Val Leu Tyr Thr Asp Lys Thr Ty #r Ala Met Gly His Leu            180       #           185       #           190Ile Gln Arg Lys Lys Val His Val Phe Gly As #p Glu Leu Ser Leu Val        195           #       200           #       205Thr Leu Phe Arg Cys Ile Gln Asn Met Pro Gl #u Thr Leu Pro Asn Asn    210               #   215               #   220Ser Cys Tyr Ser Ala Gly Ile Ala Lys Leu Gl #u Glu Gly Asp Glu Leu225                 2 #30                 2 #35                 2 #40Gln Leu Ala Ile Pro Arg Glu Asn Ala Gln Il #e Ser Leu Asp Gly Asp                245   #               250   #               255Val Thr Phe Phe Gly Ala Leu Lys Leu Leu             260      #           265 <210> SEQ ID NO 25 <211> LENGTH: 17 <212> TYPE: PRT<213> ORGANISM: Homo Sapiens <400> SEQUENCE: 25Met Leu Gln Asn Ser Ala Val Leu Leu Leu Le #u Val Ile Ser Ala Ser  1               5  #                 10  #                 15 Ala<210> SEQ ID NO 26 <211> LENGTH: 22 <212> TYPE: PRT<213> ORGANISM: Artificial Sequence <220> FEATURE:<221> NAME/KEY: SIGNAL <222> LOCATION: (1)..(22)<223> OTHER INFORMATION: consensus signal sequence <400> SEQUENCE: 26Met Pro Thr Trp Ala Trp Trp Leu Phe Leu Va #l Leu Leu Leu Ala Leu  1               5  #                 10  #                 15Trp Ala Pro Ala Arg Gly              20

and variations of the present invention are possible in light of theabove teachings and, therefore, are within the scope of the appendedclaims.

What is claimed is:
 1. An isolated polypeptide comprising a sequence ofamino acid residues selected from the group consisting of: (a) aminoacid residues 1 to 233 of SEQ ID NO:2; and (b) amino acid residues 39 to233 of SEQ ID NO:2.
 2. The isolated polypeptide of claim 1 whichcomprises amino acid residues 1 to 233 of SEQ ID NO:2.
 3. The isolatedpolypeptide of claim 1 which comprises amino acid residues 39 to 233 ofSEQ ID NO:2.
 4. The isolated polypeptide of claim 1, wherein saidisolated polypeptide is glycosylated.
 5. A recombinant protein producedby a method comprising: (a) culturing a host cell under conditionssuitable to produce the isolated polypeptide of claim 1; and (b)recovering the protein from the host cell culture; wherein said hostcell comprises an exogenously-derived polynucleotide encoding theisolated polypeptide of claim 1 and wherein the recombinant protein isencoded by said polynucleotide.
 6. A composition comprising the isolatedpolypeptide of claim 1 in a carrier.
 7. The composition of claim 6,wherein the carrier comprises a liposome.
 8. The isolated polypeptide ofclaim 1 which comprises a heterologous polypeptide.
 9. The isolatedpolypeptide of claim 8, wherein the heterologous polypeptide is animmunoglobulin Fc domain.
 10. The isolated polypeptide of claim 8,wherein the heterologous polypeptide is human serum albumin.
 11. Anisolated polypeptide comprising a fragment of SEQ ID NO:2 wherein saidfragment is at least 30 contiguous amino acids in length, and wherein apolypeptide consisting of said fragment is capable of stimulating theactivation of a T cell.
 12. The isolated polypeptide of claim 11,wherein said isolated polypeptide is glycosylated.
 13. A recombinantprotein produced by a method comprising; (a) culturing a host cell underconditions suitable to produce the isolated polypeptide of claim 11; and(b) recovering the protein from the host cell culture; wherein said hostcell comprises an exogenously-derived polynucleotide encoding theisolated polypeptide of claim 11 and wherein the recombinant protein isencoded by said polynucleotide.
 14. A composition comprising theisolated polypeptide of claim 11 in a carrier.
 15. The composition ofclaim 14, wherein the carrier comprises a liposome.
 16. The isolatedpolypeptide of claim 11 which comprises a heterologous polypeptide. 17.The isolated polypeptide of claim 16, wherein the heterologouspolypeptide is an immunoglobulin Fc domain.
 18. The isolated polypeptideof claim 16, wherein the heterologous polypeptide is human serumalbumin.
 19. The isolated polypeptide of claim 11 wherein said fragmentis at least 50 contiguous amino acids in length.
 20. The isolatedpolypeptide of claim 19, wherein said isolated polypeptide isglycosylated.
 21. A recombinant protein produced by a method comprising:(a) culturing a host cell under conditions suitable to produce theisolated polypeptide of claim 19; and (b) recovering the protein fromthe host cell culture; wherein said host cell comprises anexogenously-derived polynucleotide encoding the isolated polypeptide ofclaim 19 and wherein the recombinant protein is encoded by saidpolynucleotide.
 22. A composition comprising the isolated polypeptide ofclaim 19 in a carrier.
 23. The composition of claim 22, wherein thecarrier comprises a liposome.
 24. The isolated polypeptide of claim 19,which comprises a heterologous polypeptide.
 25. The isolated polypeptideof claim 24, wherein the heterologous polypeptide is an immunoglobulinFc domain.
 26. The isolated polypeptide of claim 24, wherein theheterologous polypeptide is human serum albumin.
 27. An isolatedpolypeptide encoded by the cDNA contained in ATCC Deposit No.
 97377. 28.The isolated polypeptide of claim 27, wherein said isolated polypeptideis glycosylated.
 29. A recombinant protein produced by a methodcomprising: (a) culturing a host cell under conditions suitable toproduce the isolated polypeptide of claim 27; and (b) recovering theprotein from the host cell culture; wherein said host cell comprises anexogenously-derived polynucleotide encoding the isolated polypeptide ofclaim 27 and wherein the recombinant protein is encoded by saidpolynucleotide.
 30. A composition comprising the isolated polypeptide ofclaim 27 in a carrier.
 31. The composition of claim 30, wherein thecarrier comprises a liposome.
 32. The isolated polypeptide of claim 27which comprises a heterologous polypeptide.
 33. The isolated polypeptideof claim 32, wherein the heterologous polypeptide is an immunoglobulinFc domain.
 34. The isolated polypeptide of claim 32, wherein theheterologous polypeptide is human serum albumin.
 35. An isolatedpolypeptide comprising a fragment of the polypeptide encoded by the cDNAcontained in ATCC Deposit No. 97377 wherein said fragment is at least 30contiguous amino acids in length, and wherein a polypeptide consistingof said fragment is capable of stimulating the activation of a T cell.36. The isolated polypeptide of claim 35, wherein said isolatedpolypeptide is glycosylated.
 37. A recombinant protein produced by amethod comprising: (a) culturing a host cell under conditions suitableto produce the isolated polypeptide of claim 35; and (b) recovering theprotein from the host cell culture; wherein said host cell comprises anexogenously-derived polynucleotide encoding the isolated polypeptide ofclaim 35 and wherein the recombinant protein is encoded by saidpolynucleotide.
 38. A composition comprising the isolated polypeptide ofclaim 35 in a carrier.
 39. The composition of claim 38, wherein thecarrier comprises a liposome.
 40. The isolated polypeptide of claim 35which comprises a heterologous polypeptide.
 41. The isolated polypeptideof claim 40, wherein the heterologous polypeptide is an immunoglobulinFc domain.
 42. The isolated polypeptide of claim 40, wherein theheterologous polypeptide is human serum albumin.
 43. The isolatedpolypeptide of claim 35 wherein said fragment is at least 50 contiguousamino acids in length.
 44. A recombinant protein produced by a methodcomprising: (a) culturing a host cell under conditions suitable toproduce the isolated polypeptide of claim 43; and (b) recovering theprotein from the host cell culture; wherein said host cell comprises anexogenously-derived polynucleotide encoding the isolated polypeptide ofclaim 43 and wherein the recombinant protein is encoded by saidpolynucleotide.
 45. The isolated polypeptide of claim 43, wherein saidisolated polypeptide is glycosylated.
 46. A composition comprising theisolated polypeptide of claim 43 in a carrier.
 47. The composition ofclaim 46, wherein We carrier comprises a liposome.
 48. The isolatedpolypeptide of claim 43 which comprises a heterologous polypeptide. 49.The isolated polypeptide of claim 48, wherein the heterologouspolypeptide is an immunoglobulin Fc domain.
 50. The isolated polypeptideof claim 48, wherein the heterologous polypeptide is human serumalbumin.